JP2020137794A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having a setting change function and capable of suppressing reduction of game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided in which a lottery is performed based on a game ball entrance into a predetermined start port and a variable display of symbols is performed based on a result of the lottery to perform a predetermined win game if a win result is led out as a result of the variable display of the symbols. The game machine comprises: setting change means capable of changing setting information on a probability at which the win result is to be led out if a specific start operation is performed; suggestion presentation performance means for performing a suggestion presentation based on the setting information; abnormality determination means for determining a specific abnormality regarding the game machine; and suggestion presentation performance restriction means for restricting a performance of the suggestion presentation after the specific abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating body type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

In recent years, it has been considered that gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a setting changing function in order to make the game playability more diverse. In such a game machine, for example, setting information such as a hit probability can be set to any of a plurality of settings by a setting-related operation by the hall manager (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-91049

However, for example, if the hit probability or the like is simply increased or decreased according to the setting information set by the hall manager, the change in the game according to the setting information is scarce, and the game interest is reduced. There was a risk of inviting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest of a game in a new manner.

In order to achieve the above object, in the present invention,
A lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined starting port, a variation display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and a predetermined result is derived when a winning result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol. In a game machine that executes a winning game
A setting changing means capable of changing the setting information regarding the probability that the hit result is derived, and
Equipped with an effect control means for performing a predetermined effect control,
The effect control means performs a specific effect of receiving a firing operation of a game ball and outputting a light suggesting a set value after the setting is changed by the setting changing means.
The specific effect is characterized in that it is performed when a contact with a predetermined firing handle is detected as a firing operation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest in gaming.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A) to (c) are explanatory views which show the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board in which the front component, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit and the like are transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is sectional drawing cut along the line CC in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the front unit in parallel with the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a perspective view. The left side view of the start port unit, (d) is the left side view of the side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening in an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the start port unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st prize winning door in the 1st attacker unit from the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 1st attacker unit in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. Is a perspective view seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 2nd attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section. FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view of a right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. It is a perspective view of the back unit in a game board as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which enlarges the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-rear effect unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of the back-rear effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-back effect unit. It is a front view which shows the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the back. It is the front view which shows the part of the movable decorative body after the back enlarged. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate by the broken line in the front view of FIG. 147. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), and (c). ) Is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the same portion as the decorative body of (a). FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view in which the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiating plate in the part from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the 1st LED of a back-rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of. It is a front view which shows a part of the back-rear decorative substrate enlarged together with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form different from that of (a). FIG. 6C is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from that of (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the back-rear movable decoration body of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable decoration body of FIG. 142 in cross section, and (b) is the back-rear movable decoration body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of this in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable composition of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle elevating mechanism of the lower back middle effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle elevating mechanism of the lower back middle effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the under-back middle effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decorative body unit viewed from behind by disassembling the under-back middle effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating and lowering of the back lower middle decorative body unit by the back lower middle elevating mechanism in the back lower middle production unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration related to the rotation of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit from the front, and (b) is the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with each detection sensor in a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement of LED of the back lower middle decoration unit in the back lower middle production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up effect unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up effect unit as viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and (b) is the back-up elevating decoration with the back-up elevating decoration unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of a body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back-up-back rotation decorative body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decorative substrate from the front in the state which moved the back-up elevating decorative body unit to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the back rear left decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit viewed from behind by disassembling the back rear left decorative unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the back rear right decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right production unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the right rear right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit from the evacuation position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the rotating ornament body under the back of the middle under the back effect unit is moved from the lower position to the upper position. The back-up-back effect unit's back-up-back-rotating decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back-left effect unit's back-back-left-rotating ornament is moved from the back-up position to the first appearance position, and the back-back-right effect unit is back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the rear right rotation ornament body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-back left-rotating decorative body of the back-back left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-back right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. The back-back movable decorative body of the back-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up and rear-effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back-back-left effect unit is back-left-rotated. From the evacuation position to the first appearance position, from the back rear right effect unit to the back rear right rotation decoration unit from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, and from the back lower middle effect unit to the back lower middle rotation decoration unit from the descending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved to a position. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows the shape of the betta land in the part where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib part formed in the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and is the copper foil of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is the schematic (a) of the surface, and is the schematic (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land when flowing the peripheral control board into a solder bath. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 212. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply board. This is a configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram of a motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the main control solenoid drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control board. It is a circuit which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the effect control solenoid drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the effect control motor drive circuit. Outline of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in a door frame. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 228. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 234. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 235. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for the lottery process for big hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the types of big hits, and (C) is a type of small hits. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process of. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification. (A) is a front perspective view of the dot matrix display, and (B) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (A) and a perspective view seen from the back surface side. (A) is a front view of the circuit board of the modified example 1 and a sectional view taken along the line AA, and (B) is a front view of the circuit board of the modified example 1 and a sectional view taken along the line AA. It is a front view of the circuit board provided in the dot matrix display of the modification. It is a time chart which shows the control state of a dot matrix display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display content of a dot matrix display. (A) is a front perspective view of the dot matrix display of the modified example, (B) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (A), and is a perspective view seen from the back surface side. There are (A) a front view of the specific substrate, (B) a front view showing the decoration of the specific substrate, and (C) the specific substrate in the modified example. It is a detailed view of the main control unit in a game board. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of a pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of a pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of a pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of a pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the operation timing of the specific operation of a movable body in the fluctuation display of the first symbol after the setting of a set value is changed when the power of a pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special monitor-related effect processing executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the signal path at the time of detection of a steering wheel touch sensor and a single-shot button operation sensor. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the first command-related processing at the time of firing stop which is executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the second command-related processing at the time of firing stop which is executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command-related processing at the time of launch permission executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. This is a specific example of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect. It is the perspective view (a) which looked at the function display unit from the front, and is the perspective view (b) which looked at the function display unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the function display unit from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the function display unit from the back. It is the schematic of the front surface (front surface) of the function display board housed in the function display unit. It is a schematic diagram of the game board side matrix display device provided in a game board and the door frame side matrix display device provided in a door frame. XX in the schematic views (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board is covered with the insulating film. It is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of the schematic diagram (b) and (b) of the cross section of a line. X-X in the schematic views (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board is covered with the insulating film. It is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of the schematic diagram (b) and (b) of the cross section of a line. XX in the schematic views (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board is covered with the insulating film. It is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of the schematic diagram (b) and (b) of the cross section of a line. XX in the schematic views (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board is covered with the insulating film. It is a schematic diagram (c) of the modification of the schematic diagram (b) and (b) of the cross section of a line. It is a schematic view (a) on the rear surface (back surface) side and a schematic view (b) on the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate on which the DIP type connector is mounted, and the surface mount (SMD) type connector is mounted. It is a schematic view (c) on the rear surface (back surface) side of the decorative substrate and a schematic view (d) on the front surface (front surface) side. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. This is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a time chart which shows the deformation example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. This is a modification of the specific display displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. This is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine when a game ball enters when the second start port is closed. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine at the time of abnormality detection. It is a time chart which shows the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body at the time of completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body after the setting value is changed when the power of a pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the suggestion effect and the abnormality detection. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position as viewed from the front right. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. It is attached to the rear surface of the plate-shaped game panel 1100 which is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, the board holder 1200 which is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of golden obstacle nails N (in the present embodiment, brass is used) that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , General winning opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate portion 2003, second start that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a mouth 2004, a first prize opening 2005, and a second prize opening 2006. The golden obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the back-back effect unit 3100 and the back-back effect unit 3100. Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production It is possible to entertain the player by causing a light emitting effect, a movable effect, or the like to be performed by the unit 3800 or the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontally extending portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent the pinching.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 which are attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion posterior to the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached at a position to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the outer frame left member 11 on the right side surface in front of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Hereinafter, a frame body composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a “front frame”.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the assembled state, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and various substrates of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending vertically and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hooking member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a in which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a, and the ball feeding member 143 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 by partitioning between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that projects forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball striking supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted to the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b, which is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b extending upward. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 211) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 or the weight portion 143d which are rotatably supported by the shaft. However, the working paddle 143c protruding forward of the ball pulling member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 operated by pressing the upper dish ball pulling button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation paddle 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It can be prevented from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in the front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the penetrating ball passage 150a in the front view and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball socket 150c that receives a foul ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by a full tank receiver 150b and a foul ball socket 150c. The ball discharge port 150d is provided so as to discharge the ball forward and communicate with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the working protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged apart from each other on the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof projects downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 that is attached to the handle base 181 and a plurality of LEDs that are attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The handle decorative substrate 184 is provided, and a transparent handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decorative substrate 184 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It includes an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, in a state where the three groove portions 181c are aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded forward and is formed transparently. An inner lens 185a three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is attached to the back surface of the handle cover 185 and inside the handle cover 185. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the surface of the handle decorative substrate 184 arranged behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface). A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 185a (may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner lens 185a. It may be formed (it may be formed into a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184. The front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front surface and the back surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the handle cover 185 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is affected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before the single-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and projecting forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. ing. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For the ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The entire dish unit 200 bulges forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and opens the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission part 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. Cylinder insertion through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 which penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the taxiway 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The rear surface of the dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211 when attached to the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). After inserting cash or a prepaid card for (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. The purpose is to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the loaned game ball B, and to adjust the volume related to the production to a large or small level.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged to the right of the withdrawal button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending operation base 223 that is lower right of the upper plate ball lending button 222 on the upper surface of the base portion 221. Volume up button 226 arranged at the lower left of the above, volume down button 227 arranged below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base portion 221 and a ball arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. It includes a lending button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (the distance dimension that the upper plate ball pulling button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). The pressing operation unit of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a (lead type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, while the player releases the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves to the upper original position, the pressing operation unit of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (the distance dimension is such that the upper plate ball removal button 222 moves downward when the player presses it. The pressing operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the return button tactile switch 225a, while the player releases the pressing operation. The return button 225 moves to the upper original position, the pressing operation unit of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, and the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the loaned game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces upward, and is slightly moved downward by the player's pressing operation (pressed by the player). The pressing operation part of the tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) for the volume up button is pushed slightly downward for the volume up button, which is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper plate ball pulling button 222 moves downward by operation. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves to the original position above and the pressing operation unit of the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button returns upward. The tactile switch 226a for the volume up button can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and is slightly moved downward by the player's pressing operation (pressed by the player). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper plate ball pulling button 222 moves downward by operation.) For the volume down button The pressing operation part of the tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) is pushed slightly downward for the volume down button. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves to the upper original position and the pressing operation unit of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The tactile switch 227a for the volume down button can be turned off.

The tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. , The drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 (controls the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side via a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, which will be described later. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510) which can be described later. The ball lending board 228 and the volume control board 229 are housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state of being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220.

In this way, the ball rental button 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 on which the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted are electrically connected. The volume control board 229 and the electric volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 on which the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button, and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted. The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side connected to is a completely different relay board, and in various relay boards on the door frame 3 side, the ball rental button tactile switch 224a and the return button tactile The signal transmission path for the switch 225a and the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not mixed on the same relay board. .. This is because the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is the so-called main signal transmission path, so the door on the door frame 3 side. The signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a so-called main signal transmission path, whereas the configuration is such that the frame main relay board 104 is used. Therefore, the configuration is such that the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side is used.

On the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228, a tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, a tactile switch 225a for the return button, and a pad and a through hole (inside the through hole) to which the three 7-segment LEDs are soldered. The peripheral wall is copper-plated to have conductivity. The same shall apply hereinafter.) A green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution over the entire area excluding lands (hereinafter, simply ". It may be described as "solid green resist") to form a green resist layer. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, a solid green color is applied to the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the area where the connector (lead type) not shown is mounted is soldered. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the surfaces of the mounted ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs and the like are mounted. Attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the side electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component and the size of the surface-side electronic component). The surface side notation part indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included) is solidly painted with a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green. It is printed by silk printing on a green resist. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the back surface side electronic components are arranged in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as the connector (surface mount type). Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position to be mounted (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component The notation on the back side indicating (may be included) is a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist.

On the other hand, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, the pad, through hole, land, etc. to which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are soldered are excluded. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, the area where the connector (not shown) is mounted is white except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc., which are white with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, the vicinity of the surface side electronic components such as the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted. In addition, the attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electron The surface side notation, which indicates the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the component and the model of the electronic component on the surface side, is a solid white color with a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable than white. It is printed by silk printing on the resist of. Although not shown, the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229 is an area indicating the component number of the back surface side electronic component and the position where the back surface side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

As described above, the colors of the resist liquids applied to the ball lending substrate 228 and the volume control substrate 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state of being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 are different. Explaining this, the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is, as described above, the so-called main signal transmission path. Therefore, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. The LED is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the signal transmission paths for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not the so-called main signal transmission paths as described above. The tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, and are mounted on the door frame 3 side. Drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (front unit 2000 and back unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (periphery described later that can control the progress of the effect) via the effect drive board 1720 (described later) that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in the present embodiment, the volume is electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. The adjustment board 229 and the ball lending board 228 electrically connected to the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. The volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, whereas the ball rental board 228 is coated with a green resist solution different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, the operator who makes the wiring connection is electrically connected to the volume control board 229 using the color of the coating film formed in this way (that is, the color of the resist) as a mark. This can contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection between the wiring and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228. Therefore, it can contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

Further, on the volume control board 229, a tactile switch 226a for a volume up button that allows the player to greatly adjust the volume related to the production and a tactile switch for the volume down button that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the production small. 227a is mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 on the side (peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later), and the player can request the ball rental board 228 to pay out the game ball B by ball rental. A tactile switch 224a for a ball lending button, a tactile switch 225a for a return button that can request a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are mounted, and the detection result by the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button and the tactile switch 225a for the return button (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) ) Is transmitted to the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. By transmitting the drive signal from the ball rental machine (for example, CR unit) to the ball rental board 228, the ball rental display unit composed of the three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball rental board 228 can be used for ball rental. While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the machine is displayed, the volume is adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the production) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 is based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. No electronic components that make up the displayed display unit are mounted. In this way, the path of the player's operation position is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. And, because there is a path transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, it is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 are erroneously connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that a white resist solution is applied to the ball rental substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the ball rental substrate 228. By forming a green coating film to be formed, erroneous connection is prevented.

Further, while surface mount type electronic components are used as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, they are mounted on the ball rental board 228. Since the electronic components of the lead type are used for the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs, the type of electronic component (lead type or surface mount) mounted on the board. Based on one of the types), it is possible to distinguish between the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228. It can contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection.

By the way, although the reflectance of light is highest in white and low in dark color, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the volume control substrate 229 without a display unit to form a white coating film. On the other hand, the ball rental substrate 228 provided with the ball rental display unit is coated with a dark green resist liquid to form a green coating film. As a result, the efficiency with which the light emitted by the ball rental display unit is reflected on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental substrate 228 is reduced so as not to interfere with the production by the production device excluding the ball rental display unit. Can be done. In the present embodiment, green is adopted as the dark color, but purple or black may be used instead of green.

In the present embodiment, the ball lending board 228 is a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. While electrically connected to (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 does not go through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , Drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later. Via the drive board 1720), via the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, and electrically with the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 exist on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, the same color as the resist liquid applied to the ball rental board 228 is adopted for the front surface (surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, and the green resist liquid is applied. A green coating is formed, and the same color as the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is used for the front surface (surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. , It is preferable that a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film. The white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution, and is a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base). When a plurality of substrates are arranged from a material) and cut out for manufacturing, they may be cracked or torn.

By the way, when manufacturing a substrate, as described above, since a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material), the color of the silk paint and the resist liquid are used. The same color will be produced, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not the substrate is manufactured from the same standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) by examining the substrate having white color, and the substrate having white color has a defect. When it is found, when confirming another defect, it is sufficient to first trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one and investigate, which has the advantage of contributing to the early detection of the defect.

The volume adjustment operation for adjusting the volume of the effect based on the volume up button 226 to be large or the volume of the effect based on the volume down button 227 to be small is performed for a certain period of time (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on). Variable display for a certain period from the time until the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter, for those having the function of the peripheral control MPU, it may be referred to as "peripheral control IC" instead of the peripheral control MPU) is activated. It may be always executable by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) except for one or both of the special symbols before and after the stop, or the customer waiting state. The peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) can be executed only when specific conditions such as the period during which the effect display device 1600 is demonstrating by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) are satisfied. It may be one. In addition, the volume adjustment result based on the volume adjustment operation, such as adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 to be large or adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 to be small, is immediately adjusted to the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral). The control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be delayed from the timing of the volume adjustment operation depending on the situation (whether or not the fluctuation is being displayed, the progress of the production, etc.). It may be reflected.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). However, among the plurality of substrates, they are adjacent to each other. In the case of being arranged in, the person performing the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring that is electrically connected to one board and the wiring that is electrically connected to the other board.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is mounted below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a tubular front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

After removing the upper plate ball, the unit 240 has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game from a position lower than the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right when viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is urged upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the upward moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guideway 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached to the entire surface of the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body 251 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical transparent dish upper left decorative body 271 that extends to the left and right, a transparent dish upper left inner lens 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a dish upper left inner lens. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The dish upper left inner lens 272 is inserted from behind into the dish upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the plate are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is formed transparently. The surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the upper left decoration of the dish is arranged behind the inner lens 272 on the upper left of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 273. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272 (may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272, the back surface may be formed. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The left end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical transparent dish upper right decorative body 276, a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right inner lens. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The upper right decorative body 276 of the dish has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate and the back surface may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The dish upper right inner lens 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate can be luminescently decorated. .. The inner lens 277 on the upper right of the plate is transparently formed. The surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the upper right decoration of the dish is arranged behind the inner lens 277 on the upper right of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 278. The front surface and the back surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the inner lens 277 on the upper right of the plate may be replaced with a lens cut. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. It is possible to form a step in which the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate are raised between the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285, in cooperation with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left decorative unit 280 is a semi-cylindrical, transparent lower left decorative body 281 that extends to the left and right, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish, and an inner lower left dish. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283 which is attached to the rear side of the lens 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the back surface may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated. .. The lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is formed transparently. The surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the lower left decoration of the dish is arranged behind the lower left inner lens 282 of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the plate (may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the plate, the back surface may be formed. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical transparent lower right decorative body 286 extending to the left and right, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. , The lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish, which is attached to the rear side of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). , Is equipped.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is inserted from behind into the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is luminescently decorated. Can be done. The lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is formed transparently. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the dish is placed behind the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 288. It may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or it may be lens-cut on the front surface and the back surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish (on the polyhedron). It may be formed), and the back surface of the inner lens 287 at the lower right of the plate may be cut in place of the front surface (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish are made to emit light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is emitted. The entire front surface of the can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a transparent central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and the outer circumference and the rotation operation unit of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is composed of a transparent annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the inner circumference of 302.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. The transparent dish center upper inner lens 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and the dish center upper inner lens 313 mounted on the rear side and can irradiate light forward. A dish center upper decorative substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent dish center lower inner lens 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a dish center lower inner lens. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316, which is mounted on the rear side of the 315 and on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a transparent dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircle bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a transparent dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a semicircular shape protruding forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparently formed.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The inner lens 313 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate of the unit front cover 312. The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and is forward (outside) on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). ) Are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light. The front surface of the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the back surface may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is transparently formed. The surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and is located below (or behind) the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish to be arranged. The front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from behind into the decorative body 312b below the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and is forward (outside) on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward) are mounted. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light. The front surface of the dish center lower decorative body 312b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the dish center lower decorative body 312b may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish center lower decorative body 312b may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is formed transparently. The surface of the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and is located below (or behind) the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the dish to be arranged. The front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part and has translucency (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It includes a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from below, and the portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The legs 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 are attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably attached around the axis extending vertically to the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334. The ring mounting base 331, the rotating base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are each transparently formed.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates vertically at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which arcs constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b that is arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , Drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It has 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 in the range of a predetermined rotation angle by the operation ring drive motor 342. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

Since the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparently formed by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 to emit light, the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are formed transparently. Through, or through the through hole 331c of the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner, which constitute the transparent rotation operation unit 302. The cover 337 can be luminescently decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower part. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is composed of ,.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. The elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and can be mounted vertically above the elevating base 364 by a pair of guide shafts 362. The transparent center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373. The transparent center button cover 375, which has substantially the same diameter and is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and the upper base 363. It includes a central button decorative substrate 376 that is mounted on the upper surface and has a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The transparent outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and the outer circumference of the central button body 373 in the outer peripheral board cover 378 are covered. A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the portion and is three-dimensionally decorated, and covers the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379. It is attached to the elevating base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 is composed of an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380 to form an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which projects downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is equipped and is transparently formed. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

The central button decorative substrate 376 is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors because a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type. ing. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate and decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors because a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type. ing. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and extends upward from the inner circumference of the annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and the central button main body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upper side are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. .. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in a plan view, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moving upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, by driving the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that the player can easily do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302 can be light-emitting and decorated. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operating unit 301 in the player participation type production. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402 and the door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 and the transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. It has a body 404 and.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side inner lens 403 is transparently formed. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the left side of the door frame is arranged behind the left side inner lens 403. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative substrate 402. It should be noted that the front surface and the back surface of the left side inner lens 403 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface instead of the front surface of the left side inner lens 403 may be formed. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is transparently formed. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be formed. It may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). May be good).

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the parts corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the side window interior decoration member attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411. It is provided with a transparent inner lens 414 inserted into each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the 412.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A through hole 416a that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a is formed so as to cover the right side base 411 of the cage door frame and the right side inner lens 415. It is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415, and is attached to the upper and lower sides so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. It includes a door frame right side inner panel 417 which extends in a flat plate shape in the direction and the front-rear direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is transparently formed. The surface of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration member 412 may be formed. The front surface and the back surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration members 412 may be formed in the plurality of side windows. The back surface of the decorative portion 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 413 in the side window (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and full-color capable of emitting multiple colors. It is said to be an LED. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal inner lens 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal inner lens 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four upper, lower, left and right parts. The internal inner lens 414 is transparently formed. The surface of the inner inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and a side window decoration portion arranged behind the inner inner lens 414. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 413. The front surface and the back surface of the internal inner lens 414 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the internal inner lens 414 may be lens-cut instead of the front surface. May be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction has a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is formed. The right side inner lens 415 is transparently formed. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the right side of the door frame is arranged behind the right side inner lens 415. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative substrate 418. The front surface and the back surface of the right side inner lens 415 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the right side inner lens 415 may be replaced with a lens cut. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparently. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be formed. It may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). May be good).

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a 1/4 portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 has a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame. A translucent (for example, milky white) top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the top base 451 and the upper front surface, and attached to the front end of the top top cover 452. The transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top bottom plate having translucency (for example, having milky white color) connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with 454. In the present embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top top cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have translucency (for example, having milky white color), but the door frame top. The top top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the base 451 and the upper part of the front surface, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are doors. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured as a transparent one instead of one having translucency (for example, having a milky white color).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, it is arranged behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decoration. The transparent top center inner lens 458 attached to the front of the top top cover 452 (located in front of the substrate 455) is located between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 (ie). (Arranged behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456) The transparent top left inner lens 459 attached to the front of the top top cover 452 and the door frame top. Top cover 452 placed between the decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, placed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top right decorative board 457). It is equipped with a transparent top right inner lens 460 mounted on the front of the door.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 and the top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below (for example, milky white). The lower cover frame 466, the door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451 and the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top top plate 468 having translucency (for example, having milky white color) is provided.

The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It is provided with a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is transparently formed. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively. The front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating up and down on the outside of each pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is a surface mount type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and can emit multicolor. It is said to be an LED. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is a surface mount type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and can emit multicolor. It is said to be an LED. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a surface mount type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and can emit multicolor. It is said to be an LED. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are formed transparently. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted. Door frame placed behind the top center inner lens 458 Multiple LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board placed behind the top left inner lens 459 A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 arranged behind the top right inner lens 460. It is difficult for the player to clearly see it. The front surface and the back surface of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). Instead of the front surface of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the back surface may be provided with a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer surfaces of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[Illuminations by top side speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. The top side speaker 464 is made of a translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having a milky white color) for the vibrating part such as the diaphragm and the center cap, and the magnetic circuit part such as the magnet and the yoke is front and rear. It is formed in a columnar shape having a through hole penetrating through, and the vibrating portion and the magnetic circuit portion are held by the housing portion. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open.

A top-side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 in a mounting portion (not shown), and a predetermined distance dimension is provided on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 from the rear surface to the rear of the speaker bracket 463 (in this embodiment, about 18 mm) The acoustic decorative board 469 is mounted on the mounting portions formed on the four board mounting bent plates (not shown) that are extended. Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decorative substrate 469 to a mounting portion formed on the four substrate mounting bent plates (not shown) described above so as to cover the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. This transparent plate protects the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 from contact with other members and causing electrical troubles. In this way, the speaker illumination unit is assembled by attaching the top side speaker 464 to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and attaching the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the transparent plate to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. In other words, the speaker illumination unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decorative substrate 469, and a transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

On the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A white resist layer is formed by.). A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) 469a are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. The plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are adapted to flow a constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay substrate 467. The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives light emission data and a clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this, the acoustic decoration board 469. By controlling the constant current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned on, off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. A variety of light emission modes are realized.

The peripheral control board 1510 has an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body). Opening of frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (problem related to operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) When not present, the light emission data, which is normally the light emission mode of the effect mode, is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 has an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, door frame, etc. Opening of 3, opening of the main body frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (defect related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc. )) Occurs, the light emission data, which is a notification mode as described above, is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

In addition, in the light emitting mode (normal time) of the effect mode, there are various light emitting modes in which lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. are combined, and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set when the symbol is output, the symbol is variablely displayed using a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal, and the symbol is variablely displayed. Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission state of the effect mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time). On the other hand, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal state), the predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) is lit with the maximum brightness, and the payout control MPU is a door frame. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the release switch, a door frame opening command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board receiving this door frame opening command is transmitted. The 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame opening command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 that has been transmitted to the control board 1510 and has received such a command controls to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal state).

Although not shown, the component numbers of the surface-side electronic components and the surface-side electronic components are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as a region indicating a position (furthermore, include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component. In some cases, the front side notation portion indicating) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, the part numbers of the back surface side electronic components, the area indicating the position where the back surface side electronic components are arranged, etc. are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included). The notation on the back side shown is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 can be used. As described above, it is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, and its light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. Therefore, on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered is applied. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist".) A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is further formed on the solid white resist. By printing the identifiable front side notation with yellow paint by silk printing, the yellow front side notation is not noticeable with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is turned off. In addition to being able to do this, when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint that is very close to white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be maintained by combining with the front-side notation portion printed by silk printing.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since the arrangement covers the rear, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are transparent through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the light center cap, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion, so that the power of the top side speaker 464 is generated. It is possible to decorate. As described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes, the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and its surroundings can be passed through the through holes of the top lower cover 465. Not only can it be visually recognized, but also the illumination of the top side speaker 464 can be visually recognized.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is repeatedly reciprocated, and the speaker emits light from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469. Further, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back surface side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 so that the acoustic decorative substrate 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, they are emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, acoustic decoration). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469). Through (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the back surface (back surface), a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469)), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. It exits to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer circumference of the through hole 451ba at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and has a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (in other words). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). Through (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the back surface (back surface) of the substrate 469, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469)), the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the door frame top base. It exits to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a gap formed in the through hole 451ba formed in 451 and a through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 passes through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, and has the upper left area of the front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square in front view and the upper left area. It will be reflected in the upper right region respectively. In the present embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, but may be made of black resin. Hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening / closing shaft side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as "the shaft support side of the door frame 3" or "the shaft support side of the main body frame 4". The opposite side of the opening / closing shaft side may be described as "the open side of the door frame 3" or "the open side of the main body frame 4."

[Upper left area of front component]
On the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status (in the present embodiment, black color is provided except for each transparent region for confirming the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs. When the function display unit 1400 is provided, a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printing portion having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is attached except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

The area on the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is attached is an external region of the game region 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, the door frame base unit 100 is covered with the door frame base 101, and the reflective sheet 1000a is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. That is, since the existence of the reflective sheet 1000a, which has nothing to do with the content of the game production, can be hidden, it does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflective sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side, and the pachinko When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, on the shaft support side of the door frame 3 (the shaft support side of the main body frame 4), the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) was provided on the game board 5 side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) separately from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. Reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a and emitted forward, the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer circumference of the left acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Light from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the hole 451ba and a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion of the left top side speaker 464. Is emitted, so that the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side can be efficiently used as a game effect or a notification mode. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side (separate from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) separately from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. In order to emit light toward the front, light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decorative substrate 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 enters the game area 5a. It does not emit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

As described above, the reflective sheet 1000a has the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in the closed state). The light emitted by the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side can be reflected toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a while being provided on the front surface of the upper left side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at the position corresponding to. Therefore, the light (leakage) leaking backward from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side can be reflected toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a to be emitted toward the front of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. It can function as a reflective member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light toward the rear of the game board 5.

Although not shown, a QR code (registered trademark) that stores the number (control number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 on the reflective sheet 1000a. And are printed in predetermined positions with black paint, which is a dark color. Identification of the pachinko machine 1 by the QR code (registered trademark) that stores the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the reflective sheet 1000a, the number (control number) for specifying the model of the game board 5, and the manufacturing date of the game board 5. A specific information display unit is configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number that identifies the model of the game board 5 and the date of manufacture of the game board 5). ing. Since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin in the state where the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (when the front component 1000 is made of black resin, the background is black). Since the white reflective sheet 1000a stands out, the line of sight of a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall can be naturally directed to the reflective sheet 1000a due to the attractiveness.

Further, as described above, the region on the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is attached is an region outside the gaming region 5a formed on the gaming board 5, and is a door frame. In a state where 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 covers the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflective sheet 1000a is a door. Since it becomes difficult to see through the door window 101a of the frame 3, the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflective sheet 1000a become difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

Further, in the reflective sheet 1000a, since the reflective sheet 1000a is white, when the background is white, the dark black color is conspicuous, and the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) can be easily visually recognized. Further, the QR code (registered trademark) is a device separate from the pachinko machine 1, and when it is read by a code reading device possessed by a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall, the background is that the reflective sheet 1000a is white. Is white, and the QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. That is, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. Further, instead of the QR code (registered trademark), a one-dimensional barcode may be used, characters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be used, or characters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be appropriately combined.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000. The reflective sheet 1000a has a through hole formed in a portion corresponding to a region in which a pseudo nail having a gold color is arranged. As described above, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface (surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Since the pseudo nail is also made of gold, it can be used as a reflective member in the same manner as the reflective sheet 1000a when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4.

[Upper right area of front component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3 and on the front (surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component 1000, a metal for maintaining the mounted state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 Each fastener FT (see FIG. 10) is provided. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, the metal stopper FT is arranged on the front (surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, a metal stopper FT is arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side. The end portion of the metal stopper FT is inserted into a board stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4 and engaged with the metal stopper FT.

Further, the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, by being attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 is reinforced. Rigidity is given to the door frame base unit 100, and the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending vertically and arranged apart from each other on the left and right are connected to the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The upper reinforcing frame 113 extending to the left and right, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the intermediate reinforcing frame. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right end of 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of hooks mounted vertically separated on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. It includes a hook member 116 on which the 652 is hooked. That is, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

As described above, in the present embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, the metal stopper FT is provided on the front (surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. In addition to being arranged, on the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3. Both the metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 ( Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the surface) is transmitted by a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and a metal right reinforcing frame 112. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily visually recognized. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, but the door frame base. Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decorative substrate 469 passed through the right through hole 101k formed in 101 does not emit toward the game area 5a, and is rear of the game board 5. Does not emit even to. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

Since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the acoustic decoration on the right side passes through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 is reinforced by a metal stopper FT arranged on the front surface side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and a metal right reinforcement. Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decorative substrate 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be reflected. It does not emit light toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit light toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

Further, a white reflective sheet in which the shape of the white reflective sheet 1000a described above is appropriately modified is attached to the peripheral region where the metal stopper FT is arranged in the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. It may be configured as. In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side passes through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is transmitted to a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, and a metal right reinforcing frame 112. From a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 because it can be reflected by the white reflective sheet. Light does not emit toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit light toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

By the way, when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall is provided on the door frame 3, for example, after inserting a regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotating the door frame 3. By grasping a decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 by hand, the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, the more work is performed to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the more the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, and the door frame may be damaged. There is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. In addition, since the light is emitted rearward through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are mounted on the door frame. It is possible to emit light toward the rear of 3. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. A metal stopper FT is placed on the (surface) side, and both are metal members. Therefore, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 3, Through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, the light reflected by the metal reflecting portion such as the metal right reinforcing frame 112 and the metal stopper FT leaks out, and the gap Can be made to emit light. As a result, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right of the door frame right side unit 410 provided in the door frame 3 When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to the extent that the mode in which the gap emits light can be visually recognized, the decorative member is stopped from being pulled, and then a finger is inserted into the gap to insert the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand can be shortened, the time for which the load is applied to the joint portion between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3 can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When the door frame is opened]
By the way, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally becomes an obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball launched toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down while the player is playing a game. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further piled up on the packed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in the shape of grapes, the player calls a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall to have the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes removed. A staff member such as a clerk in a game hall called by a player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the decorative board provided on the game board 5 is used. In addition to controlling all of the mounted LEDs to be turned off, control is performed so that each movable body provided in the game board 5 is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. Control the game board at the time. A specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469) with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening. In addition to controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed.

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the door frame is controlled at the time of opening, a state in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are completely turned off and / or Among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469) lights up in a notification mode for notifying the opening of the door. It will be in a state of doing. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, as described above, the translucency is transmitted through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the center cap having the light, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion. Further, it is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and repeatedly between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. On the contrary, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light because they are emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Then, since a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back surface side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (through). ) Because a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469)), a gap between the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and the door. It exits to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through the through hole 101k formed in the frame base 101.

That is, since the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and toward the rear of the door frame 3, the door frame can emit light. In a state where 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is viewed from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface). In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light in the notification mode so that they can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469. As a result, in the game hall, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is provided to the staff such as the clerk of the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3. Further, in the game hall, an abnormality or a problem occurs in the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (pachinko). Abnormality in machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, opening of main body frame 4, wiring It is possible to promptly convey (disconnection, etc.) or malfunctions (faults related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.)), and the game The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn with an illegal tool, no sound will flow, but while it is easy to see that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn with an illegal tool, a hole is made in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool. The sound changes but the sound flows just by opening it. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker or disconnect it to prevent sound from flowing from the speaker, magnets and taps will be used. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound does not flow from the speaker in the first place. When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the game machine, the game machine is in a state of waiting for the player, and a silent demonstration (multiple LEDs provided on the door frame and the game board are set to the light emitting mode for waiting for the player). Along with the light emission, the player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device capable of displaying the effect image.) Is repeated. Then, in such a state of waiting for the player, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall has a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker by an illegal tool, and the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker is disconnected or disconnected. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not sound is flowing from the speaker.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is pierced with a wire, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, so that the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged. ), When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the top side speaker 464 emit light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing portion. Light is emitted from a translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the speaker. Since the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the center cap are made of a translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having a milky white color), the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 passes through a hole formed in the diaphragm. The light emitted from the diaphragm shines brighter as a spotlight than the light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As a result, as described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Therefore, when a silent demonstration is performed, the top lower cover 465 penetrates. Through the holes, the existence of the holes formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be discovered as the existence shining with high brightness like a spotlight. Therefore, it can contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

Further, when the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is pierced with a wire and a silent demonstration is performed, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are turned off (it happens to be turned off). The state in which the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are turned off within the period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. However, since the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on which the white coating film coated with the white resist liquid is formed is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the background becomes white due to this white coating film, so that the top side speaker The white color of the white coating film could be visually recognized through the holes made in the diaphragm of 464 and the innumerable through holes formed in the top lower cover 465, and the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 was illegally opened. The holes are easy to see. As a result, it is possible to detect whether or not the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally perforated. Therefore, it can contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, a silent demonstration in which a plurality of LEDs provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and the player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image. Since a plurality of LEDs emit light in a light emitting mode for waiting for a player, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally pierced with a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. Since the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through the holes formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464, it seems that a part of the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is emitting light. As a result, it is possible to discover that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

A speaker net having translucency may be provided on the front surface of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 from being illegally intruded by a wire, and it takes time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. , Can contribute to the early detection of such fraudulent activity. Further, since the speaker net has translucency, it is unlikely to interfere with the light emitted through the translucent diaphragm of the top side speaker 464.

Further, the top side speaker 464 is made of a translucent resin such as a vibrating plate and a center cap, for example, polypropylene having a milky white color, but has a gray color as a translucent resin. It may be polypropylene or the like having a color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc., or may be made of a transparent resin instead of a resin having translucency.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device performs effects and error notifications that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, while it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear surface side of the front frame. There was a problem.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a game board detachably held in a middle frame and having a front frame configured to cover the front side of the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-07963). (Paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). By the way, when opening the front frame, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock and rotates it, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand. As the amount of opening work increases, the front frame may be damaged due to repeated load applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the front frame.

Further, conventionally, a game machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). When any abnormality or malfunction occurs in the game machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, in the same manner as in the past, it has been difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect.

Further, conventionally, a game machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). When any abnormality or malfunction occurs in the game machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, as the light toward the rear of the game board increases, the light toward the front of the game machine decreases, so it is difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

Further, conventionally, a game machine in which specific information about the game machine is provided on the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it becomes possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the game board is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to suppress an illegal change act or the like for the game machine. However, in the same manner as the conventional mode, since the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, the decorativeness is lowered, and there is a possibility that the game interest is lowered.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a speaker in a front frame has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). Along with the production sound generated during the game, the error notification sound and the like are also played from the speaker provided in this game machine. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn with an illegal tool, no sound will flow, but it will be easy to visually recognize that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn. Simply making a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool will change the sound, but the sound will flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker or disconnect it to prevent sound from flowing from the speaker, magnets and taps will be used. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound does not flow from the speaker. When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the game machine, the game machine is put into a player waiting state, and a silent demonstration (the light emitting device emits light in the player waiting light emitting mode and is displayed on the image display device). The image for waiting for the player is displayed.) Will be repeated. However, in such a state of waiting for the player, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall has a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker by an illegal tool, and the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker is disconnected or disconnected. It was difficult to determine whether or not sound was flowing from the speaker.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decoration body 312b 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side and operated by the player The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the slingshot is tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since it is easy to understand the whole picture of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501, which face the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 to the front, are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It includes a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the table unit 2000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later). The decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like provided on the back unit 3000 are connected to the effect drive board 1720) described later, and the opposite end is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. And is connected to the door frame auxiliary relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

Then, a connection cable for connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side, which will be described later, and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. The 503 guides the side connected to the interface board 635 and the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the effect drive board 1720 described later so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. A binding band 504 inserted into a set of through holes 502d having the same left-right direction among a plurality of through holes 502d formed on both upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. , It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and regulates the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle 182 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, extending to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, thereby forming the inside of the tank rail 553. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the upper full tank path unit. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrowed between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball pulling passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball pulling passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b, so that the pachinko machine can be discharged more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and the foul cover unit 150 communicates with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected to the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward by the speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball pulling guidance portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply on the rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, for explanation, the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface on the rear side of the board 630 may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630" on which electronic components are mounted.) A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the surface. It includes a cover 631 and. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631, the state is accommodated in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630 may be described as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, simply "solid green resist"). A green resist layer is formed by ()), and a power switch 630a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power board 630. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, the attributes of the surface side electronic components such as the component number of the surface side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged (further, the surface). The front side notation part indicating the shape of the side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included. It is a white paint that stands out and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631. Further, since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control that is housed in the payout control board box 632. It includes a substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 that is attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the vertically extending shaft, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99A. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

In front view, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball squeeze) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears and belts can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip-like shape. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outward and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island facility, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed so as to match, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. .. FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it means that the LED irradiates light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. It is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed in 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of golden obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) in contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a. Further, the game board 5 is a game performed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114, 211, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The drive board unit 1700, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has a transparent panel plate 1110, it is arranged from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100 to the rear of the game panel 1100. The presence of various members can be easily visually recognized (hereinafter, may be referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards electrically connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 described above (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200 and the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400). , Door frame right side unit 410 side window decorative board 413 and door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board 467, etc.), main control board 1310 and peripheral control The panel relay board 1710 relaying the connection with the board 1510 and the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a production drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730 that houses a panel relay board 1710 and a production drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view. For example, the effect drive substrate 1720 has a green coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist liquid on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by (may be described as). A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the effect drive board 1720, and the attributes of the electronic components such as the component number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged are located in the vicinity of these electronic components. (Furthermore, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component may be included.) The white paint that stands out against the green color. Then, each is printed by silk printing on the solid green resist.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting opening that can accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. It is provided with a first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004 or a second large winning opening 2006 capable of accepting the game ball B according to the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction and is provided in the game ball B. Is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game from the game area 5a.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. The second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has the second big winning opening 2006, and the second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the second attacker unit 2600, are one. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the flat back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back back left effect unit 3500, the back front right decoration unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back back left in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and the back front right production unit 3700 provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It is provided with an out guide portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the two game balls B with a width sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball detection member 3080 of the out port 2010 and the back unit 3000 described later.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a look larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N having a predetermined gauge arrangement are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 115 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side is narrow so that a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A tubular portion 3081 of the out ball detection member 3080 in the back guidance unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each protruding forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It includes two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the fact that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Further, on the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the vicinity of the right side of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 is illegal. A magnetic sensor 1111 that detects magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113 and the like).

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below. Can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 211) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first large winning opening sensor 2402, and a second large winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 279 in addition to FIG. 107. FIG. 276 is a perspective view (a) of the function display unit viewed from the front, FIG. 277 is a perspective view (b) of the function display unit viewed from the back, and FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit viewed from the front. 278 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit as viewed from behind, and FIG. 279 is a schematic view of the front surface (front surface) of the function display board housed in the function display unit.

As shown in FIG. 107, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003. And a normal hold indicator including two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round display, which consists of five LEDs for displaying.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

As shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, the function display unit 1400 includes a box body 1400a having an opening at the rear, a flat plate-shaped cover body 1400b that closes the opening, and a box body 1400a and a cover body 1400b. It is provided with a functional display board 1400c that is sandwiched and accommodated in the space of. The shape of the side surface of the box body 1400a (that is, the outer shape) and the shape of the side surface of the cover body 1400b (that is, the outer shape) are the same, and the cover body 1400b closes the opening of the box body 1400a. When attached to, the side surface of the box body 1400a and the side surface of the box body 1400a are flush with each other. The outer shape of the function display board 1400c is smaller than the outer shape of the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. In the present embodiment, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are molded from a colored opaque resin (black resin). The colored opaque resin may be a resin such as gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, or yellow, in addition to black. Further, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b may be molded with a milky white resin or a colorless and transparent resin instead of the colored opaque resin.

[5-5-1. Box body]
The box body 1400a has a plurality of through holes 1400az at positions corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca (LED bare chips in the present embodiment) mounted in a matrix on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. The LED insertion cylinders 1400aa, which are arranged in a matrix and have a cylindrical shape communicating with the through holes 1400az, are provided so as to project rearward from the back surface side of the box body 1400a. In a state where the 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the tip of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa is in contact with the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. There is. That is, in a state where the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa is housed in the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa, the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. ..

Further, the box body 1400a is provided with plate-shaped ribs 1400ab that connect adjacent through holes 1400az to reinforce the through holes 1400az so as to project rearward from the back surface side of the box body 1400a. The tip of the rib 1400ab is formed so as not to protrude from the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa (that is, the tip of the rib 1400ab is formed shorter than the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa). As described above, since the box body 1400a is molded from a colored opaque resin (black resin), the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the rib 1400ab also have a colored (black) color. The tip of the rib 1400ab may be flush with the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

The inner diameter of the through hole 1400az and the inner diameter of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa are the same, and there is no step at the portion where the through hole 1400az and the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa communicate with each other. Further, on the upper side surface, the left side surface, the lower side surface, and the right side surface of the box body 1400a, protrusions 1400ac inserted into the locking holes 1400ba formed in the four mounting pieces 1400ba provided on the cover body 1400b are respectively. It is provided in a recess formed on the side surface. The side surface of each protruding portion 1400ac is flush with each side surface of the box body 1400a and does not project from each side surface of the box body 1400a. Further, a part of the side surface of each protruding portion 1400ac is an inclined surface that rises from the opening of the box body 1400a toward the front surface (surface) of the box body 1400a, and four mounting pieces 1400ba provided on the cover body 1400b. Makes it easier to insert into the protrusion 1400ac. When the protruding portion 1400ac of the box body 1400a is inserted into the locking hole 1400ba formed in the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b, the locking hole 1400ba formed in the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b becomes the box body 1400a. The side surface of the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b and the side surface of the box body 1400a are flush with each other, and the cover body 1400b is not destroyed unless the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b is destroyed. Has a structure that cannot be removed from the box body 1400a. In other words, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are configured as a sealing board box for sealing the function display board 1400c.

Further, the box body 1400a is provided with a plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad for sandwiching the function display board 1400c along the inner outer peripheral surface of the box body 1400a while restricting the movement of the function display board 1400c in the vertical, horizontal and front-back directions. It is provided.

Although not shown, a function display sticker having a white color is attached to the front surface of the box body 1400a. When the function display sticker is attached to the front surface of the box body 1400a, a transparent portion having a circular shape is formed at a position corresponding to each LED insertion tube 1400aa. That is, the lighting or blinking of the LED 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c is guided by the LED insertion tube 1400aa and can be visually recognized through the through hole 1400az and the transparent portion. ing.

[5-5-2. Cover body]
The cover body 1400b is provided with mounting pieces 1400ba on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, and is provided so as to project forward from the surface side of the cover body 1400b, and is locked to these four mounting pieces 1400ba. Holes 1400 baa are formed respectively. As described above, a recess is provided on the side surface of the box body 1400a, and a protrusion 1400ac is formed in the recess. When the locking hole 1400ba formed in the mounting piece 1400ba is inserted into the protrusion 1400ac and is locked, the mounting piece 1400ba is housed in the recess provided on the side surface of the box body 1400a ( Regarding the mounting piece 1400ba provided on the upper side of the cover body 1400b, the tip end portion of the mounting piece 1400ba is flush with the front surface (front surface) of the box body 1400a and does not protrude from the front surface (front surface) of the box body 1400a).

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a connector opening 1400bb at a position corresponding to the front surface mounting type connector 1400cc mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a. When the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a, the connector 1400cc of the function display board 1400c protrudes from the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b through the connector opening 1400bb and is exposed. The wiring cable through which the control signal is transmitted from the connector 1400cc main control board 1310 is electrically connected. The color of the housing of the connector 1400 cc is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). The connector 1400cc may be a surface mount (SMD) type connector instead of a surface mount type connector.

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 1400bc for mounting the function display unit 1400 to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 so as to project rearward from the back surface side of the cover body 1400b (in this embodiment, Three mounting bosses 1400bc are provided). As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the front component 1000 that divides the outer circumference of the game region 5a, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. As described above, the front component 1000 is formed with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted in the upper left corner of the front view. The front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120 has a fixing hole (not shown) having a through hole at a position corresponding to three mounting bosses 1400 bc provided on the cover body 1400 b of the function display unit 1400 in the upper left corner of the front view. Are formed respectively. In the function display unit 1400, three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b are inserted into three fixing holes provided on the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120, and three fixing holes are inserted from the rear surface (back surface) of the panel holder 1120. By inserting a screw into the through hole and screwing it in, the cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120, so that the function display unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120. It will be in a state of being. In this state, the panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000 while holding the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, so that the function display unit 1400 is attached to the function display unit mounting portion 1011 of the front component 1000 to display the function. The front surface (surface) of the box body 1400a of the unit 1400 and the front surface (surface) of the front component 1000 are flush with each other, and there is no step.

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a rib portion 1400 bd along the inner circumference of the cover body 1400b, and is provided so as to project forward from the surface side of the cover body 1400 b. When the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a, the outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1400bd comes into contact with the inner surface of the opening of the box body 1400a. Further, the cover body 1400b has a plurality of protrusions 1400bda for sandwiching the function display board 1400c at positions corresponding to a plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad provided on the box body 1400a along the inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1400bd. It is provided.

Although not shown, the product control number (for example, FDU-TYPE-A) of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b.

[5-5-3. Function display board]
A plurality of LEDs 1400ca (in this embodiment, LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements")) are mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and the front side electronic components such as the plurality of LEDs are mounted. In addition to the pads to which (front-side electronic components) are soldered, through-holes (those with copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through-holes to have conductivity. The same shall apply hereinafter), lands, etc. A black resist layer is formed by a black coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid black resist") formed by applying a black resist solution in the entire area except for the above. .. In this embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c indicates the part number of the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) and the position where the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts) such as regions (Furthermore, the shape of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), the size of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), front side electronic parts (further) The front side notation part (front side notation part) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (the surface side electronic component) and the model of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component)) has a predetermined color (the surface side notation part). For example, it is a light color (white or yellow) that is more noticeable than black, and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

In addition to the connector 1400cc to which the wiring cable is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. may be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, and the connector 1400cc, various ICs, and various types may be mounted. In addition to the pads on which the rear side electronic parts (back side electronic parts) such as resistors and various capacitors are soldered, the black color formed by applying a black resist solution to the entire area except for through holes and lands. A black resist layer is formed by a coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid black resist”). In the present embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c indicates the part number of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) and the position where the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of rear side electronic components (back surface side electronic components) such as regions (Furthermore, the shape of the rear surface side electronic components (back surface side electronic components), the size of the rear surface side electronic components (back surface side electronic components), the rear surface side electronic components (back surface side electronic components) The rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back surface side electronic component and the model of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is a predetermined color (back surface side electronic component). For example, it is a light color (white or yellow) that is more noticeable than black, and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

As described above, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and the control from the main control board 1310 is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c as described above. A connector 1400cc is mounted to which the wiring cable through which the signal is transmitted is electrically connected. The plurality of terminals provided on the connector 1400 cc to which the wiring cable to which the control signal from the main control board 1310 is transmitted are electrically connected are connected to the plurality of LEDs 1400ca via various wiring patterns formed on the function display board 1400c. It is electrically connected. In the wiring cable, in addition to the wiring for transmitting the control signal from the main control board 1310, the wiring for supplying the power supply (for example, + 12V) and the wiring for making the board ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 the same are also included. included. Of the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the functional display board 1400c, one surface may be a betta land, both surfaces may be a betta land, or both surfaces may be a betta land. It does not have to be.

The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c and the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c are land. (There are front (front) side lands and rear (back) side lands in the lands), which are provided on the connector 1400 cc mounted on the rear (back) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c. The plurality of terminals to be mounted and the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c are electrically connected.

When a through hole 1400 cc having a land is arranged in the vicinity of a plurality of LEDs 1400 ca, the light emitted by the LED 1400 ca is reflected by the land of the through hole 1400 cc, and when this reflected light is emitted to another LED 1400 ca adjacent to the LED 1400 ca, the other In some cases, the light emission mode may be such that the LED1400ca is lit even though it does not emit light, or the color is different from the color emitted by the other LED1400ca mixed with the light emitted by the other LED1400ca. It may be a light emitting mode, or it may be a light emitting mode in which the color is blurred. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, and is important for displaying the game state (game status), the normal lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like. Since it is a display device, if such a light emitting mode occurs, it may be misread or misrecognized by the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 279, the through hole 1400cc having the land is located at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, and the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the rib formed on the back surface side of the box body 1400a. It is arranged outside the area corresponding to the area of 1400ab. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca from being reflected by the lands of the through holes 1400cc, so that the light reflected by the lands of the through holes 1400cc does not proceed toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca. Can contribute to.

Although it is difficult to prevent the intrusion of ambient light entering through the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cc, the connector 1400cc is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c in which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are not mounted. Since it is mounted, it is possible to prevent the ambient light from directly traveling toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca.

Further, in a state where the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, as described above, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa is the front surface of the function display board 1400c. (Surface) is in contact with 1400 cx. That is, in a state where the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since the LED insertion tube 1400aa is housed in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. .. As a result, the ambient light entering from the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cc passes through the through hole 1400cc having a land from the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c to the front surface of the function display board 1400c. Even if the (surface) 1400 cx is invaded, the LED insertion tube 1400aa that functions as a partition wall can suppress the invasion of ambient light into the LED insertion tube 1400aa, so that the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca can be changed. It is possible to prevent the colors of the ambient light from being mixed (the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca and the color of the ambient light can be reduced).

As described above, in the present embodiment, silk printing is not present on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c. Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Even if the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the side electronic component (front side electronic component) is is formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. However, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c, the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is formed, is used as the rear surface side electronic component ( Information for identifying what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component is is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. That is, in the present embodiment, the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c is is the function display board. Nothing is written on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the 1400 c, and what kind of electronic component the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c is specified. No information is written on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c.

Further, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. This is because when a black resist solution is used, the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity is prevented from being reflected by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c. This is because it can contribute to avoiding mixing with.

Further, since the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are molded from a colored opaque resin (black resin), light passes through the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. Can be prevented from invading. Even if light enters the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, a black resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the functional display substrate 1400 c. Since the black resist layer is formed by the black coating film, the reflected light is directed to the plurality of LEDs 1400ca by suppressing the reflection on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the functional display substrate 1400 c. It is possible to suppress the progress.

By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is an important display device in which the lottery result, the game state, etc. are displayed and controlled by the main control board 1310, the function display board 1400c housed in the box body 1400a of the function display unit 1400 is illegal. If it is modified to, the lottery result, the game state, etc. cannot be displayed correctly. In this case, for example, even though the game ball has not actually entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, an invalid signal is input to the main control board 1310 as if the ball had entered. Even if a fraudulent act that obtains many lottery opportunities is performed, the function display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery result, the game status, etc., and it is difficult for the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to notice.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, silk printing is not present on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c. That is, on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c, the front side notation portion (front surface side notation portion) and the rear surface side notation portion (back surface side notation portion) printed by silk printing are completely provided. Not formed. Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Even if the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the side electronic component (front side electronic component) is is formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. However, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c, the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is formed, is used as the rear surface side electronic component ( Information for identifying what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component is is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the function display board 1400c and grasp the circuit configuration.

In the present embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400 c. We adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the LED. LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements") are enclosed in surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, and cannonball type packages, and are extremely small electronic components. is there. Therefore, compared to the case where the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c, the depth distance dimension in the surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, bullet type, or the like package. The size can be reduced by the amount of the above, and the function display unit 1400 can be downsized. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by the player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the function display unit 1400 provided in the game board 5 is struck. It is unlikely that the LED bare chips mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c will be damaged by the impact caused by the impact.

Examples of the method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode of the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display substrate 1400c include wire bonding, flip chip bonding, etc., but in the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, the electrode of the LED bare chip and the predetermined electrode of the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display substrate 1400c are not electrically connected by using a wire as in wire bonding, but are bumped to the electrode of the LED bare chip. A protrusion called a protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode of 1400cx on the front surface (surface) of the function display substrate 1400c. This connection is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c do not have any area to be printed by silk printing. As a result, the process of silk printing can be omitted, so that the substrate manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the plate cost for silk printing and the number of substrate manufacturing processes.

In the above-described embodiment, silk printing was not present on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Instead, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are configured as a sealing board box for sealing the function display board 1400c, and the cover body 1400b can be removed from the box body 1400a unless the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b is destroyed. Since the structure is not provided, the front surface side notation portion (front surface side notation portion) is provided on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c in a predetermined color (for example, white, which is a bright color that is more noticeable than black). It may be printed by silk printing on a solid black resist with a (yellow) paint, and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the functional display board 1400c has a rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component). , It may be printed by silk printing on a solid black resist with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow which is a light color that is more conspicuous than black).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the box body 1400a is provided with an LED insertion tube 1400aa having a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 1400az so as to project rearward from the back surface side of the box body 1400a. , Instead of the cylindrical LED insertion tube 1400aa, at a position corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted in a matrix on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c separately from the box body 1400a. A grid-like spacer may be provided. Like the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the lattice-shaped spacer is molded from a colored opaque resin (black resin). Even with this configuration, in a state where the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, a plurality of functional display boards 1400c mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. Since the LEDs 1400ca are housed in the rectangular openings formed in the corresponding grid-like spacers, the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. The grid-shaped spacer can function as a partition wall in the same manner as the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the through hole 1400cc having the land is located at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca and corresponds to the regions of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa and the rib 1400ab formed on the back surface side of the box body 1400a. When it is difficult to arrange the through hole 1400cc having a land at a position away from a plurality of LEDs 1400ca, the through hole 1400cc having a land is arranged in the area corresponding to the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa. It may be arranged in a region smaller than the region (that is, within the region where the tip end portion of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa and the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c are in contact with each other and do not protrude from this region. (It may be arranged as a sword), within the outer peripheral region of each LED insertion cylinder 1400aa (that is, within the region where the LED 1400ca is accommodated, which is inside the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa, and the tip of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa and the function display. It may be arranged in the region where the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the substrate 1400c abuts and the region excluding the combined region).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c have front side electronic components (front surface side electrons) mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cc of the function display board 1400c. No information for identifying what kind of electronic component the (component) is is written on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c, and is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400c. No information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is is written on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, but the substrate of the function display board 1400c. The control number may be written on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and / or the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board 1400c. As a method of indicating this substrate control number, silk printing is performed with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow which is a light color which is easily noticeable with respect to black, and gray which is a dark color which is less noticeable with respect to black). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the board control number is a foil removal formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board control number in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil. It may be formed by leaving a foil.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the model of the connector 1400 cc mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c is not described on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c, but the model of the connector 1400 cc. May be indicated on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and / or the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c. As a method of indicating the model of this connector housing, silk is applied with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a light color that is easily noticeable with respect to black, and gray, which is a dark color that is less noticeable with respect to black). It may be printed by printing, or in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, a wiring pattern that is a copper foil is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the model of the connector 1400cc. It may be formed by removing the foil and leaving the foil.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, but instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, the box body 1400a The product control number of the function display unit 1400 may be engraved on any of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is stamped on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, but instead of the stamp, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is specified. You may print directly on the back surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b with a paint of the same color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. The printed matter may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b. Further, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is assigned to any of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body 1400a. You may print directly with a paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or you can manage the function display unit 1400 on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. You may paste the one with the number printed on it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. However, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the functional display substrate 1400 c on which no LED 1400 ca is mounted, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution instead of black. Alternatively, a white resist layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. For example, a green resist solution is inexpensive because it is a general one that is usually used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. However, instead of black, a green resist layer may be formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution, or a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. May form a white resist layer. For example, a green resist solution is inexpensive because it is a general one that is usually used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board 1400c. (Surface) We adopted a configuration that mounts directly on 1400cx, but instead of LED bare chips, LED packages with surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, bullet type, etc. are used for the function display board 1400c. It may be mounted on the front surface (front surface) of 1400 cx.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, flip-chip bonding is adopted as a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode of the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display substrate 1400c, but instead of flip-chip bonding, Wire bonding may be adopted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front (front) side wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the front (front) side wiring pattern is formed on the front (front) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. Information for identifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front surface electronic component) which is a plurality of LEDs 1400ca is is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. Although it was not formed by leaving foil, a foil removal standard is formed by creating a circle symbol near the position corresponding to the terminals (anode terminal or cathode terminal) of multiple LEDs 1400ca and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. Black (may be green or white instead of black) formed as terminal symbols on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400 c and solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400 c. The foil removal reference terminal symbol may be covered with a resist. The front (front) side wiring pattern forming the foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the LED 1400ca. As the foil removal reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called beta land (board ground), the circle symbol itself may be used as the foil removal. Further, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED 1400ca instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal), or in the circuit diagram. The symbol to be used (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified). Further, when the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c are substantially the same (that is, the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are the same for the mounting worker or the automatic machine). For the orientation (when there is no one to be mounted in the opposite direction), the foil removal reference terminal symbol is a function display board near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one of the multiple LED1400ca. It may be formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the 1400 c, or a foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400 c in the vicinity of a predetermined position corresponding to one or more LED 1400 ca terminals. It may be formed. In this case as well, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED 1400ca instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal). The symbols used in the circuit diagram (symbols that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, and uses the game state (game situation) and the normal lottery result. Since it is an important display device for displaying special lottery results, etc., a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution to the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the functional display board 1400c is black. By forming a resist layer, reflection by light emitted by a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display board 1400c is prevented, so that the light does not mix with the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby. I was able to contribute to doing so. Therefore, with respect to the substrate accommodated in the other display devices of the function display unit 1400, the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate are formed in the same manner as in the function display substrate 1400c accommodated in the function display unit 1400. A black resist layer may be formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. By doing so, it contributes to prevent the reflection by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the substrate accommodated in the display device so as not to be mixed with the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity. be able to.

This display device will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a schematic view of a game board side matrix display device provided on the game board and a door frame side matrix display device provided on the door frame. As a display device, as shown in FIG. 280, the game board 5 is separate from the effect display device 1600, which accommodates a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted, and can display a predetermined effect image. UDPC, a circular game board side matrix display device provided in the center of the upper part of the center accessory 2500, and the left side of the door frame of the door frame 3 that accommodates a plurality of boards on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted. Examples of the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL, TDPR, etc. provided in the unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, respectively. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR are different from the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, and the peripheral control unit 1500 (controls the progress of the effect). It differs in that it is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510) which can be described later. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR have the same configuration, and a detailed description of the game board side matrix display device UDPC will be described later as a "dot matrix display".

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 211) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded of a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 are formed, and a long ventilation length in the vertical direction is formed. A plurality of holes are formed in a state where the holes are aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b projecting upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c projecting downward from the lower end surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1601c is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 where the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first big winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, is different from the first big winning opening 2005. It is possible to accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is provided at the position and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is equipped with the second major winning opening 2006.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged in the lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the leftmost general winning port 2001. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a are provided. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have a second major winning opening 2006. It has a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. The gate member 2800 is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. ) Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the start port unit and the side unit in the game board. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

The start port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is formed entirely of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which the front view is a combination of a rectangular portion long to the left and right and a semicircular portion having a string on the lower side of the rectangular portion. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100, in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, has a first start port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is opened. It is located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101, which is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be encouraged to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. At the same time, by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002, a lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state occurs in which the player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous is performed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In this start port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B in the rear direction is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 can be expressed in the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted by.

Further, in the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located behind and is provided in the back bottom middle effect unit 3300. Light from LEDs such as the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is used for light emission decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with ribs straddling the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 at the first starting port 2002. The ribs are formed in a triangular shape (which may be partially rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. The distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 while inclining at substantially the same angle as the portion. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided backward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It can be delayed from the timing at which it comes into contact with the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upwards, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and a second second that extends from the base plate in the shape of a gutter and is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes downward. One gutter, the first front wall that closes the front end side of each of the two first gutters, and a gutter-shaped extension from the base plate to the left of the two first gutters. It is provided with a second guide gutter and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely made of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. In the first guide gutter 2202, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward, and in the second guide gutter 2204, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 extends vertically on the upper side with a portion at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom as a boundary, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower side moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the game ball B can be accepted by the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. It forms a general winning opening 2001. Further, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, a portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrates the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. As a result, it protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided backward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the third delivery port 3063 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then lowered. It is discharged onto the board holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. It is less noticeable than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and even if a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , It doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the lower back counterclockwise rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, since the side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the back lower left of the back unit 3000 due to the portion. The light radiated forward from the lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. You can improve the appearance.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. As a result, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001, and to prevent the player's interest from being attracted to the general winning opening 2001 unnecessarily for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's interest to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 can be expressed in the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted by.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is viewed from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. The game ball B can pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. If the game ball B is not paid out, the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side may feel distrustful, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if it is illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball is in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. The illusion of being accepted can be made and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (payment of game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to avoid feeling distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 by the second front wall portion 2205 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) among the three general winning openings 2001. The shape is similar to that of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the leftmost general winning opening 2001, it is possible for some players to have the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is the starting opening, the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, so that the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by "right-handed") away from the first starting port 2002 in the center in the left-right direction to the left, and the second Since there is no decorative sticker attached to the front of the front wall part 2205 to indicate the starting port, it is possible to reconfirm that it is not the starting port, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering it.

Further, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is compared with the case where the front ends thereof are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition to being able to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because the decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001.

The angle of inclination from the horizontal on the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is not shown, but the variable winning openings such as the large winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the horizontal inclination angle when the game ball B is rotated around the lower side so as to move forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. It is an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game ball B to the variable winning opening is larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, many of the game balls B to the variable winning opening are used. Will hope for a prize. Alternatively, even if the variable winning opening (large winning opening) has a specified number of winnings, the applicant will wish to win more than the specified number. Therefore, by making the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening, and to give the general winning opening 2001 the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning door in the open state is loose, it takes a long time for the winning door in the open state to close, so that the number of game balls B is more than the specified number for the player. Can make you feel like doing.

Further, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the portion extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is more than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end. The distance of is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the ordinary lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 Can be hidden from the player's field of vision at an early stage.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, among a plurality of general winning openings 2001, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are used. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called "left-handed") in the normal gaming state can enter the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not tilted. The one provided at the position is shown, but it is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not tilted is in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probability change", or "big hit"). The game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called "right-handed") may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening) is opened from the time when it is closed. It has a narrow angle. If the number of game balls B paid out when winning a prize in the large prize opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, the player will win more than the specified number even in the large winning opening where the specified number of winnings is set. I hope. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big prize opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with the front tilted rolls to the back side. There is. In other words, when the general winning opening 2001, which is less than the number paid out when winning the large winning opening, is won, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B winning the large winning opening rolls to the back side is faster. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more payouts are made, the slower the time it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, the more payouts are made, the longer the time of joy when winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right. The entire side upper left unit 2300 is transparently formed.

The side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first prize-winning door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is arranged in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, in front view, the second starting port 2004 is provided in the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first large winning opening 2005.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a first that detects the game ball B received in the first grand prize opening 2005. It includes a large winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. Two first prize opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, the front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 to form the flow path of the game ball B, and the rear side of the unit base 2411. The rear cover 2413, the second start port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2414 are moved to open and close the second start port 2004. The start port solenoid 2415 for making the start port solenoid 2415, the solenoid cover 2416 covering the start port solenoid 2415, the first big prize opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big prize opening 2005, and the first The first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first prize opening door 2417 to open and close the first prize opening 2005, and the transmission for moving the first prize opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. A member 2419 and a member 2419 are provided.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first grand prize opening decoration substrate 2420 for emitting and decorating the first grand prize opening 2005 and the rear surface of the rear cover 2413. Second start port sensor 2401, first prize opening sensor 2402, first sub-out port sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, start port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first prize opening decorative board 2420 and panel relay board A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710 is provided.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. A second opening 2411c that is long left and right and penetrates back and forth in the upper part on the left side from the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that are lined up side by side and penetrate front and back below the second opening 2411c. It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted through the first opening 2411a. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a tubular shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is inserted through the second opening 2411c. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a tubular shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered.

Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e use the game ball B, which is rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417, as the contact portion of the front cover 2412 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 just above the first guide hole 2411b, with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes match. Further, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and is transparently formed into a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in front view. It is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a and between the first shelf 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004 and the second shelf so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The third shelf 2412c, which extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are spaced from the left end to the left by 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the third shelf 2412c. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d, which extends from a lower position to the left so as to be lowered to the left, and forms a first large winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and is separated to the left from the right side of the front cover 2412. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are inclined at the same angle, respectively, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, the third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and the third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. It has a sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extending downward from the fourth shelf portion 2412d and a seventh vertical wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. Further downward, it extends to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower to the right. Above, further down, extends to the bottom of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of the 2412e, incline so that the game ball B is lowered to the left with a space between the first lateral wall portion 2412l and the first lateral wall portion 2412l, and then to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side. It has a second side wall portion of 2412 m, which is inclined so as to be higher toward it. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412 m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2412n extending and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the interval at which the game ball B can be distributed between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided with a space. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and is triangular at a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions that project rearward in shape. These contact portions refer the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open forward, and is formed of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413, in cooperation with the unit base 2411, holds the second starting door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first winning door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich the second starting port sensor 2401 and the first winning opening sensor 2402.

The second starting port door 2414 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b, with respect to the unit base 2411. It has a rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion of the lower part of the arm portion 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to a position substantially the same as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the side of the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second start port door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction. The start port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The start port solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the start port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first prize-winning door 2417 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b, respectively. It has a rotating shaft 2417c that extends coaxially from the lower end to the left and right, and a columnar link pin 2417d that protrudes to the right from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bend forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in the transmission member 2419 described later.

The first prize-winning door 2417 can close the first prize-winning door 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first prize-winning door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the plunger is projected forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the extension portion 2419b. It also has a slit 2419c that extends vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2420 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The first grand prize opening decoration substrate 2420 can illuminate and decorate the first grand prize opening 2005 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state, respectively. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It projects forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is located above the first prize opening 2005, and the door portion 2417a cannot accept the game ball B into the first prize opening 2005. It is in a state of being. That is, the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

When the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a in this normal state, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 After rolling the upper surface and the second shelf portion 2412b, the second shelf portion 2412b is discharged from the left end to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and is left due to their inclination. Roll to the direction. When the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and bounces to the right, a gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005 with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzag in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m, and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m. Due to the inclination of the part 2412 m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412 m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412 g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412 h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and then enters the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back induction unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both first. It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger resists the urging force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second start port door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Will be. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g and becomes the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion of the first lateral wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls rearward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its rear end. The game ball B discharged rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is delivered onto the substrate holder 1200 below the back guide unit 3050. It is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the urging force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first prize-winning door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first prize opening 2005 is reached. The game ball B is ready to be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first prize opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then the fifth standing wall. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, it is detected by one of the two first major winning opening sensors 2402, and then the first (3) It falls on the lateral wall portion 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to be lowered from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B discharged rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first prize opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first prize opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005. Since the door portion 2417a is rotated around the rotation shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction to open and close the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 (first prize opening 2005) The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. As a result, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since it is released to the rear of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying between the first prize opening 2005 and the first prize sensor 2402, and many game balls are released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided on the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 projecting from the outer periphery and contacting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 projecting from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, in the support portion 2503, the end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

More specifically, a plurality of support units 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support portion 2503 provided at a portion above the warp inlet 2511 described later and where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost position, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is intermediate between the portions extending vertically. Is shaped like a bulge to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and at the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower side portions (see FIG. 135). The support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled on the game board 5, and the portion extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support portion 2503 is a back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It roughly follows a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support portion 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 on the lower side of the warp inlet 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). Since the tip sides extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, it seems to be a part of the shape of the shutter 3732. The support unit 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the warp outlet 2512 which is made capable of releasing the game ball B which has entered the warp inlet 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 provided in the upper right corner and composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the abutment of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 extending from the center. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened diagonally to the lower right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are the first guides. It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. In this lower right guide passage 2530, the entrance opens upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower left with the width of one game ball B.

The right end of the lower right guide passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory 2500 at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is an outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding mold without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back surface where the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support unit 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. Is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. Therefore, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the visibility of the decorative bodies and the like provided at the rear, and it is possible to surely exert the decorative effect by them.

Further, since the support unit 2503 and the like are transparent and the support unit 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 capable of luminescent decoration, the luminescent decoration can be performed by the light from them, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, behind the support portion 2503 (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135), the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided. , The light radiated forward from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. It can be shown to the player. In addition, the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the light from the rear can be diffused by the step or the like, so that the light can be made to look more gorgeous.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided so as to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further increased as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if you want to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear in front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support portion 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body, and at the same time, the support portion 2503 also has decorativeness. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses the appearance of blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 away from the rear back unit 3000. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to look blurry.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating through the panel plate 1110, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. It is also possible that there is no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112. .. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center accessory 2500 is not provided with the flange portion 2502. You may do so.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the side right middle unit in the front unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second grand prize opening 2006 that opens and closes to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second major winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2006 and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second major winning opening 2006. It is equipped with 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second major winning opening door 2611 for closing the second major winning opening 2006 so as to be openable and closable, and the second major winning opening door 2611 to move the second major winning opening 2006. The second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, the transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second prize opening door 2611, and the second prize opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the received game ball B and discharges it rearward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second major winning opening 2006 opens to the left at a position to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second major winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning door 2611 is provided.

The second prize-winning door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a bulge from the upper end of the right side to the left. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize-winning door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircle as the axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position away from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The lower rotation shaft of the second prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is located so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the second grand prize opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center accessory 2500. A space through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the player and the right side of the 2501. Further, in the state of the second attacker unit 2600 assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guidance passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second prize-winning door 2611 is upright, and the second prize-winning door 2006 is closed by the second prize-winning door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second major winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second prize-winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second prize-winning door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second prize-winning door 2611 moves to the left, the second prize-winning door 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second prize-winning door 2611 becomes lower. It becomes a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the second large winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted by the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 is guided by the guidance passage 2613 after being detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and is discharged backward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward with the width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the game is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear and a second guide passage B that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear. It has two guide passages 2702 and. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, which extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends to the right and then bends further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends rearward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, in the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can circulate is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly to the left of the second major winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guidance passage 2701, and is provided behind the back. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guidance passage 2702, and is provided behind the back unit. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Has been done. The gate member 2800 is a gate sensor 2003 for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003 and the gate portion 2003 in which the lottery of the normal lottery result for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by the passage of the game ball B is performed. It has 2801 and. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 protruding diagonally from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both the left and right sides. A gap through which the sphere B can flow is formed. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. FIG. 130 is an enlarged explanatory view of the right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so as to enter the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than those. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more than the game ball B distributed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B circulates mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven upward from the left side along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N guides the user to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to any of the 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is rarely accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted at the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down to the side unit 2200 through between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B that has been released from the stage 2513 and has not been received by the first start port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 and is accepted into the second starting port 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being killed.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 has a probability of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 with respect to the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is not in the open state, the operation of driving the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left-handed”) can be promoted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 directly above.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is located on the left side of the gate member 2800, at the gate portion, due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. In 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided so that the probability becomes lower, and the side right middle unit 2700 side flows down.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the sill, and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flow down to the left of.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006.

The game ball B received in the second prize opening 2006 is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2601 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back induction unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game ball B by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second prize opening 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second prize opening 2006, entered the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exited the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and moves the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and their inclinations. After rolling to the left from the door portion 2417a and rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N, the ball does not flow down to the first shelf 2412a but to the upper shelf 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left side. After abutting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, the first major prize depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first prize opening 2005 is opened. It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces to the right due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may be rolled to the right against the inclination and discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned to the game area 5a, but is not returned to the game area 5a, and the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003, the second start Since the door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is accepted by the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is discharged to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery As a result, when the "big hit" is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that it is released from the second shelf 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the first large winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B may come into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and flow down diagonally to the lower right to reach the second shelf 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf and the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m and is received by the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If this is not the case, the game is discharged downward from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a, behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

Therefore, in order to open and close the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, and a "small hit" is made. It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (assign) the "normal hit" as the result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity for the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and a "small hit" or a "big hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 To open and close, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, and the first prize opening It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B in 2005 or the second prize opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and it is easy to pass through the gate portion 2003 by the guide passage to be distributed. , Since it is easy to be accepted by the second sub-out port 2012, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage, and the player can be made to play the game ball. You can enjoy the driving operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that a "normal hit" in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing "right-handed" may be drawn, and the open state may be drawn. Since there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 will accept the game ball B and a "small hit" or "big hit" will be drawn, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the flat back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back back left effect unit 3500, the back front right decoration unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back back left in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and the back front right production unit 3700 provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and various effect units are mounted, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are mounted on the rear side. The back box 3010 is transparently formed of a synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a with an open front and a square frame penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorative bodies, effect units, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at a distance from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

When the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are assembled on the game board 5, the outer peripheral edge on the outside extends in a flat plate shape so as to be located outside the game area 5a in the front view. (See FIGS. 111 and 135, etc.). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge on the outside is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. It extends to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It is extended to the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Further, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevating drive motor 3554 can be obscured. Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it in the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of the 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, in the back front right decorative body 3040, in front view, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600, and is transparent in front. Even through the constituent members 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is made invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as the back front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional parts provided behind, the front constituent members 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. However, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, give the player a feeling of openness, and give the player a feeling of openness, and the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decorative sticker 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative sticker 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are provided with predetermined decorations, are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through the game, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the player side) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the portions extending outward from the game area 5a in the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a in the front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be generated may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in a balance such that a large game area 5a can be taken with respect to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in the front view. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is, and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guide unit 3050 is formed to be substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and the like. The out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, the second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. It is provided with a magnetic sensor 3055, which is provided in a portion behind the above and detects illegal magnetism.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050 was received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. The second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, the third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inside of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and the general on the left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received to the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning opening 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning opening 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 are accepted. The 7th delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B is delivered, the 8th delivery port 3068 to which the game ball B received to the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the side right middle unit 2700 It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path and a second discharge path for guiding the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharging it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. The third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it diagonally to the lower right, and the position where the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066. It is provided with a fourth discharge path, which is guided downward to the left, guided to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharged diagonally to the lower left. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067, and the ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first start port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Will be done. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. The ball B joins the second discharge path, is detected by the general winning opening 2001, and then is discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. ..

It is accepted by the second start port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the game ball B and the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received by the second major winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth. It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is on the upstream side of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and the second (Iv) It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B received in the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not exist (the game ball B for which the privilege was not given, also referred to as "out ball"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the tubular portion 3081 and the tubular portion 3081 that extend the game ball B in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction so as to be able to flow. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that projects in a flat plate shape from the outer periphery of the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the tubular portion 3081 and lowers It is provided with a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the tubular portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The tubular portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which two game balls B are sufficiently lined up (a width in which three game balls B are not lined up), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side projects forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and projects forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left out port sensor 3053 detects the game ball B circulating on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081, and the right out port sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081. It detects the distributed game ball B. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface on the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out port sensor 3053, so that the out port sensor 3053 can smoothly detect the game ball B, and the game ball B can be detected smoothly. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detection member 3080 has a tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

When the out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper part of the front end of the tubular portion 3081 protrudes forward from the rear end of the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out-ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out-guidance unit 1003 and received in the out-port 2010. The game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the tubular portion 3081, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without abutting it on the substrate holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the partition portion 3082 partitions between the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is It is possible to guide the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side of the out port sensor 3053 side as well as to guide the game ball B to the left side of the out port sensor 3053. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player tends to "left-handed" or "right-handed" based on the number of game balls B detected per hour. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to promote the optimum driving operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the protrusion of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over it. Therefore, when many game balls B enter the out-port 2010 per hour, the partition is made. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the distribution amount of the game ball B is relatively small in the part 3082, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without delay.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows back by the out-ball detection member 3080 and is used by the out-port sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent the detection from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010.

In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. At the same time, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific prize is won. If the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a cheating is being performed on a specific winning opening. It is possible to notify that cheating is being carried out.

In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by accepting the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, the "ball ejection rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the "ball output rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“global”) hit in the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“global”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, since only the "out ball" is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and the "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "" and "global", the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 can be detected.

[5-9d. Back-to-back production unit]
Next, the back-back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back-back effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-back effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (front of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape with the front view open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-rear movable decoration 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorative bodies 3111 provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, each of which is a surface mount type. The decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) can be light-emittingly decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding to the left from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding to the left from the vicinity of the upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have.

The rear-rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape with the front view open downward, and extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010 and the unit base 3121. The slide shaft 3122, which supports the left slider 3116 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122, and spirals on the outer circumference. It includes a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

Further, in the back-rear movable mechanism 3120, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 on a rotating shaft. The back-rear drive motor 3126, the motor base 3127 in which the back-rear drive motor 3126 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 are rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed into the spiral shaft 3123 and can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and the slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends up and down and can be raised and lowered so that the lower end side can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. It has.

Further, the back / rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back / rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110, a back / rear / lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back / rear. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connection between the front right cover 3138 attached and the back rear drive motor 3126, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 attached to the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137 and the effect drive board 1720. The connection between the back rear left relay board 3139 and the back rear decorative board 3114 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, which is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the effect drive board 1720. It is provided with a back-right relay board 3140 that is relaying.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects to the right from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and the slide guide 3130 is made non-rotatable with respect to the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. In the slide guide 3130, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface. Further, in the slide guide 3130, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

The transmission slider 3131 is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 is movable in the vertical direction only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar protrusion rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. It is provided with a protruding pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower surface of the slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protrusion pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end side of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121, and the lower end side is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a front view shape formed into a triangle in which each apex is R-chamfered. The link member 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long-hole first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis and a long-hole shape extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the apex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b and. In the link member 3133, the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137 between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a columnar shape, forms a flat upper end surface with a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and laterally. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is extended and inclined so as to move to the left with the contact surface 3134b that can be contacted and from the right end of the contact surface 3134b downward. It has a guide surface 3134c to which the locking projection 3116b can come into contact with.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to slidably support the right slider 3117 of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-and-forth effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state of the back-rear effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and is located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back-rear movable decoration body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the 3110 is in contact.

In the normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of the 3132 is such that the link member 3133 acts in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis and the lock member 3134 is urged in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (fault), the rest may prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving (falling) downward. it can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The back-up effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the evacuation position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is lowered. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the lock protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back-rear movable decoration 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward while the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward. The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the clockwise direction. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left via the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b. The lock member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is not detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen back-rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, so that the fall is stopped and the state of the appearance position is reached (see FIG. 141 (c)). In this state of appearance, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with the back-rear movable decoration 3110.

In the back rear movable decorative unit 3100, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has fallen. In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be light-emitting and decorated. The light emitting decoration can entertain the player.

When returning the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back-rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in a plan view). Rotate in the direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, when the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing against, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

Then, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts on the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes the locking member 3134 to move to the left. The lock member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that acts to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking projection 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right by the urging force of the spring 3132 and is in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back-rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the state of the retracted position which is the normal state.

According to the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the state of the retracted position which is invisible from the player side to the state of the appearance position where it can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration after back]
Subsequently, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. 143 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate with broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a). (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-back decorative substrate at the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the back and rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear decorative substrate enlarged together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 155 (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form different from that of (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and FIG. 3 (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from that of (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located in the left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both the left and right ends and the two first decorative portions 3151 in the front view. It has a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decoration departments 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, the second decorative unit 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged in rows on the left and right, so that the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, pachinko A predetermined logo is formed according to the world view of the machine 1 (game board 5). In this way, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the unevenness of the relief shape. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having the above, and a translucent part (area) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (pattern) forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide emitting plate 3113 provided behind the light guide emitting plate 3113. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)") and the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. A flat decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. It includes a slider 3117.

The surface of the surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, such as the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as the first LED and the second LED, and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. Indicates the attributes of the side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the surface electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component may be included). The front surface side notation is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, there is a translucent portion (translucent portion). Since the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having the region) and the transparent portion (region), the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are arranged in this order, the decorative sheet 3112 transmits light. Although there is a property (region), the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing is the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and It is visible through the decorative body 3111, and in a state where the first LED and the second LED are off, it is a region corresponding to a translucent portion (region) and a predetermined paint color. If you can see the above, you can only confirm the existence of the color of the predetermined paint, and it is not possible to determine whether the color of the predetermined paint indicates characters or symbols or the shape. On the other hand, if the area corresponds to the transparent part (area) and the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface indicated by the surface side notation) are determined by the color of the predetermined paint. The attributes of the side electronic components) can be determined.

[5-9d-2. Back and rear movable decorative body decoration body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front surface side and the rear surface side. The decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c, which is shorter than the portion 3111b and projects forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion serving as an outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed at the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in double (two rows). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms and petals smaller than the first decorative protrusion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil pressing region (see FIG. 156 (a))) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a metallic decorative portion 3111d (a shaded portion having a dark shade in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156 (a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at a curved front portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided. It is not provided on the side part of. As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can give a high-class feeling. At the same time, the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d can further emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide emitting plate 3113. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the above is made difficult to see from the front.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. It can be reflected rearward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front side on which the first decorative protrusion 3111a or the like protrudes faces upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate having elasticity on the lower surface side and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) to form the hot plate. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil pressing region FS1 above (front) of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, the portion of the transfer sheet that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111, which is the transfer destination of the metal foil, has elasticity. Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a) is not flat and curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil is in good condition even on a three-dimensionally shaped part such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (foil stamped) with. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative protrusion 3111d by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, whereby the first decorative protrusion is formed. A metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b to form the decorative body 3111.

Alternatively, with the unfinished intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 attached to the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is formed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color. It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil pressing area FS2), and first at the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer the metal foil. Subsequently, the hot plate is made lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b by using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) having a color different from that of the first metal foil. It is lowered to the position (first foil pressing region FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). As a result, the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b form a decorative body 3111 having different colored metal decorative parts 3111d without masking the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film of the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled (laser peeled) by laser light. , The decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface portion in addition to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a.

The decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is recessed from the general surface on the rear surface side toward the front. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the concave portion 3111e equalizes the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to sink marks of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recess 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a described later in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111.

Further, since the rear recess 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is in front of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d described later in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear recess 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the light radiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is emitted from the gap. , The front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e are diffusely reflected, and the portion of the rear recess 3111e becomes bright due to the light from the front. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 constituting the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding from the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. As a result, it is difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front (player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body after back]
The decorative sheet 3112 has a thin sheet shape and is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on the back surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, except for the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a and the first decorative protrusion 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in a double manner of the decorative body 3111. The first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151, and the first (Ii) A second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) which is provided in the double direction of the decorative body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152. It has a diffusion unit 3112d and.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided in a portion of the decorative body 3111 behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Have.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern imitating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is It is said to be the part where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaquely. In the present embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is white or pink (the pink color in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is colored according to the view).). In addition, the ink (paint) used for a pattern or the like may have glitter particles that shine.

The first contour portion 3112a is located behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is made of metal. Since it has a portion having the same color as the decorative portion 3111d (gold in the present embodiment), it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Further, the rear surface side of the first contour portion 3112a is formed to be light gray or white. As a result, the color development of the pattern and hologram on the front side is improved. Further, since the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a can reflect the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the rear and return it to the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation Since the plate 3113 can emit light brighter, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated and decorated brighter. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be radiated and decorated more uniformly.

Further, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, it is flat except for the rear concave portion 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the site. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

As shown in the figure, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed golden metal decorative portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decorative portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 is translucent and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, in the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, from the center to the periphery of the petal. A predetermined color (this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) toward the direction. Multiple dots (pink) are printed. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear to the first light diffusing portion 3112c is made to emit light, the pear-skin-like pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c causes a slight amount of light emission. Various shades will appear, and it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the luminescent decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 is translucent and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been done. The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear to the second light diffusing portion 3112d is made to emit light, it is determined by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters of can be radiated and decorated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light radiated from the front to the portion of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the first light is generated by the light from the front. The diffuser 3112c and the second light diffuser 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 constituting the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d, and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It constitutes the rest of the part 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet as a base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d may be used as a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparently. Since the transmission portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitting from the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. A part of the light radiated forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided only on the front side and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to the surface leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e shines a halo on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). Further, the light radiated from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to the outside through the transmission portion 3112e can illuminate the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the front. Therefore, it is possible to make the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a more visible, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. The decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At that time, by displaying the effect image continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a unified effect, and the game can be played. It is possible to give a person a visual impact and attract attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the player.

In the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transparent portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e in the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from being unsightly. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour portion 3112a is passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of movable decorative body after back]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide emitting plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a extending to the left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and insert the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 that penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LED 3114b is inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the peripheral edge of the 3113c, and an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. ..

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the front view right end of the main body portion 3113a.

The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end projecting rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled on the back rear movable decorative body 3110.

The inner peripheral shape of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is formed to be rectangular. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the decorative portion 3150 having low transparency when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the decorative sheet 3112 in the first light diffusing portion 3112c where the shades of pink are darkened by dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is located on the center side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. The center of the long side with a rectangular inner circumference is provided so as to be located on the center line of the petals.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been done. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LED 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 153 (c). It is formed in a state of being. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 3113a from forming a portion thinner than the thickness thereof, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 is damaged. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light is emitted. A part is reflected straight to the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the first LED accommodating portion. It will be emitted to the inside of 3113c. Then, when the light radiated from one of the four surfaces of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c It reflects inward and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, it radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected at the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side, the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The amount of light in the light will be greatly reduced as compared with before passing through.

For this reason, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light trying to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. At the site where the first LED 3114a is housed, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED house 3113c. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be generated. It is possible to avoid being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 to be light-emitting decorated, and it is possible to reliably emit light-decorate only the desired second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of second decorative portions 3152. ..

More specifically, the operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. A first LED accommodating portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each of the first LED accommodating portions 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to be used. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of the “☆” arranged below the “I” are provided under the “☆”. Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of "☆" is made to emit light, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be luminescently decorated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED accommodating portion 3113c accommodating the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of a part of the "I" is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of the "☆". ing. With this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of the "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is luminescently decorated, "i" is not luminescently decorated. Further, it is possible to reduce (block) the light for illuminating and decorating the "I" from being guided to the "☆" side by the extending portion 3113j. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as "i" or "☆" can be reliably luminescent and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the inner circumference of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is formed in a circular shape. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions imitating the stamens provided around the center in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of the petals. As a result, in each of the five petals, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d are provided one by one on the center line of the petals.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the light is emitted. A part of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3113a so as to diffuse in a fan shape. In the present embodiment, since the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, FIG. 153 (b) shows. As shown, the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d, and the reflection thereof. Light can make the petals brighter and more luminescent.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a square pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect the light radiated in the direction along the plate surface forward within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a and radiate it from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a to the front. The light guide emitting plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the rear portion is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be radiated forward from the substantially entire surface, so that the model can be changed or designed. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiating plate 3113, and it is possible to easily respond to the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed from increasing.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided with a surface on the first LED accommodating portion 3113c side on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. As a result, the area of the light receiving unit 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body 3113a. Can be done. Further, when the legs 3113f are assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C chamfered shape along the side opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface can be made difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the back rear decorative substrate is provided from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated. The heat from the second LED 3114b housed in the LED 3114a and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal influence on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, or the like. Even if it is, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion are compared with the case where the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, it is possible to alleviate a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed therein, and it is possible to suppress the heat effect on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like. Further, in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c which is close to each other and is connected to each other and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c having the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and further alleviate the rapid temperature rise.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to make the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 thinner in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. , A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is suppressed to be affected by the heat. Can be reduced. The gap between the main body 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the first. It is desirable that the distance is within the range of "a distance to the front surface of the LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the light guide radiating plate 3113 guides light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is forward by a reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a. Since it can be radiated to, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion of the main body 3113a where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer circumference of the main body 3113a and the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

[5-9d-5. Back and rear movable decorative board]
On the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a surface mount type and a side view type, a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a surface mount type and a top view type, and a surface mount type 3114g of the connector (1114g of a surface mount type connector is arranged on the right side of the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 in FIG. 155 (a)). The packages of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector 3114g is white (natural color). It is also said to be made of resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor are mounted. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a flat plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (FIG.) in which a predetermined circuit pattern is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the flat plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c. (See 154 etc.), respectively.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c, that is, the first LED 3114a (surface mount type), the second LED 3114b (surface mount type), and the connector 3114 g (surface mount type). A white coating film (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the type) is soldered. In some cases), a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, pads, through holes, lands, etc., on which the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate body 3114c on which the electronic component 3114e (surface mount type) is mounted are soldered, are provided. A white resist layer is formed by the solid white resist in the entire area except. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, although not shown, the surface-side electronic components are placed in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the surface-side electronic component (mounting). The front side notation part indicating the direction) and the model of the front side electronic component is silk-printed on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Is printed by. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 shows the part numbers of the back-side electronic components and the positions where the back-side electronic components are arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic components such as the electronic components 3114e. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating) is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are described above. In addition, it is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, and its light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, on the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a pad on which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, which is the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c. A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A layer is formed, and the surface side notation that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is printed on this solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint, thereby emitting multicolor emission. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation inconspicuous with respect to the white resist when the possible full-color LED is turned off, further, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light). The surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by a combination of a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. ) Can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b with the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to a size that is formed substantially constant. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a size that is constantly formed. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

At the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111a It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom can be luminescently decorated by the first LED 3114a of the portion of the first decoration portion 3151.

Further, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111 are provided. Near the rear of the 3111a, the light is provided so as to irradiate the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. As a result, the first LED 3114a of the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 can illuminate and decorate the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right one by one.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are central portions that imitate cherry blossoms in the first decorative portion 3151, and are circular portions that imitate stamens located on the center lines of the five petals. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. As a result, the second LED 3114b can illuminate and decorate the five parts of the first decoration part 3151 that imitate the stamens of the central part.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, a portion imitating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is displayed from other portions. It can also emit light with high brightness, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. Therefore, in the light emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits light in a point shape by the second LED 3114b can be provided. It is possible to perform a variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

The substrate main body 3114c is a rigid substrate whose thickness is slightly thinner than the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite substrate.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance from the external conductive member (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are earned to discharge static electricity or the like. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to electric discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion inside a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. As a result, a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d to dissipate heat from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be dissipated. , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined size for easily reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the substrate main body 3114c side on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side. It has a light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (a region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. Therefore, as compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the first LED 3114a is mounted. (I) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is such that the angle approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, so that the light emitted toward the substrate body 3114c can be easily reflected forward. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided so that the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f. Since the contact is made, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 is increased to increase the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be brighter and luminescent.

Further, in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the rear end (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). As a result, even if the white coating film (white resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the legs 3113f is worn or rolled up, only the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the insulation property is lowered by the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 to form a flange portion 3115b described later of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the outer periphery of the 3113b is double-enclosed, it becomes difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, and deterioration of the appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted into the gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b from the rear, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, a member provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 by the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 is light-emitting and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is possible to reliably perform a desired light emitting effect on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from seeing the rear through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear movable decoration. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113 on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It is possible to make the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 thinner in the front-rear direction.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits) and resistors as electronic components 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic components 3114e on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, they are black from the front. The electronic component 3114e can be made invisible, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look good. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply a paint of a color such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative base of movable decorative body after the back]
The decorative body base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the front view right end of the covering plate portion 3115a are provided.

The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a is substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the covering plate portion 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to the size of. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the covering plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear and protect the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the front end is forward of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Protrudes so that is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the outside, and improving the appearance. Further, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted in the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long on the left and right, and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. With these plurality of openings 3115c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut the portion of the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided near the outer peripheral edge. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by abutting the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on the front surface thereof. .. As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main action and effect of movable ornaments after back]
Subsequently, the main action and effect of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body are formed. It is assembled by attaching the mounting boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative body base 3115 with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is made relatively thin.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a having a hologram on which a pattern or light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. The first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can give a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. And a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the thickness of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the player does not feel the thinness, and the decoration effect of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 by the decoration portion 3150 is sufficient. It can be demonstrated and entertained by the player.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it becomes a more effective part inside the game board 5. By providing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging the other decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, or a pachinko machine 1 that allows you to enjoy a variety of productions, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be more differentiated. can do.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d makes the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decorative portion 3111d and to give a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the visible appearance position, the high-class decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to strongly make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. , The outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby producing a unified effect. It can be shown to a person, can give the player an impact on the appearance and attract attention, and can entertain a large decoration, and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decorative effect.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 And the second decoration unit 3152 can be individually luminescent and decorated. As a result, it is possible to sequentially illuminate a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, or to illuminate only a specific first decorative portion 3151 or second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately luminescent decoration of the first decorative section 3151 and the plurality of second decorative sections 3152, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emitting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. it can.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a after irradiating light in a direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Since the light is radiated forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above to radiate and decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the light from the first LED is radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. The distance to can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and uniformly luminescently decorated, and the player can be entertained by the luminescent decoration having a good appearance. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. It can be made thinner, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b as a top-view type, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative portion 3150). ), It is possible to add a portion that emits light with high brightness in a dot shape to the portion that is light-emitting decorated in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission effect of the second LED 3114b can be sharpened, it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the gaming state, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the side view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide emitting plate 3113, and receives light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to the desired portion to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be light-emitting and decorated more brightly. The high LED decoration can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear into the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodating portion 3113d, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is backed to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since a gap is formed in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. The gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "the substrate". It is desirable that the distance is within the range of "the distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. Since the portion 3115c is provided, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, The heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be dissipated to suppress the temperature rise of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

A temperature sensor is provided on the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. May be made to increase the frequency (probability) of execution. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down to ventilate the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 to flow to the back rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance inside the SL. Even with this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance can be lengthened, the insulation property against static electricity and other discharges and short circuits can be enhanced, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharges and the like can be suppressed.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is larger than that in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be made smaller, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the drive of the rear-rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle is moved up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are made of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, their surfaces are formed. It is difficult for the static electricity accumulated in the whole to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. However, as described above, the metal decorative portion 3111d Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed both with a light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitting and decorated.

When the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative portion 3111d to the GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of the back-back movable ornament]
Next, with respect to the back-rear movable decoration 3160, the back-rear movable decoration 3170, the back-rear movable decoration 3180, and the like of the embodiment different from the back-rear movable decoration 3110, mainly referring to FIG. 157. This will be described in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the configuration of the back-rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the back-rear movable decoration of FIG. 142, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the decorative body in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 157 (a), the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided behind the decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiating light in a direction along the front surface, and a light guide radiation plate. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3164 in which a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate the inside of the 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. It has a decorative portion 3161c and. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (picture) is printed. In the decorative sheet 3162, a portion having low transparency in decoration is located at a portion in front of the LED3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b in the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LED3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surfaces provided. It has a reflecting portion 3163b and. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a forward, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. A plurality of side view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide emitting plate 3163, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-back decorative substrate 3164 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state, the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. Is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is reduced. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces from the outside. It looks good.

In this back-rear movable decorative body 3160, since the flange portion 3161b extends rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 to decorate the back-rear decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. The back-rear movable decorative body 3160 may be provided with a decorative body base that covers the back side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment has the outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3171 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (b). A flat plate-shaped interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface forward. The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface to irradiate the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 has a main body portion 3171a that is frame-shaped and extends forward and backward, a support portion 3171b that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the tablet. The distance from the front end of the main body 3171a to the front surface of the support 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The interior decoration body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the exterior decoration body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED accommodating portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. A plurality of reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape around a predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3173a forward. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide emitting plate 3173, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-back decorative substrate 3174 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. Are substantially in agreement with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a light guide radiating plate 3173 and a back-rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the light guide radiating plate 3173 is placed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is reduced. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. It makes it difficult to see and makes it look good.

Since the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body portion 3171a The creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment has the outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3181 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (c). A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside) and a back-rear decorative substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a that can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface. And have.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 covers the entire surface of the flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, the flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3181a, and the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a metal decorative portion 3181c that covers it. The metal decorative portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decorative body 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer circumference is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3182a. It has a flange portion 3182b extending to the surface. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The outer shape of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to be smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b in the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is the outer decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. In other words, the outer circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 hides the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 from the outside.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3180 is provided with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182. Since the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182, the metal decoration portion 3181c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 (copper) The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the internal decorative body 3182. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and are located from the front. It is visible through a transparent game panel 1100, a front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the lower left production unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left rotating decoration 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back left decorative body 3201 provided behind the lower back left rotating decoration 3201. A lower left decorative substrate provided behind the 3202 and the lower left decorative body 3202, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It is provided behind the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower left decorative board 3203, and the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and the back lower left decorative body 3202 is attached, and the back lower left decorative body 3202 is attached. It is equipped with a unit base 3204, which is attached to the lower end of the left side of the.

Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205, which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the lower back left drive motor 3205. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207, which are meshed with the drive gear 3206 and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and the second transmission gear 3208 are meshed with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3209 and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower counterclockwise rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decorative body 3202 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 on the front and back, and rotating the petals on the rear side so as to be located between the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

The lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the lower back left rotation In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3201 and the lower left decorative body 3202, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom left rotation Through the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 arranged behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The lower left decorative substrate 3203 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) on the rear surface thereof to detect the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that projects forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back lower left drive motor 3205, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to cause the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202. It can be luminescent and decorated.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the front side electronic parts such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower left decorative board 3203, and the surface side electronic parts such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic parts are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be included). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the transparent lower back left decorative body Since 3202 and the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing is the lower back left decorative substrate 3202, Then, it is visible through the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are used according to the predetermined paint color. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation part) can be discriminated.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white) in each package, and the connector is a connector. The housing is made of white resin (also called a natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 has a transparent lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 provided behind the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. A lower right decorative substrate provided behind the 3252 and the lower right decorative body 3252, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It is provided behind the 3253 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the lower right decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached and the lower right decorative body 3252 is attached. It is provided with a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the.

Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower right drive motor 3255, which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the lower right drive motor 3255. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 and the drive gear 3256 are meshed with the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 and the first transmission gear 3257 which are rotatably attached to the unit base 3254. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and a second transmission gear 3258 meshing with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. It includes a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3259 and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the lower right decorative body 3252.

The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right decorative body 3252 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

The lower back right decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the lower back right decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of ridges extending in a short linear direction in a random direction, and the lower back right rotation In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom right rotation is performed. Through the decorative body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 arranged behind the lower right decorative body 3252 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The lower right decorative substrate 3253 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that projects forward and is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253. In the state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotation decoration body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can emit and decorate the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower right rotating decorative body 3251, the transparent lower right decorative body is formed. Since the 3252 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing is the lower right decorative body 3252. Then, it is visible through the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are used according to the predetermined paint color. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the surface-side electronic component indicated by the surface-side notation) can be determined.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are each package made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector is the same. The housing is made of white resin (also called a natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

On the surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower right decorative board 3253, a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), connectors (surface mount type), lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and lower back A white coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid white") formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the above. Pads and throughs to which the lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253. A white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area excluding holes, lands, and the like. Further, although not shown, the surface side (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower right decorative board 3253 is located near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front side. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the component number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the surface-side electronic component. (Mounting direction), the model of the electronic component on the front side may be included.) The notation on the front side is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is applied on a solid white resist. It is printed by silk printing. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 is located near the electronic components on the back surface such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component The back side notation, which indicates the mounting direction (mounting direction) and the model of the electronic component on the back side, is a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable than white. It is printed on top by silk printing.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, the entire surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 excluding a plurality of LEDs, pads to which connectors are soldered, through holes, lands, etc. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution, and further, this solid is formed. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors on a painted white resist is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that it is white when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation part inconspicuous with respect to the resist, in addition, when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), it is solidly painted with high reflectance. The surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 by a combination of a white resist and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint having a white reflectance very close to that of white. The reflectance of the LED can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

[5-9f. Under the back production unit]
Subsequently, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 shows the back lower middle elevating mechanism of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 shows the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit disassembled from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the raising and lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle raising and lowering mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit, which is related to the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decorative body, and FIG. 168 (b) is the back lower middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the under-back middle decoration unit in the under-back middle effect unit from the front.

The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-back middle effect unit 3300 has a under-back middle decoration unit 3320 having a transparent under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and an under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 that raises and lowers the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320. Elevating mechanism 3350 and.

The under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle effect unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. The lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 has six number decorations formed in relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at every 60 degree angle in the clockwise direction around the center. It is placed on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 described later, a first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323. It has a recess 3311 capable of accommodating.

The lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is transparently formed, and the outer peripheral portion of each of the six number decorations protrudes forward, and a rib portion connecting the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state is provided. It is formed so as to project forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and the rib portion. In other words, a metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion on which the metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed are integrally molded with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, but the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion May be formed separately from the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, a metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion, respectively.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3310a can give a high-class feeling, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The metal decorative portion 3310a is formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion protruding from the front surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the metal decorative portion 3310a is completely formed on the side surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Absent. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is further increased by at least the length of the side surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and damaging the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. Therefore, the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be improved.

As described above, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is formed with a rib portion that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state so as to project forward. In the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the rib portion is projected from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front surface, the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the lower back middle. Along with being transparently formed up to the trailing edge of the side surface of the rotating ornament 3310, a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, the rib portion is projected from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. A satin-skin-like pattern is formed by a plurality of ridges extending in a random direction in a short linear manner extending to the trailing edge of the side surface of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, and the rib portion is a lower back middle rotation decoration. The shade becomes darker from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding to the front surface of the body 3310 toward the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the side trailing edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so as to be (the one with low transparency). Is given by printing.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and an inner lens (diffusing lens). ) 3322, and the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the lower back, in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a attached to an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and projecting rearward in a columnar shape, and a shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. The portion 3323a has a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and includes a rotation base 3324 attached to the rear side of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and is arranged behind the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. The front surface and the back surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), instead of the front surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. The back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has a region detection piece 3325 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extending in a semi-arc on the same axis as the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 above, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating circular opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent under-back middle decoration 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer circumference with the center of the circular opening 3328a as the center point, and the rear of the under-back middle decoration 3328. 3329, the second decorative substrate in the lower back, and the second decorative substrate in the lower back, in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A plurality of area identification sensors 3330 (lead type) mounted on the front surface of the 3329 and capable of detecting the area detection piece 3325, and a position detection piece 3326 mounted on the front surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. It is equipped with a detectable position identification sensor 3331 (lead type).

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached and the back lower middle decorative body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332 is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft projects forward, and the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 is attached to the rotation shaft of the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. The elevating slider 3336 is slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360 of the above.

The inner lens (diffuse lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 are located between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state. , It is in a state of being housed in the recess 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 or the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the portion of the number decoration (relief) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotary gear 3327 and projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 has a number of "3", "4", and "5" between the numerical decorations of "2" and "3" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. Through the number decoration, between the number decorations of "5" and "6", it is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis.

Each of the plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) in the circumferential direction so that each position detection piece 3326 is located at the center of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the position detection piece 3326. There is an interval of 2 x β degrees (θ degree-α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) with the position detection piece 3326 about the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). ..

A plurality of (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310. The three region identification sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area identification sensors 3330 are of "3", "4", and "5" in a state where the decoration of "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the number decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

The position identification sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 from the first region identification sensor 3330a. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that projects rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a columnar shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333, thereby rotating the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can be done. Further, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, respectively, so that the back lower middle decorative body 3310 emits light. And the lower back middle decorative body 3328 can be light-emitting decorated.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, and the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the inner lens (diffusing lens) is behind the transparent rotating decorative body 3310 under the back. ) 3321 and the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back are arranged in order, so that the color of the predetermined paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is the inner lens. It is visible through the (diffuse lens) 3321 and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, a predetermined paint is used. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation) can be identified by the color of.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered is white with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, although not shown, the component numbers and surfaces of the surface-side electronic components are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where side electronic components are placed (Furthermore, shape of surface-side electronic components, size of surface-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of surface-side electronic components, surface side The front side notation part indicating the model of the electronic component may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. .. On the back surface (rear surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating (there is)) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, the area identification sensor 3330, the part number of the surface side electronic component such as the position identification sensor 3331, and the surface side electronic component are arranged. Attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position to be mounted (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation portion indicating) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the transparent under-back middle decorative body 3328 is displayed. Since the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is arranged behind the back, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is in the lower back. It is visible through the decorative body 3328, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off and a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, a predetermined paint color) are used according to the predetermined paint color. The attributes of the surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation section) can be determined.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are made of resin in which each package is white (a color recognized to be the same color as white). It has become.

On the surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, a pad to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a region identification sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position identification sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered. A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Layers are formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, a pad for which an area identification sensor 3330 (lead type), a position identification sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area excluding through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, although not shown, the component numbers and surfaces of the front surface electronic components are located in the vicinity of the surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the surface side. The front side notation part indicating the model of the electronic component may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. .. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, although not shown, the part numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating (there is)) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs and the like are soldered are provided on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area except for the above area. , The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors on this solid white resist is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation less noticeable with respect to the white resist at times, it is also solid with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light). By combining the painted white resist and the front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the white reflectance, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative in the lower back The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends are attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the unit base 3351 and the unit base 3351. The flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352, which is mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352, which is mounted on the rotation shaft and partly faces the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354, which meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, meshes with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer circumference of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that projects forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity, and includes an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached to the upper center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3351.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 on the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The first slit 3357a extending to the first slit 3357a and the second slit 3357b which extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. An elevating arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof and a lower back middle elevating detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided, and the unit base 3351 is provided. It is provided with a back lower middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and an elevating and lowering in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, the gear cover 3361 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front). It is provided with a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction with respect to sight).

The lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit base 3351. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached so that the base end side is on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 and at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The tip side of the elevating arm 3357 extends to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, the area identification sensor 3330, the position identification sensor 3331, the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3331, and the back lower middle elevating drive motor. The connection between the 3352, the lower back middle lift detection sensor 3358a, and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the elevating arm 3357 can be rotated by the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 via the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position in which the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved most downward. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 in the under-back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located at the tip end side below the base end side, and the tip detection piece 3357c moves up and down under the back-bottom middle of the back-bottom middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution and near the end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. .. More specifically, a normal of the drive pin 3356b passing through the contact point with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowering position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the urging force of the spring 3362, the elevating cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end end side of the first slit 3357a. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving upward.

In the normal state of the under-back middle effect unit 3300, among the plurality of number decorations in the under-back middle rotating decoration 3310, the number decoration located at the uppermost side is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in the normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost position is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is located behind the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and in the lower middle. (Ii) By emitting light from the LED of the decorative substrate 3329, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the rotating decoration under the back, the first starting port 2002 formed of the transparent member can also be made to emit light (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are used. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm. The 3357 will rotate clockwise around the base end side so that the tip side moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted in the second slit 3357b on the tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The decorative body unit 3320 under the back is moved upward via the elevating pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the proximal end side. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, a urging force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, so that the urging force assists the upward movement of the decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back, and is in the lower back. The load applied to the elevating drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is driven. The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is in the raised position where it has moved most upward.

In the state where the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the first slit 3357a in the drive pin 3356b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the line of force of the force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the ascending position, and the lower back middle decoration unit. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In the state where the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3356b comes into contact with the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the decorative body unit 3320 under the back, the elevating cam gear 3356 is clocked by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end end side of the first slit 3357a. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

In the state where the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, most of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a). B is located above the bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is forward (player). All numerical decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 201).

When returning the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 from the raised position to the lower position, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lifting arm 3357 Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the ascending position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle elevating detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle elevating drive motor 3352. , The center that prevents the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) in the lowered position (furthermore, the game ball B that rolls in the game area 5a) in the normal state. The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where it overlaps when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

The under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the under-back middle decoration unit 3320, and thereby, the under-back middle rotation decoration unit 3310 via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated around an axis in the front-back direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 at any position such as a lowering position or an ascending position of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320.

In the under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality of (here, 6) numerical decorations in the under-back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located directly above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in a state where the numerical decoration of "1" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is specified as the first area. The sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c are detected by the three area identification sensors 3330, and a plurality of (here, 6) position detection pieces 3326 are detected by the position identification sensor 3331. Is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area identification sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 will be described. In the state where the number decoration of "1" is set to the stop position, as described above, the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are the region detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the numerical decoration of "1" is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

When the first region identification sensor 3330a and the second region identification sensor 3330b detect and the third region identification sensor 3330c does not detect, the numerical decoration of "2" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a detects and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification sensor 3330c do not detect, the numerical decoration of "3" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are not detected, the numerical decoration of "4" is in the range of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located inside.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a and the second region identification sensor 3330b are not detected and the third region identification sensor 3330c is detected, the numerical decoration of "5" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a is not detected and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the number decoration of "6" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, by combining the detection / non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330 of the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, any numerical decoration can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located in the including stop area.

Since the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area identification sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the under-back middle rotation drive is driven. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area identification sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position identification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the desired numerical decoration at the stop position, the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 rotates and the three area identification sensors 3330 stop at the desired stop position. In the combination that satisfies the position, the position identification sensor 3331 is displaced in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first region identification sensor 3330a, so that the position identification sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, and further rotates, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. The origin is the angle at which the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. Then, when it is rotated by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the under-back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to obtain a desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 has been described by an angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 made of a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is set to 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates 13 steps further in a state where the three area identification sensors 3330 satisfy the desired stop positions, the position detection piece 3326 Apart from the position identification sensor 3331, the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. When the position identification sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps from the non-detected angle, the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to stop the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

Next, the light emitting decoration in the underside middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 has a back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 equipped with a plurality of LEDs for light emitting and decorating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. It includes a decorative substrate 3322 and a second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs of the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numerical decorations in the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, and each of the numerical decorations can be independently luminescently decorated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are located behind the portion outside the plurality of numerical decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and are outside the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be luminescently decorated.

As described above, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotation position of the under-back middle rotating decoration 3310 to some extent by the three area identification sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection of the area identification sensor 3330. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the number decorations are rotated in a state in which only specific numerical decorations are luminescent or decorated in different colors. It is possible to show the player a production that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Further, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B wins a prize in the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is emitted (or, one emission mode is determined from a plurality of light emitting modes and the light is emitted. ) May be made.

As described above, according to the under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions detects an area having a length over three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and a three-region identification sensor 3330 for detecting the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, all the area identification sensors 3330 are not temporarily undetected, and the area detection piece 3325 is detected. By combining the area identification sensor 3330, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, the lower back middle rotation is performed by detecting the area detection piece 3325 by the three area identification sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be prevented. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back lower middle rotating ornament 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by reducing the number as much as possible.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game is played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, can strongly attract the player's attention, and can rotate the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310 is supposed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numerical decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel that rotates and stops at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the rotating ornament 3310 under the back is provided. It can be entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position , The number of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is the same as that of the stop position, the ability (grasp of the stop position) by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 is possible. It can be made larger, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together) with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of the elevating decorative body unit, and the rotating mechanism of a back-up rear rotation decorative body from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

The back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back-up effect unit 3400 has a transparent back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back-up front rotation decoration body. A transparent back-up front decoration body 3421 extending to the left and right through which the shaft shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter, "surface (mounting)" provided behind the back-up front decoration body 3421. A surface) ”is sometimes described as a back-up front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a back-up front decorative board 3422 provided behind the back-up front decorative board 3422 and on the front surface. Is attached and includes a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotating ornament 3410.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 is between the rear cover 3424 which is attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotation axis is forward on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotating shaft of the back-up front rotary drive motor 3425 and the back-up front rotary drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, and the drive gear 3426 mesh with each other. A rotary gear 3427 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back upper front decorative substrate 3422. It is equipped with a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) that is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a back-up lift drive motor 3492 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back-up lift drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the rear cover 3424 penetrate from the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a. With a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a columnar shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a, the elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. , The tip of the back-up front decoration board 3422, which is attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decoration board 3422 and is provided with the back-up lift detection sensor 3432 (lead type) capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431, and the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440. The back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around the axis in the front-rear direction so that the side moves up and down by the rotation of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 A spring 3433 that urges the elevating decoration unit 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward, and a spring 3433 that is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 to move upward of the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450. It is provided with a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 that regulates the movement of the gear.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is a transparent shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent back-up rear rotation decoration 3440. The back surface is provided behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The upper rear decorative substrate 3452 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 are mounted on the front surface from the rear of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3423, and the shaft of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440. It includes an elevating unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the above, the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 that meshes with the drive gear 3455 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the first transmission gear 3456. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457, which is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, which is meshed with the second transmission gear 3457. It includes a spur gear-shaped rotary gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. It includes a 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 penetrates the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-up front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear It extends to the space between the cover 3424. The back-up front decoration body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-top front rotation decoration body 3410 stacked in the center in the left-right direction, and the petals on the rear side are between the petals on the front side. It has a decoration shaped like it is rotated so that it is located in.

The back-up front decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back-up front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can be light-emittingly decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 is formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front The concept of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is such that in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3421, the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery. That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) are printed, and the back top front of the back top front decoration 3421 is printed. Pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) so that the shades are constant in the region excluding the region corresponding to the rotating decoration body 3410 (so that the shades are lighter and more transparent than the shades at the periphery of the petals). ) (That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed, but the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 And through the back-up front decoration 3421 (even at the periphery of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decoration 3422 arranged behind the back-up front decoration 3421 can be visually recognized. ing.

It should be noted that the attribute of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the surface side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back surface front decorative substrate 3422 and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the transparent back-up front decorative body 3421, Since the back-up front decorative substrates 3422 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 by silk printing is passed through the back-up front decorative body 3421. Or, when the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the components can be visually recognized via the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation) can be identified by the color of a predetermined paint.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back side are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white) in each package. ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a back surface rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back surface elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the back surface front decorative substrate 3422. The entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. is white due to a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. The resist layer of is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a back surface rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back surface elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the back surface front decorative substrate 3422. A white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, although not shown, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the back surface front decorative substrate 3422 is an area indicating the part number of the back surface side electronic component and the position where the back surface side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, which are attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has an arc shape in which a columnar support shaft 3424a projecting rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted coaxially with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 is detected by the backside rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3431, the gear portion 3431a is formed in a semicircular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion protruding outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear side. The back-up rear decoration body 3451 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It has a decoration with a shape that makes it look like it was made.

The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 can illuminate the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and back-upper decoration body 3451 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3451 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-up and back-rotating decorations are formed in a satin-like pattern. In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but they rotate after the back. Through the decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 arranged behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up and rear-decorative substrate 3452 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3440, a transparent back-up and rear-decorative body is used. Since the 3451 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 by silk printing is the back-up rear decorative body 3451. When the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized through, or through the back-up rear decoration body 3451 and the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation) can be identified by the color of a predetermined paint.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface are each package made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector is a connector. The housing is made of white resin (also called a natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

A white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface, except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 3452, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electronic components are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components of the plurality of LEDs mounted. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the surface side electronic component The front side notation part indicating (may include a model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 has a part number of the back-side electronic component, an area indicating a position where the back-side electronic component is arranged, and the like in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component of the connector. Attributes of the back side electronic component (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). The notation on the back side indicating is printed with a yellow paint, which is a light color that is less noticeable than white, on a solid white resist by silk printing.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a, which penetrate the base end side (right end side in the front view) and the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. It has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating a cherry blossom on the front surface.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, on the surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs and the like are soldered is covered. , A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution, and further, this solid coating is further formed. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors on the white resist is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is white when it is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation less noticeable to the resist, it is also a solid white with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light). On the front surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, depending on the combination of the resist and the front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint having a white reflectance very close to the white color. The reflectance can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

Next, the movements of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back-up elevating decoration body unit 3450 in the back-up effect unit 3400 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3400, under normal conditions, the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back side. The upper front rotating ornament 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back-up evacuation decoration unit 3450 provided with the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 on the tip side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the whole excluding the tip side is It is located behind the front decorative body 3421 on the back side and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). The portion of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back-up front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution thereof, and is located near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is acting, the force of the force is applied. Since the lines of force pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decorative unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3492 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-up lift drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves to the left and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, and at the same time. Due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above the straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. It slides in the slit 3453b in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b, the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 stops the rotation of the motor gear 3430, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b Revolution stops.

As a result, the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the tip side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is moved. , It is in the state of the appearance position moved below the front decoration body 3421 on the back side (see FIG. 176 (b)). In the state of this appearance position, the tip side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is located below the back-up front decorative body 3421, so that the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. It will be in a possible state.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to further rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the line of force of the force hits the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the elevating decorative body unit 3450 on the back side moves counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. The weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is clocked by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

When the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 is visible from the front, if the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. ..

When returning the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is moved up and down by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip side of the back-up evacuation decorative unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, the back-up evacuation decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429. It can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and raises and lowers the back-up. The load applied to the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back-up effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment has the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 provided behind the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be light-emitting and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be light-emittingly decorated.

At this time, in a state where the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back-up rear decoration substrate 3452 is made to emit light, so that the back-up rear rotation decoration is luminescent. The body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative unit of the back rear left effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 disassembles the back rear left decorative unit of the back rear left effect unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-back left effect unit 3500 has a transparent back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-back-left decoration that rotatably supports the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. It includes a body unit 3520 and a back rear left drive unit 3550 that is mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The back-back left rotation decoration unit 3510 of the back-back left production unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back-back counterclockwise rotation decoration body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 includes a transparent back-rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the transparent back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 penetrates in the center, and a back. The rear left decorative substrate 3522, which is provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), and the back rear left decorative substrate 3522. A front cover 3523 and a front cover 3523 that are mounted from the rear of the left decorative substrate 3522 to the rear side of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and rotatably support the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510. It is equipped with a movable base 3524 which is mounted on the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably mounted on the back rear left drive unit 3550.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, which are attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotating shaft of the counterclockwise rotary drive motor 3525 and a flat gear 3526 that meshes with the drive gear 3526 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotary decorative body 3510. It includes a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

In the back-back left decoration unit 3520, the back-back left decoration unit 3521 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-back left rotation decoration 3510, which are stacked back and forth, and the petals on the rear side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it is rotated so that it is located between. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-back left decorative body 3521 are formed transparently and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510 and the back-back left-handed decorative body 3521 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 is formed. In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back side rotates counterclockwise. Through the decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 arranged behind the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-left decorative substrate 3522 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510, the transparent back-rear left decorative body 3521, Since the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 by silk printing is the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back. It is visible through the rear left rotation decorative body 3510, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are used according to the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation part) can be discriminated.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is provided by a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, the component numbers of the front surface electronic components and the surface electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 can be maintained by combining with the front-side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending in a quadrangular shape from the upper left to the upper side of the portion are combined. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a that penetrates back and forth on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b that projects forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 is inserted with the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 back and forth via the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back rear left decorative unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and installed in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and rotating to the upper part of the front surface of the unit cover 3553. A spur gear-shaped motor gear attached to the rotating shafts of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 whose shafts are mounted so as to project between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553. It is equipped with 3555.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 has a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. The elevating cam gear 3557 and the elevating cam gear having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the front outer circumference of the gear portion 3557a. The drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending to the left and right, and the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 extending to the left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted, and includes a link member 3558 which is slidably attached vertically between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The back rear left relay board 3651 attached to the front surface of the 3553 and the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 (lead) attached to the rear surface of the back rear left relay board 3651 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557. Type) and.

A white resist liquid is applied to the front surface and the rear surface of the back rear left relay board 3651 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 are soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear left relay board 3651, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear left relay board 3651, the part numbers of the back-side electronic components and the back-side electronic components are located near the back-side electronic components such as the connector and the back-rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component The notation on the back side indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. The back rear left relay board 3651 is not a decorative board, and although the LED is not mounted on it, it is a board provided in the game board 5, so that the front and rear surfaces of the back rear left relay board 3651 are reflectors (reflectors). By functioning as a plate), when the light emitted by the LED mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has substantially the same length as the unit base 3552 and extends vertically, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 with the drive pin 3557b penetrating the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and a first slit 3558a is provided near the upper end and a second slit 3558b is provided at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3559 is attached to the link member 3558, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3651 relays the connection between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-back left effect unit 3500 is a back-back left decorative body in which the back-back left rotating decoration body 3510 is provided on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a). The unit 3520 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700, and cannot be seen from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back front left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700, and the back rear left elevating drive motor. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). The portion of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 facing the front is covered by a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 It is located near the left end of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left lift drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lift cam gear 3557, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the elevating cam gear 3557 tends to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, so that the drive pin 3557b Can not revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right in the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operating pin 3524b slides to the right in the second slit 3558b, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the link member 3558 to move upward, reducing the load applied to the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554.

In this way, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a, so that the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving upward, the back-back left-handed decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700, and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides to the left in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184 (c). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force that causes the back rear left decorative unit 3520 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force causes the movable base. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b of the 3524, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 also does not rotate, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the rear left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b is brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, and the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b, the second The elevating cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is moved via the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is reversed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557 by rotating in the direction of, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves downward as the link member 3558 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, thereby emitting light decoration. The back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back-back left decoration body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 shows the back-rear right effect unit disassembled from the back and rear right. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-back-right effect unit 3600 has a transparent back-back-right rotating decoration 3610 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-back-right decoration that rotatably supports the back-back right-rotating decoration 3610 on the lower end side. It includes a body unit 3620 and a back-rear right drive unit 3650 that is mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 of the back-back right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back-back clockwise rotating ornament 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a transparent back rear right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft shaft 3610a of the transparent back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a back rear right decorative body 3621. A rear right decorative substrate 3622, which is provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), and a back rear right decorative substrate 3622. A front cover 3623 and a front cover 3623 that are attached from the rear of the right decorative substrate 3622 to the rear side of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and rotatably support the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610. It is provided with a movable base 3624, which is attached to the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the back rear right drive unit 3650.

Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotating shaft of the right-handed rotary drive motor 3625 and a flat gear 3626 that meshes with the drive gear 3626 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear right-handed decorative body 3610. It includes a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

The back rear right decorative body 3621 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 stacked back and forth, and the petals on the rear side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it is rotated so that it is located between. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative substrate 3622 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-back right-handed decorative body 3610 and the back-back right decorative body 3621 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the back-back right-handed decorative body 3610 and the back-back-right decorative body 3621 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-back right-handed decorative body 3621 rotates right-back after the back. In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but they rotate clockwise after the back. Through the decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 arranged behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back-back right decorative substrate 3622 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610, the transparent back-back right decorative body 3621, Since the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 is arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 by silk printing is the back rear right decorative body 3621 and the back. It is visible through the rear right-handed decorative body 3610, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are used according to the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the surface-side electronic component indicated by the surface-side notation portion) can be determined.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 are each made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the right decorative substrate 3622, the white resist layer is made of solid white resist in the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622, although not shown, the part numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 in the entire area excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance It is possible to maintain a high reflectance on the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 by combining with the front-side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending in a quadrangular shape from the upper right to the upper side of the portion are combined. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangular shape. The front cover 3623 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a that penetrates back and forth on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b that projects forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 is inserted with the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 moves the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 back and forth via the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the back rear right drive unit 3650 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the back rear right decorative unit 3620. , The vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and installed in the back box 3010, the vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and the unit cover. It is attached to the rotating shafts of the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, which are attached to the upper front surface of the 3653 so that the rotating shaft projects between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3657a, and the front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending to the left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b, which extends below the 3658a to the left and right and into which the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is slidably inserted, the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is provided with a link member 3658, which is slidably attached to and from the link member 3658.

Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3569 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. The back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the 3653 and the back rear right relay board 3662 attached to the rear surface of the back rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 (lead). A type) and a lower base 3663, which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

A white resist liquid is applied to the front surface and the rear surface of the back rear right relay board 3661 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 are soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-right relay board 3661, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, although not shown, the part numbers of the back rear side electronic components and the back surface are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side The notation on the back side indicating the model of the electronic component may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. .. The back rear right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board, and although the LED is not mounted, it is a board provided in the game board 5, so that the front and rear surfaces of the back rear right relay board 3661 are reflectors (reflectors). By functioning as a plate), when the light emitted by the LED mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3651a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663) with substantially the same length, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and a first slit 3658a is provided near the upper end and a second slit 3658b is provided at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3659 is attached to the link member 3658, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decorative board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the back-back right effect unit 3600 is a back-back right decoration body provided with a back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a). The unit 3620 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right effect unit 3800, and cannot be seen from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). It is invisible from.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 It is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the direction of upward movement by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is formed. Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3569 does not act on the back-rear right evacuation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, so that the drive pin 3657b Can not revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the elevating cam gear 3657 The drive pin 3657b of the above revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left in the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides to the left in the second slit 3658b, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 retracts. It will rotate in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3569 assists the link member 3658 to move upward, reducing the load applied to the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654.

In this way, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. It will move upward, and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610 will move to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800, and will be visible from the front (player side).

In the back-rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back-rear right decorative unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted state). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back-right elevating drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the back-rear right decorative unit 3620 is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the rear right decorative unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force moves. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate either, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b is brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. Due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved via the rotary gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is reversed by the back rear right evacuation drive motor 3654. By rotating in the direction of, the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 moves downward as the link member 3658 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. The back-back right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back-back right decoration body 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Subsequently, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative unit in the back front left effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 disassembles one back front left decorative unit in the back front left effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, in order from the top, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A, the second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decorative unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 has a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. The shape of the shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. It includes a shutter unit 3730 and.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided behind the transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front left decorative body 3713. The back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)") and the back front left decorative board 3714 are covered from the rear. It is provided with a rear cover 3715 which is attached to the front cover 3711 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left effect unit 3500.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front left drive solenoid 3717. The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger in the left drive solenoid 3717 and the support plate 3716 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, and the transmission member 3718 is moved forward and backward by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. It includes a rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction to open and close the shutter unit 3730 by rotating the link member 3719.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the front cover 3711. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3711, but is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and the molded portion and the front cover are molded separately. It may be configured to assemble with 3711.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can give a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3711 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the front cover 3711 can be further emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decorative portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711, so that the metal decorative portion 3711a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and damaging the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be improved.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left side after projecting from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3734 that extends in a columnar direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height in which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

The shutter member 3731 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3733 by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the open / close slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 has characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The pattern is given. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing the light from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and behind the back front left decorative body 3713. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front left decorative board 3714. The front surface and the back surface of the back front left decorative body 3713 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the back front left decorative body 3713 may be replaced with a lens cut. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

When the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front left decorative body 3713 is transparently formed, the surface (mounting) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 arranged behind the back front left decorative body 3713 through the back front left decorative body 3713. The surface) can be visually recognized.

It should be noted that the attribute of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front surface side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is arranged behind the transparent back front left decorative body 3713. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 by silk printing is passed through the back front left decorative body 3713. If the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side notation portion) are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. The attributes of the surface-side electronic components shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, a white resist is applied with a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, although not shown, the component numbers of the surface side electronic components and the surface side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be maintained by combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the right. In the support plate 3716, a portion bent to the right on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a columnar shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3719 can be rotated about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3720 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the normal state, the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 is in a state where the plate surface faces forward, and there are a plurality of them. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

When the opening / closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crankshaft 3734 is located below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is turned up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed to the back front left decoration body 3713. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative substrate 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are emitted. Then, the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are made to emit light, so that the back front left decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decorative unit units 3710A, a second back front left decorative unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative unit 3710C. Since the shutter unit 3730 can be opened and closed independently and the 3710 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decoration units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Subsequently, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative unit in the back front right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 disassembles one back front right decorative unit in the back front right effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back front right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decoration body 3040. .. The back front right production unit 3800 has three back front right decoration units, in order from the top, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A, the second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. The shape of the shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. It is equipped with a shutter unit 3830.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is provided behind the transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 and the back front right decorative body 3813. The back front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)") and the back front right decorative board 3814 are covered from the rear. It includes a rear cover 3815 that is attached to the front cover 3811 and is attached to the front of the back rear right effect unit 3600.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and the support plate 3816 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, and the transmission member 3818 is moved forward and backward by the back front right drive solenoid 3817. It includes a rotating link member 3819 and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction to open / close the shutter unit 3830 by rotating the link member 3819.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the front cover 3811. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3811, but it is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and the molded portion and the front cover are molded separately. It may be configured to assemble with 3811.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can give a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3811 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the front cover 3811 can be further emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decorative portion 3811a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811, so that the metal decorative portion 3811a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 and damaging the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be improved.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a columnar shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left-right direction, and a right side after projecting from the tip of the right shaft part 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3834 that extends in a columnar direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height in which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

The shutter member 3831 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3833 by the shaft portion 3833 being rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the open / close slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 has characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The pattern is given. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing the light from the LED of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The surface of the back front right decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and behind the back front right decorative body 3813. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front right decorative substrate 3814. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the back front right decorative body 3813 (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface may be replaced with the front front right decorative body 3813. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front right decorative body 3813 is transparently formed, the surface (mounting) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 arranged behind the back front right decorative body 3813 through the back front right decorative body 3813. The surface) can be visually recognized.

The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The front right decorative substrate 3814 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decorative body 3813. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by silk printing is passed through the back front right decorative body 3813. If the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side notation portion) are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. The attributes of the surface-side electronic components shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814, a white resist is applied with a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, although not shown, the component numbers of the surface side electronic components and the surface side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be maintained by combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the left. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3820 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state in which the plate surface faces forward, and a plurality of the shutter units 3800 are present. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

By moving the opening / closing slider 3820 downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crankshaft 3834 is located below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3830. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative substrate 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are emitted. Then, the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are made to emit light, so that the back front right decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decorative body units 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. Since the shutter unit 3830 can be opened and closed independently and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effect (movable effect) on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit is moved from a lower position to an ascending position. FIG. 202 shows the back-up rear rotation decoration of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back left rotation decoration of the back-up left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-back right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back-right rotation decoration body of the production unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-rear-left effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear-right effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

FIG. 205 shows the back-back movable decorative body of the back-back effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back-back left effect unit behind. Move the left-handed decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-back right-rotating decorative body from the back-back right effect unit to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body from the back-lower middle effect unit to the first appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved from the descending position to the ascending position, respectively.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, under normal conditions. , As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and the back lower left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back lower left. Decorative body 3201, back bottom right effect unit 3250 back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom middle effect unit 3300 back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top effect unit 3400 back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of.

Further, in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is from the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side right middle unit up to the vicinity of 2700. Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 and cannot be seen from the player side.

Further, the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 at the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the lower back right rotating decoration 3251. Is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper portion protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the rotating decoration body 3310 from diagonally above, the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the back-up front decorative body 3421 of the back-up effect unit 3400 extends to the left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in the front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction is the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. It can be visually recognized through 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decoration body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized. The back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 having the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a state of a retracted position behind the back-up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side. Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back front right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative unit 3710B on the middle side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. Most of the lower third back front left decorative unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, and the back front left decoration unit 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A of the three back front right decoration units 3810 is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decorative body unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side are the transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the part to the left of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, and the back front right decoration unit 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 produces a back-to-back effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 The lock is released by, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see the effect (movable effect) in which the large back-rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

In this back-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the back-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back-rear movable decoration. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the forward / reverse rotation of the back / rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed, so that the back / rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be reciprocated up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. The movable decorative body 3110 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to rotate the lower back middle decorative unit 3320. Is moved from the lowering position to the ascending position, and the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, it gives the player the impression that the roulette wheel is rotating. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the number of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating is displayed. Depending on the situation, the "piece" may advance. As a result, the player is harassed by whether or not the rotating underside middle rotating ornament 3310 stops rotating at the desired number decoration position so that the "piece" advances to the desired "square". It can be thrilling and entertaining to the player. In addition, as the "piece" advances, the player can feel that the expected value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

Examples of the production using the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are shown in FIG. 202. As shown, in the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201, and in the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back lower right drive motor 3255 rotates the back lower right rotation decoration body. Rotate the 3251. Further, in the back-up effect unit 3400, the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back-up front rotation decoration unit 3410, and the back-up lift drive motor 3429 lowers the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 moves the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 moves the back rear left decorative unit 3520. Rotate the counterclockwise ornament 3510. Further, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper left by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is used to move the back rear right decorative unit 3620. Rotate the clockwise ornament 3610.

As a result, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 can be moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration body can be visually recognized. Because the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper back rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate respectively. By rotating the six ornaments round and round, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game by making people think that something good will happen.

At this time, the back-up elevating drive motor 3249, the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated forward and backward as appropriate, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the back-rear left decoration. The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swaying, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven ornaments rotate around, which makes the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) that the player has an advantage may occur. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 203, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is backed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the back rear left rotation decoration 3510. Further, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620. Rotate the decorative body 3610. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate around at a position of approximately height, so there is something good that surprises the player. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 at the second appearance position are the concepts of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1). It is also possible to display an effect image that is the position of the eyes of a predetermined character's face in line with the (world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the character's eyes are spinning, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, in the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, since each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and the combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be opened and closed individually. As a result, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Back back production unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all the decorative bodies and the like may be movable. This will
By moving all the decorative bodies, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) will occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the advantageous gaming state. In this case, in the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decorative body has been described, but when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative substrate provided at the rear is appropriately emitted to emit light, so that the player can produce the light emitting effect of the decorative body. It can be shown and can attract the attention of the player even more.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main actions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment is provided with a penetrating opening 1112 in the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a on the front side, and then the game area 5a is distributed to the distribution area where the game ball B can be distributed. The frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossible non-circulation area and is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is likely to be the circulation region, and the inside is the non-circulation region. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from a position where the front surface and the front-rear direction of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 are the same to the non-distribution region side (inside). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution region side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the distribution area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the actual distribution area does not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased to increase the non-distribution area. It is possible to make it easier to see the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the game and the non-distribution area in the distribution area by the game ball B. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed in any of the productions in.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided in the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside) and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (contacts) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 or the like. It is possible to prevent deformation and damage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500).

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, etc., the peripheral wall portion 2501 is brought into contact with the game ball B. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501 and making a strange movement different from the conventional one, which causes discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest and suppress the decline of interest.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center) can be made difficult to see. Since the production image of the production display device 1600 as the production device provided behind the accessory 2500) and the movable body and decorative body of the production unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, it is a non-distribution area. The range in which the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. can be seen can be made larger, and the effect of the effect of the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect is provided behind the non-distribution area. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by having a large visible range of the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. of the effect display device 1600, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support unit 2503 is made transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed or the pachinko machine 1 is provided by the transparent part. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), a transparent part such as a support portion 2503 or a peripheral wall portion 2501 is illuminated. It can be made to look gorgeous, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support unit 2503. The light emission by the light emitting means (LED) obtains the above-mentioned effect, and the transparent support portion 2503 makes it possible for the player to recognize the existence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is extended to the game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the lens is extended to the same thickness as the 1100, and the support unit 2503 has the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and the part (design) behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the production image of the production device, the movable body, the decoration body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be made more visible.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed at a portion having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the tip end side of the support portion 2503. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown depending on the tip side of the frame, it is difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape is formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it seems that attention is paid to details. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and is different at the relevant portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, the effect of reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make the illusion as if, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support unit 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (midway) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction, it is behind the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 with respect to the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficient. It can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium comes into contact with the game medium.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to have a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100 when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, regardless of whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is divided by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area, the movable body of the effect unit, the decorative body, etc. can be clearly seen from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of fully exerting the effect of the effect of the above.

Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed from an angle, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it looks protruding to the side, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to make it easier for the player to recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution region side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the flange portion 2502 is provided at the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide a support unit 2503 that extends to the non-distribution area side (inside), so that the support unit 2503 interferes with the visibility of the effect device (effect display device 1600 or the effect unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be enlarged, the effect of the effect can be more easily exerted, and the effect device can be used by the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded and gold. Deformation of the molded product can be prevented when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is extended into a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with the synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from the other portions. It is possible to prevent the difference in the amount of shrinkage from becoming large, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of it is outside the game area 5a in the front view, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Back front left decorative body 3030 and back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to at least cover the portion in the game area 5a of the elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 make it possible to cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see from the player side, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be seen. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be seen instead of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have an enhanced appeal to the player.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a partitioned by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by looking like this, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as the conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. Therefore, since the gaming area 5a looks larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, raise the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1, and play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover at least a portion in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with continuous decorations over the entire surface, and the back front extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the continuous decoration, and give a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It is possible to make it stand out and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It is possible to prevent the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by preventing it from becoming worse.

Further, in front view, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 as functional parts is arranged outside the game area 5a (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554). Since it is completely (whole) located outside the game area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are used to arrange the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By balancing, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. It is possible to obtain a pachinko machine 1 capable of relatively increasing the space of the game area 5a and further exerting the above-mentioned action and effect. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory that moves in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased. In that case, The range of effects performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory that can move in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1 as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 were emitting light. Can improve the appearance of. Further, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with the opaque decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are each based 3031. And since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042) is made of a transparent member, the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is emitted from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 reaches the front right decorative body 3040 and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional part, it can be understood that it is a functional part by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It becomes spicy and can look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not sized to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. The game area 5a can be made larger while reducing the cost of 3030. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, but some of them are pachinko machines. It is desirable that the portion is closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, it extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a even for a predetermined place where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a place in the lower left in FIG. 131, that is, a place in the lower left corner in the game board 5). By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look larger.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same action and effect can be obtained, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the front view, the back front left decorative body in the door window 101a The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inner part of the door window 101a of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 raises and lowers the back rear left. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is made parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since (a sticker is attached), the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (player side), and the first starting port 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player's consciousness to be directed toward the first starting port 2002 than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B accepted by the first starting port 2002 is reduced (or the first starting). It is possible to avoid that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, and the player aimed at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first start port 2002, the player can be disturbed, and when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002, Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result is drawn, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for the game is raised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the winner is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, which greatly enjoys the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed, but the game ball B is paid out as a privilege. , The player will not be discouraged, and the game can be continuously enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting port 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 will be significantly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unattractive, and the player can enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 are provided. Since the light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is used as the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided backward later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is used as the general winning hole 2001. Since the game ball B received can be guided to the rear at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superiority complex) due to the acceptance of the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 is a general prize. The player can be allowed to taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is accepted into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward (). Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to suppress the realization of the game for a long time, the player's attention can be directed to the next game ball B, the game can be advanced smoothly, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 after the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100. In order to make it possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view. Depending on the player, the game ball B can be made to have the illusion that it has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced. Decoration such as a seal can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player by turning that amount into a production device or the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom middle rotation having a plurality of (here, 6 places) stop positions at an even position. The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length that covers half of the stop positions, and a plurality of position detection pieces (6 in this case) corresponding to each stop position, and an area detection piece 3325. Multiple (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting, and one position identification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326, and multiple (here, four) sensors. Since it is provided, when the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 repeat increasing in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decreasing. Therefore, by combining the area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325, the current rotation position of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the area detection piece 3325 is half. The number of the minimum area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half of the number of stop positions. Then, the three area identification sensors 3330 are set as the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is in the first stop position. At (the position of the decorative number of "3"), it is assumed that only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative number of "2") from this state, the first area identification sensor 3330a and the second area identification sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. To do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number "1"), the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c move. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "6"), the first area identification sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second area identification sensor 3330b and the third area identification are specified. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "5"), the second area identification sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area identification sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. Detects 3325. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative number "4"), the third area identification sensor 3330c is also non-detected, and all the area identification sensors 3330 are the area detection piece 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative number of "3"), and only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. In the initial state, the detection / non-detection of the region identification sensor 3330 as described above is repeated as the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 results in the rotation decoration under the back. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area identification sensors 3330 are not undetected even until the rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the medium-rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Further, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331. , The deviation of the stop position can be minimized, and the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent giving a person a sense of discomfort (discomfort), to entertain the production (movable production) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and to suppress the decline in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, can strongly attract the player's attention, and can rotate the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in front, and it is arbitrary after rotating round and round. Since it is possible to show the player an effect like a roulette that stops rotating at the stop position of, the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the rotating ornament 3310 under the back bottom stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to enjoy the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area identification sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position. The number of the number is the same as the number of the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, and the ability (grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (area identification sensor 3330 and position identification sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions.

In the above embodiment, the back unit 3000 has 6 stop positions as the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the back bottom middle effect unit 3300, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a movable body having a plurality of stop positions (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body has a plurality of stop positions. These may be "circling", "linearly moving", "arc-shaped moving", "curved moving", and the like.

[5-12. Improvement of reflectance by insulating coating on the land of each decorative substrate prepared for the game board]
Next, a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 (hereinafter, "a configuration in which the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments are covered with an insulating film". ”) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284. FIG. 281 is a schematic view (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5. It is a schematic view (b) of the cross section of the X-X line in a), and is the schematic view (c) of the modification of (b), FIG. 282 is on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. It is the schematic (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment to be formed, and is the schematic (b) of the cross section of the XX line in (a). , (B) is a schematic view (c) of a modified example of (b), in which FIG. 283 is insulated from the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. It is a schematic view (a) explaining the structure to cover with a coating film, is a schematic view (b) of the cross section of XX rays in (a), and is a schematic view (c) of a modification of (b). 284 is a schematic view (a) for explaining a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. It is a schematic view (b) of the cross section of the X-X line in (b), and is the schematic view (c) of the modification of (b). In addition, in FIGS. 281 to 284, those having the same function are represented by the same reference numerals, and each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is represented as a decorative substrate KB.

As described above, the through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to have conductivity, and a through-hole for mounting an electronic component and a through-hole for mounting an electronic component are not mounted. There are holes, and the configuration in which the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments are covered with an insulating film is adopted for the through holes in which electronic components are not mounted. Each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is provided with a non-through hole in addition to the through hole in the decorative board KB. In the non-through hole, the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is not copper-plated, and the decorative board KB Copper plating is applied to the inner peripheral wall of the through hole at the point that there is no land on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB, and the land is landed on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. It is very different from the through hole with. The non-through hole is formed to attach the substrate to the member, or is formed to fix an electronic component (such as a connector to which wiring is attached / detached) to which an external force is applied to the substrate. It should be noted that there is no problem in adopting a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through holes for the through holes for mounting electronic components.

Here, first, each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 will be briefly described, a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments, and mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate. The connectors will be described in order.

In the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating film, a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. It is applied to decorative boards that do not have, but not to decorative boards on which heat sources such as LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits) are mounted. Further, the configuration in which the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments are covered with an insulating film is a drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor, which will be described later, for driving the first distribution drive motor which is an electrical drive source (FIG. 217.), Drive circuit 1310vb (see FIG. 217) of the second distribution drive motor, which will be described later, to drive the second distribution drive motor, which is an electrical drive source, and drive a drive solenoid, which is an electrical drive source. It does not apply to the main control board 1310 on which a heat source such as the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da (see FIG. 218) described later is mounted, and the payout motor drive IC633abb (FIG. 221) that drives the payout motor 584 described later as an electrical drive source. It is not applied to the payout control board 633 on which the heat source such as (see FIG. 206) is mounted, and the heat source such as the peripheral control IC 1510a (see FIG. 206) which is air-cooled by the air-cooled fan FAN (see FIG. 206) described later is used. It does not apply to the mounted peripheral control board 1510.

Each board on which these heat sources are mounted (that is, a decorative board provided in a game board, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a peripheral control board 1510) is a IC (that is, an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit)). , 1st distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310va, 2nd distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310vb, drive solenoid drive IC1310da, payout motor drive IC633ab) wiring that is electrically connected to the pad portion to which each terminal is soldered. The configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the pattern with the insulating coating on the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied, but the lands of the through holes according to the first or second embodiment are not applied. Each IC (that is, LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor, drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor, drive solenoid drive IC 1310da, payout motor drive) is configured to cover with an insulating coating. It may be applied to the pad portion to which each terminal of IC633ab) is soldered.

Further, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating film is not applied to the power supply board 630 to be described later on which the heat radiation fins are mounted. Of the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5, the decorative substrate may be configured so that the heat radiation fins are mounted. In this case, the configuration for covering the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating film , It is not applied to the decorative substrate on which the heat radiation fin is mounted, whereas it is applied to the decorative substrate on which the heat radiation fin is not mounted. Further, the heat radiating fins may be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 (see FIG. 206). In this case, the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments may be mounted. The configuration of covering with an insulating coating is not applied to the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 on which the heat radiation fins are mounted.

Further, as described later, an amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body is used. It can be housed or mounted in a metal partial case. Therefore, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating film is not applied to the amplifier substrate.

[5-12-1. Each decorative board prepared for the game board]
First, as described above, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is provided with the back-back decorative board 3114 provided in the back-back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145 and the back-bottom left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 provided in the lower back right effect unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, the lower lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 shown in FIG. The second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, and the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 173. 3452, the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 shown in FIG. 188, FIG. 193. There are a back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 shown, a back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, and the like. A white coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid coating") formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating film on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is applied. It may be described as "white resist") to form a white resist layer. Further, on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, a full-color LED that makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), which are electronic components, on a solid white resist. When including the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the component, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component. The notation part indicating) is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. As the attributes of electronic components, solid lines, broken lines, characters in the case of models, etc. are used.

The white color of the resist liquid may be light white or dark white due to variations, or may be dark white or bright white. In addition, since the ink company that supplies the resist liquid also has a range of white (for example, yellow that is closer to the bright side and yellow that is closer to the dark side), white is used as the resist liquid for the same substrate manufacturing company or multiple substrate companies. Even if it is specified, it will not be exactly the same white color (it is difficult to make it exactly the same white color), but it will be a color with a wide range of white color.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the notation is red, the red notation is conspicuous with respect to the white resist, whereas it is white. In the combination of yellow and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and when the notation is yellow, the yellow notation is less conspicuous than the white resist.

When the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and temporarily, the player makes the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. On the white resist that is solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, the part number of the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged can be found even if can be visually recognized. Since the notation part showing the attributes of the electronic parts such as the area shown is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the yellow notation part is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist and has nothing to do with the game for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

In addition, the notation part indicating the attributes of the electronic component such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), is , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 was printed by silk printing with yellow paint, but instead, the yellow color is printed on the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5. It may be printed by silk printing with a paint, or it may be a color different from yellow (for example, a non-bright color such as black, or a color such as blue, green, or red. ) May be printed by silk printing. In this case, there is nothing printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, and only the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is printed by silk printing. There will be something to be done. By doing so, the white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 increases the reflectance of the plurality of LEDs to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). Can contribute. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part numbers of the electronic components and the attributes of the electronic components that have nothing to do with the game for the player.

In addition, the notation section indicating the attributes of the electronic component such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), is an electronic component. , The front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 was printed with yellow paint by silk printing, but instead, the part number of the full-color LED is printed with foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). Characters are created with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on the surface of the copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form the characters), and the attributes of the full-color LED are excluded from each terminal not shown and the wiring pattern not shown. The front surface of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is formed as a foil removing area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern). A white resist that is solidly coated on the (surface) may cover the foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters. Specifically, for example, a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as a foil removing region on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, and a full color LED is formed in the vicinity of the foil removing region. The corresponding part number is formed as a blank character on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and the foil is removed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5. The area and its foil stripped letters are covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed by being electrically insulated from the electronic components. By doing so, the white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 increases the reflectance of the plurality of LEDs to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). Can contribute. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part numbers of the electronic components and the attributes of the electronic components that have nothing to do with the game for the player.

In addition, the notation section indicating the attributes of the electronic component such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), is an electronic component. , The front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 was printed by silk printing with yellow paint, but instead of this, the part number of the full-color LED is white using a white resist coated twice. In addition to being formed as a resist-free character, the attribute of the full-color LED may be formed as a white resist-free region using a white resist coated twice. Specifically, for example, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is approximately the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 as the first of the two-coated white resists. The whole is covered with a white resist (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 as the first of the two-coated white resists). The front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged (a region instructing the arrangement of a predetermined pin number) as the second time among the white resists coated twice. (Including the notch)) is masked as the white resist removal area, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED is masked as the white resist removal character in the vicinity of these white resist removal areas. The entire front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in No. 5 is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the second layer. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is formed as the white resist-removing area and is also full-color. The part number corresponding to the LED is formed as a white resist-free character. By adopting the same transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are used. The white resist of the above is shaded, and the base (copper foil surface (copper foil portion)) and the copper foil surface (copper) of the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 are provided through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the area excluding the foil part), the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. On the other hand, in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap due to being masked, the white resist of the first layer is covered with the white resist of the second layer. The white resist of the first layer looks pale because it is exposed without being damaged. That is, when looking at the base of the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region and the white resist removing characters in the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it. By doing so, the white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 increases the reflectance of the plurality of LEDs to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). Can contribute. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part numbers of the electronic components and the attributes of the electronic components that have nothing to do with the game for the player.

In addition, the notation section indicating the attributes of the electronic component such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), is an electronic component. , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 was printed by silk printing with yellow paint, but instead, the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 are printed. ) May have no area printed by silk printing. By doing so, the white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 increases the reflectance of the plurality of LEDs to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). Can contribute. In addition, the part numbers of the electronic components and the attributes of the electronic components, which have nothing to do with the game for the player, can be completely eliminated from being visually recognized by the player. Further, since the process of silk printing can be omitted, the substrate manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of substrate manufacturing processes.

Multiple LEDs are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board KB, and on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB, in addition to a connector for connecting an electric wiring to the decorative board KB, a resistor, a capacitor, and a plurality of LEDs There are cases where one or more electronic components such as a circuit (for example, a constant current drive circuit) for controlling the light emission of the above are mounted. An LED is an electronic component whose package has a white or near-white color (eg, ivory, beige, cream), and a connector has a housing whose housing is white or close to white (eg, ivory, beige, cream). For example, it is an electronic component having ivory color, beige color, cream color), and the constant current drive circuit is housed in an IC package which may have black color as an integrated circuit, and is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver. It is an electronic component that is an IC, the resistor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component that has black, blue, white, etc., and the capacitor is a surface mount type that has black, brown, gray, white, etc. (SMD type) electronic component. On the back surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB, electronic components (connectors, resistors, capacitors, circuits that control the light emission of multiple LEDs, etc.) can be identified on a solid white resist. The notation part such as the part number of the electronic component and the area indicating the attribute of the electronic component may be printed by silk printing with yellow paint, or a color different from yellow (for example, a non-bright color such as black). Alternatively, it may be printed in a color such as blue, green, or red) by silk printing.

The surface mount type (SMD type) resistor should be placed only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB on which no LED is mounted, and not on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted. The area of the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB can be increased. This is because most surface mount type (SMD type) resistors have a black upper surface (sometimes called a protective film) except for the terminals, and a decorative substrate with a black upper surface. When placed on the front surface (surface) of the KB, the reflectance is different from that of the white resist, so the presence of dark black in the light white resist makes the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB solid white. The reflectance of the resist is lowered, and the uniformity of the reflectance is impaired. In addition, the resistance whose upper surface is black (dark color) is a color that stands out (color that is easy to see) when combined with the white color (light color) of the resist, so the player should see black that is not necessary. As a result, the effect of the effect may be reduced. In addition, the resistance value may be indicated on the upper surface (protective film) of the surface mount type (SMD type) resistor. If the upper surface (protective film) is black, the number or symbol indicating the resistance value is white. Although it is often done, the black area that is the base is overwhelmingly larger than the number or symbol that indicates the resistance value, so even if the resistance value is indicated, the upper surface (protective film) is recognized as black. To. In some cases, resistors are also arranged on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, depending on the mounting density of the decorative substrate KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decorative substrate KB.

The surface mount type (SMD type) capacitor (ceramic capacitor) is placed only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted, and on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted. If it is not arranged, the area of the white resist coated solidly on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB can be increased. This is because surface-mounted type (SMD type) capacitors (ceramic capacitors) generally have an upper surface (because they are often manufactured by the green sheet method and the upper surface is made of a dielectric ceramic). Most of them are brown except for the terminals, and if a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) with a brown top surface is placed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, the reflectance is different from that of the white resist, so the light white resist is medium. Due to the presence of dark brown color on the surface, the reflectance of the white resist coated solidly on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB is lowered, and the uniformity of the reflectance is impaired. Also, a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) whose top surface is brown (dark color) is when combined with the white (light color) of the resist. Since it is a conspicuous color (a color that is easy to see), there is a risk that the effect of the effect may be reduced by seeing brown that the player does not need. A capacitor (ceramic capacitor) may also be arranged on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted depending on the mounting density of the decorative substrate KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decorative substrate KB.

When mounting the connector on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, it is desirable to use a connector having the same color as the white resist coated solidly on the front surface (surface surface) of the decorative substrate KB, that is, a connector having a white housing. .. When mounting the connector on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB, colors such as white, black, and blue may be used except in special cases.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow by the dark side), it can be used as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors. For this reason, the notation part is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, but the notation part is printed with a paint that has a color close to the lightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) in addition to yellow. Even when printing by silk printing, the color does not become close to the exact same white lightness (it is difficult to make the color close to the exact same white lightness), and the white lightness does not become the same as the above-mentioned yellow paint. There is a wide range of colors close to. Even when a color different from yellow is used for the notation portion as the silk printing paint, the color has a wide range as in the above-mentioned yellow paint.

The LED is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, but may be a single-color LED such as white, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, or green, or a surface mount type top-view type LED. Or a surface mount type side view type one may be used. Further, in addition to using a surface mount type LED, a cannonball type LED may be used.

Further, a connector for connecting an electric wiring to the decorative substrate KB was mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB, but the color of the connector housing is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color, etc.). When it is an electronic component having (beige color, cream color), it may be mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is done by mounting a white connector (or a connector having a color close to white) having the same color as the white coating film, which is an insulating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB, and decorating with this connector. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface (surface) of the substrate KB.

[5-12-2. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A small through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (vertical back surface) of the KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. By removing the copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 having the outer diameter KTHD1 are formed, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and the rear (back) side are formed. A wiring pattern is formed. Through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole with conductivity. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. It has a diameter of KTHD1 and has the same size.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (front) side wiring pattern and a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is soldered are electrically connected. ing.

In addition, in the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the front (front) side land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. Further, in the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and is also electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected via a through hole KTH1. , The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) KBy formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, which are electrically connected. The back surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) It is in a state of being electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

Although a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. A front (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1. .. Further, although a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to form the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (back surface) side is formed. In the region of the resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. There is.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (front) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the rear (back) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The ground) and the ground) are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. ..

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is in the region corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra having a smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front (front) side land KRDx1 is front from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be covered with a white resist as an insulating film, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be kept small.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1, the front (front) side to the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the decorative substrate KB The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the decorative substrate KB for electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation), and the decorative substrate KB can be checked from the rear surface (back surface) side to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the decorative substrate KB to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check). That is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

Further, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 on the front (front) side from the front (front) side of the decorative substrate KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Since the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe should be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side to the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. If this is possible, the decorative substrate KB can be electrically inspected (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing the work for taking out the decorative substrate KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a small irradiation angle (a type having a narrow irradiation angle), they appear as point light sources and become an aggregate of point light sources to be visually recognized by the player. There is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort. Therefore, as the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB, a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) is adopted so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected by a plurality of other members and is reflected on the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returned to the decorative substrate KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs. Is used as a reflecting surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decorative substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and a rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the copper foil is exposed on the front (front) side land KRDx1, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) coated solidly as an insulating film and the reflectance of the front (front) side land KRDx1 Since the reflectance is different, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Therefore, in the configuration for covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment with an insulating coating, a white resist is covered as an insulating coating on the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side lands KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. By keeping the copper foil exposed, the area of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is kept small, and the reflectance of the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted is reduced to one. It is possible to contribute to making the pattern (uniform).

Further, the decorative substrate KB that can be visually recognized by the player by covering the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with a white resist as an insulating film. In the above, since the ratio of the copper foil exposed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be reduced, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is made uniform (uniform). This makes the copper foil portion inconspicuous and contributes to the improvement of the light emitting effect of the decorative substrate KB.

Further, as described above, an inner lens is arranged on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB so that the lens is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the existence of holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. By adopting a configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the presence of holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be further enhanced. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, when there is a difference in the thickness of the white resist coated solidly as the insulating film formed on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the reflection efficiency due to the shade of color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the maximum visual target of the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) The decorative substrate arranged so as to cover the upper side of) and the decorative substrate movably arranged so as to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. In the configuration in which the coating is applied, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) by minimizing the portion of the through hole that is not covered by the insulating coating. The effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, the effect of making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand, and the like are enhanced. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see through the inner lens which is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light. It is said that the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) by covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment with an insulating film. There are effects such as making the copper foil portion less noticeable, and making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand. In addition, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and each decorative board provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand, and the like are high.

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. By forming a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in the region to be formed. The outer peripheral portion of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the rear surface (back surface) side toward the center of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. In addition, the region of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the decorative substrate KB rear surface (back surface) KBy uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED by KBy cannot be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

Further, in the configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed therein, but a white resist liquid was formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs were mounted. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating the coating film, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted is formed as an insulating film almost entirely. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color formed by applying a resist solution of another color different from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the decorative substrate KB rear surface (back surface) KBy uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED by KBy cannot be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

Further, in the configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Although a white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed in the process, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB were formed almost entirely. A white silk printing layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by printing with a white paint as an insulating film by silk printing. In this case, the part number of the electronic component and the notation indicating the attribute of the electronic component, which makes it possible to identify the electronic component on the white silk printing layer formed on one surface or both surfaces, are silk-screened with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as pastel color. When the white silk printing layer described above is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad on which the electronic component is soldered, the copper foil surface excluding the predetermined area) ) May be formed, or the resist layer may not be formed. When the resist layer is formed, silk printing is performed with a white paint as an insulating film so as to cover the resist layer. A white silk printing layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution or a resist solution of another color (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white.

Further, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment with an insulating film can be applied to the lands of the through holes of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing the reflection by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c. It can contribute to avoiding mixing with the light. For this reason, the copper foil is exposed on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate 1400c by covering the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) side land with a black resist as an insulating film. By keeping the area of the land on the surface) side small to reduce the reflectance, it contributes to making the reflectance by the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform). Can be done.

Further, as described above, the through hole has the inner peripheral wall of the through hole plated with copper to have conductivity, and the through hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There are through-holes that do not, and the lands of both through-holes have adopted a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film. It is not necessary to adopt the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with an insulating film for the one provided directly under the electronic component. That is, among the through holes in which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil in the lands of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole is present. This is because it is not necessary to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the existence of through-hole lands and the existence of through-hole holes are visually confirmed by electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land of the through hole to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB.

[5-12-3. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in FIGS. 282 (a) and 282 (b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB (decorative substrate KB). A small through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (vertical back surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed on the foil surface by removing the copper foil, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and the rear (back surface) side are formed. ) Side wiring pattern is formed. Through holes KTH1 are formed by subjecting the through holes to a conductive plating process. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (front) side wiring pattern and a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is soldered are electrically connected. ing.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

In addition, in the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the front (front) side land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. Further, in the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and is also electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected via a through hole KTH1. , The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) KBy formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, which are electrically connected. The back surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) It is in a state of being electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

Although a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. The region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1 is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and is insulated from the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 in the configuration for covering the coating is formed. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 includes a resist liquid intrusion prevention region concentrically extending outward from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the front surface (surface surface) of the hole of the through hole KTH1. ) Resistant liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension from the inner peripheral edge on the side (The resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. A distance dimension is required, and 0.5 mm is adopted in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment is covered with the insulating film). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the double of the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. It is 1.0 mm larger.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, but the rear surface (rear surface (back surface) In the region of the back surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. It is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film.

The substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The ground) and the ground) are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. ..

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is in the region corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. KBxrD1 which is smaller and smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating coating, and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra is formed, the front (front) side land KRDx1 has a front (front) side land from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. Outer peripheral portion of KRDx1 except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention region (that is, the region extending from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 to a position separated by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)). Is in a state of being covered with a white resist as an insulating film. As a result, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from almost inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating film (over the region excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), the portion where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention region. As a result, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 in which the copper foil is exposed can be suppressed to be extremely small as compared with the configuration in which the through-hole land according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. it can.

Further, since the resist liquid intrusion prevention region is provided in the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist liquid is formed as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. When applied, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB faces vertically upward (the decorative substrate KB is actually a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). Since it is placed and finally cut out to be manufactured, it is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the front surface of one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward), and the white resist liquid is actually produced. Even if it is applied, the white resist liquid penetrates into the holes of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and is dried without closing the holes.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1, the front (front) side to the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the decorative substrate KB The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the decorative substrate KB for electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation), and the decorative substrate KB can be checked from the rear surface (back surface) side to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the decorative substrate KB to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check). That is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

Further, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 on the front (front) side from the front (front) side of the decorative substrate KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Since the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe should be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side to the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. If this is possible, the decorative substrate KB can be electrically inspected (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing the work for taking out the decorative substrate KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a small irradiation angle (a type having a narrow irradiation angle), they appear as point light sources and become an aggregate of point light sources to be visually recognized by the player. There is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort. Therefore, as the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB, a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) is adopted so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected by a plurality of other members and is reflected on the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returned to the decorative substrate KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs. Is used as a reflecting surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decorative substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and a rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the copper foil is exposed on the front (front) side land KRDx1, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) coated solidly as an insulating film and the reflectance of the front (front) side land KRDx1 Since the reflectance is different, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Therefore, in the configuration for covering the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment with an insulating coating, the front (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from substantially the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side lands KRDx1 (that is,). Since it is possible to cover the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with a white resist as an insulating film (over the region excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), copper. Since the portion where the foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention region, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed is set with respect to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. The first implementation is to make the reflectance of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform) by keeping it extremely small as compared with the configuration in which the insulating coating is covered. Compared with the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the form is covered with the insulating film, it is possible to contribute more.

Further, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from substantially the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. In the decorative substrate KB that is visible to the player by covering the white resist as an insulating film (over the region excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since the ratio of the copper foil exposed to KBx being exposed can be reduced, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is made uniform (uniform), so that the copper foil portion is less noticeable. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect by the decorative substrate KB.

Further, as described above, an inner lens is arranged on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB so that the lens is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the existence of holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. By adopting a configuration in which the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the presence of holes in the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be further enhanced. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, when there is a difference in the thickness of the white resist coated solidly as the insulating film formed on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the reflection efficiency due to the shade of color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the maximum visual target of the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) The decorative substrate arranged so as to cover the upper side of) and the decorative substrate movably arranged so as to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment. In the configuration in which the coating is applied, as compared with the configuration in which the lands of the through holes covered with the insulating coating according to the first embodiment, the portion not covered by the insulating coating on the lands of the through holes is reduced as much as possible, so that the plurality of LEDs The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand. The effect etc. becomes high. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see through the inner lens which is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light. Even in the case of the above, a plurality of LEDs are mounted by the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment with an insulating coating, as compared with the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment with an insulating coating. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand. And so on. In addition, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and each decorative board provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand, and the like are high.

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the second embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. By forming a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in the region to be formed. The outer peripheral portion of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the rear surface (back surface) side toward the center of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 282 (c). In addition, the region of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the decorative substrate KB rear surface (back surface) KBy uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED by KBy cannot be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

Further, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed therein, but a white resist liquid was formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs were mounted. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating the coating film, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted is formed as an insulating film almost entirely. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color formed by applying a resist solution of another color different from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the decorative substrate KB rear surface (back surface) KBy uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED by KBy cannot be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

Further, in the configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Although a white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed in the process, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB were formed almost entirely. A white silk printing layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by printing with a white paint as an insulating film by silk printing. In this case, the part number of the electronic component and the notation indicating the attribute of the electronic component, which makes it possible to identify the electronic component on the white silk printing layer formed on one surface or both surfaces, are silk-screened with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as pastel color. When the white silk printing layer described above is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad on which the electronic component is soldered, the copper foil surface excluding the predetermined area) ) May be formed, or the resist layer may not be formed. When the resist layer is formed, silk printing is performed with a white paint as an insulating film so as to cover the resist layer. A white silk printing layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution or a resist solution of another color (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white.

Further, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment with an insulating film can be applied to the lands of the through holes of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing the reflection by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c. It can contribute to avoiding mixing with the light. Therefore, from substantially the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) side land on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c (that is, the front surface (front surface) side land on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400 c. Since it is possible to cover the black resist as an insulating film (over the area excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), the portion where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention region. As a result, the area of the front (front) side land where the copper foil is exposed is extremely compared with the functional display board 1400c which adopts the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. In order to reduce the reflectance by keeping the size small and to make the reflectance by the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the functional display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform), the through hole according to the first embodiment. It can contribute more than the functional display board 1400c which adopts the structure of covering the land with an insulating film.

Further, as described above, the through hole has the inner peripheral wall of the through hole plated with copper to have conductivity, and the through hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There are through-holes that do not, and the lands of both through-holes have adopted a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film. It is not necessary to adopt the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment is covered with the insulating film for the one provided directly under the electronic component. That is, among the through holes in which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil in the lands of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole is present. This is because it is not necessary to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the existence of through-hole lands and the existence of through-hole holes are visually confirmed by electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land of the through hole to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB.

[5-12-4. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in FIGS. 283 (a) and 283 (b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB (decorative substrate KB). A small through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (vertical back surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed on the foil surface by removing the copper foil, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and the rear (back surface) side are formed. ) Side wiring pattern is formed. Through holes KTH1 are formed by subjecting the through holes to a conductive plating process. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (front) side wiring pattern and a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is soldered are electrically connected. ing.

In addition, in the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the front (front) side land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. Further, in the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and is also electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected via a through hole KTH1. , The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) KBy formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, which are electrically connected. The back surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) It is in a state of being electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

Since a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. A white resist liquid is also applied as an insulating film to the region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1 to form the front (front) side resist layer KBxr.

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. .. Therefore, when a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is oriented vertically upward. (The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out, so that one standard-sized copper-clad laminate is manufactured. It is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the front surface of the plate (base material) faces vertically upward), and the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, and this hole is formed. It will be blocked. The white resist liquid that has penetrated into the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is dried by its own weight in a state of being depressed from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side of the holes of the through holes KTH1 toward the center of the holes. It becomes.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, but the rear surface (rear surface (back surface) In the region of the back surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. It is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film.

The substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The ground) and the ground) are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the region of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. At the same time, a white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, and the hole is closed. As a result, the entire front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the holes of the through holes KTH1 can be covered with a white resist as an insulating film, so that the front surface (surface) can be covered. ) The copper foil does not expose the side land KNDx1 and the conductive plated portion applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the hole of the through hole KTH1 does not expose from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Can be. Further, since the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is closed, the light from the rear of the decorative substrate KB passes through the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. You can prevent it from proceeding.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a small irradiation angle (a type having a narrow irradiation angle), they appear as point light sources and become an aggregate of point light sources to be visually recognized by the player. There is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort. Therefore, as the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB, a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) is adopted so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected by a plurality of other members and is reflected on the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returned to the decorative substrate KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs. Is used as a reflecting surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decorative substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and a rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the copper foil is exposed on the front (front) side land KRDx1, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) coated solidly as an insulating film and the reflectance of the front (front) side land KRDx1 Since the reflectance is different, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Further, when the player can see the holes of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 formed on the front (front) of the decorative substrate KB, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 The presence of holes can be annoying to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the third embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr. The area to be covered is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film, and the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the front surface side to close the hole. Since it is in the state, it is possible to contribute to making the reflectance by the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Further, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the region of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. , The decorative substrate that can be seen by the player because the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and the hole is closed. In the KB, the proportion of the copper foil exposed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be reduced (at least, the copper foil on the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is not exposed at all). By making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform), it is possible to make the copper foil portion inconspicuous and contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect of the decorative substrate KB.

Further, as described above, an inner lens is arranged on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB so that the lens is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the existence of holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. By adopting a configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the presence of holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be further enhanced. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, when there is a difference in the thickness of the white resist coated solidly as the insulating film formed on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the reflection efficiency due to the shade of color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, although the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and the hole is closed, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is formed. The rear surface (back surface) side is in an open state. That is, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB are closed on the front surface (front surface) side by the white resist liquid, while the rear surface (back surface) side is open. This is a state in which the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface side in the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, and air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. If the rear surface (back surface) side of the through hole KTH1 is closed, a liquid such as a resist removing liquid may remain inside the through hole KTH1, and the conductivity inside the through hole KTH1 is affected by the influence of this liquid. Poor contact occurs due to corrosion of the plating, or the liquid inside the through hole KTH1 momentarily vaporizes and expands (so-called "steam explosion") in the soldering (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied. This is because the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged, which may cause electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1.

Further, although there are holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1, the presence can be hidden by the white resist, so that the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is solidly coated. The front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous, and the holes of the through holes KTH1 can be made inconspicuous with respect to the white resist. As a result, the holes of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 can be prevented from being an obstacle to the player. Further, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the player visually recognizing the holes of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the pattern or pattern.

Further, since each decorative board provided in the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the front surface (front surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB. Even if the LED emits light, the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 because the hole is closed with a white resist. Therefore, one decorative substrate KB Through-hole KTH1 of a decorative substrate KB in which light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decorative substrate KB is one with respect to the color of light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the other decorative substrate KB. By passing through, it is possible to prevent the colors of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative substrate KB from being mixed. When the other decorative substrate KB is not arranged behind the one decorative substrate KB, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB must be closed with a white resist. Looks like black dots, so for the color of light emitted by multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB, the black dots due to the holes in the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB. That is, when the black color is mixed, but the hole of the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB is closed with the white resist, the area corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1. Since it is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, the holes of the through hole KTH1 are mixed (assimilated) with the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. It is possible to prevent color mixing due to the through hole KTH1 formed on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB with respect to the color of light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the maximum visual target of the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) The decorative substrate arranged so as to cover the upper side of) and the decorative substrate movably arranged so as to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment. In the configuration in which the coating is applied, the portion of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate that is not covered by the insulating coating against the land of the through hole is eliminated, and the through hole hole is closed on the front surface (surface) side of the decorative substrate. As a result, the effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the existence of through-hole holes are more games. The effect of making it difficult for people to understand is enhanced. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens which is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the through-hole holes inconspicuous. It has the effect of making the existence more difficult for the player to understand. In addition, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and each decorative board provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand, and the like are high.

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the third embodiment, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. By forming a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in the region to be formed. The outer peripheral portion of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the rear surface (back surface) side toward the center of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 283 (c). In addition, the region of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the decorative substrate KB rear surface (back surface) KBy uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED by KBy cannot be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

Further, in the configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed therein, but a white resist liquid was formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs were mounted. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating the coating film, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted is formed as an insulating film almost entirely. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color formed by applying a resist solution of another color different from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the decorative substrate KB rear surface (back surface) KBy uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED by KBy cannot be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

Further, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Although a white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed in the process, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB were formed almost entirely. A white silk printing layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by printing with a white paint as an insulating film by silk printing. In this case, the part number of the electronic component and the notation indicating the attribute of the electronic component, which makes it possible to identify the electronic component on the white silk printing layer formed on one surface or both surfaces, are silk-screened with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as pastel color. When the white silk printing layer described above is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad on which the electronic component is soldered, the copper foil surface excluding the predetermined area) ) May be formed, or the resist layer may not be formed. When the resist layer is formed, silk printing is performed with a white paint as an insulating film so as to cover the resist layer. A white silk printing layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution or a resist solution of another color (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white.

Further, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the third embodiment with an insulating film can be applied to the lands of the through holes of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing the reflection by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c. It can contribute to avoiding mixing with the light. For this reason, in the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx of the functional display substrate 1400 c, the region corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer is also covered with a black resist as an insulating film. , The black resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface side in the hole of the through hole 1400 cc of the function display board 1400 c, and the hole is closed. Therefore, the reflectance is reduced and a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are reduced. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c on which the above-mentioned is mounted uniform (uniform).

Further, as described above, the through hole has the inner peripheral wall of the through hole plated with copper to have conductivity, and the through hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There are through-holes that do not, and the lands of both through-holes have adopted a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes according to the third embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, but among the through-holes that do not mount electronic components, It is not necessary to adopt the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with an insulating film for the one provided directly under the electronic component. That is, among the through holes in which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil in the lands of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole is present. This is because it is not necessary to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the existence of through-hole lands and the existence of through-hole holes are visually confirmed by electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land of the through hole to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB.

[5-12-5. A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with the insulating film, as shown in FIGS. 284 (a) and 284 (b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB (decorative substrate KB). A small through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (vertical back surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed on the foil surface by removing the copper foil, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and the rear (back surface) side are formed. ) Side wiring pattern is formed. Through holes KTH1 are formed by subjecting the through holes to a conductive plating process. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (front) side wiring pattern and a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is soldered are electrically connected. ing.

In addition, in the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the front (front) side land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. Further, in the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Has a first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and is also electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two from the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected via a through hole KTH1. , The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) KBy formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, which are electrically connected. The back surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) It is in a state of being electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

Although a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. A front (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1. .. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating film.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, so that the rear surface is formed. A white resist liquid is also applied as an insulating film to the region of the (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 to form the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr.

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment and painting, a process of drying, a process of making holes, other processes, etc., and each substrate is finally cut out. .. Therefore, when a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is oriented vertically upward. (The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out, so that one standard-sized copper-clad laminate is manufactured. It is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the rear surface of the plate (base material) faces vertically upward), and the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, and this hole is formed. It will be blocked. The white resist liquid that has penetrated into the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is dried by its own weight in a state of being depressed from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole. It becomes.

The substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The ground) and the ground) are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is in the region corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra having a smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front (front) side land KRDx1 is front from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. Further, in the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the region corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. The white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, and the hole is closed. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be covered with a white resist as an insulating film, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be kept small, and the light from the rear of the decorative substrate KB is prevented from traveling toward the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB through the holes of the through hole KTH1. can do.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1, the front (front) side to the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the decorative substrate KB The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the decorative substrate KB for electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation), and the decorative substrate KB can be checked from the rear surface (back surface) side to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. The tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the decorative substrate KB to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check). That is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

Further, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 on the front (front) side from the front (front) side of the decorative substrate KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Since the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe should be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side to the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. If this is possible, the decorative substrate KB can be electrically inspected (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing the work for taking out the decorative substrate KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a small irradiation angle (a type having a narrow irradiation angle), they appear as point light sources and become an aggregate of point light sources to be visually recognized by the player. There is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort. Therefore, as the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB, a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) is adopted so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected by a plurality of other members and is reflected on the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returned to the decorative substrate KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs. Is used as a reflecting surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decorative substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and a rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the copper foil is exposed on the front (front) side land KRDx1, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) coated solidly as an insulating film and the reflectance of the front (front) side land KRDx1 Since the reflectance is different, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Further, when the player can see the holes of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 formed on the front (front) of the decorative substrate KB, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 The presence of holes can be annoying to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for covering the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating coating, a white resist is covered as an insulating coating on the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side lands KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. In addition to this, a white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, and the hole is closed, so that a plurality of LEDs are displayed. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to be mounted uniform (uniform).

Further, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, and in the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. In the decorative substrate KB that is visible to the player by the white resist liquid invading from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side and closing the holes, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) Since the ratio of the copper foil exposed to KBx being exposed can be reduced, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is made uniform (uniform), so that the copper foil portion is less noticeable. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect by the decorative substrate KB.

Further, as described above, an inner lens is arranged on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB so that the lens is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the existence of holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. By adopting a configuration in which the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the presence of holes in the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 in the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be further enhanced. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, when there is a difference in the thickness of the white resist coated solidly as the insulating film formed on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the reflection efficiency due to the shade of color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, although the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and the hole is closed, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is formed. The front (front) side is in an open state. That is, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB are closed on the rear surface (back surface) side by the white resist liquid, while the front surface (front surface) side is open. This is because the white resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the through-hole KTH1 hole of the decorative substrate KB, and air remains inside the hole of the through-hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. If the front surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 is closed, a liquid such as a resist removing liquid may remain inside the through hole KTH1. Due to the influence of this liquid, the conductivity inside the through hole KTH1 is reduced. Poor contact occurs due to corrosion of the plating, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 momentarily vaporizes and expands (so-called "steam explosion") in the soldering (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied. This is because the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged, which may cause electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1.

Further, although there are holes in the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1, the presence of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the white resist on the front (front) of the decorative substrate KB, and through. Since the holes of the holes KTH1 can be hidden by the white resist on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB, the white resist coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is used. On the other hand, the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous. As a result, the holes of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 can be prevented from being an obstacle to the player. Further, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the player visually recognizing the holes of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the pattern or pattern.

Further, since each decorative board provided in the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the front surface (front surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB. Even if the LED emits light, the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 because the hole is closed with a white resist. Therefore, one decorative substrate KB Through-hole KTH1 of a decorative substrate KB in which light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decorative substrate KB is one with respect to the color of light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the other decorative substrate KB. By passing through, it is possible to prevent the colors of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative substrate KB from being mixed. When another decorative substrate KB is not arranged behind the one decorative substrate KB, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB must be closed with a white resist. Looks like black dots, so for the color of light emitted by multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB, the black dots due to the holes in the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB. That is, while black is mixed, when the hole of the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB is closed with a white resist, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB on the front surface (surface) KBx. Since the entire outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, the white resist in which the holes of the through hole KTH1 are closed and the front (front) side land KRDx1 Due to the arrangement close to the white resist that covers the entire outer peripheral portion, the holes of the through hole KTH1 are mixed (assimilated) with the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent color mixing due to the through hole KTH1 formed on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB with respect to the color of light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB. Can be done.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the maximum visual target of the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) The decorative substrate arranged so as to cover the upper side of) and the decorative substrate movably arranged so as to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment. In the configuration in which the coating is applied, the portion of the through hole that is not covered with the insulating coating is reduced as much as possible, and the through hole holes are closed on the rear surface (back surface) side of the decorative substrate, so that a plurality of LEDs can be used. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand. The effect etc. becomes high. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens which is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the through-hole holes inconspicuous. It has the effect of making the existence more difficult for the player to understand. In addition, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and each decorative board provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand, and the like are high.

In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. By forming a front (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in the region to be formed. The outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land KRDx1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer circumference of the front (front) side land KRDx1 toward the center, as shown in FIG. 284 (b). In the region of the front (front) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1, the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 and further than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is small and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 may be formed. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 includes a resist liquid intrusion prevention region concentrically extending outward from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the front surface (surface surface) of the hole of the through hole KTH1. ) Resistant liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension from the inner peripheral edge on the side (The resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. A distance dimension is required, and in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with the insulating film, 0.5 mm is adopted). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the double of the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. It is 1.0 mm larger.

As a result, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from almost inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating film (over the region excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region), the portion where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention region. As a result, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 in which the copper foil is exposed can be suppressed to an extremely small size.

Further, since the resist liquid intrusion prevention region is provided in the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist liquid is formed as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. When applied, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB faces vertically upward (the decorative substrate KB is actually a plurality of substrates from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). Since it is placed and finally cut out to be manufactured, it is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the front surface of one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward), and the white resist liquid is actually produced. Even if it is applied, the white resist liquid penetrates into the holes of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and is dried without closing the holes.

Further, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from substantially the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. The part where the copper foil is exposed is reduced to the resist liquid intrusion prevention region by covering the white resist as the insulating film (over the region excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region). However, it is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land KRDx1 on the front (surface) side from the front surface (surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. Therefore, the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. For example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the decorative substrate can be used. When the front surface (surface) of the KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land KRDx1 on the front surface (surface) side from the front surface (surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. It is also possible to carry out an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative substrate KB as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing the work for taking out the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead that checks the continuity of a so-called "tester".

Further, in the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Each of the white resist layers was formed by the white coating film formed by the above. However, the color of the resist covering the entire outer peripheral portion of the land of the decorative substrate KB and the resist that closes the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB The color may be different from the color. For example, a white resist layer is formed on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating film almost entirely on the decorative substrate KB. The entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land KRDx1 in the front (front) KBx is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, whereas the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is almost entirely covered. A black resist layer is formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution as an insulating film, so that the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB are closed with the black resist. it can.

Further, in the configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating film, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Although a white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed in the process, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB were formed almost entirely. A white silk printing layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by printing with a white paint as an insulating film by silk printing. In this case, the part number of the electronic component and the notation indicating the attribute of the electronic component, which makes it possible to identify the electronic component on the white silk printing layer formed on one surface or both surfaces, are silk-screened with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as pastel color. When the white silk printing layer described above is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad on which the electronic component is soldered, the copper foil surface excluding the predetermined area) ) May be formed, or the resist layer may not be formed. When the resist layer is formed, silk printing is performed with a white paint as an insulating film so as to cover the resist layer. A white silk printing layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution or a resist solution of another color (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white.

Further, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating film can be applied to the lands of the through holes of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400 cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display substrate 1400 c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing the reflection by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the function display board 1400c. It can contribute to avoiding mixing with the light. Therefore, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land on the front (front) 1400 cc of the function display board 1400c is covered with a black resist as an insulating film, and the through hole 1400 cc of the function display board 1400c Since the black resist liquid invades from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole and the hole is closed, the reflectance is reduced and the front surface of the function display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted. (Surface) It can contribute to making the reflectance of 1400 cx uniform (uniform).

Further, as described above, the through hole has the inner peripheral wall of the through hole plated with copper to have conductivity, and the through hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There are through-holes that do not, and the lands of both through-holes have adopted a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes according to the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating film. It is not necessary to adopt the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with the insulating film for the one provided directly under the electronic component. That is, among the through holes in which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil in the lands of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole is present. This is because it is not necessary to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the existence of through-hole lands and the existence of through-hole holes are visually confirmed by electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the land of the through hole to perform an electrical inspection (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB.

[5-12-6. Connector mounted on the back surface (back surface) of the decorative board]
Here, the connector mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB will be described with reference to FIG. 285. FIG. 285 shows a schematic view (a) on the rear surface (back surface) side and a schematic view (b) on the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate on which the DIP type connector is mounted, and the surface mount (SMD) type connector is It is a schematic view (c) on the rear surface (back surface) side and a schematic view (d) on the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate to be mounted. The front surface (front surface) of the connector will be described below as a surface mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB.

[5-12-6a. DIP type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285 (a) and 285 (b), various terminals of the DIP type connector KCN (in this embodiment, four terminals are provided, the first terminal: the ground terminal, the second terminal: the power supply terminal (for example,). + 12V), 3rd terminal: data signal terminal 1 (for example, serial signal terminal), 4th terminal: data signal terminal 2 (for example, clock signal terminal). However, a through hole KTH (hereinafter, simply referred to as "land KRD") having a land KRD through which a plurality of power supply terminals and a plurality of data credit terminals are allocated and soldered is described. In this case, a through hole KTH is formed in the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB described above, and the front surface (front surface) KBx copper foil surface of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. A land KRD having a predetermined outer diameter is formed on the copper foil surface of KBy by pulling out the copper foil at the copper foil surface (in the present embodiment, four through holes KTH are formed). In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are the same size. There is. One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB.

Although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the above-mentioned front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr The resist liquid is not applied to the region corresponding to the land KRD, and the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed. The resist solution may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD on the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed, and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed. Further, although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to form the above-mentioned rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr The copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed without applying the resist liquid to the region corresponding to the land KRD. The resist solution may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed, and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decorative board KB has a single reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa through which the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the DIP type connector KCN is inserted, and two connector mounting locking pieces provided in the DIP type connector KCN. Two mountings through which KCNb (instead of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, two screws for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative substrate KB may be used (two rivets may be used)) is inserted. A through hole KBb is formed. In the single reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa and the two mounting through holes KBb, the inner peripheral wall of the above-mentioned through hole is not copper-plated, and the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. It is formed on the decorative substrate KB as a non-through hole having no land.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the DIP type connector KCN is arranged on the front surface (surface) of the housing having a horizontally long square shape, whereas the two connector KCNs provided in the DIP type connector KCN are provided. The connector mounting locking pieces KCNb are arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having a horizontally long square shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are made of the same resin as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN and have the same color.

To briefly explain the mounting of the DIP type connector KCN on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the DIP type connector KTH is applied to the through hole KTH (4 through hole KTH) from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Insert various terminals (4 terminals) of the connector KCN, and insert the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the housing of the DIP type connector KCN into the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Insert and insert the two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided in the housing of the DIP type connector KCN into the two mounting through holes KBb from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB.

Then, the rear surface (back surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is pushed toward the rear surface (back surface) KBy side of the decorative substrate KB, so that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. The reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa may be closed with (Note that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may protrude forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may be the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) The tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb may be flush with the KBx.) The tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb projects forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the decorative substrate KB (surface) ) Locked with KBx, various terminals (4 terminals) of the connector KCN protrude from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. In this state, various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN and the land KRD of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are soldered from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB.

As described above, the housing of the DIP type connector KCN, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa, and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are the same color, and the color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color). , Beige, cream), so when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is closed, and the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa becomes visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, but the tip of this connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is white. Alternatively, because the color is close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is white or has a circular shape having a color close to white, and is a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance by the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform). Further, when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb is forward from the mounting through hole KBx of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. It protrudes and is locked to the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb becomes visible from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, but the tip of this connector mounting locking piece KCNb. Since the color of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb is the same as that of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, the connector mounting locking piece KCNb and its tip are solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB because the color is white or close to white. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform) by being mixed with the white resist, and the presence of through holes is present to the player. The effect of making it difficult to understand can be obtained. Further, even when the substrate portion of the connector mounting portion facing the housing has a through hole which is a through hole for not mounting electronic components, the same effect as the above-mentioned reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa can be obtained, and the reflectance can be improved. It is possible to contribute to making it uniform (uniform), and it is possible to obtain the effect of making the existence of the through hole difficult for the player to understand.

When the above-mentioned connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is not provided on the DIP type connector KCN, the reverse insertion prevention is prevented when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Since there is nothing that blocks the inside of the through hole KBa, the front surface (surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN can be seen from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. Since the color of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is white or close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also white or close to white as the same color as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN. The insertion prevention through hole KBa is white or has a circular shape having a color close to white, and is mixed with the white resist coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. It can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform).

Regarding the configuration of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which the DIP type connector KCN shown in FIGS. 285 (a) and 285 (b) is mounted, the DIP type is attached to the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 described above. When the connector 1400 cc of the above is mounted, it can be applied to the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c. In this way, the housing of the DIP type connector 1400cc and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss are the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the front surface mounting type connector 1400cc is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole formed in the function display board 1400c. The tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss can be seen from the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c by closing the reverse insertion prevention through hole, but the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss is close to black or black. Due to the color, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa becomes black or has a circular shape having a color close to black, and is mixed into the black resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) 1400 cx of the functional display board 1400c. It is possible to reduce the reflectance and contribute to making the reflectance by the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform).

In addition, on the decorative board KB, two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided on the DIP type connector KCN (note that, instead of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, the DIP type connector is used to fix the DIP type connector to the decorative board KB. Two mounting through holes KBb through which two screws or two rivets are inserted were formed as non-through holes, but the inner peripheral wall of the through holes was plated with copper. It may be formed as a through hole having conductivity and fixed by soldering. In this case, the two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb are made of metal. The land of the through hole is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, the beta land) of the decorative substrate KB. By soldering and fixing the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb to the decorative substrate KB, the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb and the decorative substrate KB are grounded (GND) (that is, that is). Betagland) is electrically connected, and noise that invades the DIP type connector KCN can be released to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, Betagland) of the decorative substrate KB, improving noise resistance. Can contribute to. Instead of the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb, two metal screws for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative substrate KB may be used, or two metal rivets may be used. In this case as well, the two metal screws or the two metal rivets are fixed to the decorative substrate KB, so that the two metal screws or the two metal rivets and the decorative substrate KB are fixed. The board ground (GND) (that is, rivet land) is electrically connected, and the noise that enters the DIP type connector KCN is released to the board ground (GND) (that is, rivet land) of the decorative board KB. This can contribute to the improvement of noise resistance.

[5-12-6b. Surface mount type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285 (c) and 285 (d), various terminals of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN (in this embodiment, four terminals are provided, the first terminal: ground terminal, the second terminal: power supply). It is assigned to a terminal (for example, + 12V), a third terminal: a data signal terminal 1 (for example, a serial signal terminal), and a fourth terminal: a data signal terminal 2 (for example, a clock signal terminal). The pad KSP to which a plurality of power supply terminals and a plurality of data credit terminals are assigned can be increased without limitation) is a copper foil of KBy on the back surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. By removing the copper foil on the surface, each of them is formed into a predetermined rectangular shape (in this embodiment, four pad KSPs are formed). One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the pad KSP formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Further, a metal connector fixing portion provided on the housing for fixing the housing of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN to the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB (in the present embodiment, two metal connector fixing portions are used. The fixed pad KSPF to which the (formed) is soldered is formed into a predetermined rectangular shape by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB (in the present embodiment). Two fixed pads KSPF are formed). Although the four corners of the fixed pad KSPF around the fixed pad KSPF are not shown, the fixed pad KSPF is decorated through a cross-shaped pattern by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. It has a thermal pattern that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (ie, betaland) of the substrate KB. Due to this thermal pattern, the heat that melts the solder when soldering the metal connector fixing part provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the fixing pad KSPF of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is generated by the fixing pad KSPF. It can be prevented from being robbed from the outer circumference.

A resist solution is applied to the region corresponding to the pad KSP on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the above-mentioned front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. Further, although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to form the above-mentioned rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr The copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed without applying the resist liquid to the region corresponding to the pad KSP. The resist liquid may not be applied to a region larger than the outer shape of the pad KSP on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed, and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decorative substrate KB is formed with a single reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa through which the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the surface mount type connector KCN is inserted.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the surface mount type connector KCN is arranged on the front surface (surface) of the housing having a horizontally long square shape, whereas it is provided in the surface mount type connector KCN. The two metal connector fixing portions are arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having a horizontally long square shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is made of the same resin as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN, and has the same color.

To briefly explain the mounting of the front surface mounting type connector KCN on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the surface mounting type connector KSP (4 pads KSP) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB Various terminals (4 terminals) of the connector KCN and the metal connector fixing provided on the housing of the surface-mounted type connector KCN to the fixing pad KSPF (2 fixing pads KSPF) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB while aligning the parts (two metal connector fixing parts) with the connector reverse insertion provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. Insert the prevention boss KCNa.

Then, the rear surface (back surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is pushed toward the rear surface (back surface) KBy side of the decorative substrate KB, so that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is closed (the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may protrude forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, and the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may be the decorative substrate KB. The front surface (surface) of the cable may be flush with KBx). In this state, the pad KSP (4 pads KSP) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and the various terminals (4 terminals) of the connector KCN are soldered, and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is soldered. The fixing pad KSPF (two fixing pads KSPF) and the metal connector fixing portion (two metal connector fixing portions) provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN are soldered.

As described above, the surface mount type connector KCN housing and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa have the same color, and the color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color). ), Therefore, when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa to prevent reverse insertion. The tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is visible from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB by closing the through hole KBa, but the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is white or a color close to white. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

When the above-mentioned connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is not provided on the surface mount type connector KCN, the reverse is true when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Since there is nothing that blocks the inside of the insertion prevention through hole KBa, the front surface (surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN can be seen from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. However, since the color of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is white or a color close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also white or white as the same color as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. The colors are close to each other, and it is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Regarding the configuration of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN shown in FIGS. 285 (c) and 285 (d) is mounted, the function display unit of the game board 5 described above. When a surface mount (SMD) type connector 1400 cc is mounted on the 1400, it can be applied to the rear surface (back surface) 1400 cy of the function display board 1400 c. In this way, the housing of the surface mount type connector 1400cc and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss are the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the surface mount type connector 1400cc is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole formed in the function display board 1400c. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole is closed, and the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole becomes visible from the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, but the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole becomes black or black. By having similar colors, it is possible to reduce the reflectance and contribute to making the reflectance by the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform).

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a game board provided with a light emitting means such as a board lamp has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted is required to be able to efficiently reflect the light emitted by the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, a game machine in which a display device is provided in the lower right portion of the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, when a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the display board of the display device, when the light emitted by the light emitting means is reflected on the surface of the display substrate, the color of the light emitted by one light emitting means and another There is a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the color of the light emitted by the light emitting means (the light emitted by the other light emitting means becomes the ambient light).

In addition, conventionally, a game board provided with light emitting means such as a board lamp, a main control board for controlling game progress and game profit, a sub control board for controlling an effect executed with the progress of the game, and the like have been used. The provided gaming machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraphs [0023], [0051], FIGS. 2 and 5)). By the way, since there are places where through holes are formed by routing the wiring pattern on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, there is a possibility that the effect of the effect may be reduced by the presence of the through holes being visually recognized by the player. It was.

[6. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is performed.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 is guided. A plurality of passages are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance opened at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 and the like. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right-handed striking). If the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker to some extent), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the first attacker unit The closed second starting port 2004 in the 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01-600 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. In addition, the normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) in the normal time (non-time reduction state), and the time reduction time (600 seconds in this example). (Time saving state) is changed in a short time. As a result, the normal lottery result is frequently derived during the time saving time (time saving state), so that the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened. In this way, since the second start port 2004 is frequently opened in the time saving time (time saving state), the game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right-handed") is performed. Will do.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of pending results is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being a side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the sill, and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004 or the first big winning opening 2005. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second major winning opening 2006, and the second of the side right middle unit 2700. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted by the starting port 2004 or the first prize winning port 2005.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so that the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to urge a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the probability of accepting the game ball B of the second sub-out port 2012 is lower in the second guide passage 2522 than in the first guide passage 2521. , It is possible to prompt the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than "right-handed" in which the game ball B abuts on the abutting portion 1006, it is possible to promote a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B. You can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly uses.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the center, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2006 when the second big winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 10 pieces, or 10 pieces, or a predetermined number) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second large winning opening 2006 has the first shelf portion 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf portion 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further, the third shelf 2412c, the first winning door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d roll to the left and enter the game area 5a. It is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start door When the 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is performed.

In addition, a special lottery result (No. 1) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 when the game ball B is rolling on the first prize opening door 2417. When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are the special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the lapse of the special fluctuation time. Then, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provide a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 10) from the payout device 580. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first prize opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by having the first prize opening 2005 accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be made to pay out. Can be entertained.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is displayed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big prize has passed after the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is 1) that makes the game balls B unacceptable. A predetermined number of times (referred to as a round) is repeated. For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), and the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", ST (special) is set as an advantageous game state after the first big winning opening 2005 enables the game ball B to be accepted in a predetermined pattern.・ Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the combinations correspond to the special lottery results. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time for suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back effect unit 3100 and the back of the back unit 3000 are provided. Bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

[7. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. 206 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 207 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 208 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 207, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from, it is omitted because of the ease of viewing the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 and electricity. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is two times larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front thereof, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are projected rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) on the lower side and the right side to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501ab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooled fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a includes connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control switch, which are attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The position corresponding to 1510d is a closed, almost horizontally long rectangular area (to be exact, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. The 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed by protruding. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are located at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d, respectively. It is formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume control holes 1501ac8 are exposed.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. A position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular regions (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The cover body 1501 is formed so as to project toward the opening side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. Each will be exposed.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). The protruding portion 1501afa having the dimensions) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) that closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable. In a flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data are arranged in parallel to the effect display device 1600, and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wire from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and projecting outward at a predetermined distance in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to which has a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are formed, and these lands are formed. In 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4, a wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. The 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The bearing surface of the metal pan screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to which has a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to cover the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the 1501a. In this state, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1, 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal. The bearing surface of the pan screw made of the product is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw, the ground of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

As described above, in a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. Is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume adjusting switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gaps formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The gap formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in) is smaller than the sum of. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. It is possible to keep the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of them small.

When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into the FAN can be kept small, but when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks air through the wings and surrounds it. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in an opaque black color, and is the upper side of a horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a when viewed from the front surface. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are projected forward (on the back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base flat plate 1502a is located at a predetermined interval along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board). Each terminal of the connector CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted. Peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at the position where it does not interfere with each protruding terminal because it protrudes from 1510y. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cc and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state where the hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf are in contact with the hinge hook portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd L-shaped hook portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf are hooked on the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
The peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs) described above are on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. The CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attitude, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), various I / O interfaces, etc. are 1 Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player), and various schedule data that regulate the progress of the production. The control ROM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, and the like) and the peripheral data provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A slide type SDRAM 1510c composed of a SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide type that can adjust the volume. A volume control switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Examples of various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, SPI communication or I2C communication is used to provide an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame. Drive data can be transmitted to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids that communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or the game board 5 side. Light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN7) provided in the door frame 3 and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. Is transmitted, signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communication via the connector CN6) are received as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3) are received. It receives signals from (communication) as detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / Os, there are GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are input from the GPIO (connector CN6). It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer to SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards are further provided. I have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB method, an LVDS method, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) method, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) method, and a clockless method. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, with one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, LEDML1 is further provided near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 is provided near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 is provided near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 is provided near the special connector SCN2. , Is equipped. In the peripheral control board 1510, various voltages (+ 24V, + 12V, and + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied via the interface 635. LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which + 24V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which + 24V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface (cover) of the various boards A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

On the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connectors SCN4 provided include the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 to provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they include a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction at all when they are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connector SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket, respectively.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the socket and the plug. Fits. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface of the machine 1. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the back surface of the 1501a.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the socket and the plug. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range (direction between the back surface and the front surface). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral data ROM 1520a (the function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, etc.) Includes.) As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer speed by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise invading the board-to-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 uses the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x as the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during this operation, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to provide a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect display device 1600 proceeds with the game effect (for example, for the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state will not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing images (such as images that convey the fact that the player is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstrations that are performed while waiting for the player). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x, and is mounted on the surface (mounting) of the peripheral control board 1510. (Surface) The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in 1510x and pushed in. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to ensure the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared with the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism capable of arranging, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position).

[7-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The surface (mounting surface) 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 to be formed, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. .. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are made of a metal (not shown). The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting bosses formed on the back surface side are inserted into the protruding portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by covering the peripheral control substrate 1510. Dimensions of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are in contact with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. In a state where the base body 1502 wraps around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw into which an anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 is in contact with each other. The front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the above is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against fraudulent acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of screws from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and mounting the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and is on the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engaging portion 1502ca side) formed in the game panel 1100 is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the above-mentioned assembly method, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is first placed at the predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the above is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is pushed into the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is a cover). It is also possible to fix the body 1501 to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when pushing the board is absorbed, so that the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to reliably form transmission lines between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its peripherals. It is possible to surely form a transmission line between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a substrate that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these two types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system). Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 suitable for the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (grounds of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various substrates to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of the various substrates.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 208, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, angles in multiple directions. The surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is originally kept in a lit state in a state where + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state in which + 5V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin can be matched. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to be confirmed. Area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the state of the IC pin. Are arranged in a distributed manner so that the data can be visually recognized, that is, a large area in which the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pin can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be modified into a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the above. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state in a state where + 24V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Originally, it has a function to check (monitor) the state where + 24V is supplied, but the surface (mounting surface) of the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. ) The special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided on the 1520x. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. A region larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (a shape composed of a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). They are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be. As a result, the inter-board connector can be modified by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it illuminates the inter-board connector brightly by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having a function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of sex.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SRAM 1510c1, so that the model and the state of the IC pin of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and the state of the IC pin can be confirmed from multiple angles. The regions are dispersed and arranged so as to have a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state in a state where + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which + 12V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility between the surface of 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Because it is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface (cover) of the various boards A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, it is possible to brightly illuminate the space formed in this way.

Further, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the region on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face each of the light emitting surfaces of LEDsML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the generated light and direct the peripheral control board 1510 to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x again. As these reflecting portions (not shown), in addition to a bright color colored paint such as white, a glossy colored paint may be used, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. Therefore, a ball path composed of these. The game balls rub against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and be affected by noise. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data. A configuration is adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, noise that invades through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Noise can be removed by flowing it to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[7-5. Partial foil removal of Betta Land]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a ground (GND) other than a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying a power supply, and a region where various land patterns are formed. , So-called beta land (board ground) (also called "solid earth"), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. , The area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is set as a ground (GND), which is formed as a so-called beta land (board ground) (also referred to as "solid earth"). The beta land (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the beta land (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are peripheral control boards. Holes (copper) penetrating a plurality of through holes (both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the peripheral control board 1510) formed on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the 1510. By being electrically connected by the holes to be plated)), they are the same ground (GND).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side when viewed from the front. Positions (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the peripheral control board is inserted. Since it protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the 1510, it is located at a position where it does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals). Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. , The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 The front surface of ~ 1502aa3 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (grounds of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. You can do it.

By the way, the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Betagland was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion, and the betaland was covered with a resist. In the noise resistance test, peripheral control at the contacted portion was performed. A betagrand was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and a peripheral control substrate 1510 at the contacted portion was covered with a resist without forming a betaland on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. As a result of testing with the above, it was found that the one covered with a resist without forming a betagrand on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion had higher noise resistance. ..

When electromagnetic wave noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and invades the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise invades through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection. If the front surface of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is adjacent to the portion in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

Further, among the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with which disconnection prevention rib portion. Since it is unpredictable whether or not it will invade, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component away from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

It should be noted that the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and is solid because a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. In order to invade the brand, when the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta clant are in contact with each other via a resist, a high voltage is applied to the contacting portion due to electromagnetic wave noise invading the base body 1502. Therefore, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring in which electromagnetic wave noise invades from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the beta-gran is formed.

Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the gland will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the shape of the betta land at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and is the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface of the above, and is a schematic view (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings have a copper foil surface in a rectangular foil removing region 1510ya long in the vertical direction having a distance dimension dgw in the left-right direction and a distance dimension dgh in the vertical direction. It is formed at 1510 yp respectively. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, a region in which a part of the betagran is removed (removed) is formed.

In these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is set to the length of deg0, and the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension gg0 between the left side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side thereof and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (dg1) between the right side of the foil removing region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the lateral distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension DG1 between the right side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side thereof and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (dg2) between the upper side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension pg2 between the upper side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

That is, since the foil removal region 1510ya is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp on which the betagland is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal region 1510ya is not electrically connected to the betaland. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510 yp of the peripheral control substrate, the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal region 1510 ya as shown in FIG. 209 (b), and the resist layer 1510 yr Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate. Betagland is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil removal region of the same shape is formed.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and become the same ground (GND). It is configured to be GND). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is peripherally controlled from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 via the foil removing region 1510ya. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "route through which noise escapes" that flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via a metal pan screw.

[7-6. Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and is a board that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Because it is, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 (so-called "". Lands ”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called“ lands ”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (soldering surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, respectively. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to insert the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw.

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removal with metal pan screws. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 is a metal pan. It rubs against the seating surface (seat surface of the head) of the screw pan and peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 and the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side is exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reused because it oxidizes and electrically deteriorates the connectivity. There is a problem that it becomes difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the surfaces thereof. Each copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. While covering it so that it can be connected, the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw are electrically connected. Covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from peeling off from the base material, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the seating surfaces (heads) of the pans of the metal pan screws. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, and the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve the electrical connectivity in a state where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other, and solder. Electrical connection between the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw in contact with each other. The sex can be made good.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise that has penetrated into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed through the metal pan screw to the board ground (grounds of various boards (GND)). ) Is surely formed, so that the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of the conductive resin can be stably maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are as described above. , The copper foil on the surface is soldered so as not to be exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 because the bearing surfaces of the metal pan screws come into contact with each other. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, there is a raised part of the solder), the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. Further, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, must be uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) 1510x It is said that the area where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. There's a problem. If the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Distortion of the control board 1510 will occur, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the copper foil which is the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the bearing surface of the metal pan screw comes into contact. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the metal mask, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the holes formed in the metal mask. By putting the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. Can be done. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). By applying from the holes, putting the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is increased. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[7-7. Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the surfaces. The copper foil was soldered so that it would not be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side and comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side may be coated with a resist solution to cover the land. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with the resist solution. To. Even with this configuration, the metal pan screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan screw. Can be in a state. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By applying the foil with a resist solution and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It was applied from the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was put into a reflow furnace to dry the solder paste with heat, but the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 was dried. ) May be poured into a soldering tank and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. To prevent the area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flown into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, by partially coating the copper foil with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 210 (a), a resist is predetermined for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a single circle having a predetermined width may be formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 210 (b), the resist has a predetermined width. And a shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape as the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 210 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed separated by a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width may be formed, or the resist has a predetermined width. A plurality of lines having only the lateral direction separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed.) As shown in FIG. 210 (d), the lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and rise to the right. A shape in which a plurality of diagonal lines are formed (a shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width of a resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a diagonal line), a small circular shape (not shown) The assembled shape and the like can be mentioned.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. The amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It can be made uniform so that the solder does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts a predetermined figure formed by such a resist with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but the metal pan head screw has a flat washer, a spring washer, and a tooth. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the cover 1501 made of a conductive resin, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a Lands 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 while being in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the When ~ 1510rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 were electrically connected, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but they were conductive. A metal cover 1501'may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, a metal one instead of the conductive resin one, or the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring drawer opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently dissipated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently dissipated to the outside air in the metal partial case.

Since the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case, it is made of a metal board box or a metal. Noise may enter the partial case of. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of pieces formed on the amplifier board. The land and the metal cover of the metal substrate box or the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal partial case are in contact with each other. , A plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, so that the metal is passed through the metal pan screw. The metal cover or metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the multiple lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover or metal of the metal board box is made of metal. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover of the metal board box or the metal partial case via the metal pan screw to efficiently dissipate heat to the outside air. You can also do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Therefore, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used for a two-story board (so-called "Kamenoko board"). it can. For example, multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, and multiple lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) on the child board, and multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected. By screwing the land and the multiple lands of the child board at both ends of the metal support (spacer), electricity is supplied through the multiple lands of the parent board, the multiple lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). It can be in a connected state. As a result, the ground (GND) of the parent substrate and the ground (GND) of the child substrate can be made the same ground (GND) via the metal support column (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board 633 that house the main control board 1310 are housed. When the payout control board box 632 is configured to be made of conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to the rules, and those made of conductive resin are used. Although it is not possible, the board box for accommodating the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for accommodating various relay boards are configured to be made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed by the same method. By doing so, it is possible to exert the same effect as the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of the conductive resin described above on the board box accommodating the power supply board and various relay board boxes accommodating various relay boards. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball tank includes a board-to-board connector with a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector with a special connector SCN2 provided on a peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on a liquid crystal output board 1530. By arranging it closer to the center of 552, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside via a plurality of notches 553aa formed on the lower side thereof (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). By arranging the above-mentioned inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to cause electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the state where the 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 206, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector can be reduced by arranging the connectors in the vertical direction, so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. The area of adhesion can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area where dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres becomes extremely large. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 206, and the area of the upper surface of each connector is large. Is arranged so that the area where dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres becomes extremely large. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is. The protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a prevents the plugs from being projected from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted. Even if dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, the orientation in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the orientation in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal methods to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector to be a socket) as a plug, and correspondingly, the socket on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a special connector (or a plug). A special connector) can be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in any one or in combination of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring increases.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, so that the peripheral control board box 1505 falls onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

[8. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. Has been done. The main control board 1310 can control the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect, and can control various effects during the game based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 and a peripheral control unit. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that can control the display of the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that can control the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. There is.

[8-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200. For explanation, the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front of the board holder 1200. The surface opposite to the front side (that is, the surface on the rear side) of the main control board 1310 facing the rear surface may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310" on which electronic components are mounted. Although detailed illustration of the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is omitted, a green coating film (hereinafter, hereinafter, a green coating film) formed by applying a green resist solution to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by simply "a solid green resist"), which controls the power-on processing executed at power-on and a predetermined time has passed since the power-on. From the main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs such as the main control program that controls the game operation to be executed later, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various sensors. The main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal of the above is input, the main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids are predetermined. A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a voltage failure or momentary power failure, and a RAM clear switch 1310f that has a pressing operation unit for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. It has. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

Main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, RAM clear switch 1310f, various connectors, etc. are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A through hole having a mounting surface side land through which various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted and a through having a mounting surface side land through which the DIP type electronic component is not inserted are mounted. The holes are formed, and a green resist layer is formed by the solid green resist in the entire area excluding the land on the mounting surface side and the through holes. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310, a solder surface side land corresponding to the through hole is formed, and in the entire area excluding the solder surface side land and the through ho, a solid green resist is used. A green resist layer is formed. The mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the solder surface side land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the solder surface side wiring pattern. When various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 into a through hole having a land on the mounting surface side, the back surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the inserted through hole is inserted. The DIP type electronic components are fixed to the main control board 1310 by being in a state of projecting from the solder surface side land formed on the (solder surface) and soldering the protruding various terminal pins and the solder surface side land. It becomes a state. As described above, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are formed by applying a green resist liquid to form a green coating film (that is, a green resist layer formed by a solid green resist). However, the green coating film is not covered at all on the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land. This is because the pachinko machine 1 has a back in the island facility of the game hall. There are multiple rows of game balls facing each other, and the game balls that have become hot after being polished are supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the heat released from the pachinko machine 1 is also added to create a closed space called island equipment. In order to prevent the main control board 1310, which is an important board for controlling the progress of the game, from being affected by heat and causing thermal runaway due to the increase in the temperature inside, the land on the mounting surface side, the through hole, and the solder The copper foil portion of the surface side land is exposed. This makes it possible to improve the heat dissipation efficiency of the main control board 1310 and contribute to the prevention of thermal runaway of the main control board 1310.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control") that updates the big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch 1310f, attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (further) , The shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component may be included.) It is a white paint that is easily noticeable, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. Further, the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the main control board 1310 is also arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see because the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are transmitted from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground of the main control board 1310), and various signals are externally connected to the various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit with reset function equipped with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information of various signals to be output to the board, etc., and a reset function without a reset terminal It is composed of a main control output circuit without a reset function, which does not have. The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, in the main control output circuit with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the main control system reset, and the signal based on the information is reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no output is made from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is generated. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, the gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball B that is received in the second start port 2004. The second start port sensor 2401 for detecting the above, the general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first grand prize for detecting the game ball B received in the first grand winning opening 2005. Mouth sensor 2402, second big winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, out opening sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out opening 2010, first sub-out opening The first sub-out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in 2011, the second sub-out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, 3055, etc. to be detected are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function based on these detection signals, thereby driving the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with a reset function. By outputting the control signal to the circuit 1310d, the drive signal can be output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., or its predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special of the function display unit 1400 from the main control output circuit with a reset function. Each drive signal is output to the symbol display, the first special hold number display, the second special symbol display, the second special hold number display, the round display, and the like.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, so that the payout control board 633 is output from the main control output circuit with a reset function. Main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to the game or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the game ball B The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B frequently enters. , The detection of the game ball B by the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 and the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2402 and the second prize opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without a reset function as serial data, so that the payout control board 633 does not have a reset function. Various commands are sent as serial data to. When the payout control board 633 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function. No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Various voltages (DC + 24V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. The RAM clear signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. It has become like. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without the reset function, and is also output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without the reset function.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 24V from the power supply board 630, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these DC + 12V and DC + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is from a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Along with being input to the input terminal, the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output times 1310c) and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. Is entered in. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display device 1600 in addition to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and further, the door frame 3 is input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635. It is input to various boards etc. attached to The power failure warning signal may be configured so as not to be input to various boards or the like attached to the door frame 3.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power lines, a power line to which DC + 12V is supplied (+ 12V power line) and a power line to which DC + 24V is supplied (+ 24V power line). By monitoring each voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure compared to the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line or the + 24V power line. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is provided on the main control board 1310 as described above, but DC + 12V and DC + 24V are supplied from the power supply board 630, and these DC + 12V and DC are supplied. Since it monitors signs of a + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, it may be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630 instead of the main control board 1310. By doing so, since the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e does not need to be provided on the main control board 1310, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not required every time the game board 5 is manufactured, which can contribute to the cost reduction of the game board 5.

[8-2. Payout control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 that controls the launch and ball feed of the game ball B is a payout control that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. It is housed in the board box 632, and for explanation, the surface opposite to the front side (that is, the surface to be the rear side) of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. It may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633" on which the electronic component is mounted. The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a green coating film formed by applying a green resist liquid on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, simply "solid coating"). A green resist layer is formed by (may be described as “green resist”), and the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and the ball feed solenoid 145. Error cancellation having a launch control unit 633b that controls ball feeding, an error LED display 633c that displays the status of the soldering machine 1, and a pressing operation unit that cancels the error displayed on the error LED display 633c. It is equipped with a switch 633d.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, DIP type electronic components constituting the payout control unit 633a, the launch control unit 633b, the error LED display 633c, the error release switch 633d, various connectors, etc. are mounted. , A through hole having a mounting surface side land through which various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted and a through hole having a mounting surface side land through which DIP type electronic components are not inserted are formed, and the mounting surface side land and the mounting surface side land are formed. A green resist layer is formed by the solid green resist in the entire area except for the through holes. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633, a solder surface side land corresponding to the through hole is formed, and in the entire area excluding the solder surface side land and the through ho, a solid green resist is used. A green resist layer is formed. The mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, and the solder surface side land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. It is electrically connected to the solder surface side wiring pattern. When various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 into a through hole having a land on the mounting surface side, the back surface of the payout control board 633 corresponding to the inserted through hole. It is in a state of protruding from the land on the solder surface side formed on the (solder surface), and the various terminal pins protruding from the land on the solder surface side are soldered to fix the DIP type electronic component to the payout control board 633. It becomes a state. As described above, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control substrate 633 are formed by applying a green resist liquid to form a green coating film (that is, a green resist layer formed by a solid green resist). However, the green coating film is not covered at all on the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land. This is because the pachinko machine 1 has a back in the island facility of the game hall. There are multiple rows of game balls facing each other, and the game balls that have become hot after being polished are supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the heat released from the pachinko machine 1 is also added to create a closed space called island equipment. In order to prevent the payout control board 633, which is an important board for controlling the payout of the game ball, from being affected by heat and causing thermal runaway due to the increase in the temperature inside, the mounting surface side land, through hole, and The copper foil portion of the land on the solder surface side is exposed. This makes it possible to improve the heat dissipation efficiency of the payout control board 633 and contribute to the prevention of thermal runaway of the payout control board 633.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch 633d, the attribute of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the surface side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged (further) , The shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component may be included.) It is a white paint that is easily noticeable, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633. Since the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. Further, the error release switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is also arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see because the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[8-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633, controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and also performs a game medium payout operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. The payout control MPU633aa, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs including the payout control program to be controlled, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input. The payout control input circuit 633ab, the payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board, and the payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. It has.

The payout control MPU633aa includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and its operation (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") that monitors the system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 633ab, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are transmitted from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground of the payout control board 633), and various signals are externally connected to the various input terminals thereof. A payout control output circuit with a reset function that is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information of various signals for output to the board, etc., and a reset function that is not provided with a reset terminal. It is composed of a payout control output circuit without a reset function. The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the payout control system reset, and the signal based on the information is reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no output is made from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the payout control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is generated. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the various output terminals.

Detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154 of foul cover unit 150, detection signal from ball cut detection sensor 574 of ball guidance unit 570, detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590 of payout device 580, payout detection of payout device 580 The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuits. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU633aa normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa transmits various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without the reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby payout control output without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED display 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with the reset function to the error LED display 633c.

The error LED display 633d is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball gummy" (specifically). Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other to indicate that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has a problem based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". Notifies that it is "tan" (specifically, that the lower plate 202 is full in the game ball B stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , When the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). Has been reached) is notified.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a prize ball to the payout control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby payout control with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal plate 558 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photoIC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball B and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. It is designed so that the computer does not malfunction or break down, and it is possible to control the main control board 1310, payout, etc., which allows the game to proceed from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be made and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect so as not to malfunction or break down. The hall computer grasps the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as prize balls, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, so that the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called). , Ball launch information) and the player's game are monitored.

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. .. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is transmitted to the payout control board 633 via a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown) of the payout control MPU633aa. It is designed to be input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is a ball. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the rental operation unit 220.

Various voltages (DC + 24V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is output as an operation signal (RAM clear signal). It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633aa completely erases (clears) the RAM of the payout control built-in RAM. There is.

[8-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b is based on a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various sensors related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and an oscillation circuit based on the clock signal. A launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch reference. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on a pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects this is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

[8-3. Peripheral control board]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is described as a green coating film (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist solution on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). As shown in FIG. 211, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit 1511 and its surroundings capable of controlling various effects during the game based on various commands from the main control board 1310. It also has a function with the above-mentioned effect display control unit 1512 that can control the display of the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the control unit 1511, and has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, etc. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data that regulates the progress of various programs and effects in advance, and a peripheral data ROM. Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520 can be transferred and stored in the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the slide-type volume adjustment capable of adjusting the volume. It includes a switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). ing. Examples of the various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

Peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, volume control switch 1510d, backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit (not shown), peripheral control input circuit (not shown), various connectors, etc. are configured on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface mount (SMD) type electronic components are mounted, and pads to which various terminals of surface mount (SMD) type electronic components are soldered, through holes with mounting surface side lands (that is, various terminals of electronic components) A through hole having a mounting surface side land through which is not inserted) is formed, and a green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist in the entire area excluding the pad, the mounting surface side land and the through hole. .. Further, on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510, a back surface side land corresponding to the through hole is formed, and a green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist in the entire area excluding the back surface side land and the through ho. Has been done. The mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the back surface side land are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surface side land is electrically connected to the back surface side wiring pattern on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected. Various terminals of surface mount (SMD) type electronic components are arranged on pads formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and various terminals and pads are soldered to surface mount (SMD). The type of electronic component is fixed to the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, a green resist layer is formed by applying a green resist liquid (that is, a solid green resist). However, in addition to the pad, the green coating is not covered at all on the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the back surface side land.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has various control information (periphery) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one of the initial setting processes when the power is turned on (including the case where the power is restored from a power failure). Data) is controlled to be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a transfer rate of 2 Gbps between the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the peripheral data ROMs 1520a at high speed. .. As control information (peripheral data), a plurality of image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs to be mounted, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, various types provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling the movable effect body.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information or delete the information during processing. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system, the CPU reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 from the main control board 1310 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. ..

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by controlling the data so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various effects flow.

Based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the LCDs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generates drawing data for drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the output to the liquid crystal output board 1530 is controlled. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where it can accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convey that fact.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like by reading sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, generating and outputting the sound data based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and the read schedule data. Various game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color color LED, or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is output to the DRAM 1510c1, 1510c2. It can be read from and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the effect drive board 1720, or various drive motors and various drive solenoids provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5. Various game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the game board side electric drive source such as, etc. are read from the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the effect drive board 1720, or the door. Door frame side electrical drive source for the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the frame 3 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 (including the drive solenoid when the drive solenoid is provided on the door frame 3 side). Outputs various door frame side drive data for outputting drive signals to, and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to full-color LEDs, monochromatic color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Various door frame side light emission data for this purpose are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side.

The detection signals from the various detection sensors provided in the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are input to the various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit. Has been done. Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevating detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348. The detection signal from is received (input) to various serial I / O ports (or various parallel I / O ports) of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, signals from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. ..

The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[9. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 213. FIG. 212 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 213 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 212. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the backup power supply, the power supply supplied to each control board, and the method of fixing the fuse will be described. The substrate grounds (GNDs) of various substrates and the substrate grounds (GNDs) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of the power supply substrate 630 and are the same grounds (GNDs).

[9-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIGS. 95 and 96 and the like is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of this power cord is connected to the power outlet of the island facility in the game hall. It is plugged in. In the island equipment of the game hall, a system is usually adopted in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 are supplied as one group to each transformer with AC power (AC 24V). For example, in the island facility of the game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group. Since a system is adopted in which an AC power supply (AC 24V) is supplied (by a total of five transformers), a transformer having a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC power supply (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on, while the power switch 630a When is turned off, the AC power supply (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is not supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off. The power switch 630a is normally maintained in the ON-operated state, and when a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall starts business, the breaker installed in the game hall is turned on (turned on) to turn on the island of the game hall. The power of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows in the equipment is turned on all at once. Then, after the business is closed, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall turns off (turns off) the breakers installed in the game hall to shut off the power of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in multiple rows in the island facilities of the game hall all at once. Do. For this reason, among the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows in the island equipment of the game hall, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or off individually, for example, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall performs maintenance. When the power switch 630a is sometimes turned off and the power switch 630a is turned on again when the maintenance is completed, a clerk in the game hall, etc., has a problem with the pachinko machine 1 in order to solve the problem. The case where the person in charge of the power switch 630a is turned off and the power switch 630a is turned on again when the trouble is solved can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 212, the power supply board 630 includes fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, noise suppression circuit 630b, rectifier circuit 630c, power supply destruction circuit 630g, power factor improvement circuit 630d, smoothing circuit 630e, and power supply, in addition to the power supply switch 630a. It is provided with a creation circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power supply (AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V”)) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is an interface board via the power supply board 630 regardless of the ON operation / OFF operation of the power switch 630a. It is supplied to 635, and is supplied from the interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the noise suppression circuit 630b via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and the power switch 630a, and noise is generated in the noise suppression circuit 630b. Will be removed. The AC24V from which noise has been removed is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, and is rectified (converted from AC to DC (AC-DC conversion)) in the rectifier circuit 630c to become a DC power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a DC + 35V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 35V”) having an improved power factor is created in the power factor improving circuit 630d. Will be done. The created + 35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, and the ripple of + 35V is removed and smoothed in the smoothing circuit 630e. This smoothed + 35V is supplied to the power supply creation circuit 630f. When the voltage supplied to itself exceeds a predetermined voltage, the power supply destruction circuit 630g blows a large current exceeding the allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to blow them from the island equipment of the game hall. It electrically cuts the supplied AC24V. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit (disruption current) flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element portion of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is blown and AC24V to the subsequent fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. To shut off.

The power supply creation circuit 630f to which the smoothed + 35V is supplied includes a + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, a + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and a + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc. The + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa creates DC + 5V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 5V”) from + 35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb creates DC + 12V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc creates DC + 24V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply system created by the power supply board 630 to which + 5V is applied is created by the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system created by the power supply board 630 to which + 12V is applied and supplied is created by the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply board 630. The power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied becomes the + 24V power supply line.

[9-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”), and the capacitor BC1 supplies the payout control in the payout control board 633. A backup power supply is supplied to the RAM built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”).

+ 5V of the power supply making circuit 630f + 5V created by the power supply making circuit 630fa is supplied to the payout control board 633. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes a + 5V power supply line in the payout control board 633 via the payout control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and is a RAM with a built-in payout control via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the power supply terminal of. The + 12V created by the + 12V power supply making circuit 630f of the power supply making circuit 630f is supplied to the + 5V making circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V from + 12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the main control MPU 1310a. + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g (hereinafter, may be referred to as “main control board side creation + 5V”) is created by the main control board side in the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h + 5V power supply. It becomes a line and is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. The + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creating circuit 630fa of the power supply creating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the + 5V (created by the main control board side + 5V) created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 are electric. They are not connected to each other and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 633. That is, the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and the power supply of the discharge control built-in RAM which is forward by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is electrically such that + 5V created by the + 5V power supply making circuit 630fa of the power supply making circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 returns to the payout control board 633 and again from the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. With various connection methods, + 5V can be supplied and charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa and the payout control MPU633aa does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The stored contents of the RAM with built-in payout control are retained.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, the + 5V (created on the main control board side + 5V) created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0. , Current flows toward the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical connection method in which + 5V (main control board side creation + 5V) created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, + 5V created on the main control board side is supplied and can be charged. As a result, + 12V created by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is + 5V. When it becomes impossible to create (main control board side creation + 5V), the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 633. Therefore, the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the main control MPU1310a does not operate. However, the main control is supplied by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. The stored contents of the built-in RAM are retained.

[9-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the power supply mainly supplied to the payout control board and the power supply supplied to the main control board will be described.

The three types of power supplies, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, respectively, created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are shown in FIG. 212. Of these three types of power supplies, two types of power supplies, + 12V and + 24V, are supplied to the payout control board 633, and are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The three types of power supplies created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are transferred to the interface board 635. In addition to being supplied, the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like are supplied via the interface board 635, respectively.

The three types of power supplies, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., are blown due to an overcurrent flowing through each of these power supply lines. A + 5V fuse (not shown), a + 12V fuse (not shown), and a + 24V fuse (not shown) may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like, respectively.

In particular, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line are monitored for a decrease in potential by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the potential of the + 12V power supply line and the potential of the + 12V power supply line decrease. When the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the payout control MPU 63aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on turn process described later. The payout control MPU633aa stops the progress of the game by performing the payout control unit power cut-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later to stop the payout progress (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball). Will be done.

Therefore, when a + 12V fuse (not shown) and a + 24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, the main control board 1310 constituting the main board is provided. When the payout control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635 and the door frame main are in the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line such as the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame clothing relay board 105. An electrical trouble to the relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. may cause a leakage current or a short circuit, resulting in an interface board 635, a door frame main relay board 104, etc. When an overcurrent flows through the door frame clothing relay board 105 or the like, the + 12V fuse or the + 24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. is blown. be able to. As a result, the drop in the potential of the + 12V power supply line and the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is mainly controlled by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. It is not necessary to output to the MPU1310a or the payout control MPU63aa, and the main control MPU1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on time processing described later, and the payout can be continued. The control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power off time process in the payout control unit power on-time process described later.

As shown in FIG. 213, the three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the effect drive board via the + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, and the + 24V fuse SF24. It is supplied to 1720 respectively. The + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the effect drive board 1720 via the + 12V fuse SF12, and is also supplied to the effect display device 1600 via the + 12V fuse SF12 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Has been done. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 relays + 12V supplied through the + 12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device.

The + 5V fuse SF5 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the + 5V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used by the subsequent board such as the effect drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the control board around the + 5V power supply line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the + 5V power supply line flows in the + 5V fuse SF5, the element portion of the + 5V fuse SF5 is blown and supplied via the + 5V fuse SF5. Cut off the + 5V power line.

The + 12V fuse SF12 includes the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, and subsequent boards such as the effect drive board 1720 and various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The current used in the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used in the succeeding device such as the effect display device 1600 via the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into consideration to set the capacity in advance, and the allowable current of the peripheral control board of the + 12V power supply line is set. Current can flow up to the upper limit (cutoff current). In the + 12V fuse SF12, when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the + 12V power supply line flows, the element portion of the + 12V fuse SF12 is blown and supplied via the + 12V fuse SF12. Cut off the + 12V power supply line.

The capacity of the + 24V fuse SF24 is preset by taking into account the current used in the subsequent board such as the effect drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the + 24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. The current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the control board around the power supply line. When the peripheral control board 1510 uses + 24V to provide an electrical drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) with a + 24V system driver circuit, the peripheral control board 1510 in the + 24V power supply line is used as the capacity of the + 24V fuse SF24. The current used by itself and the current used in a subsequent board such as the effect drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 are added and set in advance. In the + 24V fuse SF24, when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the + 24V power supply line flows, the element portion of the + 24V fuse SF24 is blown and supplied via the + 24V fuse SF24. Cut off the + 24V power line.

The + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, and the + 24V fuse SF24 are the original sources in which the + 5V power supply line, the +12 power supply line, and the + 24V power supply line are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 to the succeeding boards such as the effect drive board 1720. Since it is a fuse, the flowing current is large and it may generate heat. Therefore, it is placed away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC1510a so as not to cause a failure due to the thermal shutdown built in the IC due to the influence of this heat generation. In particular, near the connector to which the + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the interface board 635 (in particular, near the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which the + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the interface board 635 is connected. ) Is preferably arranged.

The peripheral control board 1510 is a control that creates DC 3.3V (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 3.3V”) as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the peripheral control IC 1510a from + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse SF12. It is equipped with a power supply creation circuit 1510z. The + 3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit 1510z is the CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA integrated on one semiconductor chip as the peripheral control IC 1510a (peripheral control IC 1510a) via the control power supply fuse SF3. It is supplied to the controller, various I / O interfaces, etc.), and is supplied to the peripheral control data ROM board 1520, although it is a local power source for the peripheral control board 1510. The + 3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit 1510z becomes a + 3.3V power supply line in the peripheral control board 1510 and a + 3.3V power supply line in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the control power supply fuse SF3. The control power supply creation circuit 1510z is supplied via the + 5V power supply line and / or the + 24V fuse SF24 supplied via the + 5V fuse SF5, except for the + 12V power supply line supplied via the + 12V fuse SF12. Even if an abnormal current flows through the + 24V power supply line and the fuse blows, + 3.3V, which is a local power supply that serves as a control power supply for the peripheral control IC 1510a, can be created from + 12V from the + 12V power supply line. The control IC 1510a does not stop and operates continuously, and when the + 24V fuse SF24 is blown, it becomes difficult to drive the + 24V electric drive source (drive solenoid), but the progress of the production is continued. can do.

In addition to + 3.3V, the control power supply creation circuit 1510z has a plurality of control power supplies corresponding to each device such as the control ROM 1510b and the SDRAM 1510c of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as local power supplies. (For example, DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as "+ 1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+ 1.25V"), etc.) may be created. In this case, the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies (for example, a + 3.3V fuse for + 3.3V and a + 1.5V for + 1.5V). For + 1.25V, a + 1.5V fuse is provided, and a + 3.3V power line is provided via a + 3.3V fuse, and a + 1.5V power line is provided via a + 1.5V fuse, resulting in a + 1.5V power line. It becomes a + 1.25V power supply line through a fuse for .25V).

The control power supply fuse SF3 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the + 3.3 V power supply line and the current used by a subsequent board such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is preset, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the control board around the +3.3V power supply line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the +3.3 V power supply line flows through the control power supply fuse SF3, the element portion of the control power supply fuse SF3 is blown and the control power supply fuse SF3 is used. The + 3.3V power supply line to the subsequent supply is cut off. When the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, + 3.3V fuse for + 3.3V, + 1.5V fuse for + 1.5V, +1 When a + 1.25V fuse is provided for .25V), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the subsequent board such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510 This current and its capacity are preset in consideration of, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the control board around each power supply line of the plurality of control power supplies, and each of the plurality of control power supplies. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board around the power supply line flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse SF3 provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies is blown, and the blown control power supply fuse is blown. The power supply line of the subsequent control power supply supplied via the SF3 is cut off.

The control power supply fuse SF3 is the main fuse of the + 3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control IC1510a, etc., and is affected by this heat generation because the flowing current is large and heat may be generated. It is preferable to dispose of the peripheral control IC 1510a away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a so as not to cause a failure due to the thermal shutdown built in the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is preferable that it is arranged near the terminal supplied as the +3.3 power supply line).

In the present embodiment, the + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, the + 24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses and are predetermined. When a current that exceeds the permissible upper limit of the permissible current (each predetermined breaking current) flows, it blows. Unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, even if the current drops, the power line is connected to the following. It is an electronic component that cannot be supplied. As the + 5V fuse SF5, + 12V fuse SF12, + 24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as the + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, the + 24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current is restarted. On the other hand, a power line can be supplied.

Of the three types of power supplies, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the production drive board 1720, + 5V is supplied to the input buffer circuit 1720a and the like via the + 5V fuse EF5, and + 24V is played via the + 24V fuse EF24. It is supplied to the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 that drives and controls the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the board 5, and + 12V is supplied to the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 via the + 12V fuse EF12. It is supplied to the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 for drive control, and is also supplied to a plurality of decorative boards provided in the game board 5 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5").

The capacity of the + 5V fuse EF5 is preset in consideration of the current used by the production drive board 1720 itself in the + 5V power supply line of the production drive board 1720, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 5V power supply line production drive board (disconnection current). ) Can be passed. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 5V power line effect drive board flows through the + 5V fuse EF5, the element portion of the + 5V fuse EF5 is blown and supplied via the + 5V fuse EF5. Cut off the + 5V power line.

The + 12V fuse EF12 includes a current used by the production drive board 1720 itself in the + 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720 and a current used by a subsequent board such as each decorative board of the game board 5 via the production drive board 1720. , Is added and the capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disconnection current) of the + 12V power supply line effect drive board. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power line effect drive board flows through the + 12V fuse EF12, the element portion of the + 12V fuse EF12 is blown and supplied via the + 12V fuse EF12. Cut off the + 12V power supply line.

The capacity of the + 24V fuse EF24 is preset in consideration of the current used by the production drive board 1720 itself in the + 24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720, and the + 24V power supply line production drive board allowable current upper limit (disconnection current). ) Can be passed. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power line effect drive board flows through the + 24V fuse EF24, the element portion of the + 24V fuse EF24 is blown and supplied via the + 24V fuse EF24. Cut off the + 24V power line.

The + 5V fuse EF5, + 12V fuse EF12, and + 24V fuse EF24 are fuses that supply a + 5V power supply line, a +12 power supply line, and a + 24V power supply line, and are the original + 5V fuse SF5 and + 12V on the peripheral control board 1510. Compared to the fuse SF12 for + 24V and the fuse SF24 for + 24V, the current that flows is small, but the current is large and may generate heat. For example, due to the influence of this heat generation, the thermal shutdown unit built in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 It is preferable to arrange the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 and other electronic components away from the electronic components so that the function does not cause a failure due to shutdown, and the vicinity of the connector to which + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 (particularly). It is preferably arranged near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which + 5V, + 12V, + 24V is supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 is connected.

The input buffer circuit 1720a receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, and removes noise from the input control signal. The output is to the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 and the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2. Specifically, the input buffer circuit 1720a is supplied to a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720 via the + 5V fuse EF5, respectively. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of the resistor to which + 5V is applied and one end of the resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected to remove noise that has entered multiple wirings (harnesses). This makes it possible to improve the noise resistance.

The + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is provided in a driver IC that drives the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and a fuse that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC (hereinafter, "+ 24V system driver circuit 1720c1"). It may be described as "a fuse to be used"), and it is mainly composed of. The + 24V supplied via the + 24V fuse EF24 is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is obtained by adding the current used in the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 in the + 24V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disruption current) of the drive solenoid on the game board side. The fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 blows the element part of the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows, and the + 24V system driver The + 24V power supply line to the subsequent supply supplied through the fuse provided in the circuit 1720c1 is cut off.

The + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is provided in a driver IC that drives the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC (hereinafter, "+ 12V system driver circuit 1720c2"). It may be described as "fuse"), and it is mainly composed of. The + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse EF12 is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is obtained by adding the current used in the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disruption current) of the drive motor on the game board side. The fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 blows the element part of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows, and the + 12V system driver The + 12V power supply line to the subsequent supply supplied through the fuse provided in the circuit 1720c2 is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the + 5V fuse EF5, the + 12V fuse EF12, the + 24V fuse EF24, the fuse provided in the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1 and the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are surface mount type. It is a (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows, it blows. Unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, it blows. It is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. The + 5V fuse EF5, the + 12V fuse EF12, the + 24V fuse EF24, the fuse provided in the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1 and the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are used as SMD type chip fuses. Instead, a lead type fuse may be used. Further, the fuse provided in the + 5V fuse EF5, the + 12V fuse EF12, the + 24V fuse EF24, the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1 of the effect drive board 1720, and the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 are of SMD type or lead type. A resettable fuse such as a thermistor may be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current is restarted. On the other hand, a power line can be supplied.

The + 12V supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 is referred to as a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and monochromatic LEDs provided in the game board 5 via the + 12V fuse DF12 (hereinafter, "various LEDs of the game board 5" and the like). It may be described.) Is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit capable of passing a constant current through various LEDs of the game board 5 and a maximum current of the current flowing through the various LEDs of the game board 5. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. If the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with the input buffer circuit corresponding to the input buffer circuit 1720a described above, an input buffer circuit corresponding to the input buffer circuit 1720a described above is provided in front of the LED constant current drive circuit. It may be provided.

The + 12V fuse DF12 has a capacity set in advance in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5 in consideration of the respective currents used in each of the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the decorative board on the game board side. The current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side flows in the + 12V fuse DF12, the element portion of the + 12V fuse DF12 is blown and supplied via the + 12V fuse DF12 to the subsequent fuse DF12. Cut off the + 12V power line.

The + 12V fuse DF12 is a fuse that supplies a +12 power supply line, and although the flowing current is smaller than that of the original + 12V fuse SF12 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the + 12V fuse EF12 on the effect drive board 1720. Since the current is large and heat may be generated, it is preferable to dispose of the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit away from each other so that the various LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are not damaged by the influence of the heat generation. It is preferably arranged near the connector to which + 12V is supplied from the effect drive board 1720 (particularly, near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which + 12V is supplied from the effect drive board 1720 is connected).

In the present embodiment, the + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and exceeds a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). When a current flows, it blows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. As the + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as the fuse DF12 for each decorative substrate + 12V of the game board 5, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current is restarted. On the other hand, a power line can be supplied.

The + 12V supplied to the effect display device 1600 passes through the + 12V fuse PF12 as the front fuse that becomes the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, and the + 12V fuse PF12a1 as the first rear fuse that becomes the fuse of the branch first system. And, as the second post-stage fuse which becomes the fuse of the branch second system, the + 12V fuse PF12a2 is branched and supplied. The + 12V supplied as the first subsequent fuse via the + 12V fuse PF12a1 is supplied to the liquid crystal panel power supply creating circuit 1600z that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply to be supplied to the liquid crystal panel. In addition to supplying the created liquid crystal panel power supply to the liquid crystal panel, the liquid crystal panel power supply creating circuit 1600z may supply the created liquid crystal panel power supply to the backlight and the drive circuit. The + 12V supplied as the second rear fuse via the + 12V fuse PF12a2 is supplied to the backlight and the drive circuit. The + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12a2 is supplied to the backlight and the drive circuit, and may also be supplied to the liquid crystal panel.

The + 12V fuse PF12, which serves as the main fuse, has a preset capacity that takes into account the currents used by the directing display device 1600 in the + 12V power supply line of the directing display device 1600. The current can flow up to the breaking current). The + 12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse, is supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12 by melting the element portion of the + 12V fuse PF12 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the main allowable current upper limit flows. Cut off the + 12V power line to.

The + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the fuse of the first branch system is the current used in the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z in the + 12V power supply line supplied through the + 12V fuse PF12 which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. The capacity is preset in consideration of the current used in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, the drive circuit, and the like, and the current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (disconnection current) of the first branch system. The + 12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, blows the element portion of the + 12V fuse PF12a1 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system flows, and the + 12V fuse PF12a1 is blown. The + 12V power supply line to the subsequent supply supplied through the fuse is cut off.

The + 12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, is used in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. in the + 12V power supply line supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. The capacity is set in advance in consideration of the current to be generated, and the current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (disconnection current) of the second branch system. The + 12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, blows the element portion of the + 12V fuse PF12a2 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the second branch system flows, and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 is blown. The + 12V power line to the subsequent supply supplied through the fuse is cut off.

The + 12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, and PF12a2 are fuses that supply a +12 power supply line, and flow as compared with the original + 12V fuse SF12 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the + 12V fuse EF12 on the effect drive board 1720. Although the current is small, the current is large and heat may be generated. Therefore, for example, the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z and the effect display device 1600 liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit should not be damaged by the influence of this heat generation. , The liquid crystal panel power supply making circuit 1600z and the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 are preferably arranged away from each other, and the vicinity of the connector to which + 12V is supplied from the liquid crystal output board 1530 (particularly, the liquid crystal output). It is preferably arranged near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which + 12V is supplied from the board 1530 is connected.

In the present embodiment, the + 12V fuse PF12, the + 12V fuse PF12a1 and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 are surface-mounted type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and the allowable current upper limit (each When a current exceeding (predetermined breaking current) flows, it blows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, even if the current drops, the power line cannot be supplied to the following electrons. It is a part. The + 12V fuse PF12, the + 12V fuse PF12a1, and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. Further, as the + 12V fuse PF12, the + 12V fuse PF12a1 and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current is restarted. On the other hand, a power line can be supplied.

The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the door frame clothing relay board 105 are described as door frame side drive boards (hereinafter, "each drive board of the door frame 3") provided in the door frame 3 and not shown. (In some cases) and a plurality of decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "each decorative substrate of the door frame 3") are supplied with the power required by themselves, and the power supply is supplied. The corresponding fuses (not shown) are provided on the substrate.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 has, for example, a + 24V electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) in addition to a fuse (for example, a + 5V fuse, a + 24V fuse, and a + 12V fuse) corresponding to a power supply. A fuse provided in a + 24V system driver circuit for drive control, a fuse provided in a + 12V system driver circuit for driving and controlling a + 12V system electric drive source (for example, a drive motor), and the like are also provided. The capacity of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is preset in consideration of the current used in each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3. Side power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (for example, door frame side + 5V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (cutoff current), door frame side + 24V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (cutoff current), door frame side + 12V power supply line The current can be passed up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive board (cutoff current). Fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is the upper limit of the allowable current of each power line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 5V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power line drive board on the door frame side, and the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the + 12V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (abnormal current) flows, the element part of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is blown, and the blown power supply is supplied through the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the blown power supply. The power line to the following is cut off.

The fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is added with the current used in the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the + 24V system driver circuit in the + 24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and a current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side (disconnection current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side flows through the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is blown and becomes a + 24V system driver circuit. The subsequent + 24V power supply line supplied through the provided fuse is cut off. The fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit takes into account the current used in the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the + 12V system driver circuit in the + 12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and a current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutting current) of the drive motor on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side flows through the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown and becomes a + 12V system driver circuit. The subsequent + 12V power supply line supplied through the provided fuse is cut off.

The fuses of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 are preset in capacity in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in consideration of the respective currents used in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutting current) of the decorative substrate on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative substrate on the door frame side flows through the fuse of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 (not shown), the element portion of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is blown. The + 12V power supply line to the subsequent supply is cut off through a fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3.

For example, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards of each drive board of the door frame 3 requires + 12 V, the door frame 3 is provided with a + 12 V fuse (not shown). Supply to a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor that is the electrical drive source (for example, the drive motor (operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button elevating drive motor 367) of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3). The + 12V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC. The + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The + 12V system driver circuit fuse is the + 12V system electricity of the door frame 3 in the + 12V power supply line of the drive board. The capacity is preset in consideration of the current used in the target drive source (drive motor) and the + 12V system driver circuit, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side (disconnection current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side flows, the fuse of the system driver circuit is supplied through the fuse of the + 12V system driver circuit by blowing the element part of the fuse of the + 12V system driver circuit. The + 12V power supply line to the following is cut off.

Of each drive board of the door frame 3, a + 5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided on the drive board on which the + 12V driver circuit is provided (mounted or mounted). A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is input, and this input is input. Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the + 12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is for + 5V for each of the plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3 to each other. One end of the resistor to which + 5V supplied via the fuse is applied and one end of the resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are configured as a circuit that is electrically connected to multiple wirings (harnesses). The noise resistance can be improved by removing the invading noise. The same effect (that is, improvement in noise proof stress) can be achieved by using + 12V supplied through the + 12V fuse instead of + 5V supplied to this resistor.

Further, for example, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all the drive boards of each drive board of the door frame 3 requires + 24 V, the door frame 3 is passed through a + 24 V fuse (not shown). It is supplied to a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided in the above. The + 24V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC. ing. The + 24V supplied via the + 24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit has the capacity in advance by adding the current used in the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the + 24V system driver circuit in the + 24V power supply line of the drive board. It is set, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (disruption current) of the drive solenoid on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side flows through the fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit is blown through the fuse of the + 24V system driver circuit. The + 24V power line to the subsequent supply is cut off.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, for the drive board on which the + 24V driver circuit is provided (mounted or mounted), as described above, a + 5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer (not shown) are provided. A circuit is provided, and a control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is input. , The noise is removed from this input control signal and output to the + 24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is + 5V for each of the plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the boards of each drive board of the door frame 3. One end of a resistor to which + 5V is applied, which is supplied via a fuse for use, and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are configured as a circuit that is electrically connected, and multiple wirings (harnesses). The noise resistance can be improved by removing the noise that has entered the circuit. When + 24V or + 12V supplied through the + 24V fuse is also supplied instead of + 5V supplied to this resistor, the same effect (that is, noise resistance) can be obtained even if + 12V is supplied via the + 12V fuse. Improvement) can be achieved.

Further, for example, when one decorative board, a plurality of decorative boards, or all the decorative boards of the decorative boards 3 of the door frame 3 require + 12V, the door frame 3 is passed through a + 12V fuse (not shown). Controls various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting of a plurality of LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various LEDs of the door frame 3") such as full-color LEDs and monochromatic LEDs. It is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit capable of passing a constant current through various LEDs of the door frame 3 and a maximum current of the current flowing through the various LEDs of the door frame 3. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. The + 12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity in consideration of the current used in each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the + 12V power supply line of the decorative board, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side ( A current can flow up to the breaking current). In the + 12V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative substrate on the door frame side flows, the element portion of the + 12V fuse (not shown) is blown and supplied via the + 12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the + 12V power line to the following.

Of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3, one decorative substrate (for example, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side constituting the decorative substrate 402 on the left side of the door frame provided in the door frame 3) is an LED constant current drive circuit. Is not provided, and one decorative substrate is provided by an LED constant current drive circuit provided on another decorative substrate of the door frame 3 (for example, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b constituting the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 provided in the door frame 3). When the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the self is controlled, a + 12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative substrate. Further, when the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with the input buffer circuit corresponding to the input buffer circuit provided (mounted or mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is driven. An input buffer circuit corresponding to this input buffer circuit may be provided in front of the circuit.

In the present embodiment, each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). It is an electronic component that blows when it flows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it blows, it cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. As each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the succeeding current, but if the current drops, the succeeding current is restarted. On the other hand, a power line can be supplied.

[9-3-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to the payout control MPU633aa and the like. The payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 630, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control unit 633a. The + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 558z. The +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633.

[9-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied via the payout control board 633, and + 5V which is the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is created from this + 12V. In the present embodiment, + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and + 5V created by the main control board side creation + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically provided. Since the circuit is configured so as not to be connected to the power supply board 630, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V (created on the main control board side + 5V) created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510, the interface board 635, and the door frame clothing relay board 105, as shown in FIG. 213, and the peripheral control board 1510, Then, it is input to the effect display device 1600 or the like via the liquid crystal output board 1530.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. It is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure as compared with the case of monitoring the voltage.

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 respectively create + 5V. Of the three types of power supplies of + 12V and + 24V, the two types of power supplies of + 12V and + 24V are various types such as the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect drive board 1720, as described above. It is supplied to the board. That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, the power supply of + 12V has the same potential on various substrates, and the power supply of + 24V has the same potential on various substrates. Further, the + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. However, they have the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 has a + 12V fuse SF12 and a + 24V fuse SF24. Along with being provided (mounted and mounted), the effect drive board 1720 is provided with a + 12V fuse EF12 and a + 24V fuse EF24 (mounted and mounted).

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, as described above, the power supply of + 12V and the power supply of + 24V are both monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, + 12V, which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and + 12V, which is provided (mounted or mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510. The fuse SF12 for use and the + 12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted, mounted) on the effect drive board 1720 have the same potential, and the power supply is monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The + 24V fuse SF24 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (mounted and mounted) and the + 24V fuse EF24 provided on the effect drive board 1720 (mounted and mounted). It has the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require + 12 V, the above-mentioned As described above, a drive motor (for example, a drive motor of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 (operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button up / down)) which is an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 via a + 12V fuse (not shown). It is supplied to a + 12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor 367), and among each drive board of the door frame 3, one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards require + 24V. In this case, as described above, it is supplied to a + 24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid, a drive motor) provided in the door frame 3 via a + 24V fuse (not shown). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, the power supply + 12V monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 and the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 are used. The + 12V fuse SF12 provided (mounted and mounted), the + 12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted and mounted) on the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5, and the drive board of the door frame 3 The + 12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted or mounted) has the same potential, and the + 24V power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 The + 24V fuse SF24 provided (mounted and mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 and the + 24V fuse EF24 provided (mounted and mounted) on the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5. And a + 24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted or mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 have the same potential.

[9-4. How to fix the fuse]
Next, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630, each fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. A method of fixing the fuses provided on the door frame 3 and the fuses provided on the door frame 3 side will be described.

The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are made of transparent glass, and both ends of the transparent glass tube are made of metal. The support terminals at both ends of the tube are detachably attached to support brackets (also referred to as fuse holders) (not shown) that are soldered to the power supply board 630, and include fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including fuses FUSE3) (FIGS. 214 and 215). If) is blown, it can be replaced with a new fuse. On the other hand, the + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, the + 24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the + 5V fuse EF5 and + 12V fuse provided on the production drive board 1720. EF12, + 24V fuse EF24, the fuse provided in the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1, the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2, the + 12V fuse DF12 provided in each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. The provided + 12V fuse PF12, + 12V fuse PF12a1, and + 12V fuse PF12a2, and each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses and square chip type. There are ceramic type, mold type, etc., which are directly soldered to the substrate.

In this way, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630 is removable, and when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows through the fuse and blows, the fuse is replaced with a new fuse. On the other hand, each fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and each fuse provided on the effect display device 1600. Since each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side is a chip fuse directly soldered to the substrate, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows through the fuse and the fuse blows. , Cannot be replaced with a new fuse.

The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are formed of support terminals made of metal at both ends of the transparent glass tube. Whether or not the element portion of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 is blown can be visually confirmed through a transparent glass tube. .. On the other hand, the + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, the + 24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the + 5V fuse EF5 and + 12V fuse provided on the production drive board 1720. EF12, + 24V fuse EF24, the fuse provided in the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1, the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2, the + 12V fuse DF12 provided in each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. The + 12V fuse PF12, the + 12V fuse PF12a1, the + 12V fuse PF12a2, and the fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and therefore are square chip types. In any of the ceramic type and mold type chip fuses, it is not possible to visually confirm from the appearance of the chip fuse whether or not the element portion arranged inside the chip fuse is blown.

[10. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board.

The island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V (hereinafter referred to as "AC100V") is changed to AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V") for a game machine. The voltage is stepped down. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of an island facility in a game hall, AC24V is supplied to a power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 has various power sources (DC + 24V (hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V"), DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V"), and DC + 5V (DC + 24V (hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V")) and DC + 5V (hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V") supplied from the island facility of the game hall. Hereinafter, various DC power sources such as "+ 5V") are created and supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1. Power supply board circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 214, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power supply switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and the input is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via the class B fuse specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Specifically, the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a has an AC24V line 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "AC24V1" (may be referred to as "L side")) is AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1). It is input via the fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for the power switch, and is described as AC24V line 2 (hereinafter, "AC24V2" (hereinafter, may be described as "N side") at the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Yes).) Is input via the fuse FUSE2, which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2). The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise suppression circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically conductive, and the AC24V1 goes to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically conductive, and the AC24V 2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically non-conducting, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. When the supply is cut off, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically non-conducting, and the AC24V 2 is cut off from the supply to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

With the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall turned on, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can turn on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b is composed of a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and a choke coil L1, and is an output of a power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise suppression circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and the varistor voltages are the same. The varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is electrically connected to the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal of a frame ground board (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558 shown in FIG. 86 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

The payout base 551 is viewed from the front so that the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, the ground terminals are provided) are mounted on the frame ground board is horizontal with the mounting surface facing downward. Therefore, it is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion, and covered with the terminal cover 551k shown in FIG. That is, the frame ground substrate is in a state of being accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes the normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber), and removes noise that cannot be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a.

The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24V. .. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit that does not, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and peripheral circuits 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of FET Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

The AC24V1 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminals of the power supply creation circuit 630f, respectively.

The AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified into a DC power supply by switching by the FET Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode of the Schottky barrier diode D2 It is output from each of the terminals 2. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to one heat radiation fin (not shown). The heat radiating fins are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and also to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Is output from and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

The rectified DC power supplies output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor improving circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and peripheral circuits 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

The DC power supply whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and the anode terminals 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and drains the FETs Q3 and Q4 directly without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. It is input to each terminal. At the gate terminals of FET Q3 and Q4, the gate signal for the power factor improving circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply making circuit is input via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminal and drain terminal of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

In the DC power supply in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2, the generation of harmonics is suppressed by switching by FET Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. It is output from 2 respectively. The types of packages of FET Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the types of packages of FET Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above). Not fixed to one heat dissipation fin respectively. The heat radiating fins are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

The DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these plurality of electrolytic capacitors are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals are input to the DC power supply whose power factor is improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d. Will be done. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsation from the DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply making circuit 630f, and also fuses FUSE3 (this). In the embodiment, a transparent glass tube having the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a class B fuse specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law is used. As + 24V, it is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 is the + 24V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The fuse FUSE3 is a glass tube fuse for a + 24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)), and when a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit (disruption current) flows, the element portion of the fuse FUSE3 becomes It blows and cuts off the + 24V power supply line to the following through the fuse FUSE3.

[10-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the DC power supply from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply creation circuit 630f creates + 12V and + 5V from the input DC power supply, respectively. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created + 5V from the + 5V terminal from the power supply board 630 to the inside of the pachinko machine 1. Supply to each board of. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a power line.

The power supply creation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor improvement circuit 630d by controlling the output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power supply creation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power supply creation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

A power cord plug (not shown) is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistakenly plugged into the AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than + 24V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

In the power supply creation circuit 630f, the magnitude of the power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value: the present embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. Then, when the voltage reaches about 50V), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit can be output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

When the power supply creation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destroys to enter the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g to supply power. When the current flows into the CGND terminal of the created circuit 630f at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

The GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is electrically connected becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end on the opposite side of the resistor R25, which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5, so that the power supply creation circuit 630f In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the above.

In the power supply destruction circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates and the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. A large current flows toward (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), and the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained. Will be done. Although the FET Q5 is of the same type as the package of the FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 (TO-220F described above), the FET Q1 , Q2, Q3, Q4, Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, and heat dissipation fins (specifically, FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2) to which each is fixed. There are heat radiation fins (not shown) to which the FETs are fixed, and heat radiation fins (not shown) to which the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are fixed respectively. It is placed in a position where it is not. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged while each heat radiation fin is arranged, and is not fixed to each heat radiation fin at all. The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat through the heat radiation fins so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 generates heat in a short time when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed.

That is, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When plugged in, the power supply creation circuit 630f is based on a power supply voltage in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal, and the magnitude of this power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value). : In the present embodiment, it is set to about 50V.) When the power supply destruction circuit gate signal is output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the FET Q5 is controlled to self-destruct. As a result, the state of the short mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, so that the power switch 630a is operated. When the fuse is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETQ5 in the power supply destruction circuit 630g in the short mode, so that the power supply creation circuit 630f By flowing into the CGND terminal at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and the plug of the power supply cord is commercialized. Even if it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being plugged in, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 with unfused ones, and replace the power cord plug with AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the rectifier circuit 630c Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, so that a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the fuse. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will be blown again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is used in the island facility of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, the game cannot be started.

The fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are detachably attached to support metal fittings (also referred to as fuse holders) not shown to be soldered to the power supply board 630, and when the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are blown. It can be replaced with a new fuse.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of capacitors BC0 and BC1. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 has a built-in main control of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 211. It is electrically connected to the main VBB, which is the backup power line to the RAM. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is the payout control provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 211. It is electrically connected to the payout VBB, which is the backup power line to the payout control built-in RAM of the MPU633aa.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is the payout control board 633. Then, a + 5V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 212 (that is, the main control board side creation + 5V power supply line, this main control board side creation) The + 5V power supply line is not electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f as the main VBB, and is independent of FIG. 212. Through the diode MD0 provided in the main control board 1310 shown in the above, the main VBB is supplied to the capacitor BC0 provided in the power supply board 630 to charge the capacitor BC0, and the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is built in the main control. It supplies various information to the RAM and holds various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is a payout control board. It is supplied to 633 and supplied to the capacitor BC1 provided in the power supply board 630 as a payout VBB via the diode PD0 provided in the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 212 to charge the capacitor BC1 and pay out the payout control board 633. It is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the control unit 633a and holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or a momentary power failure. If this occurs, + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f cannot be created in the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is mainly prevented by the diode MD0 provided in the main control board 1310 to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side) supplied from the + 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. Various information supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as a VBB and stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. In addition, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. If this happens, + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f will not be supplied to the capacitor BC1. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is blocked by the diode PD0 provided in the payout control board 633 to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the payout control board 633 is paid out as a payout VBB. Various information supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the control unit 633a and stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

That is, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, due to the discharge of the capacitors BC0 and BC1, various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB is held, and the payout control is performed as the payout VBB. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the board 633 is held.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the power supply board 630 has a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) and a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2). And a fuse FUSE3 which is a glass tube fuse for a + 24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)) are provided. As a result, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electrical drive source, a sensor to which + 24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which + 24V is supplied instead of a sensor to which + 12V is supplied) is provided. When used, this + 24V supply sensor (+ 24V power supply alternative sensor) and the load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, sensor to which + 24V is supplied among various sensors) (Or, when a sensor to which + 24V is supplied is used instead of the sensor to which + 12V is supplied, this sensor to which + 24V is supplied (+ 24V power supply alternative sensor)) and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. The fuses corresponding to the power supply line (+ 24V and the same potential (+ 24V)) supplied to the power supply board are the fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and the power supply. A fuse FUSE2 that is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the board 630 and a fuse that is a glass tube fuse for a + 24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)) provided on the power supply board 630. Of the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 that is the board on the production side and the board that is dependent on the peripheral control board 1510, which is compatible with FUSE3, the + 24V power supply among the power lines supplied to a specific load. The lines are a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. The fuse FUSE3, which is a glass tube fuse for the + 24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)) provided on the power supply board 630, the + 24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is a chip fuse, and the effect drive board 1720. It corresponds to the + 24V fuse EF24.

When the power supply board 630 is not provided with the fuse FUSE3 which is a glass tube fuse for the + 24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)), that is, the power supply board 630 is for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1). When the fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse and the fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) are provided, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 ( Of the electrical drive source and various sensors, the sensor to which + 24V is supplied (or the sensor to which + 24V is supplied when using a sensor to which + 24V is supplied instead of the sensor to which + 12V is supplied (+ 24V power supply alternative sensor) )) And the load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, sensor to which + 24V is supplied among various sensors (or sensor to which + 24V is supplied instead of the sensor to which + 12V is supplied). When using, the power supply line (+ 24V and the same potential (+ 24V)) supplied to the sensor (+ 24V power supply alternative sensor) to which this + 24V is supplied and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. The fuses corresponding to)) are the fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and the glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. Of the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 which is the board on the production side and the board subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510, which corresponds to the fuse FUSE2, which is supplied to a specific load. The + 24V power supply line is a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. The fuse FUSE2 corresponds to the + 24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the + 24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720, which are chip fuses.

In the present embodiment, for the + 12V (+ 12V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, as described above, the + 12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) is connected to the power supply board 630. ) Is not provided with a + 12V glass tube fuse. As a result, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electrical drive source, the sensor to which + 12V is supplied among various sensors, and the load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrically). Of the drive source and various sensors, the fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+ 12V and the same potential (+ 12V)) supplied to the sensor to which + 12V is supplied and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is The fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and the fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. It corresponds.

For + 12V (+ 12V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, it becomes a glass tube fuse for the + 12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) on the power supply board 630. When a glass tube fuse is provided and + 12V is supplied from the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 via the + 12V glass tube fuse, a load (electrically) electrically connected to the main control board 1310. A sensor to which + 12V is supplied from the drive source and various sensors, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, a sensor to which + 12V is supplied from various sensors, and a main control board 1310 The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+ 12V and the same potential (+ 12V)) supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the power supply board 630 is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630. Fuse FUSE1 to be a fuse, fuse FUSE2 to be a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630, and a + 12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) provided on the power supply board 630. ), Which is a glass tube fuse for + 12V, and a specific load among the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 which is the substrate on the production side and the substrate dependent on the peripheral control board 1510. Of the power supply lines supplied to the load, the + 12V power supply line consists of a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and AC24V2 (AC power supply line) provided on the power supply board 630. FUSE2, which is a glass tube fuse for 2), + 12V glass tube fuse, which is a glass tube fuse for the + 12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) provided on the power supply board 630, and a chip fuse. The peripheral control board 1510 has a + 12V fuse SF12, the effect drive board 1720 has a + 12V fuse EF12, each decorative board of the game board has a + 12V fuse DF12, and the effect display device 1600 has a +12 fuse PF12, PF12a1, and PF12a2. It will correspond.

Further, the "specific load on the production side" means that the probability of failure is higher than that of other loads among the plurality of loads on the production side, or when a failure occurs, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the main control board. The effect on the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310 is large. For example, a load that causes a large amount of current to flow, a load that generates heat, a load that operates a movable body, and a load that moves in the vertical or horizontal direction as the movable body operates. Examples include a load that opposes the generated wiring (harness).

A load that is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electrical drive source, when using a sensor to which + 24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which + 24V is supplied instead of a sensor to which + 12V is supplied) Is a sensor that supplies + 24V (+ 24V power supply alternative sensor), a load that is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, a sensor that supplies + 24V among various sensors (or + 12V is supplied). When a sensor to which + 24V is supplied is used instead of the sensor to be supplied, the power supplied to the sensor to which + 24V is supplied (+ 24V power supply alternative sensor), the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310, and the power supply to be supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. If the fuse FUSE3, which is the fuse (glass tube fuse) of the glass tube of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the line (+ 24V and the same potential (+ 24V)), is blown (blown), the function of proceeding with the game is impaired. Therefore, the game is substantially stopped. On the other hand, when the + 24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the + 24V fuse EF24 of the production drive board 1720, which are the chip fuses on the production side, are blown (blown). For example, although the game machine fails due to a problem that the + 24V system electric drive source of the game board is not operated, if a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of the game ball is not affected. Therefore, the damage (stress) to the player can be suppressed to the minimum.

A + 12V glass tube fuse is provided on the power supply board 630 for the + 12V (+ 12V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and a power supply for the power supply board 630 is created through the + 12V glass tube fuse. When supplying + 12V from the circuit 630f, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electrical drive source, the sensor to which + 12V is supplied among various sensors, and the payout control board 633 are electrically connected. The power supply line (+ 12V, which is + 12V and has the same potential) is supplied to the load (electrical drive source, the sensor to which + 12V is supplied among various sensors, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310). If the + 12V glass tube fuse of the power supply board 630 corresponding to (+ 12V)) is blown (blown), the function of advancing the game is impaired, so that the game is substantially stopped. + 12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, + 12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board, and +12 fuses PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600. If the fuse is blown (cut), it will be a malfunction as a game machine due to, for example, a problem that the + 12V system electric drive source of the game board is not operated or a problem that various LEDs of the game board and the door frame are not lit. When a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of the game ball is not affected, so that the damage (stress) to the player can be minimized.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the AC power supply (AC24V) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is transferred to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630 regardless of the ON operation / OFF operation of the power switch 630a. It is supplied and supplied from the interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is a pachinko machine via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside of No. 1, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In the present embodiment, the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is provided with a glass tube fuse (or a glass tube fuse (not shown) corresponding to only one of AC24VA and AC24V, respectively) corresponding to AC24VA and AC24V. A glass tube fuse (not shown) corresponding to AC24VA and AC24V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the CR unit provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the glass tube fuse provided on the interface board 635.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, the control power supply creation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600 are provided with an overcurrent protection circuit (so-called OCP (so-called OCP). Over Current Protection (abbreviation))) may be installed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power supply board 630 is provided with a + 5V glass tube fuse for the + 5V (+ 5V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the power supply is provided through the + 5V glass tube fuse. + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f of the substrate 630 may be supplied.

Next, measures against the commercial power supply voltage are taken when the plug of the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 shows the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 215, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 214 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of measures for commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of the FETQ5, the resistors R25, R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply is destroyed from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via the resistor R25, FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of FETQ5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5 are overloaded). By destroying the FET Q5 due to the electric current), the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, and a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. It is composed of a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and a choke coil L1, and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and the diodes D5 and D5. It is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminal of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. Will be done.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Briefly explaining this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall has the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 on both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (L side (AC24V1), N side ( This is because it was input to AC24V2)), but according to the test conducted by the applicant, no problem occurred even if one (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted. As a result, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, one of the AC24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is set to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Cost reduction is realized by inputting as it is in.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same power switch 630a as in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment is adopted. To briefly explain this, with respect to the power switch 630a, it is necessary to reliably disconnect / connect both the L side and the N side of the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment has the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall, similarly to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / contacted at the same time.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power supply switch 630a. It is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1 between them. The other end of this microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The micro-gap type arrester AL1 surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") invades AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall due to a lightning strike. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a, or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning the power switch 630a ON / OFF is applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a surge current through the frame ground FG2 so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. Further, the microgap type arrester AL1 is a frame grounding board (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558 shown in FIG. 86 by an operator when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. If you forget to electrically connect the ground terminal (island equipment ground) and the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, electromagnetic noise will be sent from the island equipment of the game hall as a proof stress. The noise resistance can be improved by guiding the AC24V to the N side (AC24V2) and removing the AC24V.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and a choke coil In addition to L1, it is composed of a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power supply destruction circuit 630g', and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit. It is input to 630 g'and the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630 g'has a faster reaction speed than the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned), one end of which is electrically connected to the L side (AC24V1) of AC24V via the power switch 630a, and the other end is the N side of AC24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, causing a short circuit and short mode.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also referred to as a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a steep rise as compared with a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has features that it has a very fast response to a surge, has a very good control voltage characteristic, and has a very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type may be used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , Is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the 3rd (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor improving circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to the relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). The thermistor TH1 is a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, if the vertical axis is the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis is the AC voltage, the AC voltage value increases. Therefore, a capacitor that has a curve that the value of the allowable capacitor capacity becomes smaller and is not destroyed even when AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is applied is selected.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power supply creating circuit 630f, and input to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

The rectified DC power supply output from the cathode terminals 2 of the shotkey barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is insufficient in power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive). Since the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating due to insufficient power supply by + 24V from the circuit 630i, the relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, the relay RL1 remains OFF). ), Input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 while the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conducting state. Will be done. As a result, the rectified DC power output output from the cathode terminals 2 of the shotkey barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifying circuit 630c flows only toward the thermistor TH1, and when this DC starts flowing to the thermistor TH1, a resistor Although a high value causes a weak current to flow through the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually rises due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, thereby following the thermistor TH1. A strong current is passed through the load.

On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned ON and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (by the power supply by + 24V from the relay drive circuit 630i) switches from the non-operating state to the operating state of the relay RL1 coil, the relay RL1 Is turned on to make the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 conductive, and the rectified DC power supply output from the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, respectively. In addition to the thermista TH1, the relay RL1 is diverted between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal (that is, between the contacts) and passes through each of them, and is connected to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Entered. As a result, the rectified DC power supply output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, the contacts). The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases and the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, so that the 2nd (COM) terminal and 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) will increase.

As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified DC power supply output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is used. When flowing through the thermistor TH1, the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 becomes stronger as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and the power supply of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into an outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermista TH1 rises, and a large current will flow through the surge absorber SA1 to cause a surge. The absorber SA1 can be destroyed to enter the short mode.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 which is in the short mode state in the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is blown. It will be blown. Further, when the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1, so that the elements of the surge absorber SA1 are scattered and the surge absorber SA1 becomes It can be prevented from being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. It is possible to surely prevent this.

In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit and the CGND terminal for passing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of AC24V for the game machine. When the surge absorber SA1 that is plugged in and constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g'is destroyed, replace the fuse FUSE1 with one that has not been blown, and replace the plug of the power cord with the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if the fuse is plugged into the AC24V power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g'has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1. A large current flows through FUSE1 and the fuse FUSE1 is blown again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g'is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed. Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, the game cannot be started.

In the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g are mounted on one board called the power supply board 630. , Various electronic parts and the like are provided, but it can also be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, so that the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. 214. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifying circuit 630c, the force factor improving circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creating circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. 214. , Fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifying circuit 630c, it is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply creation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC power sources such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 215 can be divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A is the power supply line connector DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. 215. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly composed of the connector A includes a rectifying circuit 630c, a force factor improving circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply making circuit 630f, a relay drive circuit 630i, and a relay RL1 as shown in FIG. 215. It mainly consists of a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC power sources such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

[11. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit, production drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the circuit of the effect drive board 1720, and the like shown in FIG. 211 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 224. FIG. 216 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 217 is a circuit diagram of a motor drive circuit, FIG. 218 is a circuit diagram showing a main control solenoid drive circuit, and FIG. 219 shows a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 220 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board, FIG. 221 is a circuit showing a payout motor drive circuit, and FIG. 222 is a circuit diagram showing an effect control solenoid drive circuit. FIG. 223 is a circuit diagram showing an effect control motor drive circuit, and FIG. 224 is a schematic view of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the fuse is mounted. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the circuit of the effect drive board will be described. The wiring to the power supply and the input signal board in the circuits of various boards will also be described as appropriate.

[11-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with + 12V from the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. In the + 12V to + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 5V is created as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the main control board 1310. This local power supply, + 5V, has the same potential as + 5V created by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

As a local power source serving as a control power source for the main control board 1310 in the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 5V is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h as shown in FIG. 216. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V from the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first rippled (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Has been removed and smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. When a momentary power failure occurs in the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. Further, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the above. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0, whereas the main control MPU 1310a is supplied. The diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the above, via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, and the second start port sensor 2401. The detection signal, the detection signal from the first prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the second prize opening sensor 2601, the magnetic sensor 1111, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, etc. are the main controls. Each is input to the input circuit 1310b.

Detection signal from gate sensor 2801, detection signal from general winning opening sensor 3051, detection signal from first starting opening sensor 3052, detection signal from second starting opening sensor 2401, detection from first large winning opening sensor 2402 The signal, the detection signal from the second prize opening sensor 2601 and the magnetic sensor 1111 are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is discharged via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the control board 633. Like the input port PA, the input port PB is composed of 8 bits. Further, although the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and the detection signals from other sensors are input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. The input terminals that are input to the predetermined input terminals and become empty terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminals of its predetermined output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power failure clear signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c, or outputs a drive signal via the main control output circuit 1310c. The main control solenoid outputs to the circuit 1310d.

Note that the detection signals from other sensors may not be input to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, but may be input to the predetermined input terminals of the port PC, respectively, and are input terminals that are empty terminals in the port PC. Is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA. The port PC is composed of 8 bits like the input ports PA and PB.

[11-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here as an example.

As shown in FIG. 216, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input has one end of the + 12V power supply line (power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to (that is, the + 12V power supply line), and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. Transistor MTR0 In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is created on the main control board side + 5V power supply line (provided on the main control board 1310). It is a + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and is electrically different from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. Along with being electrically connected to the other end of the connected resistor MR5, the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and a signal input to one of them (MIC10A). The waveform logic is shaped and output without being inverted.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a.

[11-1-2. Motor drive circuit under the control of the main control board]
Next, the motor drive circuit under the control of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. In some cases, the game board is provided with a member that distributes the path to the downstream side of the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion (not shown) provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5 by using a distribution piece that swings like a wiper. .. A stepping motor, which is a drive motor, can be mentioned as an electric drive source for operating such a distribution piece. This drive motor is driven by the motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310. The rotary motion of the rotary shaft of the drive motor is converted into a wiper-like swing motion by a distribution piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). Here, a first distribution drive that distributes a game ball that has entered a ball entry portion (not shown) provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5 to a path to the downstream side using a first distribution piece that swings like a wiper. The drive circuit of the motor and the drive circuit of the second distribution drive motor that distributes the game ball distributed by the first distribution piece to the path further downstream using the second distribution piece that swings like a wiper will be described. To do.

The motor drive circuit 1310v is composed of a drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor and a drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor. The drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as excitations to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 according to the rotational state of the first distribution drive motor. The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m capable of driving the first distribution drive motor and the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n capable of driving the first distribution drive motor are provided. The drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as excitations to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 according to the rotational state of the second distribution drive motor. The second distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310p capable of driving the second distribution drive motor and the second distribution drive motor drive IC 1310q capable of driving the second distribution drive motor are provided. Since the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor and the drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor are the same circuit, here, the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor will be described and the second distribution drive will be described. The drive circuit 1310vb of the motor may be represented in parentheses following the reference numerals referred to in the description of the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor.

The first distribution drive motor always swings the first distribution piece in a wiper shape, and the second distribution drive motor always swings the second distribution piece in a wiper shape. Therefore, the first and second distribution drive motors Needs to be driven at all times. However, when the first and second distribution drive motors are constantly driven, the first and second distribution drive motors generate excessive heat, thereby driving the first and second distribution drive motors or the first and second distribution drive motors. The first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs may malfunction or malfunction, and the rotational movement of the rotation shaft of the drive motor is a wiper-like swing movement by the distribution piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). If for some reason a malfunction occurs in the gear mechanism and it becomes difficult to rotate, the distribution drive motor that has become difficult to rotate due to a malfunction in the gear mechanism among the first and second distribution drive motors The overload and excessive heat generation may cause a malfunction or failure in the distribution drive motor or the distribution drive motor drive IC that drives the distribution drive motor. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second distribution drive motors are constantly driven.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first and second distribution drive motors are driven to swing the first and second distribution pieces in a wiper shape, the operating voltage is used, whereas the first and second distribution pieces are used. , When driving the second distribution drive motor to stop the first and second distribution pieces, the voltage switching circuit that uses the stop voltage is controlled, and the current flowing to the first and second distribution drive motors. Is used as a resettable fuse by using a poly switch to protect the first and second distribution drive motors and the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs that drive the first and second distribution drive motors. The heat generated by the constant drive of the first and second distribution drive motors is suppressed.

[11-1-2a. 1st and 2nd distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit]
The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly comprises a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. Has been done. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and electrically to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 1.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is shown as a D-type flip-flop for first distribution piece voltage switching (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 1) (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 2). It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the second distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for switching the voltage of the first distribution piece (D-type flip-flop for switching the voltage of the second distribution piece) is the output terminal for switching the voltage of the first distribution piece (the first) of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU1310a. It is electrically connected to the two-segment voltage switching output terminal).

The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via a resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is a + 12V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 (that is, a + 12V power supply line)) and electricity. Is connected. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). .. The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is a + 5V power supply line created by the main control board side (+ 5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310), and is a + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, different from the + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa. The other end of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD51 and MD52 (MD61, MD62), and supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D).

[11-1-2b. 1st and 2nd distribution drive motor drive IC]
The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) contains four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN-type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is. Electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66) and is the base of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is a U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which a current that excites / φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows, and the terminal and electricity of the connector. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the terminal of the connector as a Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which a current that excites φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is used as a U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which a current that excites / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector.

The other ends of the resistors MR54 to MR57 (MR64 to MR67) are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, instructs the start or stop of excitation of φ1 of the first distribution drive motor. As a line for transmitting a signal called MPD0 (MPD4), it is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (not shown) of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor. Has been done. The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the output for φ1 of the first distribution drive motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (output terminal for φ1 of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, instructs MPD1 (MPD5) to start or stop the excitation of the first distribution drive motor with respect to / φ1. ) Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first distribution drive motor / φ1 D-type flip-flop (not shown) of the second distribution drive motor / φ1 D-type flip-flop as a line for transmitting the signal. There is. The input terminal of the / φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (/ φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the / of the first distribution drive motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (/ φ1 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, is MPD2 (MPD6) that instructs the start or stop of excitation of φ2 of the first distribution drive motor. As a line for transmitting the signal, it is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for φ2 of a first distribution drive motor (not shown) of a D-type flip-flop for φ2 of a second distribution drive motor (not shown). The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the output for φ2 of the first distribution drive motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (output terminal for φ2 of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor, instructs MPD3 (MPD7) to start or stop excitation of the first distribution drive motor / φ2. ) Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the / φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (not shown) of the second distribution drive motor / φ2 D-type flip-flop (not shown). There is. The input terminal of the / φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (/ φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the / of the first distribution drive motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (/ φ2 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four diodes built-in, and the first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are paired. It is placed in the package.

The cathode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been done. The cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

The cathode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been done. The cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

The first to fourth diodes convert the counter electromotive force generated when the excitation of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 is stopped into heat. The first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors are protected by removing them.

The + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) power supply line that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is a first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive) via connector terminals and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to φ2C (common) of the third pin and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin of the connector of the motor). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which the current that excites φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows is the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the connector terminals and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to φ1 of the 6th pin of the connector of. The U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which the current that excites / φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows is the first distribution drive motor (first distribution drive motor) via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to / φ1 of the second pin of the connector of the two-distribution drive motor). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current that excites φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows is the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the connector terminals and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to φ2 of the 5th pin of the connector of. The U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which the current that excites / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows is the first distribution drive motor (first distribution drive motor) via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to / φ2 of the first pin of the connector of the two-distribution drive motor).

MPD0 to MPD3 that instruct the start and stop of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor, and start of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the second distribution drive motor. When the swing drive data MPD0 to MPD7, which is 8-bit information including MPD4 to MPD7 instructing to stop or stop, is output from the main control MPU1310a, the corresponding D-type flip-flop described above and each resistor are used. The data are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q, respectively. When the system of the main control board 1310 is started in the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q), the main control side power-on processing described later is performed and the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing) described later is started. Then, according to the swing drive data MPD0 to MPD3 (MPD4 to MPD7) from the main control MPU1310a in the port output processing, the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) operates voltage or stop voltage. A current that excites φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is passed by the voltage switched to.

Here, the operation of the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) performs the main control side power-on processing described later when the system of the main control board 1310 is started (main control side timer interrupt processing (port output) described later. When the processing) is started), when the signal logic of the voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a in the port output processing is output as the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off. The voltage of the power supply line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is raised to the + 12V side by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) to drive the first distribution. + 12V as an operating voltage is supplied to the motor (second distribution drive motor) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). It should be noted that the power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) is not supplied to the +5 power supply line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

On the other hand, when the signal logic of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as a stopping voltage logic that is the reverse of the working voltage logic logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned on. Then, the voltage of the power supply line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) by interrupting + 12V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is the diode MD50. By being pulled up to the + 5V side via (MD60), + 5V as a stop voltage with respect to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). ) Is supplied as a power line.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stopping voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V × voltage V ÷ resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage + 12V is 144 / resistance R (voltage V squared / resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage + 5V is 25 / resistance R (voltage V squared / resistance R). R). Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage + 12V is 5 times or more (5.76 = 144/25) as compared with the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage + 5V, so that the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. It becomes. This also applies to the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

That is, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem when the single power supply is driven by the operating voltage of + 12V (continuous driving), the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by driving by the stopping voltage of + 5V. ..

The package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is based on the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). It absorbs heat generation and heat generation by the first to fourth diodes that convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) into heat. This absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island equipment in the game hall is lined up in a row with other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment in the game hall is high due to the heat generated from the power supply board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first distribution drive motor drive is driven. Around the IC1310n (1310q), that is, when the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so that heat is stored in the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC1310n (1310q). It will be. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN type Darlington The transistor may fail.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is driven to rotate the rotation axis in CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first distribution is performed. By continuously exciting φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the drive motor (second distribution drive motor) as much as possible, the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) φ1, φ2, / φ1 , / The number of times that the excitation to φ2 is stopped is reduced, and the backlash that occurs when the excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is stopped. The number of times the electric power is converted into heat by the first to fourth diodes and removed can be reduced. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small value, which can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the failure of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors due to heat.

In the present embodiment, the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) does not use a relay, but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60). This is because a time lag occurs in the relay and there is a large variation in performance between individuals, so that it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation.

[11-1-2c. Poly switch]
Here, a poly switch will be described as a resettable fuse. The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). In the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, so that the main body becomes When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns, and by using this, the current that flows to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), which is the load, is limited and the first distribution drive motor, which is the load. (Second distribution drive motor) can be protected. A fuse can be mentioned as a device that limits the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing it when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, it is necessary to prevent a person who obtains an illegal game ball by illegally modifying the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, such as the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are, for example, one-way of a caulking portion which is a sealing mechanism. It is crimped with screws. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, the fuse must be mounted on the main control board 1310, and if the fuse blows, the crimped portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the crimped portion of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is performed. Is in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting the overcurrent as in the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited to protect the load by identifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike fuses, the polyswitch itself is not destroyed by overcurrent and does not need to be replaced at all, and the load is the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) or the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). ), The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the crimped portion.

The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a rectangular parallelepiped body, and has a lead linear shape in which two leads protrude downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity and causes a current. When it is shut off and the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), by arranging the two leads of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) in the vertical direction, the thickness of the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can be increased. The smaller surface can be in the vertical direction, and the heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can be easily convected upward.

Further, since a large current flows through the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60), each phase of the terminal for supplying power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) and the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). It is arranged in the vicinity of a connector having a terminal for exciting (φ1, / φ1, φ2, / φ2). As a result, it is possible to contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) with respect to other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

Further, since the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), it protects the overheating of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). be able to.

In the present embodiment, one poly switch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and the poly switch MPS50 is provided for the second distribution drive motor. One switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the collector terminals 2, 4 of the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q are provided. A poly switch may be provided exclusively between 9 and 11 and the corresponding terminal of the connector of the first and second distribution drive motors.

Further, in the present embodiment, one poly switch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310 for the first distribution drive motor, and poly for the second distribution drive motor. One switch MPS60 was provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, but instead, it is supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. A common poly switch may be provided exclusively for each of the + 12V and + 5V motor power supplies, or + 12V supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. One common poly switch may be provided exclusively for the motor power supply.

Further, for example, when a stepping motor is driven as another drive motor together with the first distribution drive motor (the first distribution drive motor is driven by the first distribution drive motor drive IC1310n, and the other drive motor is another drive motor. (When driven by a drive IC), the motor power supply supplied to the other drive motor together with the first distribution drive motor can be switched by the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m. In this case, the common polyswitch for the first distribution drive motor and the other drive motor is the polyswitch MPS50, and the motor power supply of + 12V or + 5V is transmitted to the other stepping motor together with the first distribution drive motor via the polyswitch MPS50. Each is supplied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the unipolar type stepping motor is used as the first and second distribution drive motors, but a bipolar type stepping motor may be used instead. In this case, one poly switch is provided exclusively for each terminal to which the motor power of + 12V and + 5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature) such as a polymer-based PTC (abbreviation for Positive Temperature Coefficien) thermistor.
Although it is an element (abbreviation of Coefficient), the same effect as the above-mentioned polyswitch can be obtained even if a ceramic PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) element or bimetal is used as the resettable fuse.

[11-1--3. Main control solenoid drive circuit]
Next, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d will be described with reference to FIG. 218. The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d has a start port solenoid 2415 which is a drive solenoid as an electric drive for moving (operating) the second start port door 2414 to open and close the second start port 2004, and the first prize-winning port. The first attacker solenoid 2418, which is a drive solenoid for electrically driving the door 2417 to open and close the first prize opening 2005, and the second prize opening door 2611 are moved (operated) to the second. The second attacker solenoid 2612, which is a drive solenoid, is driven as an electric drive for opening and closing the two major winning openings 2006, respectively.

The drive solenoids such as the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is driven by. The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d is mainly composed of a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the drive solenoid.

As described above, the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are the main control solenoid drive circuits of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is driven by 1310d, and like the first and second distribution drive motors described above, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the system of the main control board 1310 is started (processing at the time of turning on the main control side power to be described later). Is performed and the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing) described later is started), and the system is not always driven. However, when driving the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 generate excessive heat for some reason. As a result, a malfunction or failure occurs in the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612 or the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. In addition, there is a problem with the mechanism that opens and closes the second starting port 2004, the mechanism that opens and closes the first prize opening 2005, and the mechanism that opens and closes the second prize opening 2006, making it difficult to move (difficult to operate). ), The solenoid that has become difficult to move (difficult to operate) due to a malfunction among the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 becomes overloaded and generates excessive heat, resulting in a malfunction. There is a risk that a malfunction or failure may occur in the solenoid or the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the solenoid, which has become difficult to move (difficult to operate). Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are driven.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the current flowing through the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is limited by using a poly switch as a resettable fuse, and the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418. , The second attacker solenoid 2612 and the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the drive solenoid drive IC for driving the second attacker solenoid 2612, thereby protecting the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid. The heat generated by driving the attacker solenoid 2612 is suppressed.

[11-1--3a. Drive solenoid drive IC]
One end of the polyswitch MPS40 is electrically connected to a + 24V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, a + 24V power supply line)). The other end is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD45 and MD46, respectively, and is a connector as a power supply line called SOL + 24V that supplies power to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. It is electrically connected to the terminal.

The drive solenoid drive IC1310da contains four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN-type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR45, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is of the resistor MR46. It is electrically connected to one end, and the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR47.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an S-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 flows, and is a collector terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. Reference numeral 4 is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D1-SOL line through which a current for exciting the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is the second attacker solenoid 2612. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D2-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil flows.

The other ends of the resistors MR45 to MR47 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR45, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, is a signal called MPC0 that instructs the start or stop of excitation of the coil of the start port solenoid 2415. Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip flop for the coil of the starting port solenoid (not shown) as a line for transmitting the above. The input terminal of the coil D-type flip-flop of the starting port solenoid is electrically connected to the coil output terminal of the starting port solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR46, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, is a line that transmits a signal called MPC1 that instructs the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 to start or stop excitation. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip-flop for the coil of the first attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the coil D-type flip-flop of the first attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the coil output terminal of the first attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, is a line that transmits a signal called MPC2 that instructs the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to start or stop excitation. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the coil output terminal of the second attacker solenoid of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid drive IC1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid drive IC1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), whereas the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is of the drive solenoid drive IC1310da. It is not connected to the outside.

The drive solenoid drive IC1310da has four diodes built-in, and the first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged in a pair in the package. It is arranged.

The cathode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD45.

The cathode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD46.

Of the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are used when the excitation of the starting port solenoid 2415 coil, the first attacker solenoid 2418 coil, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 coil is stopped. The first to third NPN type Darlington transistors are protected by converting the generated counter electromotive force into heat and removing it.

The power line SOL + 24V, which supplies power to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, is connected to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, via the connector terminals and the respective wirings (not shown). It is electrically connected to each connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612. The S-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the starting port solenoid 2415 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown). The D1-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the first attacker solenoid 2418 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown). The D2-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown).

Whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied when the system of the main control board 1310 is started (the main control side power-on processing described later is performed and the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing) described later is started). Correspondingly, in the port output process, the main drive solenoid which is the information of MPC0 to MPC2 instructing the start and stop of excitation of the coil of the start port solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612. When the drive data MPC0 to MPC2 are output from the main control MPU1310a, they are input to the base terminals 1, 5 and 8 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da via the corresponding D type flip flops and the respective resistors described above. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da excites the coil of the start port solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 according to the drive data MPC0 to MPC2 for the main drive solenoid from the main control MPU 1310a. Pass the current.

[11-1--3b. Poly switch]
Here, a poly switch will be described as a resettable fuse. The + 24V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the + 24V power supply line) is for the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The polyswitch MPS40 is supplied as a power line of SOL + 24V via the polyswitch MPS40. In the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat is generated. When the main body is cooled, the conductivity is restored and restored, and when this is used, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid, which are loads, are used. The start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, which are loads, can be protected by limiting the current flowing to the attacker solenoid 2612. Examples of the load limiting current include fuses. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing when an overcurrent flows, but the fuse itself needs to be replaced with a new one.

However, it is necessary to prevent a person who obtains an illegal game ball by illegally modifying the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, such as the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 composed of the transparent cover body and the transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are sealing mechanisms. It is crimped by a crimped portion such as a one-way screw. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, the fuse must be mounted on the main control board 1310, and if the fuse blows, the crimped portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the crimped portion of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is performed. Is in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting the overcurrent as in the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited to protect the load by identifying the polyswitch. That is, unlike the fuse, the polyswitch itself is not destroyed by overcurrent and does not need to be replaced at all, and the load is the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612 or the start port solenoid 2415, the first. The drive solenoid drive IC1310da that drives the attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612 can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the crimped portion.

[11-1-4. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 2192, the main control board 1310 has two types: + 12V power generation circuit 630fb to + 12V of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc to + 24V of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630. The voltage is supplied via the payout control board 633, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. The output is output to the payout control MPU 633aa of 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, and the like. When the power failure warning signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and stops the progress of the game. Then, the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power supply cutoff process in the payout control unit power on-time process described later, stops the payout progress (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball), and the periphery. The control board 1510 backs up the effect information, so that the effect display device 1600 can reliably complete the main control side power cutoff process by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power cutoff process by the payout control 633aa. , Create a power supply for the backlight to cut power consumption Turn off the inverter (not shown) and stop the progress of the production.

Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[11-1--4a. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 219, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are created at one end by the main control board side created + 5V power supply line (+ 5V created circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310). Other than the resistor MR20, which is a + 5V power supply line and is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the end and + 5V created on the main control board side is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component folded by voltage) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is created and supplied by a + 24V power supply line (+ 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f) (that is, a + 24V power supply). The monitoring voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V monitoring voltage V1") of the line) and the reference voltage Vref are used for comparison, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used for the + 12V power supply line (power supply). + 12V power supply of the creation circuit 630f The monitoring voltage V2 (hereinafter, referred to as “+ 12V monitoring voltage V2”) and the reference voltage Vref of the power supply line (that is, + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the creation circuit 630fb A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC21A, which is used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. These comparison results are shown in the D type flip flop MIC22. This D-type flip flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC 21 is The main control board side creation + 5V, which is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is a capacitor. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the MC 21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC 21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[11-1--4b. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 219, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, is created at one end by the + 24V power supply line (+ 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the supplied power supply line (that is, the + 24V power supply line), and the other end of the resistor MR22, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), are electrically connected. The other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), are electrically connected. At the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to a certain terminal 3 is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are smoothed. , When + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure, when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V and becomes a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V), + 24V is monitored. The voltage V1 is set to be the same as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. At the same time, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. .. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is mainly determined by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal created on the control board side + 5V side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1--4c. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 219, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, is created at one end by the + 12V power supply line (+ 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the supplied power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line), and the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), are electrically connected. The other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), are electrically connected. At the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to a certain terminal 5 is divided by + 12V according to the resistance ratio by the resistors MR24 and MR25, and ripples are removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are smoothed. , When + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure, when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V and becomes a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V), + 12V is monitored. The voltage V2 is set to be the same as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above, so one end is created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is mainly determined by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal created on the control board side + 5V side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1--4d. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, by changing the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and performs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same as the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip-flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state of outputting the signal whose logic is HI from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is a clock input terminal because the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, are electrically connected to the ground (GND), respectively. There is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, so that the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The circuit is configured. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is connected to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The applied main control board side creation + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts is electrically unconnected to the outside.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310c. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310c. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the terminal is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, is used as the main control output circuit. It is output from 1310c to the payout control board 633 as a payout power failure warning signal, and is also output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 219, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the main control board side + 5V power supply line, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 via the resistor MR27. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the main control board side created + 5V power supply line. Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (The non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) is shaped and output without inverting. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the main control board side creation + 5V side and the transistor. The MTR 20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the main control board side creation + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the main control MPU1310a. It is input to the input terminal of the port PB.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU1310a. Is entered in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as the payout failure warning signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a resistor MR32 in which one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to and electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. 211 on the payout control board 633. In circuit 633ab, one end is a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, a + 12V power supply line)). It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU633aa shown in FIG. 211.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the rear stage, is on the main control board side by the resistor MR32. By being pulled up to the creation + 5V side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the main control board side creation + 5V side and the transistor. The MTR21 is turned on, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the main control board side creation + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on. .. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 633.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), one end of the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 is a + 12V power supply line (power supply creation). + 12V power supply creation of circuit 630f Electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by circuit 630fb. Electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) and shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the main control board side creation + 5V side and the transistor. The MTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22. The main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripheral control board 1510 input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is sent to the payout control board 633. The main control output circuit 1310c has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is input to the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. While it is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is dispensed and controlled via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a on the board 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the transistor of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected. The collector terminal of the MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). Has been done. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards 1310 between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310a, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using the main control board side creation + 5V which is the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a. Between the boards of the payout control board 633 and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main The power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using the control power supply of the control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU633aa, and the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, + 12V which is a DC power supply higher than + 5V.

As described above, the power supply line (that is, the + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310 as described above. In addition to 1310b, the motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 212, and the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 213. Control power supply creation circuit 1510z, + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 shown in FIG. 213, LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 213, effect display device shown in FIG. 213. It is supplied to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of 1600, the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, the drive circuit, and the like of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 213. That is, since the + 12V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, the decorative boards of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, etc., in addition to the main control board 1310. Even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, for example, due to an electrical trouble to the control power supply creation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, the control power supply creation circuit Due to the overcurrent flowing to 1510z, the potential of the + 12V power supply line drops, or the effect display device 1600's liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z, the effect display device 1600's liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit are electrically connected for some reason. Due to a trouble, an overcurrent flows to any of the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z of the production display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel of the production display device 1600, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc., so that the potential of the + 12V power supply line drops or the production drive When the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the board 1720 (or waiting for the drive of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5). Due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason), an overcurrent flows to the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) and + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the game board 5, causing the + 12V power supply line to flow. A + 12V power supply line due to an overcurrent flowing through the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5 due to a drop in potential or an electrical trouble to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5 for some reason. The potential of is lowered. Further, on the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530 that supplies the + 12V power line from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, and the decorative boards of the game board 5. Even if a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to some electrical trouble in the formed wiring pattern or the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, etc., the overcurrent causes + 12V. The potential of the power line drops. Then, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

Further, as described above, the power supply line (that is, the + 24V power supply line) created and supplied by the + 24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f is the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 and the main control board. In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, the payout control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a + 12V power supply line via the payout control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect drive shown in FIG. 212. It is supplied to the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the substrate 1720. That is, since the + 24V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, etc. in addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board constituting the main board Even if the 633 is operating normally, when the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the effect drive board 1720 (or the + 24V system of the game board 5). (While waiting for the drive of the electric drive source (drive solenoid)), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) or + 24V system driver circuit of the game board 5 When an overcurrent flows through 1720c1, the potential of the + 24V power supply line drops. In addition, there is a leak due to some electrical trouble in the wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the + 24V power supply line, the effect drive board 1720, and the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The potential of the + 24V power supply line also drops when a current is generated or a short circuit occurs. Then, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power cutoff process in the main control side power on time process described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[11-1-5. Overcurrent protection for + 12V power line and + 24V power line]
[11-1--5a. + 12V power line overcurrent protection]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as an overcurrent protection to the + 12V power supply line, as shown in FIG. 213, the + 12V power supply line has a + 12V power supply line peripheral control board permissible current upper limit as a countermeasure against overcurrent. A + 12V fuse SF12 is provided to allow current to flow up to, and a + 12V fuse PF12 is provided to the effect display device 1600 as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600 to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the original allowable current. The 1600 is provided with a + 12V fuse PF12a1 that can allow current to flow up to the allowable current upper limit of the first branching system as a branching first system fuse that branches from the + 12V fuse PF12 to two systems, and the effect display device 1600 is provided with a + 12V fuse PF12. A + 12V fuse PF12a2 is provided as a fuse for the second branching system that branches from the second system to the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branching system, and the effect drive board 1720 is provided with a + 12V power supply line up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the effect drive board. A + 12V fuse EF12 capable of passing a current is provided, and a fuse capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side is provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 in the effect drive board 1720, and each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. Of these, the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted is provided with a + 12V fuse DF12 that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side (regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit). A + 12V fuse DF12 capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side may be provided to all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied). For + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12a1 as the fuse of the first branch system, a liquid crystal panel power supply is created by the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z, and this liquid crystal panel power supply is used as the liquid crystal panel and back of the effect display device 1600. Since it is supplied to the light and the drive circuit, it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 from + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12a1 as the fuse of the first branch system. The panel power supply and + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12a2 as the fuse of the second branch system are supplied.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, in the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, the control power supply creation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510 is reached. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line peripheral control board flows to the control power supply creation circuit 1510z due to an electrical trouble for some reason, the + 12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown. .. In this way, the + 12V fuse SF12 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the + 12V fuse SF12 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power line peripheral control board. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is paid out. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power failure warning signal does not have to be output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later, and the payout control MPU633aa is a payout in the payout control unit power on power processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the control unit power off processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the liquid crystal panel power supply of the effect display device 1600 is created in the + 12 V power supply line of the effect display device 1600. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch 1st system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z due to an electrical trouble to the circuit 1600z for some reason, it is a fuse of the branch 1st system of the effect display device 1600 + 12V. The fuse PF12a1 is blown. Further, in the present embodiment, due to an electrical trouble to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 for some reason, from + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse PF12a2 as the fuse of the branch second system. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch 1st system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit 1600z that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply, the + 12V fuse PF12a1 that is the fuse of the branch 1st system of the effect display device 1600 is blown. Due to an electrical trouble with the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 for some reason, the fuse is branched to one of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the two systems flows, the + 12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the branch second system of the effect display device 1600, is blown. Further, in the present embodiment, the + 12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, has a capacity of + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is a branch first system fuse and + 12V which is a branch second system fuse. Of the fuses PF12a2 for use, those having a capacity larger than the capacity of any of the fuses and smaller than the capacity of the sum of both fuses are selected in advance. Therefore, the + 12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse, has the + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the first branch system fuse and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 which is the second branch system fuse in the + 12V power supply line. Even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses is blown, if the overcurrent still flows in the blown fuse system and exceeds the upper limit of the original allowable current, the fuse may be blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, is the capacity of the + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the first branch fuse and the capacity of the + 12V fuse PF12a2 which is the second branch fuse. In the case of the same as the one in which and the above are added, the + 12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse, has the + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the first branch fuse and the second branch fuse in the + 12V power supply line. Of the + 12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the above, if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, the overcurrent still flows in the blown fuse system and blows when the upper limit of the original allowable current is exceeded. In some cases, when an overcurrent flows through the + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the first branch system fuse and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 which is the second branch system fuse, and both fuses are blown, the fuse is blown. In this way, the effect display device 1600 is provided with the + 12V fuse PF12 which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, the + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the first branch system fuse, and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 which is the second branch system fuse. Since the + 12V fuse PF12 which is the main fuse, the + 12V fuse PF12a1 which is the branch first system fuse, and the + 12V fuse PF12a2 which is the branch second system fuse are blown by the overcurrent. The decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the fuse failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output the fuse warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be the payout control unit described later. The payout control unit in the power-on processing can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the power-off processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the + 12V system driver circuit of the production drive board 1720 in the + 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. When the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the 1720c2 (or while waiting for the drive of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5), If an overload exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) or the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the game board 5 due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, + 12V The fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. Since the + 12V supplied via the + 12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720 is supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 in addition to the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2, the + 12V fuse EF12 The capacity is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side of the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 and the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side of each decorative board of the game board 5.

Since the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of electric current to drive, the effect of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and each decorative board of the game board 5 Of the various LED light emitting effects by the game board 5, the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the production by the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. It has become. Therefore, each decorative board of the game board 5 is blown first so that the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 is blown before the + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse DF12 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are selected in advance, and depend on the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. The capacity of the + 12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 is preset so that the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5 can be prioritized and continued rather than the effect.

As a case where the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the effect by the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, as the capacity of the + 12V fuse EF12. , Each decorative board of the game board 5 is larger than the capacity selected for use up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, and the selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2. If a fuse smaller than the sum of and is selected in advance, the + 12V fuse EF12 is used in a state where each decorative board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. Even if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) or the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the game board 5 and the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. If an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line effect drive board, it may be blown. Further, for example, as the capacity of the + 12V fuse EF12, the capacity selected so that each decorative board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, and the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2. When the same one as the one with the added capacity is selected in advance, the + 12V fuse EF12 is used in a state where each decorative board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. , An overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) and the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the game board 5, and the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. However, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power supply line effect drive board, it may be blown.

Of the effect of the + 12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5, the + 12V system electric drive source (drive) of the game board 5 is used. Contrary to the case where the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the effect by the motor), the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is more than the light emission effect of the game board. When the effect of the + 12 V system electric drive source (drive motor) of 5 is prioritized and continued, each decoration of the game board 5 is performed rather than the fuse provided in the + 12 V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 is blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are set in advance so that the + 12V fuse DF12 of the board is blown first. In addition to being selected, the effect drive so that the effect of the + 12 V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 can be prioritized and continued over the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative substrate of the game board 5. The capacity of the + 12V fuse EF12 of the substrate 1720 is preset.

Further, due to an overload or electrical trouble on the 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720 for some reason, an overcurrent flows through the 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720, and the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive) of the game board 5 is driven. When stopping both the effect of the motor) and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5, the capacity of the fuse provided in the + 12 V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 and the capacity of the fuse are used. The capacity of the + 12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 is set in advance to be less than or equal to the capacity of the + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5.

In this way, by providing the + 12V fuse EF12 on the effect drive board 1720 and providing the fuse on the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2, the + 12V fuse EF12 and the + 12V driver circuit 1720c2 are blown due to the overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is sent to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the power-on processing of the payout control unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is provided in the + 12 V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5. Of the boards, the + 12V fuse DF12 of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted causes an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side to flow through each LED of the game board 5 and the decorative board of the game board 5. And, the + 12V fuse DF12 of the decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. A + 12V fuse DF12 is provided for all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit so that the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. In this case, if the + 12V fuse DF12 of the all-decorative board of the game board 5 causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side to flow through each LED of the game board 5 and all the decorative boards of the game board 5. The + 12V fuse DF12 of all the decorative substrates of the game board 5 is blown. In this way, the + 12V fuse DF12 is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the + 12V fuse DF12 is caused by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. (Note that the current is applied to all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. When a + 12V fuse DF12 that can be passed is provided, the + 12V fuse DF12 is provided on all the decorative boards of the game board 5 so that the + 12V fuse DF12 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. The power failure warning signal is sent to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 by suppressing the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It is not necessary to output to the payout control MPU63aa, and the main control MPU1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on-time processing described later, and the payout control MPU633aa Can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, and the effect drive board 1720. In the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, the decorative board of the game board 5 and the like are electrically connected for some reason. Due to various troubles, leakage current or short circuit may occur, resulting in peripheral control board 1510, liquid crystal output board 1530, effect display device 1600, effect drive board 1720, decorative boards of game board 5, etc. When an overcurrent flows through, the + 12V fuses SF12, PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2, EF12, and DF12 provided on each board are blown, so that the fuses are supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not have to output the power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing, and the payout control MPU633aa performs the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing it. If a leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs due to an electrical trouble to the liquid crystal output board 1530 for some reason, an overcurrent flows through the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 Since an overcurrent also flows through the peripheral control board 1510, which is the upper board, the + 12V fuse SF12 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is blown.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is performed in the + 12 V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the + 12V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3) (When), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive motor is applied to the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) and + 12V system driver circuit of the door frame 3. When it flows, the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the + 12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side of the + 12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The + 12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 has an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side to the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) and the + 12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit is blown, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 12V power line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, by providing a + 12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 and providing a fuse on the + 12V system driver circuit, the + 12V fuse and the + 12V system driver circuit fuse are blown due to an overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be paid out, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is provided in the + 12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 and the decorative board of the door frame 3 due to the + 12V fuse of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted. , The + 12V fuse of the decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is blown. When a + 12V fuse is provided to all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit so that the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 by the + 12V fuse of the all decorative board of the door frame 3, the door frame The + 12V fuses of all the decorative substrates of No. 3 are blown. In this way, the + 12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the + 12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the current is passed to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side for all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied. When a + 12V fuse is provided, the + 12V fuse is provided on all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 so that the + 12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. ), The decrease in the potential of the + 12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be paid out, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, a + 12V power supply for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the like. In the line, due to an electrical trouble to each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc. for some reason, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, and the door frame occurs. When an overcurrent flows through each drive board of 3 and each decorative board of the door frame 3, the + 12V fuse provided on each board is blown, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are reached. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the supplied + 12V power supply line, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not have to output the power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, and the payout control MPU633aa is a payout control unit power off in the payout control unit power on power processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the time processing.

[11-1-5b. Overcurrent protection to + 24V power line]
Further, in the present embodiment, as an overcurrent protection to the + 24V power supply line, as shown in FIG. 213, the + 24V power supply line has a + 24V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit as a countermeasure against overcurrent. A + 24V fuse SF24 is provided to allow current to flow up to, and a + 12V fuse PF12 is provided to the effect display device 1600 as a source fuse for the effect display device 1600 to allow current to flow up to the maximum allowable current. The 1720 is provided with a + 24V fuse EF24 capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power supply line directing drive board, and the current can be passed through the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the directing drive board 1720 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side. There is a fuse that can be used.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and / or the periphery in the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power line peripheral control board flows due to an electrical trouble to the production drive board 1720 or the like that is the succeeding board of the control board 1510, the + 24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 Is designed to blow. In this way, the + 24V fuse SF24 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the + 24V fuse SF24 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power line peripheral control board. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is paid out. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power failure warning signal does not have to be output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a Can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later, and the payout control MPU633aa is a payout in the payout control unit power on power processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the control unit power off processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the + 24V system driver circuit of the production drive board 1720 in the + 24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. When the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the 1720c1 (or when waiting for the drive of the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5), If an overload exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows to the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the game board 5 due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, + 24V The fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown. The + 24V fuse EF24 is adapted to blow when the fuse provided in the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1 is blown but an overcurrent still flows and the + 24V power supply line effect drive board allowable current upper limit is exceeded. In this way, by providing the + 24V fuse EF24 on the effect drive board 1720 and providing the fuse on the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1, the fuses of the + 24V fuse EF24 and the + 24V driver circuit 1720c1 are blown due to the overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is sent to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the power-on processing of the payout control unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board is used in the + 24V power supply line such as the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. An overcurrent is generated in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, etc. due to a leakage current or a short circuit due to an electrical trouble to the effect drive board 1720, etc. When the flow flows, the + 24V fuses SF24 and EF24 provided on each board are blown, so that the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not require the power failure warning signal to be output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the payout control MPU633aa, and the payout control MPU633aa can proceed with the payout without performing the payout control unit power cut-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later (the game ball is a prize ball). The operation of paying out as) can be continued.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is performed in the + 24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the + 24V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3) (When), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid is applied to the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) and + 24V system driver circuit of the door frame 3. When it flows, the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the + 24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side of the + 24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The + 24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 has an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the door frame side to the + 24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) and the + 24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the fuse provided in the + 24V system driver circuit is blown, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the + 24V power line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, by providing a + 24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 and providing a fuse on the + 24V system driver circuit, the + 24V fuse and the + 24V system driver circuit fuse are blown due to an overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be paid out, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each of the door frames 3 is provided in the + 24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When an overcurrent flows through each drive board or the like of the door frame 3 due to a leakage current or a short circuit due to an electrical trouble to the drive board or the like for some reason, each board Since the + 24V fuse provided is blown, the decrease in the potential of the + 24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is suppressed. As a result, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU1310a and the payout control MPU63aa, and the main control MPU1310a continues the progress of the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. The payout control MPU633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power cutoff process in the payout control unit power on-time process described later. Can be done.

[11-2. Payout control board circuit]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 and + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630fa, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa. The backup power supply supplied to the power supply board 630 is supplied as a pay VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

+ 5V of the power supply making circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 + 5V from the power supply making circuit 630fa is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h as shown in FIG. 220. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly comprises a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, + 5V from the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , + 5V with the noise component removed is output from the 3rd terminal. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first rippled (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Has been removed and smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa. When a momentary power failure occurs in the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). Since the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 is large. (Capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is larger than the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). Has been selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 become the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. Further, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the above. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, via the resistor PR0, whereas the payout control MPU633aa The diode PD0 prevents the payment VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the above, via the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are Each is input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. These input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

The payout power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The detection signals from the sensors of the above are input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively, and the input terminals that become empty terminals are the input terminals PA6 of the input port PA. , PA7, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal treatment.

[11-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the payout control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, as an example, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure warning signal, which is the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 220, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure warning signal, which is the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, has a + 12V power supply line at one end (power supply creation in the power supply board 630). + 12V power supply creation of circuit 630f It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 12V power supply line) created and supplied by the circuit 630fb, and also via the resistor PR41. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 6330. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 (that is, a + 5V power supply line)). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 and has a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A). It is shaped and output without inverting the logic), and is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU633aa.

[11-2-2. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, the payout motor drive circuit 633ad will be described with reference to FIG. 221. The payout motor drive circuit 633ad is a circuit that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 89 in response to the control signal from the payout control MPU 633aa. When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 rotates, the payout blade 589 shown in FIG. 89 rotates, and the game ball can be paid out as a prize ball.

The payout motor drive circuit 633ad is a voltage switching circuit 633ada that can switch between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 according to the rotational state of the payout motor 584. And a payout motor drive IC633ab that can drive the payout motor 584.

The acceleration period from the state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped to the rotation at a constant rotation speed and the deceleration period from the state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotating at a constant rotation speed to the stop are high torque. It is necessary to apply a high voltage as an excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the payout motor 584 in order to prevent step-out, while the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped or constant. High torque is not required in the state of rotating at the rotation speed of. Therefore, regardless of the stopped state or the rotating state of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, when a high voltage is applied as an excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the payout motor 584, the payout motor 584 becomes excessive. The heat generated may cause a malfunction or failure in the payout motor 584, and it is necessary to suppress the heat generation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acceleration period from the state in which the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped to the rotation at a constant rotation speed, and the state in which the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates at a constant rotation speed to the stop are In the deceleration period of, + 12V is used as the operating voltage, which is a high voltage, whereas the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is in a stopped state or is in a state of rotating at a constant rotation speed. During this period, the voltage switching circuit 633ada, which uses + 5V as the stopping voltage, which is lower than the operating voltage, is controlled, and the current flowing through the payout motor 584 is used as a resettable fuse using a poly switch. By limiting and protecting the payout motor 584 and the payout motor drive IC633ab that drives the payout motor 584, the heat generation of the payout motor 584 is suppressed.

[11-2-2a. Voltage switching circuit]
The voltage switching circuit 633ada mainly includes a transistor PTR50, a field effect transistor (FET) PF50, a diode P50, and a polyswitch PPS50 as a resettable fuse. The base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR50 and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control output circuit 633ac as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to the output terminal of a voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown) as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching. The input terminal of the voltage switching D type flip-flop is electrically connected to the voltage switching output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa.

The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 via the resistor PR52. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 via the resistor PR53. The source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 (that is, a + 12V power supply line)). Has been done. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD50, which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch PPS50. The anode terminal of the diode PD50 is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 (that is, a + 5V power supply line)). .. The other end of the poly switch PPS50 is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes PD51 and PD52, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the connector terminal as a power supply line called MOTH + 12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584.

[11-2-2b. Payout motor drive IC]
The payout motor drive IC633ab contains four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN-type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR54, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is of the resistor PR55. Electrically connected to one end, the base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR56, and the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is connected to one end of the resistor PR57. It is electrically connected.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an Hφ1 line through which a current for exciting φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows, and the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an H / φ1 line through which the current that excites / φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows, and the current that excites φ2 of the payout motor 584 is applied to the collector terminal 9. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a flowing Hφ2 line, and the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an H / φ2 line through which a current that excites / φ2 of the payout motor 584 flows. It is connected to the.

The other ends of the resistors PR54 to PR57 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control output circuit 633ac. Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, sends a signal called HPD0 indicating the start or stop of excitation of φ1 of the payout motor 584. As a transmission line, it is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for φ1 of a payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR55, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, serves as a line for transmitting a signal called PPD1 instructing the start and stop of excitation of / φ1 of the payout motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip-flop for / φ1 of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the / φ1 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the / φ1 output terminal of the payout motor 584 of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, is shown as a line for transmitting a signal called PPD2 instructing the start and stop of excitation of φ2 of the payout motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ2 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584. The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR57, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor, serves as a line for transmitting a signal called PPD3 that instructs the start and stop of excitation of / φ2 of the payout motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip-flop for / φ2 of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the / φ2 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the / φ2 output terminal of the payout motor 584 of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the payout motor drive IC633ab inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the payout motor drive IC633ab is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the payout motor drive IC633ab inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the payout motor drive IC633ab is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The payout motor drive IC633ab has four diodes built-in, and the first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged in a pair in the package. Have been placed.

The cathode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. And inside the package, the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the payout motor drive IC633abb inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the payout motor drive IC633ab is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD51.

The cathode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the payout motor drive IC633abb inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the payout motor drive IC633ab is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD52.

The first to fourth diodes convert the back electromotive force generated when the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 is stopped into heat and remove the first to fourth diodes. It protects the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor.

The MOTH + 12V power supply line that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to φ2C (common) of the third pin and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 via the connector terminals and wiring (not shown). Connected to. The Hφ1 line through which the current for exciting φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to φ1 of the sixth pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown). The H / φ1 line through which the current for exciting / φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to / φ1 of the second pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown). The Hφ2 line through which the current for exciting φ2 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to φ2 of the fifth pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown). The H / φ2 line through which the current for exciting / φ2 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to / φ2 of the first pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and a wiring (not shown).

When the payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD7, which is 8-bit information including HPD0 to HPD3 instructing the start and stop of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the payout motor 584, is output from the payout control MPU633aa. , The corresponding D-type flip-flops described above, and the respective resistors, are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the payout motor drive IC633ab. When the system of the payout control board 633 is started (when the payout control unit power-on processing is started), the payout motor drive IC 633abb is used when the payout control unit power is turned on based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Discharge control in processing port output processing Discharge motor drive data from MPU633aa According to HPD0 to HPD3, the voltage switched to the operating voltage or the stopping voltage by the voltage switching circuit 633ada is φ1, / φ1, φ2 of the payout motor 584. And / A current that excites φ2 is passed.

Here, the operation of the voltage switching circuit 633ada will be briefly described. When the system of the payout control board 633 is started (when the payout control unit power-on processing (port output processing) described later is started), the port output When the voltage switching signal logic from the payout control MPU633aa in the process is output as the working voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned off, and the voltage of the power supply line MOTH + 12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is generated by the field effect transistor PF50. By being pulled up to the + 12V side, + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 584 as an operating voltage as a power supply line called MOTH + 12V via the poly switch PPS50. It is supplied from the power supply line of MOTH + 12V to the +5 power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 (that is, the + 5V power supply line)) via the diode PD50. Never.

On the other hand, when the signal logic of voltage switching from the payout control MPU633aa is output as a stop voltage logic that is the reverse of the working voltage logic logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned on and + 12V by the field effect transistor PF50 is set. The voltage of the power supply line called MOTH + 12V, which supplies power to the payout motor 584 by being cut off, is raised to the + 5V side via the diode PD50, so that + 5V is applied to the payout motor 584 as a stop voltage via the polyswitch PPS50. It is supplied as a power supply line called MOTH + 12V.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stopping voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V × voltage V ÷ resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage + 12V is 144 / resistance R (voltage V squared / resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage + 5V is 25 / resistance R (voltage V squared / resistance R). R). Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage + 12V is 5 times or more (5.76 = 144/25) as compared with the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage + 5V, so that the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. It becomes. This also applies to the payout motor 584.

That is, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem when the single power supply is driven by the operating voltage of + 12 V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by the driving by the stopping voltage of + 5 V.

The package of the payout motor drive IC633ab is the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the payout motor 584, and the φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / of the payout motor 584. It absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the counter electromotive force from φ2 into heat, and releases the absorbed heat to the outside air (around the payout motor 584). Since the island equipment in the game hall is lined up in a row with other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment in the game hall is high due to the heat generated from the power supply board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if the package of the payout motor 584 absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the temperature around the payout motor 584, that is, the outside air becomes high. In this state, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so that the heat is stored in the package of the payout motor 584. Then, if the temperature of the package of the payout motor 584 rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors may fail. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, the payout motor 584 is continuously excited to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 as much as possible. By doing so, the number of times that the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 is stopped is reduced, and when the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 is stopped. It is possible to reduce the number of times that the counter electromotive force generated in the above is converted into heat by the first to fourth diodes and removed. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small value, which can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package of the payout motor 584. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the failure of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors due to heat.

In this embodiment, the voltage switching circuit 633ada uses a field effect transistor (FET) PF50, which is a semiconductor, without using a relay. This is because relays have a time lag and there is a large variation in performance between individuals. By using the field effect transistor (FET) PF50, the payout operation can be accurately controlled.

[11-2-2c. Poly switch]
Here, a poly switch will be described as a resettable fuse. The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the payout motor 584 as a power supply line of MOTH + 12V via the poly switch PPS50. In the polyswitch PPS50, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current and cool the main body. By using this, the current flowing through the payout motor 584, which is a load, can be limited to protect the payout motor 584, which is a load. A fuse can be mentioned as a device that limits the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing it when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, it is necessary to prevent a person who acquires an illegal game ball by illegally modifying the important payout control board 633 that controls the payout operation of the game ball to the player, such as the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632 composed of the transparent cover body and the transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are, for example, one-way of a caulking portion which is a sealing mechanism. It is crimped with screws. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The payout control board box 632 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the payout control board box 632, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, the fuse must be mounted on the payout control board 633, and if the fuse blows, the crimped portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the crimped portion of the payout control board box 632 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is performed. Is in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting the overcurrent as in the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited to protect the load by identifying the polyswitch. That is, unlike the fuse, the polyswitch itself is not destroyed by overcurrent, there is no need to replace it, the payout motor drive IC633abb that drives the payout motor 584, which is a load, can be protected, and the caulking part needs to be broken. There is no.

The polyswitch PPS50 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in its main body, and has a lead linear shape in which two leads project downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the polyswitch PPS50, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current. When the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the polyswitch PPS50, by arranging the two leads of the polyswitch PPS50 in the vertical direction, the surface where the thickness of the main body of the polyswitch PPS50 is reduced is set in the vertical direction. This makes it easier for the heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch PPS50 to convection upward.

Further, since a large current flows through the polyswitch PPS50, the vicinity of a connector having a terminal for supplying power to the payout motor 584, a terminal for exciting each phase (φ1, / φ1, φ2, / φ2) of the payout motor 584, and the like. It is located in. As a result, it is possible to contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the payout motor 584 with respect to other electronic components mounted on the payout control board 633.

Further, since the polyswitch PPS50 can limit the current flowing through the payout motor 584, it is possible to protect the payout motor 584 from overheating.

In the present embodiment, the unipolar type stepping motor is used, but instead of this, a bipolar type stepping motor may be used. In this case, one poly switch is provided exclusively for each terminal to which the motor power of + 12V and + 5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature) such as a polymer-based PTC (abbreviation for Positive Temperature Coefficien) thermistor.
Although it is an element (abbreviation of Coefficient), the same effect as the above-mentioned polyswitch can be obtained even if a ceramic PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) element or bimetal is used as the resettable fuse.

[11-3. Production drive board circuit]
+ 5V of power supply creation circuit 630f on power supply board 630 + 5V from power supply creation circuit 630fa, + 12V of power supply creation circuit 630f on power supply board 630 + 12V from power supply creation circuit 630fb, + 24V of power supply creation circuit 630f on power supply board 630 When the + 24V from is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635, the effect drive board 1720 is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the + 5V fuse SF5, the + 12V fuse SF12, and the + 24V fuse SF24. The effect drive board 1720 is supplied to the effect drive board 1720 itself and subsequent boards such as the decorative boards of the game board 5 via the + 5 V fuse EF5, the + 12 V fuse EF12, and the + 24 V fuse EF24. It becomes a + 5V power supply line, a + 12V power supply line, and a + 24V power supply line.

As described above, the + 24V power supply line supplied via the + 24V fuse EF24 of the production drive board 1720 is supplied to the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 which is the production control solenoid drive circuit, and the + 12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720. As described above, the + 12V power supply line supplied via the above is supplied to the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 which is the effect control motor drive circuit and each decorative board of the game board 5. Here, as the circuit of the effect drive board 1720, the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 will be described first, and the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 will be described.

[11-3-1. + 24V driver circuit]
The + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 drives and controls the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5. As the + 24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, the backs provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front left drive solenoids 3717 in total) and the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, 3810C in the back front right effect unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 196, respectively. There is a back front right drive solenoid 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817).

As shown in FIG. 222, the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 includes a back front left drive solenoid 3717 (total 3) provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, and 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000. The driver IC1720c1a1 that drives and controls the back front left drive solenoids 3717) and the back front right drive solenoids provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, 3810C in the back front right effect unit 3800 of the back unit 3000, respectively. It is composed of a driver IC1720c1a2 that drives and controls 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Since the driver IC1720c1a1 and the driver IC1720c1a2 are the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC1720c1a1 will be described here, and the driver IC1720c1a2 may be represented by parentheses following the reference numerals in the description of the driver IC1720c1a1.

[11-3-1a. + 24V driver IC]
Back front left drive solenoid 3717 (total of 3 back front left drive solenoids 3717) and back unit 3000 provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000. The pachinko machine 1 is turned on for the back front right drive solenoids 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the back front right effect unit 3800. The system of the peripheral control board 1510 was started (the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later was performed, and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing) described later was started), and the predetermined conditions were satisfied. It is sometimes driven and not always driven. However, when driving the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, for some reason, the driver IC1720c1a1 and the driver IC1720c1a2 may malfunction or malfunction. Further, a mechanism for opening and closing a plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter units 3730 provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, and a back front right effect of the back unit 3000. When the mechanism for opening and closing the plurality of shutters 3832 of the shutter unit 3830 provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810A, 3810B, 3810C in the unit 3800 becomes defective and becomes difficult to move (difficult to operate), the three backs Front left drive solenoid 3717 Of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the solenoid that has become difficult to move (difficult to operate) due to a malfunction becomes overloaded and generates excessive heat, causing the solenoid or solenoid to be driven. There is a risk of malfunction or failure of the IC.

When such a malfunction or failure occurs, the back front left drive solenoid or the back of the driver IC1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Overcurrent flows to the driver IC that drives the front left drive solenoid, or the back of the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 that have a problem or failure. The potential of the + 12V power supply line drops due to an overcurrent flowing through the driver IC that drives and controls the front right drive solenoid and the back front right drive solenoid. Then, as described above, this + 12V power supply line is + 12V from the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and this + 12V is the main board constituting the main board in addition to the effect drive board 1720. Since it is also supplied to the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing is performed to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU633aa performs the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later and pays out. (The operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) will be stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 is provided with the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back fronts in the + 24V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A fuse for blocking the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c1a1 that drives and controls the left drive solenoid 3717 is provided, and the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 is provided with a + 24V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A fuse is provided to cut off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817.

+ 24V fuse EF24a1 (a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) + 24V fuse that is provided in the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. One end of the EF24a2) is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. The other end of the + 24V fuse EF24a1 (+ 24V fuse EF24a2) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED50 and ED51 (ED52, ED53), and three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three). It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line called SOLL + 24V (SOLR + 24V) that supplies power to the front right drive solenoid 3817).

The driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) includes four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN-type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER50 (ER53), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is. Electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER51 (ER54), the base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER52 (ER55) and is the base of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decorative unit 3710A among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Of the 3817, the LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative unit 3810A is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decorative unit 3710B among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Of the 3817, the LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative unit 3810B is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decorative unit 3710C among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Of the 3817, it is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LL-SOL line (LL-SOL) through which a current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative unit 3810C flows. ..

The other ends of the resistors ER50 to ER55 are electrically connected to the effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720, and the connector of the effect drive input circuit and the effect drive board 1720 (not shown), the effect drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board. Wiring that electrically connects the boards to the 1510 (they are electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the harness and the connector of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, one end is the first NPN type. The other end of the resistor ER50 (ER53) electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the Darlington transistor is the back front left drive solenoid provided in the third back front left decorative unit 3710A of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. A signal called SPD0 (SPD3) is transmitted to instruct the start and stop of excitation of the coil of 3717 (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decorative unit 3810A among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). The line is electrically connected to the output terminal of the effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720. The input terminal of the effect drive input circuit effect drive input circuit is a predetermined peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the output port of.

To briefly explain the effect drive input circuit (not shown), the effect drive input circuit includes the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 216 and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 220. It is the same circuit. The input terminal of the production drive input circuit is a power supply line created and supplied by a + 12V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and the + 12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720. It is electrically connected to the other end of the first resistor (corresponding to the resistor MR2 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR40 in FIG. 220) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line supplied via It is electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor (corresponding to the transistor MTR0 in FIG. 216 and the transistor PTR40 in FIG. 220) via two resistors (corresponding to the resistor MR3 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR41 in FIG. 220). ing. In addition to the second resistor, the base terminal of the transistor has a third resistor (resistor MR4 in FIG. 216 and resistor PR42 in FIG. 220) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720. It is electrically connected to the other end of). The emitter terminal of the transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor is a + 5V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the + 5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and is supplied via the + 5V fuse EF5 of the production drive board 1720. It is electrically connected to the other end of the fourth resistor (corresponding to the resistor MR5 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR43 in FIG. 220) electrically connected to the supplied + 5V power supply line), and is shown in FIG. 213. Non-inverting buffer ICs constituting the input buffer circuit 1720a (The non-inverting buffer IC includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and inverts the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the non-inverting buffer circuits A. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of (corresponding to MIC10 in FIG. 216 and PIC40 in FIG. 220). The output terminal of the non-inverting buffer circuit A of the non-inverting buffer IC constituting the input buffer circuit 1720a serves as the output terminal of the effect drive input circuit.

The other end of the resistor ER51 (ER54), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, is the third back front left decorative unit 3710B of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. SPD1 that instructs the start and stop of excitation of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decorative unit 3810B of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) As a line for transmitting a signal (SPD4), it is electrically connected to an output terminal of an effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720. The input terminal of the effect drive input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

The other end of the resistor ER52 (ER55), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, is the third back front left decorative unit 3710C of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. SPD2 that instructs the start and stop of excitation of the coil of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decorative unit 3810C among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). As a line for transmitting a signal (SPD5), it is electrically connected to an output terminal of an effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720. The input terminal of the effect drive input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

The lines for transmitting the signals SPD0 to SPD5 are separate lines, and are electrically connected to the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that is, different output terminals. ..

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), whereas the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2). ) Is not connected to the outside.

The driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) has four diodes built-in, and the first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are paired in the package. It is located inside.

The cathode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED50.

The cathode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. And inside the package, the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED51.

Of the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are used when the excitation of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) to the coil is stopped. The first to third NPN type Darlington transistors are protected by converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it.

The power line called SOLL + 24V (SOLR + 24V) that supplies power to the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) is connected to the three backs via the connector terminals and the respective wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to each connector of the front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710A (of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decorative body unit 3810A The LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) is provided is the third of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via the terminal of the connector and the wiring (not shown). (3) Connector and electricity of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710A (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810A among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Connected to. Of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710B (of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decorative body unit 3810B The LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) is provided is the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via the terminal of the connector and the wiring (not shown). (3) Connector and electricity of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710B (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810B among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Connected to. Of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C (of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C The LL-SOL line (RL-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) is provided is the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via the terminal of the connector and the wiring (not shown). (3) Back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710C (Back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) Second attacker solenoid It is electrically connected to the 2612 connector.

Whether the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is performed and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing) described later is started), and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Depending on whether or not, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the information of SPD0 to SPD5 instructing the start and stop of excitation of the coils of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) is used. When the drive data SPD0 to SPD5 for a certain drive solenoid is output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the driver IC 1720c1a1 (via the corresponding effect drive input circuit of the effect drive board 1720 described above and each resistor, respectively. It is input to the base terminals 1, 5 and 8 of the driver IC1720c1a2), respectively. The driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) has three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) according to drive solenoid drive data SPD0 to SPD5 from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Pass the current that excites the coil.

[11-3-1b. Arrangement of fuses provided in + 24V driver IC]
The + 24V fuse EF24a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c1a1, generates heat when a large current called an overcurrent flows through the driver IC1720c1a1 that drives the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Therefore, the connector connected as the vicinity of the driver IC1720c1a1 (particularly, the vicinity of the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC1720c1a1) or the above-mentioned SOLL + 24V power supply line, LU-SOL line, LC-SOL line, and LC-SOL line. It is preferably arranged in the vicinity (particularly, in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power line of SOLL + 24V is connected). Further, the + 24V fuse EF24a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c1a2, generates heat due to a large current called an overcurrent flowing through the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817. Therefore, it is connected in the vicinity of the driver IC1720c1a2 (particularly in the vicinity of the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC1720c1a2) or as the above-mentioned SOLR + 24V power supply line, RU-SOL line, RC-SOL line, and RC-SOL line. It is preferably arranged in the vicinity of the connector (particularly, in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power line of SOLR + 24V is connected).

[11-3-2. + 12V driver circuit]
The + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the + 12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. As the + 12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, the back rear drive motor 3126 and the back rear drive motor 3126 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 137 (a) and 137 (b) are shown in FIGS. The back lower left drive motor 3205 in the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 158, the back lower right drive motor 3255 in the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 158 (b), FIG. The back bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 shown in b), the back bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back unit 3000 back bottom middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 162 (a). 3352, the back-up front rotation drive motor 3452 in the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and 170 (b), shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and 170 (b). The back-up elevating drive motor 3249 in the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, and the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 173. The back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 in the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 shown in 178 (b), and the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b). The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 in the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 185 (b), There is a back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 185 (a) and 185 (b), and there are a total of 12 drive motors (hereinafter, "game board 5 side"). It may be described as "drive motor").

As shown in FIG. 223, the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back-rear drive motor 3126 and the back-bottom left drive motor 3205 corresponding to each of the drive motors on the game board 5 side. Driver IC1720c2a2 to drive, driver IC1720c2a3 to drive and control the lower right drive motor 3255, driver IC1720c2a4 to drive and control the lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, driver IC1720c2a5 to drive and control the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352, and the back. Driver IC1720c2a6 that drives and controls the upper front rotation drive motor 3425, driver IC1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back upper lift drive motor 3249, driver IC1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, and back rear left rotation drive motor 3525. Driver IC1720c2a9 that drives and controls the driver IC1720c2a9, driver IC1720c2a10 that drives and controls the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, driver IC1720c2a11 that drives and controls the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625, and a driver that drives and controls the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654. It is composed of IC1720c2a12. Since the total of 12 driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are all the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC1720c2a1 will be mainly described here, and the description of the driver IC1720c2a2 to the driver IC1720c2a12 may be omitted.

[11-3-2a. + 12V driver IC]
As for the drive motor on the game board 5, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is performed and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later (motor). And the solenoid drive process) is started) and it is not always driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when driving the drive motor on the game board 5 side, there is a risk that the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 may malfunction or malfunction for some reason, and a mechanism operated by the drive motor on the game board 5 side. When a malfunction occurs in the game board and it becomes difficult to operate, the drive motor on the game board 5 side, which has become difficult to operate due to a malfunction, becomes overloaded and generates excessive heat, so that the drive motor or the drive motor is turned on. There is a risk that the driver IC to be driven may malfunction or malfunction.

When such a defect or failure occurs, the drive motor or drive motor in which the defect or failure occurs is driven and controlled among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motor on the game board 5 side and the drive motor on the game board 5 side. The potential of the + 12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing through the driver IC. Then, as described above, this + 12V power supply line is + 12V from the + 12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and this + 12V is the main board constituting the main board in addition to the effect drive board 1720. Since it is also supplied to the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing is performed to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU633aa performs the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later and pays out. (The operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) will be stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motor on the game board 5 side include the drive motor on the game board 5 side and the drive motor on the game board 5 side in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. Each of the fuses is provided to cut off the overcurrent flowing through the drivers IC1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the motor.

Specifically, the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back-rear drive motor 3126 has an overcurrent that flows to the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back-rear drive motor 3126 and the back-rear drive motor 3126 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The driver IC1720c2a2, which is provided with a + 12V fuse EF12a1 that cuts off the current, and drives and controls the back lower left drive motor 3205, includes the back lower left drive motor 3205 and the back lower left drive motor 3205 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A + 12V fuse EF12a2 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a2 that controls the drive is provided, and the driver IC1720c2a3 that drives and controls the lower right drive motor 3255 is provided with the lower right drive motor in the + 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A + 12V fuse EF12a3 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a3 that drives and controls the 3255 and the lower right drive motor 3255 is provided, and the driver IC1720c2a4 that drives and controls the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is provided with the effect drive board 1720. A + 12V fuse EF12a4 is provided to cut off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a4 that drives and controls the underside middle rotation drive motor 3333 and the underside middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the + 12V power supply line.

Further, the driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352 is connected to the driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352 and the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The driver IC1720c2a6, which is provided with a + 12V fuse EF12a5 for blocking the flowing overcurrent and drives and controls the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, has the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 and the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A + 12V fuse EF12a6 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a6 that drives and controls the front rotation drive motor 3425 is provided, and the driver IC1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back-up lift drive motor 3249 is provided in the + 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. The driver IC1720c2a8 is provided with a + 12V fuse EF12a7 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back-up / down drive motor 3429 and the back-up / down drive motor 3492. The + 12V fuse EF12a8 for blocking the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 and the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720 is provided.

Further, the driver IC1720c2a9 that drives and controls the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is transferred to the driver IC1720c2a9 that drives and controls the back-rear left-rotation drive motor 3525 and the back-rear left-rotation drive motor 3525 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The driver IC1720c2a10, which is provided with a + 12V fuse EF12a9 for blocking the flowing overcurrent and drives and controls the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, has the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A + 12V fuse EF12a10 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a10 that drives and controls the left elevating drive motor 3554 is provided, and the driver IC1720c2a11 that drives and controls the back-to-right rotation drive motor 3625 has a + 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A + 12V fuse EF12a11 for blocking the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a11 that drives and controls the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625 and the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is provided, and the driver that drives and controls the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The IC1720c2a12 is provided with a + 12V fuse EF12a12 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a12 that drives and controls the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the + 12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. There is.

One end of the + 12V fuse EF12a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear-rear drive motor 3126, is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The other end of the + 12V fuse EF12a1 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60, and is also electrically connected to the connector terminal as a power supply line called MOT1 + 12V that supplies power to the back-rear drive motor 3126. One end of the + 12V fuse EF12a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c2a9 that drives and controls the counterclockwise rotation drive motor 3525, is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The other end of the + 12V fuse EF12a2 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED61, and is also electrically connected to the connector terminal as a power line called MOT2 + 12V that supplies power to the rear left rotation drive motor 3525. To. The driver IC1720c2a3 to the driver IC1720c2a11 have the same circuit configuration, and one end of the + 12V fuse EF12a12, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c2a12 that drives and controls the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. There is. The other end of the + 12V fuse EF12a12 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED71, and is also electrically connected to the connector terminal as a power line called MOT12 + 12V that supplies power to the rear right elevating drive motor 3654. To.

The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are provided with a 4-channel low-side driver, an overcurrent protection unit, a short-circuit protection unit, a thermal shutdown unit, a low voltage lockout unit, a diode for clamping a turn-off transient voltage generated by an inductive load, a serial interface, and the like. A daisy chain is electrically connected from the first-stage driver IC1720c2a1 to the final-stage driver IC1720c2a12. The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 indicate information by the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information by the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), and information by thermal shutdown (indicating a state of being shut down due to overheating). Information from the low voltage lockout unit (status information) and information (status information indicating the standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) can be read via the serial interface.

The terminals 14 (SDATIN terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial data input terminals, and the 15 terminals (SDATOUT) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial data output terminals. The drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is a connector of the peripheral control board 1510, and a wiring that electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. When the data is first input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC1720C2a1 in the first stage via the harness), the connector of the effect drive board 1720, the effect drive input circuit (not shown above), and the resistor ER60, the drive motor drive is serial data from the 15 terminals. The data signal SDAT is output and input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC1720c2a2, which is the subsequent stage of the driver IC1720c2a1 in the first stage, via the resistor ER64.

The driver IC1720c2a2 outputs the drive data signal VGA for the drive motor, which is serial data, from its 15 terminals to the driver IC1720c2a3, which is the driver IC in the subsequent stage. Then, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data output from the 15 terminals of the driver IC1720c2a11, which is the driver immediately before the driver IC1720c2a12, which is the driver in the final stage, is finally reached in the subsequent stage via the resistor ER82. It is input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC1720c2a12 of the stage. In this way, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data, is transmitted from the first-stage driver IC1720C2a1 connected in a daisy chain electrically connected in beads to the final-stage driver IC1720C2a12.

Since the driver IC 1720c2a12 is the driver IC in the final stage, there is no driver IC in the subsequent stage. Therefore, the 15 terminals (SDATOUT) of the driver IC1720c2a12 in the final stage are not connected to the outside.

Further, in the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the drive data for driving the drive motor on the game board 5, the inside of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 There is a command (status information acquisition data) for checking the status by status information. The status information includes information by the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current status), information by the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), and information by thermal shutdown (status indicating the state of being shut down due to overheating). Information), information from the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating the standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) is included. The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 output status information as serial data from the terminal 16 (FAULT) described later.

The terminals 13 (SCLK terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial clock signal input terminals. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, electrically connects the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. Harness), is input to the effect drive board 1720 via the connector of the effect drive board 1720. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal input to the effect drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminal 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the effect drive input circuit (not shown) described above. For example, the drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal branched via an effect drive input circuit (not shown), is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC1720c2a1 via the resistor ER61, and is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC1720c2a2 via the resistor ER64. It is input to 13 and is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC1720c2a12 via the resistor ER83. That is, the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are electrically connected in parallel, unlike the terminals 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 to which serial data connected in a daisy chain is electrically connected.

The resistors ER60 to ER83 function as damping resistors that reduce signal reflection in the path for transmitting the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data. This is because among the input terminals of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, the terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are terminals for inputting signals related to serial communication, and the signal transmission speed is faster than other input terminals. Is. It should be noted that there is no problem even if damping resistors are provided in the other input terminals, the terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) and the terminal 8 (ENBL terminal), which will be described later. For example, when a collective resistor (resistor array) is a component that is commonly used on a plurality of boards, a surface mount type resistor (SMD type resistor) is mounted on the terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, respectively. Compared with this, the number of parts is reduced, and when a collective resistor (resistor array) is used, it may be superior in terms of mounting density.

The terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a latch signal input terminal. The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, electrically connects the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720 (harness). ), Is input to the effect drive board 1720 via the connector of the effect drive board 1720. The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal input to the effect drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminal 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the effect drive input circuit (not shown) described above.

The terminals 8 (ENBL terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are enable signal input terminals, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720 in the present embodiment. The terminals 8 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are pulled down internally, but by being electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 can be connected to the driver IC1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. When the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, is input to the terminal 11 and the logic is the capture permission logic (for example, HI), the drive is a clock signal input to the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. Based on the clock signal SCLK for the motor, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is the serial data input to the terminals 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, is taken in, and the taken-in serial data is converted into parallel data to be described later. Output from 3, 4, 6 and 7. On the other hand, in the driver IC1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, when the drive motor latch signal SLAT which is a latch signal is input to the terminal 11 of the driver IC1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 and the logic is the capture non-permission logic (for example, LOW), The drive data signal SDAT, which is the serial data input to the terminals 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, is not taken in based on the drive motor clock signal SCLK which is the clock signal input to the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. , Maintain the current output state (that is, maintain the state of being imported from the previous time, converted, and output from the output terminals 3, 4, 6, and 7).

The terminals 9 (Reset terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are reset signal input terminals, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720 in the present embodiment. By electrically connecting the reset signal input terminal to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 and the peripheral control IC1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not intended due to disturbances such as noise. In addition, it prevents it from being reset.

The terminal 5 (GND terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a ground terminal, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720.

The terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a power input terminal, and is a connector of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. It is electrically connected to the connector of the effect drive board 1570 and the + 12V power supply line supplied via the + 12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, and the + 12V fuse EF12a1 to the fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, respectively. It is also electrically connected to one end of the EF12a12. As described above, the other ends of the + 12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively, and the game board 5 It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line of MOT1 + 12V to MOT12 + 12 that supplies power to the drive motor on the side.

The terminals 2 (VCLAMP terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals for outputting the clamp voltage, and are electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively.

The terminals 3 (OUT1 terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals to the load 1, and are connected to the connector terminals as MOT1-A to MOT12-A through which a current for exciting the A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected.

The terminals 4 (OUT2 terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals to the load 2, and are connected to the connector terminals as MOT1-B to MOT12-B through which a current for exciting the B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected.

The terminals 6 (OUT3 terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals to the load 3, and are connectors as MOT1- / A to MOT12- / A through which a current for exciting the / A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected to the terminal of.

The terminals 7 (OUT4 terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals to the load 4, and are connectors as MOT1- / B to MOT12- / B through which a current for exciting the / B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected to the terminal of.

The terminal 10 (NC terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is not connected to the outside.

The terminal 10 (NC terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is not connected to the outside.

The terminals 16 (FAULT terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial data output terminals, and are information by the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information by the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), Status information including information from thermal shutdown (status information indicating the shutdown state due to overheating) and information from the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating the standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is output as error signals 1 to 12 which are serial data. The error signals 1 to error signals 12, which are serial data output from the terminals 16 (FAULT terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are input to the logic sum circuit (OR circuit) by the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720 and calculated. The result of this calculation is serial data, and a driver circuit error signal is generated electrically between the effect drive output circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720, the connector of the effect drive board 1720, and the board between the effect drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness) to be connected and the connector of the peripheral control board 1510.

A driver circuit error signal, which is serial data, is input to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Since the error signals 1 to 12 are calculated by the OR circuit (OR circuit) of the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720 as described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a has a status included in the driver circuit error signal. Based on the information, it is not possible to individually determine which of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720 is the status information, but the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720 are used. It is possible to determine whether or not a problem has occurred, and various effect devices (various LEDs and effect display devices 1600) provided in the game board 5 and various effect devices (various LEDs and effect operations) provided in the door frame 3 are provided with error notification. It can be performed by controlling the button unit 360).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the error signals 1 to 12 are calculated by the logic sum circuit (OR circuit) by the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720, so that the peripheral control IC 1510a is a driver. Based on the status information included in the circuit error signal, it is not possible to individually determine which of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720 is the status information, but instead, the error signal A circuit configuration may be adopted in which 1 to the error signal 12 can be input to the peripheral control IC 1510a. By doing so, among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720, the status information and the driver IC can be grasped in association with each other based on the status information included in the driver circuit error signal. It is possible to determine whether or not a problem has occurred.

[11-3-2b. Arrangement of fuses provided in + 12V driver IC]
The + 12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, may generate heat due to a large current called an overcurrent flowing through the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive the drive motor on the game board 5, and therefore the driver IC1720c2a1 ~ 1720c2a12 (particularly, near terminal 1 (VM terminal), terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of driver IC1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12) or the above-mentioned MOT1 + 12V to MOT12 + 12V power supply lines, MOT1-A line to MOT12-A line, MOT1- Near the connector connected as B line to MOT12-B line, MOT1- / A line to MOT12- / A line, MOT1- / B line to MOT12- / B line (particularly, the power supply lines MOT1 + 12V to MOT12 + 12V are connected. It is preferable that it is arranged near the connector of the terminal.

[11-3-3. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted]
The copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the fuse is mounted will be described. The fuses include the + 5V fuse SF5 of the peripheral control board 1510, the + 12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, the + 24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , + 12V fuse PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the production display device 1600, + 5V fuse EF5 of the production drive board 1720, + 12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720, and a fuse provided in the + 12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720. + 12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12) shown in FIG. 223, + 24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720, and fuses provided in the + 24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the effect drive board 1720 (+ 24V fuses EF24a1, EF24a2 shown in FIG. 223). In addition to the + 12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5, there are + 12V fuse, + 24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3, + 12V fuse of each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the like.

Since each of these fuses in the present embodiment is of a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) and is mounted on a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of each substrate, here, An effect in which the + 12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720 and the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back-rear drive motor 3126 among the fuses provided in the + 12V system driver IC1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are mounted. The copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the drive board 1720 will be described, and the selection method of each fuse will be described.

[11-3-3a. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the production drive board on which the + 12V fuse is mounted]
As shown in FIG. 224 (a), the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 on which the + 12V fuse EF1 is mounted has a circular shape through which each terminal (lead type connector) of the connector is inserted. A plurality of connector soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) having a connector are formed by arranging them in two rows along the vertical direction. Of the multiple connector soldering copper foils, the topmost terminal is the 1st terminal on the left side, and the 2nd terminal on the right side is assigned a power supply terminal. A GND terminal (ground terminal) is assigned to the 4th terminal below, and a control signal is assigned to other terminals (not shown). The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is long in the vertical direction for mounting the + 12V fuse EF12 in the vicinity of the second terminal assigned as the power supply terminal among the plurality of connector soldering copper foils. Of a pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa and EF12xpb (so-called "pads") having a rectangular shape, the copper foil EF12xpa for soldering the connector side is formed so as to be arranged, and the land of the first terminal A connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa is formed that electrically connects the land of the second terminal and the copper foil EF12xpa for soldering fuses.

The connector is inserted into the copper foil for connector soldering and soldered on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720, and the pair of terminals of the + 12V fuse EF12 are paired with the copper foil EF12xpa for soldering the fuse. , EF12xpb, respectively, and soldered, the longitudinal direction of the connector and the longitudinal direction of the + 12V fuse EF12 are arranged perpendicular to each other.

Of the pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa and EF12xpb, a plurality of through holes EF12t are formed in the vicinity of the copper foil EF12xpb for fuse soldering away from the connector in three rows along the vertical direction. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension of the through holes EF12t formed in a plurality of three rows are compared with the vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension of the copper foil EF12xpb for fuse soldering. Both are about twice as large. The through-hole EF12t is electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both sides (front surface (fuse mounting surface) and back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the effect drive substrate 1720. On the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720, a copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t. It is formed as an island that is not electrically connected to the fuse non-mounting surface) the region of the copper foil formed on 1720y).

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 electrically forms a pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb, which are a fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb and a through hole EF12t. A trailing side wiring pattern 1720xpb for connecting and supplying a + 12V power supply line to a plurality of electronic components (not shown) and a succeeding board (each decorative board of the game board 5) is formed.

The line width Pw2 of the subsequent side wiring pattern 1720xpb is larger than the line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa, and is formed to be about twice as large in this embodiment. Since the copper foil for connector soldering to which the wiring pattern 1720xpa on the connector side is electrically connected is formed by arranging them close to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions, it is difficult to increase the line width of the wiring pattern, but the + 12V power supply If the wiring pattern through which the current that supplies the line flows is routed in the effect drive board 1720 with a thin line, the wiring pattern may be burnt out within the capacity selected for the + 12V fuse EF12. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to secure a large line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa. Therefore, among the plurality of connector soldering copper foils, the line length of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa can be shortened as much as possible. A + 12V fuse EF12 is arranged near the second terminal assigned as the power supply terminal.

The + 12V fuse EF12 must not be blown by the use of inrush current or normal steady current when the power is turned on, but must be blown by overcurrent. The reason for providing the through hole EF12t is that the temperature of the subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb rises because the current of the + 12V power supply line flows, but the + 12V fuse EF12 is copper-plated so as not to blow due to the temperature rise due to normal use. The surface area is increased and cooled by the holes to be formed and the copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive substrate 1720.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive substrate 1720 is coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color except for the copper foil for connector soldering, the pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa, EF12xpb, and the through hole EF12t. The orientation, part number, pin number, etc. of the electronic component are printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color. The color of the resist liquid and the color of the paint include, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, and blue, and are used in appropriate combinations.

[11-3-3b. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the production drive board on which the fuse provided in the + 12V driver IC is mounted]
Of the fuses provided on the + 12V driver IC1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 on which the fuse EF12a1 provided on the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back-rear drive motor 3126 is mounted is As shown in FIG. 224 (b), the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc branched from the above-mentioned subsequent side wiring pattern 1720xpb that supplies the + 12V power supply line has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction for mounting the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1. Of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb (so-called "pads"), the branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa is formed so as to be arranged, and the branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa is formed. And the VM terminal copper foil VMp (so-called "pad") having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction on which the terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted, and the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd that electrically connects. Is formed. In addition, on the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720, wiring copper foil (so-called "pad") for each terminal is provided even if it corresponds to other terminals in addition to the VM terminal and VCLAMP terminal of the driver IC1720c2a1. Each is formed.

Further, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is a copper foil VCLAMPp (so-called "pad") for a VCLAMP terminal having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction in which the terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted. And, the copper foil ED60ap (so-called "pad") for the anode terminal having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction on which the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 is mounted, the copper foil VCLAMPp for the VCLAMP terminal, and the copper foil ED60ap for the anode terminal are electrically operated. The wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VCLAMP terminal to be connected is formed. The line width of the wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VMLAMP terminal is the same as the line width of the wiring pattern 1720xpd for the VM terminal.

Further, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc of the pair of copper foils for soldering EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb. In the vicinity of the branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa and the other) fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpb, a plurality of through holes EF12a1t are formed in two rows along the left-right direction. The horizontal distance dimension and the vertical distance dimension of the through holes EF12a1t formed in a plurality of lines are about the same as the horizontal distance dimension and the vertical distance dimension of the copper foil EF12a1xpb for soldering fuses. It's about one size larger. The through hole EF12a1t is electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both sides (front surface (fuse mounting surface) and back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the effect drive substrate 1720. On the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive substrate 1720, a copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12a1t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12a1t (through at a position corresponding to the above-mentioned through hole EF12t). A copper foil region different from the copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) that covers the hole EF12t is electrically different from other regions (copper foil region formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive substrate 1720). It is formed as an unconnected island.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is a branch of a pair of copper foils for soldering EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb that is separated from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc (that is, electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc). Copper foil for side fuse soldering EF12a1xpa and the other) Copper foil for fuse soldering EF12a1xpb, through hole EF12a1t, and copper foil for cathode terminals having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction on which the cathode terminals of the Zener diode ED60 are mounted. To supply a power supply line called MOT1 + 12V that electrically connects the ED60kp (so-called "pad"), the copper foil VCLAMPp for the VCLAMP terminal, and the copper foil ED60ap for the anode terminal to supply power to the back-rear drive motor 3126. The motor-side wiring pattern 1720xpf is formed.

A pair of terminals of the + 12V fuse EF12a1 provided on the driver IC1720c2a1 are placed and soldered on the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb, respectively, and the anode terminal and cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 are copper for the anode terminal. When placed on the foil ED60ap and the copper foil ED60kp for the anode terminal and soldered, the longitudinal direction of the + 12V fuse EF12a1 and the longitudinal direction of the Zener diode ED60 are arranged perpendicular to each other.

As described above, the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc is branched from the above-mentioned succeeding side wiring pattern 1720xpb that supplies the + 12V power supply line, and the line width Pa1w1 is compared with the line width Pw2 of the above-mentioned succeeding side wiring pattern 1720xpb. Although it is small, it is formed larger than the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the copper foil EF12a1xpa for soldering the fuse on the branch side. The line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc may be larger, the same, or smaller than the line width of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa described above, but the line of the wiring pattern 1720xpd for the VM terminal may be smaller. The width is formed larger than the line width of the wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VMLAMP terminal. Although the line width of the wiring pattern 1720xpd for the VM terminal and the line width of the wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VCLAMP terminal are the same, they are formed thinner than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc.

The line width Pa1w2 of the motor-side wiring pattern 1720xpf is larger than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc, and is formed about 1.5 times larger in this embodiment. The wiring pattern 1720xpd for the VM terminal and the wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VCLAMP terminal to which the + 12V power supply line is supplied have a narrow line width, whereas the wiring pattern 1720xpf on the motor side has a thick line width on the motor side. This is because the pattern 1720xpf supplies a power supply line called MOT1 + 12V that supplies power to the back-rear drive motor 3126, and the amount of current flowing is large.

The + 12V fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC1720c2a1 must not be blown by the use of an inrush current or a normal steady current when the power is turned on, but must be blown by an overcurrent. The reason for providing the through hole EF12a1t is that the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf causes the current of the power supply line called MOT1 + 12V that supplies power to the back-rear drive motor 3126 to flow, so that the temperature rises. A copper foil region (described above) having a through hole to be copper-plated and a rectangular shape (not shown above) formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive substrate 1720 so that the + 12V fuse EF12a1 is not blown. The surface area is increased and cooled by a copper foil region (a copper foil region different from the copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) that covers the through hole EF12t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t).

Further, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is for a pair of fuse soldering in addition to the above-mentioned copper foil for connector soldering, a pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa, EF12xpb, and a through hole EF12t. Copper foil EF12a1xpa, EF12a1xpb, through hole EF12a1t, copper foil ED60ap for anode terminal, copper foil ED60kp for cathode terminal, copper foil VMp for VM terminal, copper foil VCLAMPp for VCLAMP terminal, and wiring copper foil for each terminal are specified. A color resist solution is applied, and the orientation, part number, pin number, etc. of the electronic component are printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color. The color of the resist liquid and the color of the paint include, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, and blue, and are used in appropriate combinations.

[11-3-3c. How to select the capacity of each fuse]
Here, a method of selecting each fuse will be briefly described. The fuse must not be blown by the use of inrush current or normal steady current when the power is turned on, but it must be blown by overcurrent. However, depending on the mounting density of the fuse, other electronic components are mounted around it, and other electronic components are densely mounted around the fuse, and other electronic components are densely mounted around the fuse. Comparing with the low mounting density state that is not mounted in, the temperature of the fuse itself in the high mounting density state is higher than the temperature of the fuse itself in the low mounting density state even if the temperature around the fuse is the same. Become. Therefore, it is preferable that the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at the pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at the pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. For example, when an electronic component is mounted as a heating element around a fuse mounted on a board and selection is made based on the relationship between the rated current ratio (%) and the ambient temperature (° C), the fuse ambient temperature is used as the ambient temperature. Instead, use the temperature of the fuse terminals. When this selection method is used, for example, when the capacity of the fuse selected by using the ambient temperature of the fuse as the ambient temperature is selected by using the temperature of the terminal of the fuse as the ambient temperature, the selection result is that it cannot be selected. In some cases, the selection is risky. It should be noted that the selection result is that the selection is possible regardless of whether the selection is made using the fuse ambient temperature as the ambient temperature or the fuse terminal as the ambient temperature. Is more preferable.

Of the capacity of each fuse, the capacity of the + 5V fuse SF5, which is the main fuse of the + 5V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the + 5V fuse mounted on the effect drive board 1720 which is the succeeding board. Compared to the largest, the + 5V fuse mounted on the succeeding board is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and a plurality of fuses are mounted on the succeeding board. In this case, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board in the same subsequent board, and the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is the capacity of the fuse in the final stage. It is larger than that.

For example, in the + 5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is one previous stage. It may be smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the + 5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity of the previous first stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is one previous stage. It may be the same as the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage of. Further, for example, in the + 5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity of the previous first stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1. It may be smaller than the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse, or it may be the same. Further, for example, in the + 5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the final stage. It may be smaller than the combined capacity of the fuses of the above, or may be the same. In the + 5V power supply line, if the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, it will be applied to the board. The substrate itself may ignite due to overcurrent.

Of the capacities of each fuse, the capacities of the + 12V fuse SF12, which is the main fuse of the + 12V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, are the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, and the game board 5 which are the succeeding boards. Compared to the capacity of the + 12V fuse mounted on each decorative board, the subsequent board has the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board (the fuse is not mounted on the previous board). Sometimes it is smaller than the capacity of the fuse on the previous board on which the fuse is mounted. The same shall apply hereinafter), and when multiple fuses are mounted on the succeeding board, the same succeeding board The capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and the capacity of the first-stage fuse is larger than the capacity of the final-stage fuse.

For example, in the + 12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is one previous stage. It may be smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the + 12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity of the previous first stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is one previous stage. It may be the same as the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage of. Further, for example, in the + 12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity of the previous first stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1. It may be smaller than the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse, or it may be the same. Further, for example, in the + 12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse, and the final stage. It may be smaller than the combined capacity of the fuses of the above, or may be the same. In the + 12V power supply line, if the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, it will be applied to the board. The substrate itself may ignite due to overcurrent.

Of the capacity of each fuse, the capacity of the + 24V fuse SF24, which is the main fuse of the + 24V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the + 24V fuse mounted on the effect drive board 1720 which is the succeeding board. The largest fuse for + 24V mounted on the succeeding board is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and a plurality of fuses are mounted on the succeeding board. In this case, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board in the same subsequent board, and the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is the capacity of the fuse in the final stage. It is larger than that.

For example, in the + 24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is one previous stage. It may be smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the + 24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity of the previous first stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is one previous stage. It may be the same as the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage of. Further, for example, in the + 24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage The capacity of the previous first stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the previous first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1. It may be smaller than the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse, or it may be the same. Further, for example, in the + 24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the final stage. It may be smaller than the combined capacity of the fuses of the above, or may be the same. In the + 24V power supply line, if the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, it will be applied to the board. The substrate itself may ignite due to overcurrent.

[12. Each decorative board provided for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. FIG. 225 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 226 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing an LED. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative substrate and the frame door sub-relay substrate provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, and the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 has a plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, and a side so as to surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. The side window decoration portion 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are arranged, and the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate. Below the central upper decorative body 312a, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the lower central decorative body 312b of the plate are arranged, respectively.

The dish upper left decorative board 271 has a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271 and mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. It is luminescent and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). Behind the dish upper right decorative board 276, a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 is arranged, and a plurality of dish upper right decorative boards 278 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). In the dish center upper decorative body 312a, a dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in a semicircular strip shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a is arranged behind the dish center upper decorative substrate 312a. It is luminescently decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative substrate 404 behind the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a). 5 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b) and 10 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). A plurality of side window interior decorative members 410b are provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decorative members 412, and behind the side window interior decorative members 410b, side surfaces formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decorative members 412. A decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the window is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in the present embodiment) mounted on the decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window emit light and decorate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative substrate 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A door frame right side decorative substrate 418 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a). 4 pieces, and 10 pieces on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b) are luminescently decorated.

In the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is arranged behind the door frame. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 455 are mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are luminescently decorated.

In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate, which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, is arranged behind the decorative substrate 281. It is luminescent and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). In the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, a lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate, which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, is arranged behind the decorative substrate 286 of the lower right of the plate. It is luminescent and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on the above. In the dish center lower decorative body 312b, a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b is arranged behind the dish center lower decorative substrate 312b. It is luminescently decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the annulus is divided into front and rear, as described above. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the rear side. , Consists of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative substrate 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 352b (9 in this embodiment). In this embodiment, 9 pieces) are luminescently decorated.

As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip. As a result, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 107, and a large-sized movable body can be provided. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board]
Plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314, left side upper decorative board 402a, left side lower decorative board 402b, side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Interior decoration part decorative board 413, right side upper decorative board 418a, right side lower decorative board 418b, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board 283, the decorative substrate on the door frame side such as the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 under the center of the plate, the front decorative substrate 352a, and the rear decorative substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 225.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 206, and is light emission data which is the first serial system on the door frame side. The SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 and the light emitting data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial systems on the door frame side, are independently input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95 via the interface board 635, and + 12V is input and the power supply board. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line from the 630 via the interface board 635 and is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the dish unit relay board of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. 40. It is input to 214 and is input to the handle decorative substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 38.

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the dish unit relay board 214, are the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the dish unit relay board 214. It is input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate, are input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, respectively. That is, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish serves as a bridging board that transmits the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. The substrate 283 and the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate are electrically connected to each other. The first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 283 on the lower left of the plate, which is the bridging board, respectively (not shown). An input connector is provided, and for output (not shown) for outputting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. A connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is shown on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish (that is, after the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and is the final stage). Only the input connectors (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors, are input are provided.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish, are input to the upper right decorative board 278 of the dish, respectively. That is, the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate serves as a bridging substrate for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. The lower decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate are electrically connected in a beaded state. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 288 on the lower right of the plate, which is the bridging board. An output (not shown) for outputting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, as well as providing an input connector. Connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower right decorative board 278 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish (that is, the latter and final stage of the lower right decorative board 288), has the lower right decorative board. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288 are input is provided. There is.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate and the center of the plate. It is input to the lower decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the front decorative substrate 352a, are input to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. That is, the front decorative substrate 352a serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the rear decorative substrate 352b, thereby forming the front decorative substrate 352a. The rear decorative substrate 352b is electrically connected in a beaded state. The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are input to the front decorative board 352a which is the bridging board. The input connector (not shown) is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are output to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b, which is electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a), has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. Only an input connector (not shown) into which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the above, are input is provided.

Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 on which the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (LED) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. The decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

The + 12V input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and surface-mounted as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It is a + 12V power supply line via the + 12V fuse SLLDF12, and is a 6 multicolor full-color LED mounted on the LED constant current drive circuit 283a mounted on the lower left decorative board 283 and the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish. It is supplied to sdLED1 to sdLED6.

Further, for example, the dish upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (LED) from the dish lower left decorative board 283 is input will be briefly described. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the dish, and is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of passing a constant current through the suLED1 to suLED6. , The maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6 is mainly composed of. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to pass a constant current through suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat distribution circuit 273c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

The + 12V input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish and mounted on the surface as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a + 12V power supply line via the + 12V fuse SLUD F12, and is an LED constant current drive circuit 273a mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish and six multicolor full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. It is supplied to suLED1 to suLED6.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side decorative board 402. In addition to being input to 402b, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the decorative substrate 418b on the lower right side of the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 73. Each has been entered.

The + 12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board 457. Has been entered in.

The second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the door frame top right decorative board 457, are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. There is. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a beaded state. The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is a bridging board, includes a second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450. An input connector (not shown) for inputting GND) is provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the door frame top center decorative substrate. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is shown on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, after the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There is an input connector (not shown) for inputting the second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors, respectively. An output connector (not shown) for outputting the second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided.

The second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. There is. That is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. , The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, which is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455), has a door. For input (not shown), the second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decorative board 455, are input respectively. Only the connector is provided.

Here, for example, the left side of the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (LED) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is input. Briefly explaining the lower side decorative substrate 402b, the lower left decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and a constant current is passed through hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly composed of a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bag that can be used, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of passing a constant current through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, hdLED9, hdLED10, and the left. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the side. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, and is mounted on the board (decorative board 402b on the lower left side). Control is performed to pass a constant current through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate (decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (decorative board 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the upper left side decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this work has his / her finger on the connector of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side and the decorative substrate 402a on the upper left side from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and static electricity. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to the above.

As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a receives + 12V from the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the ground (GND), and the huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs, have a constant current. Each line is input. As described above, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and also having a function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

The + 12V input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a surface mount type that is soldered to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and surface-mounted as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative substrate on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a + 12V power supply line via the front stage + 12V fuse LLDF12a1 which is a chip fuse, and can emit eight multicolored lights mounted on the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b and the left side lower decorative board 402b. It is supplied to hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs. The + 12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is for the above-mentioned front stage + 12V fuse LEDDF12a1 and the rear stage + 12V which is a surface mount type chip fuse soldered to the left side lower decorative board 402b and mounted on the surface. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb, which becomes a + 12V power supply line via the fuse LLDF12a2 and is mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and hdLED9, which is two multicolor capable full-color LEDs mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b. In addition to the hdLED10, the huLED1 to huLED5, which are five multicolor light emitting full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, are supplied.

[12-1--3. Luminous data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating a light emission mode, and are ID information and a floor. It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[12-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 226. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets the sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 283y that can be used.

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is relative to the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. Can be done.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is described from the linear power supply 283xa, the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[12-2-2. Linear power supply]
As described above, the + 12V input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is a surface mount type that is soldered to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and surface-mounted as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a + 12V power supply line through the + 12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse of. The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (+ 5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting + 12V from the + 12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. It is supplied to 283xi respectively, and by this internal power supply Vreg, the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi Is ready to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95 via various boards, and independently creates + DC 5V as an internal power supply Vreg. It is used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. This is because when the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 via various boards is used, this + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the + 5V power supply line that supplies + 5V is used. The length of the wire becomes longer and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 via various boards is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise resistance is extremely high as compared with the + 5V power supply line. A configuration was adopted in which + 5V was independently created as an internal power supply Vreg in the linear power supply 283xa of the constant current drive circuit 283x from the + 12V power supply line.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input and the electric wiring for external transmission to the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-3. Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it into the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are started to operate.

For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not input the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 211, and independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line that transmits the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset and the LED may be turned off due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST. did.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other board, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It can contribute to the prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flicker of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-4. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line for transmitting serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as "data line"). This circuit is capable of shaping the waveform of the signal from which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting it to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line that transmits a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”). This is a circuit in which a clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal is shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. Therefore, both the lengths of the data line and the clock line become long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. Is not transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board, and the waveform is shaped by the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise even when both the lengths of the data line and the clock line are long. As a result, it is possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise.

[12-2-5. Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 different addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283x by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not the one that receives the data by the software and sets it appropriately.

[12-2-6. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg is used in the serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Occasionally, the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to capture the gradation information from this serial data and use the captured gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[12-2-7. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from extinguishing to turning on (maximum brightness) from 0 (zero) to 127 gradations. Therefore, the gradation of one output channel is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation degree is set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current drive unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation degree.

[12-2-8. Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation degree is set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi individually includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 have one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits green light (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and + 12V is input.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16) are electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 17 to constant current driver 24) is electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element that constitutes the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can be dimmed and lit by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with a constant current set individually. As a result, it is possible to turn off the light, turn on the light with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-9. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-mentioned resistors Rr that set the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red light (R) that constitutes the full-color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Consists of full-color LEDs in eight output channels up to LG8 A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits green light (G) and full-color LEDs in eight output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B).

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[12-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 226 and 227, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are indicated by the same reference numerals for convenience of explanation.

[12-3-1. Decorative board equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 226, the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and heat. It includes a distributed circuit 283c.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emitting data SDAT1 which is the first serial system on the door frame side serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK1 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630, + 12V is input, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Has been done.

As described above, the dish unit 200 has the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the dish unit lower left decorative board 283. It is input via the unit relay board 214. As described above, the + 12V input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is a surface mount type that is soldered to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and surface-mounted as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a + 12V power supply line through the + 12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse of. The + 12V supplied from this + 12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and is the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, green (G), which constitutes the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is also input to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is taken in, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the taken-in gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). While being input to the substrate 273, + 12V and the ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 via the plate lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the subsequent substrate, the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the dish. In the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above), the waveform can be shaped.

As described above, the + 12V input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish is a surface mount type that is soldered to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a + 12V power supply line through the + 12V fuse SLUD F12 which is a chip fuse of. The + 12V supplied from this + 12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, green (G), which constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. It is also input to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the captured gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

As a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish lower right decorative board 288, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[12-3-2. Decorative board equipped with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 227, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. It is provided with ~ hdLED10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a light emitting data SDAT2 which is a second serial system on the door frame side serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK2 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630, + 12V is input, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Has been done.

As described above, the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. .. As described above, the + 12V input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a surface mounted on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as a + 12V fuse provided on each decorative substrate on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a + 12V power supply line via the front stage + 12V fuse LLDF12a1 which is a mounting type chip fuse. The + 12V supplied from this + 12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs. It is also input to the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively. Further, the + 12V input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered to the front stage + 12V fuse LLDF12a1 and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and surface-mounted as described above. It becomes a + 12V power supply line via the fuse LLDF12a2 for the latter stage + 12V. The + 12V supplied from this + 12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, green (G), which constitutes the hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is also input to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, and constitutes huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. , The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emitting mode of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two For the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the light emitting mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are respectively opposed to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. ~ LB8 (constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 described above) are electrically connected.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively opposed to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10. The hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 10 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

Further, with respect to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5) constituting the full-color LEDs (huLED1 to huLED5) The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to constant current drivers 7 described above) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1b to huRg5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1a to huRg5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the 11-constant current driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the thermal dispersion resistance huRb1b to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, respectively. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the huRb5b and the thermal dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. The output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT2, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is referred to from the light emitting data SDAT2. Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, 8 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and dimmed so as to capture the gradation information and obtain the captured gradation information. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emitting data) input via a data line buffer 402baxc and a clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Based on SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emitting data LED2 includes its own ID, gradation information is taken from the light emitting data LED2 so that the taken-in gradation information is used. Of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit, and the left side which is a subsequent board of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a, are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through 8 hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8 constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, so that the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked and left. Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate of the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is generated for two hdLED9s and hdLED10s out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which form the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is dispersed by taking charge of the heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b constituting the heat distribution circuit 402ac. You can do it.

Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the electric current, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the decorative substrate 402b below the left side, the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, and the right side. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

Further, as a decorative substrate that does not have an LED constant current drive circuit at all, in addition to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, there is a decorative substrate 418a on the right side.

[13. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 233. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 228, and FIG. 230 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by initial value update type counter operation, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, and error. The display process will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number used to determine whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot game state is generated. A symbol random number to be used to determine the jackpot symbol and small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display, and a random number to determine the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. Etc. are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece capable of accepting the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining the normal symbol hit, and the normal symbol hit determination. Initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment to be used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

[13-2. Initial value update type counter movement]
For example, the special random number is updated directly by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later, various types of RAM are stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the information as a numerical value and calculating the total is one with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when not done, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment is from the non-volatile RAM built in by the main control MPU. An initial value derivation process is executed in which the ID code is taken out and the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the taken out ID code. It is a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is constantly overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, the information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased. Operates as a function of the RAM clear switch for. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who does this turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value 1 when various information is deleted and a value 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turning it ON. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned on. Since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and / or the signal of setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when is turned ON, and the setting change or confirmation of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when the display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state in which various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 boots in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) Is in a state where it can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and thus the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , It is determined that various information will be deleted in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination in step S26, the main control MPU calculates the checksum when it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (step S29). .. This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU has a calculated checksum value (sum value) with a checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is considered to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This routine is performed again by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 after rotating the pachinko machine 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. Processing is started when the main control side power is turned on. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the above-mentioned determination in step S25. In addition, assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the step described later follows the setting change process in step S37 described later. In the process of S38, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (hereinafter, "first RAM error". How to cancel ").

As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination in step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key 1311a is not turned on and the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20B, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the above-mentioned determination in step S26. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information will be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. (Hereinafter, it will be described as "second RAM error canceling method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that there is something wrong with the contents stored in (or it is unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU itself is reset, and then returned is included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU satisfies the predetermined set value display permission condition on the assumption that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. When it is determined that there is, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). Although a detailed description of the set value confirmation display process will be described later, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 1, that is, a predetermined setting value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, this setting change process is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310. As described above, the RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, a setting changeover button for selecting and switching a set value. It works as a function of. Each time the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to change the set value and display it on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a The changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is operated from ON to OFF, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. When it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the specified area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. And clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area out of the total area of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area out of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is an area dedicated to the set value in which the set value is stored, and the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2012 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area is the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the first sub out port 2011 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2012 is stored.

The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU is a sum when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased. When the values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the taken out ID code is taken out. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on is performed, and this fixed value is used as the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or S40, the main control MPU sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT and start the time counting until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU (by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value) Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a game machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU without duplication, and are predetermined. After extracting all the values in the numerical range, the one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The other values in the are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Creates a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, initial value determination random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, a start port solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, a second attacker solenoid 2612, a special monitor, and the like. Stop (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT because it cannot be made to do so. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, because the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power off processing when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are completely erased (cleared), and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When the setting is changed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, per probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of (such as), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to changing the set value. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, possession is permitted only to a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to 2 to 3 people. In the present embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall or the like can delete (clear) the game backup information in the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the island equipment of the game hall It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off from the main control side. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set.) Is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer described later is performed. Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, it is not possible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is in progress while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power offage process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. It is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, the determination in step S24 is performed. By repeating the game, the game cannot be advanced.

By making it impossible for the game to proceed by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for use) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power outage processing. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2415 and information indicating the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. .. Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2415 and information instructing the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The problem in the case where the power is not set, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418. Then, when the first prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven and the second winning opening 2006 is opened by the opening / closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 momentarily stops or loses power based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. By restoring the game state immediately before the occurrence of the above, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The second grand prize opening 2006 will shift from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first large winning opening 2005, is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and one count of the large winning openings telling the number of the game balls entered in the first large winning opening 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the game ball can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the 4th round (4th round) of the big hit game state, the driving of the 1st attacker solenoid 2418 is stopped and the 1st big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. Mainly the big winning opening 1 closing display command instructing to shift from the open state to the closed state (that is, the closing start of the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400). When the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven and the first big winning opening. A command to display the 5th opening of the large winning opening, which indicates that 2005 is to be changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing member (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the 1st large winning opening 2005 is started). Transmission is performed from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open) to the second start port 2004. When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the start port solenoid 2415 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and is generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot game state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the drive of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the open state is to occur, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen (that is, how many rounds) that specifies that it is the four rounds of the jackpot game state. Although it is not possible to display the screen showing) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member by starting the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the big hit game state. A screen telling the player that he / she is in a state (for example, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening." The screen) can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then A screen telling that the drive of the start port solenoid 2415 is started to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is opened as the return destination of the main control board 1310. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect display device 1600 on a screen that conveys a message to the player, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port." It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and is seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is executed. Information instructing that when clearing, and the above-mentioned low when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Indicates information indicating which of the probabilistic time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will be on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to, and which work has the same copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type) and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection step of the manufacturing line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 230 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main control side, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, and a detection from the second start port sensor 2401. Signal, detection signal from first prize opening sensor 2402, detection signal from second prize opening sensor 2601, detection signal from out port sensor 3053, first sub out port sensor 2403, and second sub out port sensor 3054, Detection signal from magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a Reads the signal from, the signal from the setting switching button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that the payout control board 633 normally receives the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. , The input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing), this switch input processing is started. First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, a double reading for comparison and a double reading for comparison over the second to fourth times. Because it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401, the first Detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, out opening sensor 3053, first sub out opening sensor 2403, and detection signal from the second sub out opening sensor 3054, magnetic sensor 1111 Detection signal from 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. ..

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the state of the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of various input ports, whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW is the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Do based on. When it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal that has been subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display that informs that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 229, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only each time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 229. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball count processing (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the detection signal from the out port sensor 3053 is input based on this input information to the game area 5a which is partitioned on the game board 5. When the out port sensor 3053 detects a game ball collected by the out port 2010, the value 1 is added to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010. The game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by performing the (increment) calculation and inputting the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is first. When the sub-out port sensor 2403 detects, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the count of the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011. (Ii) When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by inputting the detection signal from the sub-out port sensor 3054. Performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012. That is, in the ball count processing, the out port sensor 3053 detects the game ball collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port sensor 2403 detects the game ball collected by the first sub out port 2011, and the second When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, a calculation of adding a value 3 to the value of the collected ball counter is performed. The main control MPU mainly controls the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012. It is stored in the area dedicated to counting out balls in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, in the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10. Each time, a ball collection command for notifying that effect is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) the value by 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first major winning opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. In order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Self-check to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within the specified time. A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command that is further classified is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the gate unit 2003, and the first Based on a game ball entered into various winning openings (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5") such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the first major winning port 2005. The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process in step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. There is. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to notify that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, 3055 are input, the fraud using a magnet ( Hereinafter, it is determined that “magnet goto” is performed), and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the game is not in the big hit game state, the detection is performed from the first big prize opening sensor 2402 or the second big winning opening sensor 2601. When a signal is input (when a game ball enters the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006), an abnormal winning of the large winning opening is classified as an abnormal state and is classified as a notification display. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 as the detection of the cheating, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value of 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, a fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame is open, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b is input and the main body frame open switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Is set in the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted until the start.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type. It is judged (determines the hit type) which of the hit type judgment values is matched.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3052, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2401. If this is the case, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 to open / close the opening / closing member. When the signal output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the first prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state (round) twice, the function display unit 1400 round. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp of the display, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp so that the 15-round indicator lamp of the round indicator is lit, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and turn on the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with the 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

As for the normal winning opening winning information, the one stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is stored. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, and the ordinary winning opening winning information of the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. After being shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is the ordinary winning. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is shifted to the first section. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are free areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored ordinary winning opening winning information is used as a hold ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned ordinary winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the open operation state, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is stored as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2415 is set so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area as information and to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (probability of winning the ordinary lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. This main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. A movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 and for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 when it is in a big hit game state. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2415 that opens and closes, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal can be output to the payout control board 633, and launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic). The launch permission signal set to is output to the payout control board 633, and the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 is displayed. A display signal is output to a special monitor, and a lighting signal for displaying a set value stored in a set value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands to be executed (for example, when a game ball entered in the first large winning opening 2005 is detected, the large winning opening 1 corresponding to the large winning opening counting command is based on the detection signal from the first large winning opening sensor 2402. Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands to be classified, various commands to be classified for testing, and various commands to be classified to others (for example, a prize ball based on a game ball in which the main control board 1310 is inserted into various winning openings provided in the game board 5). Every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Main prize ball number information output command, etc.) and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 is 10 balls. There is something wrong with the ball collection command that tells you that every time you reach, the setting change command that tells you that the setting value has been changed, or the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). ) An error display command that conveys the fact, an ON operation command of the setting key that informs that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built into the control MPU can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. You can do it. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and responds to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10, the periphery The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball collection command, and is not shown. Updated with the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (that is, the counted value (that is, the total number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012)). Information associated with the date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted values (that is, the out port 2010 and the first sub out port 2011) are used. The ball collection information in which the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012) and the updated date and time is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 sells the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power-on that indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process in step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 228 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. The main control return destination command at power-on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 228 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 229, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for identifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[13-5. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 231 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is a checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 228. This is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) of the main control MPU is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 229. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 228. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process which will be described later for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination in step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value at which the set value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM as the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it is unreliable). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is an initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control When the MPU determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switching button is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. Judge that it is not.

In the determination in step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button is being operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU is set counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it off, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise) by performing the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on and the decision key is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the enter key has not been operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is being operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is not operated. When it is determined, the determination is returned to step S216 again, and when the setting switching button is operated until the enter key is operated, the set value is added and updated by one value each time the operation is performed, and the setting display 1310 g. If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the decision key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since it is updated with respect to the set value set in, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU is in the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the determination returns to the determination of step S226 again, and the determination of step S226 is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the set value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. In the determination in step S233, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is normal in step S224. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU is in the normal range, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 as the main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 230. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the set value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not in the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is considered to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[13-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 232 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Is determined to be open, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the signal of the setting key ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such condition, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is in the normal range, and when it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

In the determination of step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU is in the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value is confirmed) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing this, control is performed to switch from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is when it determines that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it determines that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , The OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 controls to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image by switching to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the interrupt disallow setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is considered to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[13-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 (FIG. 231). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 232), and is a process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 233 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. If the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one process of the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU recovers power in step S400 and then displays an error in this routine. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an error in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229, it has already been shown in FIG. 232 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 of the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is completed, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 230. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 (FIG. 231). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 232) and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232 are started and ended, respectively, and the infinite loop is entered as described above. , This infinite loop keeps the state where the error display process is completed, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication is initially installed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data as the peripheral control board. It is being sent to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the received date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of the message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. It is forcibly set so as to be the maximum volume regardless of the volume, and control is performed to flow from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command for transmitting another error, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[14. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 237. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 234, and FIG. 236 is the payout control unit following FIG. 235. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 237 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., stored in It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (power down) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and the power is restored. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. Determine if it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the prize ball number information output determination counter. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is stored and updated by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is shown. The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gummy judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as the payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH based on the above, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process, As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal output is the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is read out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored at the time of power restoration, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the loaned ball is possible. The signal logic state is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time reaches 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the value of the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball breakage information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on the ball breakage information, the corresponding number is supported. Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S546, set the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Do. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watch dock timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watch dock timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[14-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 234 to 236.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 237 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value of 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[15. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 240 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[15-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 238. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 238 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to convey that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness designation value, one brightness designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value which is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness designation value which is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (extinguished) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, there is a case in which the player (or a clerk of the game hall or the like) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk of a game hall, etc.) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is used for a specific decorative board (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. When the brightness of the LED is set, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is controlled by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) adjusts the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (light off)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguishing)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value up to the brightness designation value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) set to each other is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later From various speakers such as speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data is instructed to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp palette setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. We analyzed whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, and a large prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the first big winning opening 2005. Recognize which game state you are in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to synchronization production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as related to test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the like are stored in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, and a track number are specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC is a screen that reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in the time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the door. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become like.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as a sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 0.5 seconds have passed since the change pattern command was received and 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for (until seconds elapse), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized. It is designed to be output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. , The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the above, is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually combined with the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is set to mute. The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track with the built-in notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined. The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub of the adjusted effect sound. (Set to the volume value), the sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or pachinko When a notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of an illegal act against the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of 4, this muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound has passed a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. When the 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. It starts to flow again from the point where it progressed according to the schedule data for sound generation until the time passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates a volume control switch to set the volume low, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 239 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit stationary processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 238 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 238. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 238. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 238. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit stationary processing Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 238 is performed. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 238. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed this time exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[15-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 238 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 240 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 238. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series while driving an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data to be performed, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. (Rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM are set in different areas and are set in different areas, and SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 238, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[15-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 241 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, among the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the data can be received, 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is taken out from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[15-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 242, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being transmitted only for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the clear signal cannot be output to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear processing of the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 238 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC immediately before the power failure state. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3052, as shown in FIG. 243. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passing process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot", 15R The process of opening / closing the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. In addition, when the mode suggests "5R jackpot", the process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and the mode suggests "2R jackpot". In addition, a process of opening / closing the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R big hit game state.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time is shortened, and the 2R big hit game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode suggesting "2R big hit". It is set when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting "5R jackpot" when ending the state, and when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. .. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 254 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S239). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 244. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first hold storage. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 0)) instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is obtained by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first reserved memory number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved storages, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize, such as whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. You will be able to grasp the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC is adapted to store the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S233, as shown in FIG. 246. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on the counter value. ) Is "1" or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command (second hold number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 0)) instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball is set to the second start port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball is set to "1". The second start port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second start port 2004 Even if the game ball enters, it is suppressed that the player is not in a disadvantageous state such as not getting a chance of a big hit lottery.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules and are random numbers used for determination. Only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. 2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which the lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 274).

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 248, first steps S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 185 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 250 (A), when the gaming state has a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and time saving state (time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). It has a big hit judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of low probability time saving state)) and a big hit judgment table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability time saving state). .. Then, in the low-probability hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it is 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 2. In the case of 1/299, when the set value is 4, 1/289, when the set value is 5, 1/279, and when the set value is 6, the first special random number is won with a jackpot probability of 1/269. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that it has been done, matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are lost in the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit judgment table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319 and the set value are 2. 1/309 in some cases, 1/299 in case of set value 3, 1/289 in case of set value 4, 1/279 in case of set value 5, and 1/269 in case of set value 6. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the big hit with the big hit probability of 144/319, and one with the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with the small hit probability of 144/319. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred for for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed rather than when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed. Is becoming more advantageous to the player. Further, the hit determination table at the time of high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased 10 times as compared with the hit determination table at the time of low probability.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time reduction state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time reduction state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 251. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 250 (B). The type of jackpot is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. 1. Closed after the first prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the first prize opening 2005 (easy), and a special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variation jackpot to control 2. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the first prize opening 2005 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. , 2nd special symbol) 5R time saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the fluctuation display than usual until the fluctuation display is executed 77 times.
3. 3. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If there is, it is controlled to the time saving state where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is terminated if it is not a jackpot before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state, 2R. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In addition, the mode when the fluctuation control of the second special symbol is stopped (the stop symbol of the second special symbol) is
In particular,
1. 1. Closed after opening the 2nd prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have been won in the 2nd prize opening 2006 by the above 2nd prize opening sensor 2601 By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state where the ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy), and a special symbol (first special) is controlled after the big hit game state ends. Until the variable display of the symbol (second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variation jackpot to control 2. After opening the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2006 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. , 2nd special symbol) until the variation display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variation display is shortened than usual.
3. 3. After opening the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy), and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If so, after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is controlled to the end time saving state if the big hit is not executed 77 times, and 2R. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time saving jackpot, and a 2R jackpot is assigned. In the case of, 92 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability of a 15R big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 46% probability of a 2R big hit. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight judgment values are distributed when a big hit occurs. That is, if a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R probability variation big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 15R probability variation jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is decided, a 2R jackpot symbol is decided as a jackpot symbol, if a 5R jackpot is decided, a 5R jackpot symbol is decided as a jackpot symbol, and if a 15R jackpot is decided, a jackpot symbol is decided. The 15R jackpot symbol is decided as the symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 250 (C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of large hit is stopped. Aspect (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed twice to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy). First small hit 2. The opening / closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed nine times to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy). One of the two types of small hits, the second small hit, is determined.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed when the first small hit is obtained. That is, if a lottery result is obtained as a small hit by a lottery based on the first special random number, the first small hit is obtained with a 100% probability, and the second small hit is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result for a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the first small hit has a 10% probability and the second small hit has a 90% probability.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. ..

If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be an out-of-order symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs any of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S328. (It may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command according to each of the lottery results so that the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

Peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is decided as a small hit symbol ("final decisive battle"), and when a 5R time saving big hit is specified, the 5R time saving big hit symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols "0" to "9". When the combination of even-numbered symbols is determined and the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9". Combination) is decided. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the loss pattern with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss. If it is decided to be a symbol) and an outlier is specified, it is decided to be an outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) and fluctuate. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if a predetermined number of big hits (for example, two times) occur after the big hit game state is controlled, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of big hit game states are completed. , It may be controlled to the normal state. Further, even when the number of times of big hits is less than a predetermined number of times, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit gaming state.

FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 252. If this is done (step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S343), and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of loss (loss without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". To do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control in the time saving state (time saving control) is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). .. That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the time-saving state has an extremely short time required for the variation display control of the special symbol as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the non-time reduction state. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 253, first steps S371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 254, first steps S381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time reduction control (control of the time reduction state) is terminated and the non-time reduction control is performed. (Control of normal state) will be started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S402), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process proceeds to the large winning opening post-processing (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is a jackpot in the jackpot control process (step S235A) after opening the jackpot opening (step S403) when the jackpot game is terminated. Opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or the first prize opening 2005 has 10 game balls won. Opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 two, five, or fifteen times (opening / closing control) and opening / closing control of the second winning opening 2006 (for example, the first winning opening 2005). After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2601, the opening / closing pattern is closed twice, 5 It is reset when the opening / closing control (opening / closing control repeated 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be performed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) is set according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit). As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) Two small hit start command) is set.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later. ) To open / close control of the second big winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice or nine times). Is reset when you exit. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variation display of the special symbol is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot game state based on the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S401), which waits until it is performed by 1510 or until the next round is started.
2. 2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is the jackpot symbol, the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 is controlled to be open, or the next round is started. After controlling the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 to be open and opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or after the first prize opening 2005 has 10 game balls. When it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that a prize has been won, or after the second prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or after the second prize opening 2006 has 10 game balls. Processing during opening of the large winning opening to close when the winning is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601 (step S402)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the large winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game state ends when all rounds are completed (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of a round that controls the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in a closed state, a big hit round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Dot matrix display]
Next, a circuit board on which an LED used as a display unit having an important function is mounted will be described. The display unit having an important function in this example is information related to the interests of the player (for example, special lottery result, type of big hit or small hit, specific big hit (probability variable big hit, 15R big hit, etc.), high probability. Indicates whether or not state control is being executed, whether or not time saving control is being executed, etc.). In addition to the above, important functions include an LED that displays information related to the interests of players and game stores, and a display unit that has a circuit board that mounts an LED that displays important information related to the progress of the game. It may be a display unit having.

As shown in FIG. 256, in this example, a dot matrix display 7000 as a display unit having an important function is provided in place of the back-up effect unit 3400. Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (A), the dot matrix display 7000 includes a case 7100 formed of a colored opaque (white in this example) resin or the like having no translucency, and a substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100. A plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200, and a predetermined color (white in this example, but light blue) mounted on the back surface (rear surface: non-LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. It has a connector 7002 (which may be another color such as yellow or green) and a translucent film 7300 attached to the surface (front surface) side of the case 7100. The plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is directly mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. .. In addition to white, the colored opaque resin may be a resin such as black, gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, or yellow.

Further, the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are each divided into separate systems, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually and independently controlled to emit light. As a result, various characters, symbols, figures, and the like can be displayed by causing a predetermined LED 7001 out of a plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 to emit light. It should be noted that a circuit board on which an LED is mounted is provided to control light emission in relation to the above-mentioned fluctuation effect (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, A predetermined number of back-back right-rotating decorations 3610, back-back movable decorations 3110, back-up front rotation decorations 3410, back-top front decorations 3421, back-front left decorations 3713, back-front right decorations 3813, etc.) Light emission is controlled for each group consisting of (two or more) LEDs, and by causing a plurality of LEDs included in this group to emit light, a specific area of the light emitting decoration (the entire light emitting decoration may be used). However, it may be a part of it). In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, each of a plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light based on the lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to determine a predetermined character. And symbols, figures, etc. are displayed.

Further, on the surface of the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface of the surface cover portion 7110 described later), a part (a portion corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, etc.) is made translucent (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass). A opaque (black in this example) translucent film 7300 is attached to the portion of the LED 7001 so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized via the translucent film 7300. Instead of attaching the translucent film 7300 to the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the film can be attached to the surface of another decorative member or printed on the surface of another decorative member, and the decorative member can be printed. A dot matrix display 7000 may be arranged at the rear so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized via another decorative member. Further, although the translucent film 7300 may not be provided on the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the light emitted from the LED 7001 is made visible through the translucent film 7300, so that the LED 7001 is a light source. Can be prevented from being directly viewed by the player so as not to make the player feel dazzling, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually surface-emitted by the translucent film 7300. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, the light source is used. Can be made inconspicuous.

In this example, a light-emitting decorative body made of a translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene (PP), transparent polyethylene terephthalate (PET), etc.) (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper back rotating decoration 3440) , Back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration A portion (front surface (front surface) of the light emitting decoration body) that is provided on the body 3813, etc. and covers a specific area (LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board) by controlling light emission in relation to the fluctuation effect. )) On the circuit board on which the LED is mounted, the light emission by the mounted LED is most reflected so as to increase the efficiency of reflection on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the circuit board and improve the brightness. A white insulating film (solid white resist, white resist layer) is formed by applying a high-quality white insulating paint (white resist treatment is performed).

On the other hand, a black insulating paint having the lowest reflection efficiency is applied to the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 of this example and the plurality of LEDs 7001 are individually surface-emitted. A black insulating film (solid black resist, black resist layer) is formed (black resist treatment is performed). As a result, the efficiency with which the light emitted by the dot matrix display 7000 is reflected on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is reduced, but the light is directly directed forward from the LED 7001 (LED irradiation direction, front direction of the substrate 7200). Interference between the light to be emitted and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front is suppressed so that the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be clearly seen. In this way, in this example, in order to increase the reflection efficiency of the circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted, a white insulating film is usually formed (resist treatment) to increase the brightness, but the plurality of LEDs are individually independent. A circuit board on which a plurality of LEDs, each of which is controlled to emit light and has an important function, is mounted. An insulating film having a color different from that of the above is formed, and the role of the LED mounted on the circuit board can be determined by the color of the insulating film (resist) formed on the circuit board. There is. That is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board mounts an LED having an important function.

As described above, in this example, the circuit board for which the brightness of the light emitting decoration is desired to be improved, such as the circuit board provided for the light emitting decoration which controls the light emission of a plurality of LEDs for each group in relation to the fluctuation effect. Like the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, which forms a white insulating film (resist treatment) and controls the emission of a plurality of LEDs individually, the emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted is clearly defined. Since a black insulating film is formed (resisted) on the substrate 7200 that is desired to be visually recognized, the reflection efficiency of the light emitted by the mounted LED is increased on the circuit board provided in the light emitting decoration body when the LED emits light. Since the decrease in the brightness of the light emitting decorative body can be suppressed, the effect of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 can be improved. Further, regarding the dot matrix display 7000, the reflection of light is suppressed when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emits light, and the light emitted directly from the LED 7001 toward the front interferes with the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front. In addition to being able to suppress it, the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized by comparing with the LED mounting surface on which the black insulating film is formed. In addition, a substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, which is individually controlled to emit light and displays important information related to the progress of the game (for example, a special lottery result), and a predetermined number of LED units (a group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs). The light emission is controlled at every) and does not display important information related to the progress of the game (it may be rarely displayed), and the circuit board provided in the light emitting decoration has a different purpose (use for showing the special lottery result). By making the color of the LED mounting surface of the circuit board different (for the purpose of enlivening the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (to improve the effect effect), etc.) It is easy to determine whether or not the light emitting means such as the LED is for displaying important information, and the control unit of the LED (whether it is controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs or independently). Therefore, if a problem occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it becomes possible to quickly respond to the problem, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, in this example, the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed is housed in the case 7100 formed of a colored opaque white resin having no translucency. That is, with respect to the substrate 7200 on which the insulating film of black having low reflection efficiency (not limited to black but may be a dark color such as green or purple) is formed, white having high reflection efficiency (not limited to white but yellow or yellow) By accommodating it in the case 7100 (which may be a light color such as light blue), the case 7100 enhances the reflection efficiency of the light emitted from the other circuit board on which the LED is mounted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1. be able to. On the other hand, the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 is mounted on the substrate 7200 because a black insulating film having low reflection efficiency (not limited to black but may be a dark color such as green or purple) is formed. The interference of the light of each LED 7001 is suppressed, and the individual light can be clearly seen.

Further, a translucent film 7300 is attached to a part of the surface (front surface) side of the case 7100, and a part of the translucent film 7300 is a non-transmissive opaque black color. Since the white case 7100 is exposed without the translucent film 7300 being attached to the side surface side and the back surface (rear surface) side of the case 7100, the pachinko can be seen from the circuit board arranged behind or to the side of the case 7100. The light emitted toward the front of the machine 1 can be reflected with high efficiency to increase the brightness, which makes it possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in this example, the bright-colored (having a light-colored housing) connector 7002 is arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. As described above, since a dark (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, the light-colored connector 7002 is attached to the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. , The front surface) increases the reflection efficiency on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 interferes with each other, making it impossible to clearly see the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001s. There is a risk. Without arranging the light-colored connector 7002 on the front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the back surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted is not arranged. By arranging it on the LED non-mounting surface), the interference of the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized. Further, the dark-colored (having a dark-colored housing) connector 7002 may be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED is not mounted, and the dark-colored connector 7002 may be dark-colored (in this example). It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the insulating film (resist) (black) is formed. By arranging the dark-colored connector 7002 on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200, and the dark-colored connector 7002 Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is excessive. It can be prevented from improving.

Not limited to connectors, bright-colored electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits), etc.) that are light-colored (some may have parts different from light-colored), etc. ) May be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, instead of being arranged on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the dark insulating film is formed. In addition, it is possible to suppress an improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. In addition, electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs) of dark colors (which may have parts different from dark colors (silver metal parts, transparent resin parts, etc.)) The constant current drive circuit), etc.) may also be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, or a dark (black in this example) insulating film (black in this example) for dark electronic components. It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the resist) is formed. By arranging the dark-colored electronic components on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED-mounted surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the dark-colored electronic components can be suppressed. Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark color (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is excessive. It can be prevented from improving.

Further, the light emitting decorative body (back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310, back top rear rotating decoration body 3440, back back left rotating decoration body 3510, back back right rotating decoration body 3610, back) that controls light emission in relation to the above-mentioned fluctuation effect. Rear movable decorative body 3110, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) and a circuit board provided on the door frame 3 to mount an LED. (Back front left decorative board unit 3710 back front left decorative board 3714, back top production unit 3400 back top front decoration board 3422, back front right decoration unit 3810 back front right decoration board 3814, back bottom right production unit 3250 Back bottom right decorative board 3253, back bottom left decorative board 3203, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left A white insulating film (resist) is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) on which the LED is mounted (the decorative substrate 456, the decorative substrate 457 on the top right of the door frame, etc.). In these circuit boards, the dark-colored (having a dark-colored housing) connector may be mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the circuit board on which the LED is not mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the white insulating film (resist) is formed and increase the brightness of the LED, so that the effect of the effect is improved. Further, the light-colored connector (having a light-colored housing) may be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, and the light-colored connector 7002 may be insulated in white. It may be arranged on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the circuit board on which the film (resist) is formed. By arranging the light-colored connector 7002 on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200, and the light-colored connector 7002 can be used. Even if the connector 7002 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively lowered. Can be.

Also, not limited to connectors, dark-colored electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits), etc.) may have parts different from dark colors. May be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, instead of being arranged on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the bright color insulating film is formed. Also, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. In addition, electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED drivers) of bright colors (which may have parts different from light colors (silver metal parts, transparent resin parts, etc.)) The IC (constant current drive circuit), etc.) may also be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, or a white insulating film (resist) may be provided for bright-colored electronic components. It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the formed substrate 7200. By arranging the bright-colored electronic components on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the light-colored electronic components can be suppressed. Even if electronic components are mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 should not be excessively lowered. Can be.

In the above example, as the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, a black insulating paint is applied to form a black insulating film, but the dot matrix display 7000 As long as the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 can be clearly visually recognized, the light emission is not limited to black insulating paint, for example, purple, dark blue, dark green, etc. A dark insulating film (a solid dark resist (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.), a dark resist layer (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.)) is formed by applying the dark insulating paint. You may try to do so. However, a circuit board on which a black insulating film is applied by applying a black insulating paint has a higher reflection efficiency than a circuit board on which a dark insulating film other than black is applied. Because it is low, a circuit board on which a black insulating film is formed by applying a black insulating paint is better than a circuit board on which a dark insulating film other than black is applied to form a dark insulating film. Interference between the light emitted directly from the LED 7001 toward the front and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front can be suppressed, and the light emission of each of the LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized. Further, at least the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is mounted on the substrate 7200 may be formed with the dark insulating film, and the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is not mounted on the substrate 7200 may be formed. An insulating film different from the dark insulating film (for example, a light-colored insulating film coated with a light-colored insulating paint such as white) may be formed. That is, the color of the insulating film may be the same on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the circuit board, or the color of the insulating film may be different between the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the circuit board. Good. Further, the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the one formed by applying an insulating paint (solid coating) (resist), but is coated with an insulating paint (solid coating). A layer composed of a layer to be formed (first layer) and a layer (second layer, outermost layer) formed by further silk-printing an insulating paint on the layer may be included. In this case, the types (components) and colors of the insulating paints of the first layer and the second layer may be different. For example, the first layer may be a dark color (for example, black or green), and the second layer may be different. The layer may be light-colored (for example, white), the first layer may be light-colored, and the second layer may be dark-colored.

Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the case 7100 is composed of a front surface cover portion 7110 on the front surface (front surface) side of the substrate 7200 and a back surface cover portion 7120 on the back surface side of the substrate 7200, and the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface. The substrate 7200 is sandwiched between the cover portion 7120 and the substrate 7200 so as to be housed inside the case 7100. Further, the surface cover portion 7110 covering the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (the surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200) has a predetermined thickness (about 5 mm in this example) and corresponds to each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200. As described above, the tubular penetrating portion 7110a is formed, and the substrate 7200 is brought into close contact with the surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED (one LED element) is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a. The front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120 are firmly adhered to each other without gaps (difficult to remove, welding, etc., and the substrate 7200 is removed unless at least a part of the substrate 7200 such as the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120 is destroyed. The board 7200 is fixed (mounted) to the surface cover portion 7110 by mounting it in an irreversible mounting state, etc., which cannot be done. As a result, the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 are arranged in separate through portions 7110a, and the light is emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. Since it is possible to suppress the leakage of light to the other penetrating portion 7110a and the back surface (rear surface) side of the substrate 7200 and suppress the interference of the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed. It can be individually emitted from the penetrating portion 7110a, and the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be easily identified individually. For example, even when the first LED and the second LED of the plurality of LEDs 7001 are made to emit different colors, the emission colors of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed by suppressing the mixture of these colors. Since it can be identified individually, it is possible to prevent the information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 from being transmitted to the player differently from the original information. Further, by firmly attaching the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120, it is possible to maintain the close contact state between the substrate 7200 and the front cover portion 7110, and the interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be prevented. The risk of impairing the suppressing function is reduced.

Further, on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, in addition to the plurality of LEDs 7001, an LED part number, an area indicating a position where the LEDs are arranged, and the like are located in the vicinity of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. Notation unit (also referred to as information display unit (including symbols and characters)) indicating the attributes of the LED (furthermore, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED may be included). ) Is a white (not limited to white, but may be a bright color (for example, yellow) with high reflection efficiency) insulating paint that is more noticeable than black, and is applied on a solid black insulating film (resist). It is silk-printed on. Then, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the silk-printed notation portion is also included in the penetrating portion 7110a. Specifically, one LED is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a, and a notation portion which is silk-printed in the vicinity of the one LED to indicate the part number of this LED or the like is arranged ( All of the notation parts may be arranged so as to fit in the penetrating portion 7110a, or a part of the notation part may be arranged so as to fit in the penetrating part 7110a). As a result, the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a on the substrate 7200 (the area where one LED 7001 is arranged) is formed by the notation portion silk-printed with the white insulating paint having the highest reflection efficiency and arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a. Since the reflection efficiency can be increased and the decrease in brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a can be further suppressed when the LED 7001 emits light, the light emission by one LED 7001 can be clearly visually recognized. Further, as described above, since the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is solidly coated with a black insulating film (resist) having the lowest reflection efficiency, the state of low reflection efficiency is maintained in the outer region of the penetrating portion 7110a. Even if the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, it is possible to prevent the light from diffusing. In this case, reduce the ratio of the notation portion to the outer region of the penetration portion 7110a in the substrate 7200 as much as possible (most of the notation portions are contained in the penetration portion 7110a and a part of the notation portion slightly protrudes outside the penetration portion 7110a. The effect of preventing the diffusion of light can be further enhanced by arranging the light in the above.

Further, in the circuit board described above, a through hole (a wiring pattern on the front surface side (front side, LED mounting surface side) and a wiring pattern on the back surface side (LED non-mounting surface side) are electrically connected through the circuit board in the front-rear direction. Multiple holes) are formed. Since this through hole penetrates the circuit board in the front-rear direction, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the circuit board is not reflected by the through hole and is not reflected by the through hole, and the back surface of the circuit board. It may leak to the side (LED non-mounting surface side) and the brightness may decrease. In this example, in the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, through holes are not formed in the region corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a (the region inside the penetration portion 7110a). With this configuration, the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the substrate 7200, and the substrate 7200 can be reflected. It is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface), and to suppress the interference of each LED 7001 so that the light emission of each LED 7001 can be clearly seen. ..

A black insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, but a notation portion is not formed on the insulating film (resist). You may do so. With this configuration, only the insulating film (resist) of the same color is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is improved by the notation portion. Further, by not improving the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, the insulating film of black (which may be a dark color such as green, blue, or purple other than black) having the lowest reflection efficiency (is not limited to black). Interference of light on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the resist) is formed is suppressed, and light can be suppressed from being diffused from the LED 7001 arranged inside the penetrating portion 7110a to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a. The light emission of each LED 7001 corresponding to the above is clarified, and the light emission state of each LED 7001 can be easily identified.

If the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is silk-printed with an insulating paint to form a notation portion, the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200 is covered with this LED non-mounting surface (back surface). If a black insulating film (resist) is formed on a predetermined color different from the color of the insulating film (resist) formed in (for example, the LED non-mounting surface (back surface)), a color having higher reflection efficiency than black (for example, white) Yellow, green, light blue, yellowish green, blue, purple, etc.), and if a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), a color with lower reflection efficiency than white (for example, yellow, green) , Light blue, yellowish green, blue, purple, black, etc.)) may be silk-printed to form the notation, or the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be defoamed (wiring pattern). In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, a wiring pattern that is a copper foil is used to form characters, figures, symbols, etc., and the surrounding copper foil is removed. The wiring pattern that forms the foil removal is The notation portion may be formed by (formed by being electrically insulated from an electronic component), or the color of the insulating film formed on the substrate 7200 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 (formed). A dark color different from a dark color such as black or green (when a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark insulating paint such as blue, purple, or green is formed, and a green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200). If this is the case, the notation portion may be formed by silk-printing on the insulating film (on the resist) with an insulating paint (a dark insulating paint such as black, blue, or purple).

That is, only an insulating film (resist) of the same color (black in this example, which may be a dark color such as green, purple, or blue) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. The notation portion having a color different from that of the insulating film may not be formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. With this configuration, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 uniform, and the improvement of the reflection efficiency is suppressed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Therefore, the interference of light can be suppressed, so that the light emission of each LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be clarified, which makes it easy to identify the individual light emission state. In addition, the part number of the LED mounted by the notation portion formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the board 7200, the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged, and the like. It becomes easy to grasp the attributes of LEDs.

Further, when the notation portion is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board according to the color of the insulating paint used to form the notation portion, and when the notation portion is formed on the circuit board. The case where the notation portion is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the above may be different from the case where the notation portion is formed. For example, in a circuit board in which a dark color (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), insulation formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). The notation may be formed by silk printing on the film (resist) with an insulating paint having a dark color (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist). , Even if the notation part is formed by silk printing with a light color (white, yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) insulating paint on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). Good. Further, in a circuit board in which a light-colored (white) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). The notation part may be formed by silk printing with an insulating paint having a light color (for example, yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist), or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). ) May be silk-printed with a dark-colored (black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint on the insulating film (resist) to form the notation portion. As a result, advantageous characteristics are added to the circuit board according to the purpose of use of the circuit board (whether the circuit board wants to improve the reflection efficiency or suppresses the interference of light by suppressing the reflection efficiency). It is possible to enhance the effect of production and the effect of information transmission. This makes it possible to deter the decline in game entertainment.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned light emitting decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back upper front An LED provided on a circuit board or a door frame 3 for mounting an LED that emits surface light in a specific area of a rotating decoration body 3410, a back top front decoration body 3421, a back front left decoration body 3713, a back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) Circuit board (back front left decorative board unit 3710 back front left decorative board 3714, back top production unit 3400 back top front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative body unit 3810 back front right decorative board 3814, back Lower right production unit 3250 back lower right decorative board 3253, back lower left production unit 3200 back lower left decorative board 3203, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455 , A bright color (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. On this insulating film (resist), a light color (yellow in this example, which may be light blue, yellowish green, etc. other than yellow) different from the color of the insulating film (white in this example) is used. The notation part is formed by silk printing.

That is, the light emitting decorative body (back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310, back top rear rotating decoration body 3440, back back left rotating decoration body 3510, back rear right rotating decoration body 3610, back back movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotation decoration body. Body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) The LED is mounted on the circuit board or door frame 3 on which the LED that emits surface light is mounted. Circuit board (back front left decorative board unit 3710 back front left decorative board 3714, back top production unit 3400 back top front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative body unit 3810 back front right decorative board 3814, back bottom right Back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the production unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door A bright color (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the frame top left decorative substrate 456, door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc., and the insulation is formed. Silk on the film with a light-colored (light-colored yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint that is different from the color of the insulating film (resist) so as not to reduce the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). A notation part is formed by printing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) from being lowered by the notation portion, and it is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and improve the effect. .. It is desirable to use a yellow insulating paint as the bright color that forms the notation. Since yellow is the color with the closest reflection efficiency to white, by forming the notation part with yellow insulating paint, while suppressing the decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface of the circuit board, the notation part indicates the LED parts. Identify LED attributes (furthermore, LED shape, LED size, LED mounting orientation (mounting direction), LED model, etc.) such as numbers and areas indicating where to place the LEDs. You will be able to.

Further, a circuit board provided in the conventional pachinko machine 1 in which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and a notation portion is formed by silk printing on the insulating film (resist) with a black insulating paint. On the other hand, in a circuit board in which a notation portion is formed by silk printing with a light-colored insulating paint such as yellow, light blue, or yellow-green, the notation portion becomes less noticeable when it is arranged in the pachinko machine 1. The above light emitting decorations (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3 with the LED mounting surface of each circuit board facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (pachinko machine). Since it is arranged so as to irradiate light toward the front side of 1, it is formed on the LED mounting surface of the circuit board in the pachinko machine 1 which is unifiedly shaped and decorated according to a predetermined theme. LED attributes such as the LED part number unrelated to the game being played and the area indicating the position where the LED is placed (furthermore, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), the LED If information such as (may include the model) is visually recognized by the player, the sense of unity and world view of the pachinko machine 1 may be disrupted and the game interest may be reduced. In the above example, since the notation part is less noticeable than the circuit board provided in the conventional pachinko machine 1, the LED attributes such as the LED part number unrelated to the game and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged are used. (Furthermore, information such as the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the LED, and the model of the LED may be included.) It becomes difficult for the player to see the information, and the pachinko machine 1 has a sense of unity. It will be possible to suppress the collapse of the world view and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Since white and yellow have similar reflection efficiencies and a small difference in visual characteristics (contrast), a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and the white insulating film (on the resist) is formed. When a yellow insulating paint having a reflection efficiency close to that of white is used as the formed notation portion, the effect of suppressing a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is enhanced as compared with the case where other color combinations are used. In addition to being able to do this, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the notation portion can be made inconspicuous and the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, light emitting decorations (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration Body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3 are provided to control light emission in relation to the variation effect, thereby specifying the light emitting decoration body. A bright color (yellow, light blue, yellow) different from the white color of the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board on which the LED that emits surface light from the region is mounted. The notation part may be formed by removing the foil, or the notation part may be formed by removing the foil, or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) without forming the notation portion on the LED mounting surface. The notation portion may be formed by a color (not limited to light color) different from the white color of the insulating film or by removing the foil. Further, the notation unit may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, "LED1" or the like is formed for one LED), or is grouped for each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, for each type). (For example, "LED1 to LED5" and the like are formed for a plurality of LEDs). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of the light emitted from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. In addition, it is possible to suppress the loss of light emission due to the non-dimming LED and realize efficient light emission.

Further, of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is white (not limited to white, but a bright color having high reflection efficiency (for example,). It may be yellow) to improve the reflection efficiency. FIG. 258 (A) shows a front view and a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the circuit board (board 7200 in this example) in the modified example 1, and FIG. 258 (B) shows the circuit board (board 7200 in this example) in the modified example 2. The front view and the cross-sectional view of AA are shown. As shown in FIG. 258 (A), as the substrate 7200 of the modified example 1, a black insulating paint is applied to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the base material 7201 to form the first conductive film 7200A (resist). At the same time, a white insulating paint is applied to the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the base material 7201 to form the back surface side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then the base material on which the first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed. Of the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of 7201, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is secondly printed with white insulating paint from above the first conductive film 7200A. The conductive film 7200B may be formed, and one LED 7001 may be mounted at the center of each of the second conductive film 7200B (the second insulating film 7200B is formed around the LED 7001 after mounting the LED 7001). You may do so).

Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (B), as the substrate 7200 of the modified example 2, a white insulating paint is applied to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7201 to form the first conductive film 7200A (resist). A white insulating paint was applied to the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the base material 7201 to form the back surface side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then the first conductive film 7200A (resist) was formed. Silk printing with black insulating paint from above the first conductive film 7200A except for the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) of the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the base material 7201. The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by mounting one LED 7001 at the center of each of the first conductive film 7200A (resist) (the second insulating film 7200B is formed after mounting the LED 7001). You may try to do it).

That is, in FIG. 258 (A), the black first conductive film 7200A is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the white first conductive film 7200A is formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 2 Conductive film 7200B is formed. Further, in FIG. 258 (B), a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white second conductive film 7200B is formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 1 Conductive film 7200A is formed.

In this way, a black insulating film (black first conductive film 7200A, black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around the region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, and the penetrating portion 7110a is formed. By forming a white insulating film (white second conductive film 7200B, white first conductive film 7200A) in the region corresponding to the above, the region (one) corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. The reflection efficiency of the through portion 7110a in which the LED 7001 is arranged) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light so that the light emission by one LED 7001 can be clearly seen, and it corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. It becomes possible to maintain a state of low reflection efficiency around the region, and even if the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, the light is prevented from diffusing. it can.

Further, in this case, the above-mentioned notation portion may not be silk-printed, or the notation portion may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the substrate 7200 is not mounted, or the LED may be mounted. Using a bright color paint with high reflection efficiency such as white or yellow on the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the surface. The notation portion may be silk-printed, or yellow or the like may be printed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in the region of the LED mounting surface corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. The notation portion may be silk-printed using a light-colored paint having high reflection efficiency.

It should be noted that the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is mounted out of the substrate 7200 is a dark color (black in this example, still black) having a lower reflection efficiency than the proportion of the light color (white in this example) having high reflection efficiency. Other than that, it may be green, blue, purple, etc.) is higher. Therefore, the interference of the light of each LED 7001 is suppressed on the entire surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is mounted in the substrate 7200, so that each light can be clearly seen.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, a through hole is not formed in the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 (the region inside the through portion 7110a). A through hole may be formed in the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a, and at least the hole on the LED mounting surface side of the through hole may be closed with the white second conductive film 7200B described above. In this case as well, the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the board 7200. It is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the 7200, and to suppress the interference of each LED 7001 so that the light emission of each LED 7001 can be clearly seen. it can.

Further, by accommodating the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed in the case 7100 formed of the colored opaque white resin having no translucency, the pachinko machine can be used from another circuit board on which the LED is mounted. Although the case 7100 is configured to increase the reflection efficiency of the light emitted toward the front of the case 1, the reflection efficiency is high in the region of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. By forming the white insulating film, the translucent film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off, and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetrating portion 7110a, or the translucent film is formed. Even when a case 7100 is used in which a part of the substrate 7200 is exposed from the penetrating portion 7110a without the 7300 being attached, the reflection efficiency is increased by the substrate 7200 exposed from the penetrating portion 7110a formed in the case 7100. It can be prevented from being lowered, and the light emitted from another circuit board on which the LED is mounted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 is reflected with high efficiency to increase the brightness and improve the effect. ..

Further, the notation portion may be formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) without forming the notation portion on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, or the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be formed. , Front surface) is a foil remover (a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed), which is a copper foil wiring pattern that forms characters, figures, symbols, etc., and is formed by removing the copper foil around it. The wiring pattern that forms the foil remover is formed by being electrically insulated from the electronic parts), and the notation portion may be formed, or the substrate may be formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. A dark color different from the color of the insulating film formed on the 7200 (dark color such as black or green) (when a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark insulating paint such as blue, purple or green, When a green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a notation part is formed by silk printing on the insulating film (on the resist) with an insulating paint (a dark insulating paint such as black, blue, or purple). You may try to do so. When the notation portion is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200, a predetermined color (white, yellow, black, etc.) is formed on the insulating film formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200. The notation part may be formed by silk printing with an insulating paint (green, etc.), or characters and figures may be formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. , Symbols, etc. are formed by removing the copper foil around them, and the wiring pattern that forms the foil removal is formed by being electrically insulated from electronic components) to form a notation. You may do so. With this configuration, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 uniform, and the decrease in the reflection efficiency is suppressed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200. Therefore, the brightness can be increased, and in the region outside the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, the improvement of the reflection efficiency can be suppressed and the interference of light can be suppressed.

Further, the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is housed in the case 7100 in a state of being in close contact with the surface cover portion 7110, and the light emitted from the LED arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a is outside the penetrating portion 7110a. Since it is difficult to leak to the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface), the area where the reflection efficiency is desired to be improved and the reflection efficiency are suppressed to suppress the interference of light on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the same substrate 7200. It is possible to coexist with regions that conflict with the desired region, which makes it possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200, and also suppresses the interference of each LED 7001 to suppress the interference of the LEDs 7001. Individual light emission can be clearly seen.

The color of the insulating film formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the same color as the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), and is, for example, a dark color on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. An insulating film (black in this example, blue, green, purple, etc. may be used in addition to black) is formed, and a bright color (white in this example, other than white) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200. It may also be yellow or the like) to form an insulating film.

Further, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 have higher brightness than usual (normal brightness: brightness reflecting the result of brightness adjustment by the player described later, higher than usual brightness. : Brighter than the brightness that reflects the result of the brightness adjustment by the player, the maximum brightness in the brightness range that the player can adjust the brightness, and the brightness higher than the brightness range that the player can adjust the brightness (the player adjusts the brightness) Even under specific conditions such as when light emission is controlled under any of (high brightness) that cannot be set in (1), the light emission is controlled for the plurality of LEDs 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 while maintaining the normal brightness. Since it is possible to individually identify the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, it is possible to recognize important information displayed by the dot matrix display 7000. Further, under the specific conditions described above, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back Front right decorative body unit 3810 back front right decorative board 3814 LED mounted on back bottom right production unit 3250 back bottom right decoration board 3253 LED, back bottom left production unit 3200 back bottom left Since some of the light emitting means (LEDs) among the plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) provided on the game board 5 such as the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 3203 are turned off, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 is reduced. It is easy to determine the light emitting state (displayed information) of a plurality of LEDs provided in the dot matrix display 7000. It should be noted that at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light with a higher brightness than usual, and the decorative body provided on the game board 5 (movable decorative body (backward middle rotating decorative body 3310). , Back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, back-back left-rotation decoration 3510, back-back right-rotation decoration 3610, back-back movable decoration 3110), back-front left decoration unit 3710, back-up effect unit 3400, back-front Light emitting means provided on a decorative body (excluding the function display unit 1400 that displays important information) that does not display important information such as the right decorative body unit 3810, the lower back right effect unit 3250, and the lower back left effect unit 3200. (LED) may be turned off, and the light emission control of the LED as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 may be performed while maintaining the normal brightness (LED). For example, when it is desired to pay attention to the display contents of the effect display device 1600 (when a super reach or an error state occurs, etc.), in this case, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 can be further reduced, so that the dot matrix display can be performed. It becomes easy to discriminate the light emitting state (displayed information) of a plurality of LEDs provided in the device 7000.

Further, since all the light can be radiated from the front of the penetrating portion 7110a without leaking the light from the LED 7001 provided in the penetrating portion 7110a to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, the brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a is lowered. Can be suppressed. Not only the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120, but also the substrate 7200 is firmly attached to the front surface cover portion 7110 (it cannot be removed unless at least a part of the front surface cover portion 7110 and the substrate 7200 is destroyed by welding or the like. The LED mounting surface of the board 7200 can be protected by the surface cover portion 7110, so that the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 may be defective due to mischief or the like. Is suppressed.

Further, a part of the back surface cover portion 7120 that covers the back surface (rear surface) on which the connector 7002 of the substrate 7200 is mounted has an opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002 mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. It is formed. Since the substrate 7200 is fixed to the surface cover portion 7110 in a state of being in close contact with the surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a as described above, the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate 7200 is fixed. ) Side light leakage is suppressed so that the light of the LED 7001 does not leak from the opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002 formed in the back cover portion 7120.

As described above, in this example, the light emitting decoration body provided with the LED that controls the light emission in relation to the fluctuation effect is formed of a translucent resin, and is surface-emitting by the light emitted from the LED. .. On the other hand, the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 may be a colored opaque white having no translucency (as long as it is opaque without translucency, it may be other than white, for example, black, navy blue, dark green, etc. The light of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized only from the penetrating portion 7110a, and the light of the LED 7001 cannot be visually recognized from other parts of the case 7100. .. Further, the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered (welded) in a state of being in close contact with each other without a gap, and light leakage from the joint portion between the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120 leaks. It is suppressed. In this way, the case 7100 accommodating the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, which is individually controlled to emit light and displays important information related to the progress of the game (for example, a special lottery result), is made of a resin having no translucency. A light-emitting decorative body that houses a circuit board on which LEDs that are formed by means of the above, etc., are controlled to emit light in a predetermined number of LED units (each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and do not display important information related to the progress of the game. Is formed of a transparent resin or the like, so whether or not a light emitting means such as a defective LED displays important information and whether or not the LED control unit (controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs) Whether it is controlled independently or independently) can be easily determined from the appearance, and if a problem occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it becomes possible to quickly respond. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered by welding or the like so that the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out from the case 7100 unless at least a part of the case 7100 is destroyed. It has become. Further, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and the sealing mechanism obtained by destroying one of the plurality of sealing mechanisms to open the main control board box 1320 and then destroying the sealing mechanism. The main control board box 1320 can be closed using one different sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 7100 of this example does not have such a sealing mechanism, and if a part of the case 7100 is destroyed and the case 7100 is taken out, the case 7100 cannot be returned to its original state. There is. In this way, since the substrate 7200 is enclosed and protected in the case 7100 in which the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out (exposed) unless at least a part of the substrate 7200 is destroyed, the LED 7001 having an important function is physically destroyed. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, a light emitting decoration body (under the back) accommodating a circuit board on which LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a predetermined number of LED units (for each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and do not display important information related to the progress of the game are mounted. Rotating decoration 3310, back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, back-back left-rotating decoration 3510, back-back right-rotating decoration 3610, back-back movable decoration 3110, back-up front rotating decoration 3410, back-up front rotation decoration 3421 , Back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are formed to be removable (reversible) by screwing, etc., so that the circuit board can be taken out without destroying the light emitting decorative body. It has become. As a result, the electronic components (LEDs, etc.) mounted on the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 housed on the circuit board on which the LED displaying important information is mounted are hard to be physically destroyed, which is important. It is possible to prevent the information from being displayed and to replace the light emitting decoration that houses the circuit board on which the LED that does not display important information is mounted, immediately if a defect occurs in an electronic component (LED, etc.). ing.

Further, in the dot matrix display 7000 of this example, the LED 7001 provided in the case 7100 has a predetermined constant brightness, and operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303). However, the brightness adjustment described later is not possible. As a result, the brightness of the LED 7001 having an important function can be kept constant, and important information such as information related to the interests of the player can be reliably transmitted. Regarding the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information even under the above-mentioned specific conditions, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and the door frame right LED provided on the side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. The LED provided on the decorative substrate 314 may also be included), and the light emission may be controlled without turning off the light.

Further, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 may be turned off, for example, ascending / descending under the back. When the elevating arm 3357 is rotated by the drive motor 3352 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the lower position to the upper position, the back upper rear rotation decoration 3440 is moved to the appearance position below the back upper front decoration 3421. When moving the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the back front left effect unit 3700, the back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 is moved to the back front right effect. When moving to the first or second appearance position to the left of the unit 3800, or by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock by the lock member 3134 is released and the back-rear movement is possible. When the decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back front effect unit 3400 The mounted LEDs, the LEDs mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, and the LEDs mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250. The LED mounted on the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 may be turned off. Movable decorative objects (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear movable decorative body 3110) in front of the effect display device 1600. ) Is executed, the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off to visually recognize the effect executed by the movable decorative body displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. Can be prevented from interfering with. In this case, the dot matrix display 7000 may be continuously controlled to emit light without being turned off. As a result, important information such as information related to the interests of the player can be displayed even under specific conditions, and no disadvantage is given to the player or the like.

In this example, not only when a specific reach effect is executed, an error state such as detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch occurs, and the back side LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the left decorative unit 3710, LED mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration of the back front right decorative unit 3810 LED mounted on the board 3814, LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, LED mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left effect unit 3200, movable LEDs provided on the decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear movable decorative body 3110). Even when at least a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 is turned off, at least a part of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is turned off. LED and the LED 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light without turning off the lights. As a result, when an error state occurs, for example, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and at least a part of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is normally turned off. Notifies that an error state has occurred (for example, the door frame 3 is open) by controlling the light emission in a mode different from that at the time of an error (for example, blinking and emitting light at a higher brightness than usual). Or, the effect display device 1600 displays a display notifying that an error state has occurred (for example, "abnormality has occurred!"), Or outputs a voice indicating that an error state has occurred (for example, "the door is open". , "Please pull out the ball.", Etc.), while the fluctuation effect is being executed by controlling the light emission without turning off the LED 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. It is possible to suppress the interruption of the game, and by continuing the update display (variable display) of the dot matrix display 7000, it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust that the special lottery result is not displayed. it can.

It should be noted that whether or not the dot matrix display 7000 is turned off may be different depending on the type of error state (degree of urgency). For example, an error having a small effect on the game (minor error: main body frame 4) may be used. When the opening of the door frame 3 is detected with respect to the above, when the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the plate 202 is full in the game ball B), the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 Is input (an error that is unlikely that a goto action is being performed, such as when it is detected that the game ball B does not exist in the guidance passage 570a), the dot matrix display 7000 is provided. By controlling the light emission without turning off the LED 7001, the progress of the game is not interrupted, but an error that has a serious effect on the game (serious error: when a radio wave irradiation goto is detected, when a magnet goto is detected, the second When the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input when the start port 2004 is not open, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 or the second big prize is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. For errors that are likely to be performed when a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2601 is input), the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to be turned off, and the fluctuation effect is being executed. Even if there is, the variation effect may be interrupted or terminated. As a result, the control state of the dot matrix display 7000 can be changed according to the degree of the error, which is disadvantageous to the player and the game store. You can avoid giving it.

In addition, when an error occurs, a display notifying that the effect display device 1600 is in an error state and an LED provided on the door frame 3 are displayed in an error mode according to the type of the error state. One of the notification by controlling the light emission and the notification that an error state has occurred by voice output may be executed, or any combination of the two may be executed. Or you may try to do everything. For example, when a minor error that has little effect on the game occurs, a display notifying that an error state has occurred in the effect display device 1600 and an LED provided on the door frame 3 emit light in the mode at the time of the error. Execution of any one or any combination of two, a notification by control and a notification that an error state has occurred by voice output, causes a serious error that has a significant effect on the game. If this is the case, a display notifying that an error state has occurred in the effect display device 1600, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in the mode at the time of an error, and an error by voice output You may want to do all of the notification that the condition is occurring.

Further, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects (contents different from the originally displayed contents, etc.) as compared with the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. , It is possible not to give a disadvantage to a player or the like. Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control unit steady processing about every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side timer interrupt process every 4 ms. The display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 are updated in a shorter cycle than when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a problem occurs and the content different from the content originally displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 is displayed, the display content is immediately updated (after 4 ms) to the original display content. It can be changed and does not cause any disadvantage to players. That is, the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information (high importance) outputs a control signal in a shorter cycle than the light emitting decoration that does not display important information (less important) and emits light (light emitting means). In order to update the light emitting mode of the LED), even if a problem occurs in the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 (light emitting mode of the LED 7001) that displays important information, it is possible to immediately change to the normal display content. This light can prevent the player from being disadvantaged by displaying different contents. Further, when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. A communication error may occur and a problem may occur in the information indicated by the dot matrix display 7000 (light emission state of the LED 7001). However, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the dot matrix display 7000, so that the peripherals Compared with the case where the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000, the information indicated by the dot matrix display 7000 (light emitting state of the LED 7001) is less likely to cause a problem, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the translucent film 7300 is attached to the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100. Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (A), the translucent film 7300 is composed of a translucent sheet, and the area around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100 is opaque black printing (limited to black). The light emission state in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a may be a color (dark color or the like) that makes it easy to see the light emitting state) so that the light is not transmitted. On the other hand, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is in a semi-transparent state having translucency without being printed in black, and is surface-emitting by the light emitted from the LED 7001. As a result, when the LED 7001 is made to emit light and the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a emits surface light, the periphery of the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a looks dark like a shadow, and corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a. By comparing the region with the periphery of the region corresponding to the penetration portion, it becomes easier to visually recognize the surface emission of the region corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a (the emission state of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200), and the dot matrix display 7000 can be used for various purposes. By being able to clearly display various characters, symbols, figures, etc., it is possible to reliably convey important information such as information related to the interests of the player. Further, by providing a region that does not transmit light between the regions that emit light from the surface corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, it is possible to suppress interference of light radiated from the plurality of penetrating portions 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, and a plurality of regions. Even when light of different colors is emitted from each of the penetrating portions 7110a, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the emitted lights of various colors so that the individual colors can be clearly seen, and the light is emitted from the LED 7001. Since it is possible to identify each region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a that is surface-emitting by light as a separate light emitting region, various characters, symbols, figures, and the like can be clearly displayed. By forming at least the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 with a dark resin such as black without providing the translucent film 7300, the light emitted from the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light can be easily recognized. In this case as well, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed on the dot matrix display 7000, so that important information such as information related to the interests of the player is available. Can be reliably communicated.

The front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) and back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 described above are divided into a first region and a second region by a predetermined virtual line, and the substrate. The LED 7001 may be mounted on only one of the first region and the second region of the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the 7200, or the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be mounted on the first region. Of the first region and the second region, a dark color (black in this example) insulating film having low reflection efficiency is formed not only in one region where the LED 7001 is mounted but also in the other region where the LED 7001 is not mounted. You may do so. For example, as shown in FIG. 259, the substrate 7200 in which a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) is provided with a mounting area on which the LED 7001 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) by virtual line X. , It may be divided into an unmounted area where the LED 7001 is not mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface).

Further, the connector 7002 may be arranged in the unmounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200. In this case, the virtual line in the unmounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 is further arranged. The connector 7002 may be arranged near the end on the side far from X. As described above, the substrate 7200 is housed in the case 7100, and an opening 7120a for exposing the connector is formed on the back surface side of the case 7100 (back surface cover portion 7120). Then, even if the light enters the case 7100 from the opening 7120a, the opening 7120a is formed at a position away from the mounting area on which the LED 7001 is mounted, so that the light enters the penetrating portion 7110a to the player. It is possible to prevent erroneous information from being recognized. Further, since a black insulating film having low reflection efficiency is formed not only in the mounting area where the LED 7001 is mounted but also in the non-mounting area where the LED 7001 is not mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, an opening is formed. Even if the light that has entered the case 7100 from the portion 7120a reaches the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 through the through hole 7003 formed in the substrate 7200, the black color formed in the unmounted region. The insulating film can suppress the reflection of light and prevent the entry into the mounting area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and causing the player to recognize erroneous information.

Further, since the connector 7002 is arranged in the unmounted area near the end on the farthest side from the mounting area of the substrate 7200 and the opening 7120a is formed in the portion of the case 7100 corresponding to the connector 7002, the opening 7120a is formed from the outside of the case 7100. It is possible to prevent the incoming light from reaching the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 through the through hole 7003 formed in the mounting region of the substrate 7200.

Further, in the above example, a light-colored electronic component is not mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the board 7200, but the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface) is bright in the unmounted area. It may be a mounting of colored electronic components. In this case, the bright-colored electronic component is provided at a position away from the LED 7001, and a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, surface) of the substrate 7200 around the bright-colored electronic component. Therefore, even if light is reflected by bright-colored electronic components, further reflection is suppressed by the black insulating film formed in the unmounted region of the surface (LED mounting surface, surface) of the substrate 7200, and the light is mounted. It is possible to suppress the entry of light into the region, thereby preventing the light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetration portion 7110a and the player from erroneous information being recognized.

[Example of production using a dot matrix display]
Next, an example of effect using the above-mentioned dot matrix display 7000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 256, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Then, important information related to the progress of the game is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 260, the dot matrix display is used when the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect based on the start prize for the first start port 2002 and the start prize for the second start port 2004. Even in 7000, the display contents are updated and displayed (variable display). Then, when a predetermined period (variation time) has elapsed since the update display of the display content was started on the dot matrix display 7000, a predetermined mode is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 261 (A) and 261 (B), information related to winning such as "big hit" and "loss" is displayed when the fluctuation time elapses. As described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is different from the light emitting decoration body or the like in which the circuit board on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the fluctuation effect, and the special lottery result (first special lottery result). , The second special lottery result) can be discriminated (at least, it suffices if different contents are displayed depending on whether it is a big hit or not). That is, the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is determined from the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration or the like in which the circuit board on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the fluctuation effect. On the other hand, it is difficult to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emitting mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. Is possible. In addition, when some condition is satisfied (for example, when executing a big hit confirmation effect that notifies that the big hit is confirmed before deriving the special lottery result), a circuit board for mounting the LED is provided. The light emission control may be performed so that the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) can be discriminated from the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration or the like whose light emission is controlled in relation to the above variation effect. However, the dot matrix display 7000 can always determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emitting mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 regardless of specific conditions. Even if a circuit board on which an LED is mounted is provided and a problem occurs in the light emitting mode of a light emitting decoration or the like that controls light emission in relation to the fluctuation effect, a special lottery result (from the light emitting mode of the dot matrix display 7000) Since the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) can be discriminated, no disadvantage is given to the player or the like.

In addition, the dot matrix display 7000 displays the jackpot type (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 2R jackpot) during the jackpot game state. It should be noted that this may be displayed when the time is shortened, or it may be displayed when the time is high.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004 in a time saving time (low probability time saving state (also referred to as time saving state), high probability time saving state (also referred to as probability change state)). (So-called "right-handed") has come to be performed. In addition, the second start port 2004 is frequently opened during the time reduction, and the start prize (to the first start port 2002) is higher than that during the normal time (low probability non-time reduction state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time reduction state). (Winning of the game ball, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004), which is advantageous to the player. However, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed if the player does not play a game (so-called "right-handed") aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004 in a short time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 261 (C), when the time is shortened, the player plays a game (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004. "Right-handed →" is displayed as a notification display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not enjoying the advantageous state in spite of the time saving, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

As described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example displays important information related to the game, unlike the light emitting decoration body or the like in which the circuit board on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the fluctuation effect. It is designed to do. Further, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 and on which the LED 7001 is mounted is an insulating film having a color different from that of the circuit board provided on the light emitting decoration or the like on which the LED is mounted. Is formed (resisted), so when the LED mounting surface of the LED is visually recognized, whether or not the circuit board is equipped with an LED for displaying important information related to the game by the color of the LED mounting surface. Can be easily determined.

In this example, the dot matrix display 7000 is configured to be provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, but it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the inner region of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 is increased, and a structure or a movable object can be provided to enhance the decorativeness and the effect of the effect.

By the way, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a payout base unit 550 that receives the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout for paying out the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side. It includes a unit 560 and. Further, the payout unit 560 is based on an instruction from the payout control board 633 of the ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The door frame is a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full tank path unit 600. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the vehicle to the 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side (see FIG. 4).

Further, the game balls B supplied to the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 are easily charged by moving to the downstream side while rubbing against each other, and when electrostatic discharge occurs from the game balls B, they are in the vicinity. There is a possibility that a problem may occur in the light emitting means (LED or the like) arranged. In this example, the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information related to the game is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, and the display content (of the LED 7001) is displayed every 4 ms. Since the lighting state) is updated, even if a problem occurs in the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 due to an electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the correct content can be immediately updated and displayed to the player, etc. It is designed not to give any disadvantage.

As described above, the region near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, etc., but in this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 By updating the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 in a short period (4 ms), a front view of the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 shown in FIG. It is possible to arrange the dot matrix display 7000 even in the upper left area or the lower left area in the front view. That is, even if the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is arranged in a region susceptible to noise, it can display without giving a disadvantage to the player.

According to the above embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorative body (light emitting decoration body (back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310, back top rear rotating decoration body, back top rear rotation decoration body)) which is mounted on a circuit board for electric parts and whose light emission is controlled according to a special lottery result. 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right The LED provided on the decorative body 3813, etc., the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, It also includes the LEDs provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the plate center upper decorative board 314. A dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.), and the plurality of light emitting means are divided into different systems for each light emitting means and individually controlled to emit light. Means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) and a second light emitting means (light emitting decoration (light-emitting decoration (rotating decoration in the lower back)) that is divided into separate systems for each of a predetermined number of light emitting means and is controlled to emit light in a predetermined number of units. Body 3310, back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, back-back left-rotation decoration 3510, back-back right-rotation decoration 3610, back-back movable decoration 3110, back-up front rotation decoration 3410, back-up front rotation decoration 3421, back LEDs provided on the front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc., LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least in this example, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door The LEDs provided on the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and are provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It may also include an LED.)), And the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted. In order to make them different, the control unit of the light emitting means mounted on the board can be determined by looking at the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board. For example, it is important that the light emission is individually controlled to hinder the progress of the game. A circuit board (board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, provided on the function display unit 1400) on which the light emitting means playing a role is mounted. Function display board) and other circuit boards (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable) The circuit board provided on the decorative body 3110, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), and the LED provided on the door frame 3. Circuit boards to be mounted (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, The decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included. By making the color of the mounting surface different from that of)), it becomes easy to determine whether or not the light emitting means in which the problem has occurred is an important light emitting means, and if the progress of the game is hindered, a quick response is made. Because it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to prevent a decline in the game interest.

Further, the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result can be discriminated, the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result is difficult to discriminate, and the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted. Since the mounting surface of is a special color (black) different from the color (white) of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted, the light emitting means in which the defect occurs plays an important role. It becomes easy to determine whether or not it is.

A first substrate case (a case 7100 accommodating a substrate 7200 of a dot matrix display 7000, a box body accommodating a functional display board of a functional display unit) and a second light emitting body accommodating a circuit board on which a first light emitting means is mounted. A second substrate case for accommodating the circuit board on which the means is mounted (the upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the effect operation unit 300, and the left side unit 400 of the door frame. Door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decoration 419, door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421 , Back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front The first substrate case is a case 7100 for accommodating a first main body portion (a substrate 7200 of a dot matrix display 7000) formed of a material having no translucency, and a function display unit. (Box body accommodating the function display board) and the first display unit (penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, insertion hole for LED of the box body accommodating the function display board) capable of determining the light emitting state of the first light emitting means. The second substrate case has a second main body portion formed of a translucent material (the upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, and the center of the dish of the effect operation unit 300). Decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side decorative body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decorative body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front Rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, back lower left rotating decoration 3201, back lower right rotating decoration 3251, back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, Since it has a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-up front decorative body 3421, etc.), it is determined whether or not the light emitting means plays an important role as a control unit of the light emitting means depending on the presence or absence of translucency of the substrate case. Becomes easier.

The first substrate case is in a state where the circuit board can be detached by destroying a part of the first substrate case, and the second substrate case is a circuit board without destroying a part of the second substrate case. The circuit board cannot be detached unless a part of the first substrate case is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitting means, which plays an important role, from being physically destroyed. On the other hand, the less important light emitting means can be easily physically replaced.

A first light emitting means (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back)) that can express a predetermined light emitting mode by controlling light emission in a predetermined number of units. LEDs provided on the right-handed decorative body 3610, the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back-front left decorative body 3713, the back-front right decorative body 3813, etc. LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top The LED provided on the right decorative substrate 457, the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the LED provided on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included)) and the first light emitting means. The first circuit board to be mounted (light emitting decorative body (light emitting decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110) , Back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), circuit board provided on the back front right decoration body, circuit for mounting the LED provided on the door frame 3 Substrate (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the upper left of the plate. It may also include a decorative substrate 273, a decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.)) And a second light emitting means (dot matrix display) capable of individually controlling light emission to represent a predetermined light emitting mode. The device 7000, the function display unit 1400) and the second circuit board (the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided on the function display unit 1400) on which the second light emitting means is mounted are provided. A white insulating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the first light emitting means of the first circuit board is mounted, and a dark insulating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the second light emitting means of the second circuit board is mounted. Therefore, the reflection efficiency of the first circuit board is increased, and the decrease in brightness at the time of light emission of the first light emitting means can be suppressed. Further, since a dark insulating film is formed on the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means for individually controlling light emission is mounted, reflection is suppressed and individual light emission is emitted by comparison with the mounting surface of the dark insulating film. It can be clearly seen.

Each light emitting means is divided into a tubular shape by an suppressing member (penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, an insertion hole for LED of a box body accommodating a function display board) for suppressing interference of light emitting colors by each of the plurality of light emitting means of the second light emitting means. Since the light emitting color is provided, the diffusion and interference of the light emitting color are suppressed, and the light emitting colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually.

A substrate case for accommodating the second circuit board (a case 7100 for accommodating the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box for accommodating the functional display substrate of the functional display unit) is further provided, and the substrate case is made of a plurality of light emitting means. A display unit that can determine the light emitting state (penetration portion 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole of a box body that houses a functional display board) and a dark color display auxiliary unit (case 7100) formed around the display unit. Since it has a translucent film 7300 in which the periphery of the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is opaque and black, and a black function display sticker in which the periphery of the transparent portion is black), the display unit is compared with the display auxiliary unit. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the light emitting means in the above.

A game board 5 on which a game is performed, a frame body (door frame 3) having a game window portion (door window 101a) arranged in front of the game board 5 and making the game board 5 visible, and the frame. Multiple frame-side light emitting means (door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 415) provided on the body. The LED provided on the 457 may include the LED provided on the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the plate center upper decorative board 314), and the game window provided on the game board. Multiple board-side light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510) visible through the unit , Back back right rotating decoration body 3610, back back movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of frame-side light emitting means emit light with higher brightness than usual, while at least a specific board-side light emitting means among the plurality of board-side light emitting means is emitted. The means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) emits light while maintaining normal brightness, and the specific panel-side light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LED elements) and the light emitting elements. A light emitting board (board 7200, function display board) to be mounted and a partition member (penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, a box LED for accommodating the function display board) for partitioning each of a plurality of light emitting elements mounted on the light emitting board. Since each light emitting means is divided into a tubular shape by the insertion hole), it is possible to suppress the interference of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting elements and make it easier to visually recognize the light emission of each of the plurality of light emitting elements. Even in a situation where the side light emitting means emits light with high brightness, it is easy to determine the light emitting state by a specific panel side light emitting means.

When a specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of board-side light emitting means (light emitting decoration (under the back)) excluding the specific board-side light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) among the plurality of board-side light emitting means. Medium rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration In order to turn off any or all of the LEDs provided on the 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the brightness inside the game window can be reduced, and a specific It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the panel side light emitting means.

A dark color with low reflection efficiency is around the area of the light emitting substrate that is partitioned by the partitioning means and where the light emitting element is arranged (around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, around the area corresponding to the functional display board). Since the insulating film of the above is formed, it is possible to suppress the diffusion of light even when the light emitted from the light emitting element leaks to the outside of the region partitioned by the partition member, and the dark insulating film is formed. It becomes possible to see more clearly by the contrast of.

A first light emitting means that receives a predetermined control signal and emits light in a light emitting mode based on the received control signal (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotation)). Decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decoration body 3610, back back movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. It may also include LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314), and represents information having a higher importance than the first light emitting means. A second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) is provided, and the control signal is output at different cycles between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, so that when a problem occurs. In addition, it is possible to suppress that both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light in a light emitting mode different from the original light emitting mode.

A first light emission control means (a portion that controls light emission of a light emitting decoration by a peripheral control MPU of a peripheral control board 1510) that outputs a control signal to the first light emission means, and a second light emission control that outputs a control signal to the second light emission means. The second light emitting means is further provided with means (a portion for controlling the light emission of the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400 by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310), and the second light emitting means is controlled in a shorter cycle than the first light emitting control means. Since the signal is output, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the information represented by the second light emitting means.

The first light emitting control means controls the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner in which it is difficult to determine the special lottery result, and the second light emitting control means controls the second light emitting means in a mode in which the special lottery result can be discriminated. By controlling the light emission in a manner in which the result of the lottery process can be discriminated, the second light emitting means, which is more important than the first light emitting means, outputs a control signal in a shorter cycle than the first light emitting means to control the light emission. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect in the information represented by the second light emitting means and giving a disadvantage to the player.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) including a first light emission control means and controlling the progress of the game, and a second light emission control means are included, and the effect is controlled based on a command from the game control means. A defect of the first light emitting means is provided because the effect control means (peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510) is further provided, the first light emitting means is controlled by the game control means, and the second light emitting means is controlled by the effect control means. Can be reliably suppressed.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) that controls the progress of the game, and a plurality of light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, which can emit light in connection with the game effect executed with the progress of the game). Function display unit 1400, light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top LEDs provided on the front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418. , Door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 LEDs, and plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314. It may also include an LED provided), and a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different circuit boards depending on the application (directing application, gaming state or notification of special display result). , A function provided on the first circuit board (board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) on which the light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) used for the first application is mounted. (Display board) and light emitting means used for a second purpose different from the first use (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510,), It is provided on the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3610, the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc. LED, LED provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, and the upper left of the plate. A second circuit board (light emitting decorative body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310)) on which the decorative board 273, the decorative board 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the LED provided on the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate are mounted may be included. , Back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front rotation decoration 3421, back front left Circuit board provided on the decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc., and a circuit for mounting the LED provided on the door frame 3. Substrate (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the upper left of the plate. The decorative substrate 273, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included. )) And, since the color of the mounting surface is different, the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased or decreased depending on the application. For example, by making the circuit board whose reflection efficiency is desired to be light-colored and the circuit board whose light diffusion is to be suppressed dark-colored, it is possible to suppress the transmission of erroneous information to the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

The light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board is used to enhance the effect of effect, and the light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board is used to display information related to the lottery result. By forming a dark insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board that displays predetermined information, light interference can be suppressed and erroneous information can be suppressed from being notified.

A white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, and a dark insulating film is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, and a light emitting means used for enhancing the effect is provided. Since the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased by forming a white insulating film on the surface of the circuit board 1, the brightness of the light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board at the time of light emission can be increased. The production effect is enhanced. On the other hand, by forming a dark insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board for displaying information related to the lottery result, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from each of the light emitting means from diffusing and interfering with each other. The light emitting state of each light emitting means becomes clear, and information related to the lottery result can be suppressed from being misunderstood and transmitted.

A first circuit board including a game board 5 in which a game area 5a on which a game ball rolls is formed on the front surface, and rail members (outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002) that partition the front surface of the game board 5. Is placed in the inner region of the rail member, the second circuit board is placed in the outer region of the rail member, and a white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, so that the rail attracted by the player. The light reflection efficiency in the inner region of the member can be increased to enhance the effect.

A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorations (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration)) mounted on a circuit board for electrical components and controlling light emission according to the result of lottery. Body 3510, back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610, back-back movable decoration body 3110, back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, back-up front decoration body 3421, back-front left decoration body 3713, back-front right decoration body 3813, etc.) LED, LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456. , And the LED provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the LED provided on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included), dot matrix. The display unit 7000, the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600, etc.) are provided, and the plurality of light emitting means are divided into a plurality of light emitting units, and the plurality of light emitting units simultaneously emit a plurality of light emitting means. The first light emitting unit (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right)) that makes it difficult to identify each light emitting state when controlled. LED, door frame 3 provided on the rotating decoration body 3610, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-top front decoration body 3421, the back front left decoration body 3713, the back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) LEDs (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate). The LED provided on the 457, the LED on the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the LED provided on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included.)) And a plurality of light emitting means are simultaneously controlled to emit light. The surface of the first circuit board, which includes a second light emitting unit (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) that makes it possible to identify each light emitting state in the case of the above, and on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. The first insulating film (light-colored insulating film such as white) formed of the first insulating paint and the electric component formed on the first insulating film and mounted on the first circuit board. LED attributes (furthermore, LED shape, LED size, etc.) such as the notation part (LED part number, area indicating the position where the LED is placed, etc.) It may include the size, LED mounting direction (mounting direction), and LED model. ) (Including foil removing and silk printing with an insulating paint of a color different from that of the first insulating paint)), and the second light emitting means to which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. The surface of the circuit board is characterized in that the notation portion is not formed and only the second insulating film (dark insulating film such as black) is formed by the second insulating paint. As a result, only the second insulating film made of the second insulating paint is formed without forming a notation portion on the surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting unit that makes each light emitting state visible is mounted. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board uniform. For example, when only the second insulating film with the light-colored second insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board. Uniform light emission can be realized, and when only the second insulating film with a dark second insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, light interference is suppressed and individual light emission states are clarified. This makes it easy to identify individual light emitting states.

Further, the first insulating paint may be light-colored, and the notation portion may be formed in a light color different from that of the first insulating paint. As a result, a coating film made of a light-colored insulating paint is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, and a light-colored notation portion different from the light-colored portion of the insulating paint is formed on the coating film. It is possible to suppress that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the substrate is lowered by the notation section, and it is possible to specify the electric component mounted on the first circuit board by the notation section. As a result, it is possible to specify the electric components mounted on the first circuit board without lowering the brightness of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board, so that the effect of the game effect is improved. It will be possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the first insulating paint may be white and the notation portion may be yellow. As a result, the notation portion is formed in yellow, which has a reflection efficiency close to that of the white color of the insulating paint formed on the surface of the first circuit board. It is possible to specify the electrical components mounted on the circuit board, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the brightness of light emission due to a plurality of light emitting means. As a result, the effect of the game production can be improved, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, the second insulating paint may be darkened, and a dark second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. As a result, while a coating film of a dark insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, the notation portion is not formed, so that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed from being improved by the notation portion. Will be possible. As a result, interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board can be suppressed and individual light emitting states can be clarified, thereby facilitating identification of individual light emitting states.

Further, the second insulating coating material may be black, and a black second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. As a result, while a coating film made of black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, the notation portion is not formed, so that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed from being improved by the notation portion. Will be possible. As a result, interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board can be suppressed and individual light emitting states can be clarified, thereby facilitating identification of individual light emitting states.

Further, a notation portion for specifying an electric component mounted on the second circuit board may be formed on the back surface of the second circuit board on which a plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. Since the notation portion is formed on the back surface of the second circuit board, it is possible to specify the electric component mounted on the second circuit board while suppressing the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the second circuit board.

Further, as the notation portion formed on the back surface of the second circuit board, it may be formed in a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black. Since the notation portion formed of a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black is formed on the back surface on which the light emitting means of the second circuit board is not mounted, the second circuit board does not improve the reflection efficiency on the front surface. It is possible to identify the electrical components mounted on the two circuit boards, suppress the interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board, and clarify the individual light emission states, thereby making it possible to clarify the individual light emission states. The identification can be facilitated.

Further, the first circuit board cover (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back) covering the surface on which a plurality of light emitting means of the first circuit board is mounted. Rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, left side of door frame 3 An inner lens 403, a right side inner lens 415, etc.) and a second circuit board cover (surface cover portion 7110) that covers a surface on which a plurality of light emitting means of the second circuit board are mounted are further provided. The circuit board case is formed of a material whose portion corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board is translucent, and the second circuit board case is formed of a material whose portion corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board is not translucent. In addition to being formed, it may have a display unit capable of discriminating the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board. By forming the part corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board of the first circuit board case with a translucent material, light is emitted over the entire area corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board of the first circuit board case. Can be decorated. Further, in order to form a portion of the second circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board with a material having no translucency so that the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means can be discriminated from the display unit. It is possible to suppress the interference of the light of each of the light emitting means and clarify the individual light emitting state, thereby facilitating the identification of the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the display unit of the second circuit board cover may have a suppressing means (each light emitting means is partitioned in a tubular shape) for suppressing light interference by each of the plurality of light emitting means. With such a configuration, the interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed, and it becomes easy to individually identify the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the second circuit board cover covers the surface cover portion (surface cover portion 7110) that covers the surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted and the back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. It has a back surface cover portion (back surface cover portion 7120), accommodates the second circuit board, and is a part of the second circuit board cover (a part of one or both of the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120). The second circuit board may be made detachable by being destroyed. As a result, the second circuit board cannot be detached unless a part of the second circuit board case is destroyed, so that the possibility of impairing the function of suppressing light interference is reduced.

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win, and is a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs). A plurality of light emitting boards having a front surface on which the light emitting means is mounted and a back surface on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted (back front left decorative board 3714 of back front left decorative unit 3710, back top front decorative board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400). , Back front right decorative board unit 3810 back front right decorative board 3814, back bottom right production unit 3250 back bottom right decorative board 3253, back bottom left production unit 3200 back bottom left decorative board 3203, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, board 7200 provided on dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400 A dark-colored light-emitting board (dot matrix display 7000) is provided, and a plurality of light-emitting boards are formed with an insulating film of at least a dark-colored (black, green, dark blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint on the surface. A bright color in which an insulating film is formed by at least a light-colored (white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint on the surface of the substrate 7200 provided in the above, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, etc.). Light emitting board (back front left decorative board 3710, back front left decorative board 3714, back top production unit 3400 back top front decoration board 3422, back front right decoration unit 3810 back front right decoration board 3814, back bottom right production Back bottom right decorative board 3253 of unit 3250, back bottom left decorative board 3203 of back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame The top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, etc.) are included in the dark color light emitting board, and the connector (connector 7002) for connecting the wiring to the dark color light emitting board only on the back surface of the dark color light emitting board. ) Is arranged, and the bright color light emitting board is characterized in that a connector for connecting the wiring to the light color light emitting board is arranged on the surface of the light color light emitting board. With this configuration, the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the light emitting substrate is uniform by arranging the connector on the back surface without arranging the connector on the front surface of the light emitting substrate on which the insulating film made of the dark insulating paint is formed. The light emitted by a plurality of light emitting means can be clearly seen. As a result, the effect of the production is improved, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, a light-colored (white, light blue, yellow, yellow-green, etc.) connector may be used. By arranging a light-colored connector on the back surface of the dark-colored light-emitting board, it becomes possible to connect the wiring to the dark-colored light-emitting board while suppressing the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the dark-colored light-emitting board. By making the connector arranged on the surface of the bright color light emitting board bright color, it is possible to connect the wiring to the light color light emitting board while suppressing the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light color light emitting board.

Further, a black insulating paint may be used as the dark insulating paint. Since an insulating film made of a black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate, it is possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate. Further, by arranging the connector on the back surface, the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the dark color light emitting substrate can be made uniform without being improved by the connector, and the light emission by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly visually recognized.

Further, a white insulating paint may be used as the light-colored insulating paint. Since an insulating film with a white insulating paint is formed on the surface of the light-colored light-emitting board, the light reflection efficiency on the surface of the light-colored light-emitting board is improved as compared with the conventional circuit board on which the green insulating film is formed. be able to. Further, by making the connector arranged on the surface bright, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright light emitting substrate, and it is possible to increase the brightness of light emitted by a plurality of light emitting means.

Alternatively, a white connector may be used. By arranging the white connector on the back surface of the dark color light emitting board, the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the dark color light emitting board can be made uniform without being improved by the connector, and the light emission by a plurality of light emitting means can be clearly visually recognized. .. Further, by making the connector white, it becomes easy to identify the connector when a dark insulating film is formed on the back surface of the dark light emitting substrate. Further, since the white connector similar to the insulating film formed on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate is arranged, it is possible to suppress that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light color light emitting substrate is lowered by the connector.

Further, a dark color light emitting board case (case 7100) for accommodating the dark color light emitting board is further provided, and the dark color light emitting board case is formed of a material whose portion corresponding to the surface of the dark color light emitting board is not translucent. It may have a display unit (penetrating portion 7110a) capable of discriminating the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the dark color light emitting substrate. In order to form the portion corresponding to the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate of the dark color light emitting substrate case with a material having no translucency so that the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means can be discriminated from the display unit, each of the plurality of light emitting means It is possible to suppress the interference of light and clarify the individual light emitting states, thereby facilitating the identification of the light emitting states of each of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the display unit of the dark color light emitting substrate case may have a suppressing means for suppressing light interference by each of the plurality of light emitting means (each light emitting means is divided into a tubular shape by the penetrating portion 7110a). The interference of light on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate is suppressed, and it becomes easy to individually identify the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the dark color light emitting substrate case may be in a state where the dark color light emitting substrate can be detached by destroying a part of the dark color light emitting substrate case. Since the dark color light emitting board cannot be separated unless a part of the dark color light emitting board case is destroyed, the risk of impairing the function of suppressing light interference is reduced.

A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light with the progress of the game. (Light emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration) 3410, LED provided on the back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc., LED provided on the door frame 3 (at least the door frame left side decoration in this example) Board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and LED provided on door frame top right decorative board 457, plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decoration A gaming machine including a substrate 278, an LED provided on a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate), a dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.). The plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different substrates depending on the application (whether the decorative body is light-emittingly decorated by surface light emission, or various hemorrhoid characters, symbols, figures, etc. are displayed by dot matrix display or the like). Among the plurality of light emitting means, the first light emitting means is provided on a first light emitting substrate (a substrate 7200 provided on a dot matrix display 7000 and a function display unit 1400) made of a black mounting surface having low light reflection efficiency. The second light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means provided on the function display board, etc.) is a second light emitting board (back front left decorative body unit 3710 back front left) made of a white mounting surface having high light reflection efficiency. Decorative board 3714, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top production unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right decoration board 3253 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom left production Unit 3200 back bottom left decorative board 3203, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, Etc.), and the first light emitting substrate is housed in a white case body (case 7100) having high light reflection efficiency. As a result, the first light emitting substrate does not increase the reflection efficiency of its own light emission, but can increase the reflection efficiency of other light emission.

In addition, the first light emitting means mounted on the first light emitting board can display the lottery result of the lottery means according to the light emitting mode, and the second light emitting means mounted on the second light emitting board is said. Before the first light emitting means displays the lottery result according to the light emitting mode, it may be possible to execute a light emitting effect according to the lottery result. By making the mounting surface of the first light emitting board, which displays the lottery result according to the light emitting mode, black with low light reflection efficiency, light interference on the mounting surface of the first light emitting board is suppressed, and erroneous information is notified. Can be suppressed.

[Fraud prevention measures for important boards]
As described above, in this example, the importance is given by controlling the circuit board on which the light emitting means that plays an important role of hindering the progress of the game is mounted, in other words, the control directly related to the interests of the player. A black insulating film is formed on the surface of a high circuit board (in this example, the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided on the function display unit 1400, etc.), which is important for the progress of the game. Light emitting decoration (which may be displayed rarely) (rearly lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration) Body 3610, back-rear movable decorative body 3110, back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, back-up front decoration body 3421, back-front left decoration body 3713, back-front right decoration body 3813, etc.) and others such as those provided on the door frame 3. Circuit board, in other words, a circuit board that is less important by controlling the game production that is not directly related to the interests of the player (in this example, the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the back upper back rotating decoration) 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right Circuit boards provided on the decorative body 3813, etc., door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board A white insulating film is formed on the surface of the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, such as 457.

Further, as described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. On the other hand, a circuit board that is less important by performing control related to the game production that is not directly related to the interests of the player (in this example, the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the back upper back rotating decoration 3440, and the back back). Left-handed decorative body 3510, back-back right-turned decorative body 3610, back-back movable decorative body 3110, back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, back-up front decorative body 3421, back-front left decorative body 3713, back-front right decorative body 3813, etc. The circuit board provided in the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included.) The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. It is designed to be controlled.

That is, in this example, among the circuit boards on which the LED provided on the game board 5 and irradiating light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted, the circuit board directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. In other words, a black insulating film is formed on a highly important circuit board (in this example, the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000), while the circuit board controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, in other words. Then, a circuit board of low importance (in this example, the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510, the back rear right rotating decoration 3610, the back rear movable decoration 3110, A white insulating film is formed on the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back-front left decorative body 3713, the back-front right decorative body 3813, and the like). ..

As described above, in this example, it is important that the circuit board on which the LED provided on the game board 5 and irradiates the light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. Insulation formed on the substrate surface to determine whether the circuit board has a high degree of importance or is a circuit board of low importance controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. It can be easily identified by the color of the film. Therefore, if it is determined that the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, etc., the circuit board is sufficiently inspected so that it is directly in the interest of the player when it is installed in the game machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of serious problems that may be involved. On the other hand, since it can be easily determined that the circuit board has a high degree of importance, there is a possibility that the circuit board having a high degree of importance may be illegally modified. In this example, by making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance, it is difficult for the player to illegally modify the circuit board of high importance.

Specifically, in the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 described above, although a black insulating film is formed on the substrate surface (LED mounting surface), the penetrating portion of the portion on which the LED is mounted is described above. Only a white insulating film is formed in the region corresponding to the portion 7110a (FIGS. 262 (A) and 262 (B)). Further, a white insulating film is formed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. Note that FIGS. 262 (A) and 262 (B) show a state in which the translucent film 7300 is peeled off from the case 7100 for convenience. Further, the translucent film 7300 is not limited to the one attached to the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, and the dot matrix display 7000 is installed in the pachinko machine 1 in front of the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000. It may be attached to a transparent member (resin, glass, etc.) to be arranged.

In this example, of the substrate 7200, the region that can be seen through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100 is controlled to be related to the game production that is not directly related to the interests of the player. Only a white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board is formed. As described above, in the region of the substrate 7200 that can be seen through the through portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, only a white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the less important circuit board is formed. By doing so, the translucent film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off, and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetrating portion 7110a, or the translucent film 7300 is not attached. When a case 7100 is used in which a part of the substrate 7200 is exposed from the penetrating portion 7110a, even if the substrate 7200 is visually recognized through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, the importance is high. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is a circuit board. However, on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is mounted out of the substrate 7200, the black insulating film occupies a proportion of the white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board. Is higher in proportion. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, it is possible to immediately determine that the circuit board is of high importance based on the color of the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the substrate 7200 is mounted, and sufficient inspection is performed. Will be.

Of the circuit boards provided on the game board 5 on which the LEDs that irradiate light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, all the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 are white. Is not limited to those on which insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) are formed, and is not limited to white on at least one of the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. It suffices if insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) are formed (black when a plurality of circuit boards are provided as circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310). It may include a combination of two or more of a circuit board on which an insulating film is formed, a circuit board on which a green insulating film is formed, and a circuit board on which a white insulating film is formed). Further, among the circuit boards on which the LED provided on the game board 5 and irradiating light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted, all the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 are white. The insulating film is not limited to that formed, and at least one of the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has an insulating film having a color different from black (for example, white or green). Is formed, or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface (rear surface)) of the circuit board on which the LED provided on the game board 5 and irradiating light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. An insulating film having a color different from white (for example, black or green) may be formed on the surface.

On the other hand, circuit boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (at least the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, but the payout control board 633). (May include other circuit boards such as) are all circuit boards of high importance, and in this example, an insulating film of the same color (green) is formed. Further, the main control board box 1320 for accommodating the main control board 1310 is formed of a transparent resin so that the main control board 1310 can be visually recognized from the outside of the main control board box 1320, and the peripheral control board box for accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. The 1520 is made of a transparent resin so that the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized from the outside of the peripheral control board box 1520. Further, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are formed with notation portions corresponding to the electronic components on the mounting surface of the electronic components. In this way, for circuit boards of high importance such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an insulating film of the same (very similar) color is formed and the mounting surface of electronic components is formed. Since the notation part corresponding to each of the electronic components is formed in, it is easy to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and sufficient inspection is performed for the circuit board of high importance. In the state of being provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 after manufacturing, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized by the player, a plurality of components arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 An insulating film having the same or very similar color to the circuit board is formed, and a notation portion corresponding to each of the electronic components is formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, so that the mounting surface of the electronic component has almost the same mode (at least). It suffices if an insulating film of the same or very similar color is formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, and the color (black, yellow, etc.) and the arrangement method (formed for each electronic component, or a plurality of notations). Since it is said that it is formed collectively for electronic components, on the front surface on which electronic components are mounted, or on the back surface on which electronic components are not mounted), the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 It becomes difficult to determine which of the plurality of circuit boards arranged in the above is the most important circuit board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.), and the most important circuit board (main control board). It becomes difficult for unauthorized modification of 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) to be performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, an insulating film of the same color (very similar color) is formed and the circuit is of high importance. While it is difficult to determine whether the board is a board or a circuit board of low importance, a circuit provided on the game board 5 on which an LED that irradiates light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. In the substrate, by making the color of the insulating film different, it is possible to distinguish whether it is a circuit board of high importance or a circuit board of low importance, but it is made visible through a case (case 7100, etc.). By making the colors of the insulating films the same (very similar colors), it is difficult for the player to notice whether the circuit board is of high importance or less important. Further, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is also provided on the game board 5 and has an LED mounted on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to irradiate light. Similarly, the color of the insulating film may be different, but if the case (main control board box 1320, peripheral control board box 1520, etc.) is made opaque, the discovery will be delayed even if unauthorized modification is performed. Therefore, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a visible transparent case (very similar color) while forming an insulating film of the same color (very similar color). It is desirable to house it in the main control board box 1320, peripheral control board box 1520, etc.).

In the above example, a white insulating film is formed in all areas of the back surface of the substrate 7200 (non-LED mounting surface), but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the connector is formed on the back surface of the substrate 7200. A white insulating film may be formed in the region corresponding to the opening 7120a that exposes the 7002 (the region that is visible through the opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002), and the other regions are white. Insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) may be formed. Further, when an opening or a penetrating portion is formed other than the opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002, a white insulating film is also formed in the region corresponding to the opening or the penetrating portion, and this opening is formed. Even if the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) is visually recognized through the portion or the penetrating portion, it is a highly important circuit board by performing control directly related to the interest of the player. It may not be noticed by the person.

Further, in the substrate 7200, a color that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board (white in this example) over a range beyond the region corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a formed in the case 7100. ) May be formed, or the substrate 7200 is formed in a circuit board of low importance in a part of a nearby region outside the region corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a in a state of being housed in the case 7100. A white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film to be formed may be formed in a predetermined form (for example, an arbitrary shape, symbol, character, notation, etc.). With this configuration, even if the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 is displaced and the region of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is changed, the black insulating film can be made difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board is of high importance. Also,

Further, as described above, the case 7100 accommodating the substrate 7200 is formed of a colored opaque white resin having no translucency. Further, a translucent film 7300 in which the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is translucent (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass) is attached to the surface (front surface) side of the case 7100. The substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 cannot be directly visually recognized from the front surface side. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and the circuit board of high importance can be sufficiently inspected, while the state after manufacturing, that is, the state after manufacturing, that is, Among the circuit boards that are of high importance in the state of being provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the circuit board on which the LED that irradiates the light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted is concealed. Since it makes unauthorized modification difficult, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

The main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., which are arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 on at least the LED mounting surface (excluding the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a) of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100. The insulating film of the same color (green) as or very similar to the circuit board of high importance may be formed. Then, among the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, at least the LED mounting surface of the circuit board on which the LED provided on the game board 5 and irradiates light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. By forming an insulating film having a color (white) different from that of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, it becomes easy to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process. It will be possible to have a circuit board with a high LED perform a sufficient inspection.

Further, the case 7100 accommodating the substrate 7200 may be formed of a white resin that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance, whereby the case 7100 is also of low importance. It is possible to recognize that the circuit board is similar to the circuit board so that the circuit board of high importance is not noticed.

Further, as described above, in this example, of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is a white insulation that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance. Since only the film is formed, even if the translucent film 7300 is peeled off from the case 7100 and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetrating portion 7110a, it is housed in the case 7100. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the substrate 7200 is a circuit board of high importance.

Further, no through hole is formed in the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 (the region inside the through portion 7110a) housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000. As a result, the surface of the white insulating film formed over the entire surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) becomes smooth, so that the surface of the substrate 7200 passes through the penetrating portion 7100a. It is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes (front surface, LED mounting surface) from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board is of high importance. A through hole is formed in the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 (the region inside the through portion 7110a), and the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the through portion 7110a including the through hole. A white insulating film thicker than usual may be formed in the substrate. In this case as well, since the surface of the insulating film can be smoothed, the surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface, front surface, through the through portion 7100a). It is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the LED mounting surface from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board is of high importance.

Further, of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is white (not limited to white, but a bright color having high reflection efficiency (for example,). The reflection efficiency may be improved by forming an insulating film (yellow) or may be). For example, as shown in FIG. 258 (A), a black insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form the first conductive film 7200A, which corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. The region (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) may be solidly coated (silk printed) with a white paint on the first conductive film 7200A to form the second conductive film 7200B, or FIG. 258 (B). ), A white insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form the first conductive film 7200A, and the region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (penetrating portion 7110a). The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by solid coating (silk printing) with a black paint on the first conductive film 7200A except for the portion (inside the region).

That is, in FIG. 258 (A), the black first conductive film 7200A is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the white first conductive film 7200A is formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 2 Conductive film 7200B is formed. Further, in FIG. 258 (B), a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white second conductive film 7200B is formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 1 Conductive film 7200A is formed. In this way, a black insulating film (black first conductive film 7200A, black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around the region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, and the penetrating portion 7110a is formed. By forming a white insulating film (white second conductive film 7200B, white first conductive film 7200A) in the region corresponding to the above, the region (one) corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. Since the reflection efficiency of the penetrating portion 7110a in which the LED 7001 is arranged) can be increased, the decrease in brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a is further suppressed when the LED 7001 emits light, and the light emitted by one LED 7001 is clarified. Since it can be visually recognized and the reflection efficiency can be maintained low around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, the LED 7001 temporarily arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a can be used. Even if the light leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, it is possible to prevent the light from diffusing. Further, in this case, the above-mentioned notation portion may not be silk-printed, or the notation portion may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the substrate 7200 is not mounted, or the LED may be mounted. Using a bright color paint with high reflection efficiency such as white or yellow on the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the surface. The notation portion may be silk-printed, or yellow or the like may be printed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in the region of the LED mounting surface corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. The notation portion may be silk-printed using a light-colored paint having high reflection efficiency.

According to the above embodiment, it is a gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win. , Main side board used for the progress of the game (board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) and for executing the effect. Sub-side boards used (peripheral control board 1510, back front left decorative board unit 3710 back front left decorative board 3714, back top effect unit 3400 back top front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative body unit 3810 back front right Decorative board 3814, back bottom right decorative board 3250 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame The top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457) are provided, and the main board is arranged so that the surface on which the electronic components are mounted faces the rear of the game machine. The first main side board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) and the surface are arranged so as to face the front of the game machine, and at least the surface is colored with a specific color that is not formed on the sub side board. It has a second main side board having an area (a board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 and a function display board provided on the function display unit 1400), and electronic components mounted on the first main side board. Attributes of electronic components such as information that identifies the type of electronic component (part number of the electronic component, area indicating the position where the electronic component is placed, etc.) (Furthermore, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting orientation of the electronic component ( A notation part (including foil removal and silk printing with an insulating paint of a color different from the first insulating paint)) indicating the mounting direction) and the model of the electronic component may be included) is provided. On the other hand, the second main board is not provided with information for specifying the type of electronic component to be mounted. As a result, with respect to the second main side substrate, which is arranged so that the surface on which the electronic component is mounted faces the front of the game machine, a specific color colored region (for example, a resist of a different color) that is not formed on the sub side substrate is formed. , Silk, etc.) makes it easy to determine whether or not the substrate is of high importance, and it is possible to prevent oversight of inspection of the substrate of high importance. Further, if the presence of a highly important substrate can be grasped from the player side, there is a risk of fraudulent activity using the substrate. However, in the present invention, the surface on which the electronic component is mounted is behind the gaming machine. By not forming a colored region of a specific color on the first main side substrate arranged so as to face, it is difficult to distinguish between the first main side substrate and the sub side substrate so that the surface faces the front of the game machine. Information for specifying the type of electronic component to be mounted is not provided on the second main board to be arranged. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the first main side substrate is a substrate of high importance as the same as the sub side substrate without providing a colored region of a specific color, and the surface of the first main side substrate is viewed from the front of the gaming machine. For the second main side substrate, which is easily visible, a colored region of a specific color is formed to facilitate the determination of whether or not the substrate is of high importance in the manufacturing process, but makes it difficult to specify the type of electronic component. This makes it difficult to illegally modify the second main board and prevents the reliability of the game machine from being lowered.

Further, the first main side substrate may have a function of performing a lottery for winning or not based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the second main side substrate may have a function of displaying the lottery result. The first main side substrate, which is the most important by drawing lots for winning or not, is the same as the sub side substrate without forming a colored region of a specific color. Therefore, the first main side substrate and the sub side substrate It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the substrate is of high importance.

The surfaces of both the first main side board and the second main side board are covered with a cover body (main control board box 1320, payout control board box 632, case 7100, etc.), and the second main side board is covered. The cover body (surface cover portion 7110) for accommodating the two is provided with an opening (penetration portion 7110a) that opens toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the plate surface on the front side of the second main side substrate is formed by the cover body. A colored region (insulating film) having a color (black, etc.) different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface which is the outside of the opening in the covered state, and is on the front side of the second main-side substrate. Only a colored region (insulating film) having a color (white, etc.) that is the same as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface that is inside the opening when the plate surface is covered with the cover body. It may be. Even if the board surface of the second main board is visually recognized from the opening toward the front side of the game machine, a colored area having the same color as or very similar to the board color of the sub board can be visually recognized, which is a fraudulent act. It is possible to make a person recognize that the substrate is of low importance and not to notice that it is an important substrate.

Further, in a state where the plate surface on the front side of the second main side substrate is covered with the cover body, a part of the vicinity of the plate surface outside the opening has a color that is the same as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub side substrate. A colored region (an insulating film of a color formed by an arbitrary shape, symbol, character, notation, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the second main side substrate housed in the cover body shifts and the area of the plate surface inside the opening changes, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the colored area having a color different from the substrate color of the sub side substrate. ..

The cover body covering the surface of the second main side substrate includes a front cover portion (front surface cover portion 7110) covering the front side of the second main side substrate and a back surface cover portion covering the back surface side of the second main side substrate. (Back surface cover portion 7120), and the back surface cover portion is provided with a back surface side opening (opening 7120a) that opens toward the back surface side of the gaming machine, and is a plate on the back surface side of the second main side substrate. A colored region (insulating film) having at least a color (black, etc.) different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface outside the opening when the surface is covered by the back surface cover portion, and the second main On the plate surface inside the opening when the plate surface on the back surface side of the side substrate is covered by the back surface cover portion, only a colored region having a color (white, etc.) that is the same as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is present. It may be provided. Even if the plate surface of the second main side substrate is visually recognized from the opening toward the back surface side of the game machine, the colored area having the same color as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub side substrate can be visually recognized. It is possible to make a person recognize that the substrate is of low importance so that the person does not notice that it is an important substrate.

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win, and is used for the progress of the game. Main side board (board 7200 provided in dot matrix display 7000, function display board provided in function display unit 1400, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) and sub side board (periphery) used for execution of production. Control board 1510, back front left decorative board unit 3710 back front left decorative board 3714, back top production unit 3400 back top front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative body unit 3810 back front right decorative board 3814, back bottom right Back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the production unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door The frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457) are provided, and the main board is a first main board (the surface on which electronic components are mounted so as to face the rear of the game machine). The main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, etc.) and the second main side having a surface facing the front of the game machine and having at least a specific color colored region formed on the sub-side board on the surface. It has a substrate (a substrate 7200 provided on a dot matrix display 7000 and a functional display substrate provided on a function display unit 1400), and the first main side board and the second main side board are case bodies (main control board), respectively. Although it is housed in the box 1320, the payout control board box 632, the case 7100, etc.), the second main board is difficult to see from the outside when it is housed in the case body (main control board box 1320). The payout control board box 632 is transparent, while the case 7100 is opaque). According to the above configuration, the second main side substrate, which is arranged so that the surface on which the electronic component is mounted faces the front of the game machine, has a specific color colored region (for example, different) that is not formed on the sub side substrate. By having colored resist, silk, etc.), it becomes easy to determine whether or not the substrate is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent oversight of inspection of the substrate of high importance. .. Further, if the existence of a highly important substrate can be grasped from the player side, there is a risk of fraudulent activity using the substrate. However, in the present invention, the surface on which the electronic component is mounted is behind the gaming machine. By not forming a colored region of a specific color on the first main side substrate arranged so as to face, it is difficult to distinguish between the first main side substrate and the sub side substrate so that the surface faces the front of the game machine. The second main side substrate to be arranged is accommodated in a case body so as to be difficult to see from the outside. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the first main side substrate is a substrate of high importance as the same as the sub side substrate without providing a colored region of a specific color, and the surface is in front of the gaming machine. A colored region of a specific color is formed on the second main side substrate so as to face the substrate, which makes it easy to determine whether or not the substrate is of high importance in the manufacturing process, but is easily visible to the player in the post-manufacturing state. Since the existence of the second main board is concealed and unauthorized modification is made difficult, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reliability of the game machine.

Further, the case body accommodating the second main side substrate may be formed in a color that is the same as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub side substrate. This makes it difficult for fraudsters to notice that it is an important board.

[Lamp / LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (at least the left side decorative substrate of the door frame in this example) is provided by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board. The brightness of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of 273, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be adjustable), and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 (at least in this example). Door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457. Even if the brightness of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 mounted on the movable decorative body can be adjusted in brightness. Alternatively, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs as the back door of the effect display device 1600 may be adjustable. However, the LED provided in the display for displaying important information related to the game (for example, the function display unit 1400). It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LED) cannot be adjusted), and the brightness of the LED) can be adjusted in 5% increments over a range of 70% to 100%.

Specifically, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated. When the rotation operation is performed counterclockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the effect display device 1600 displays a barometer corresponding to the current brightness for a certain period of time, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer is increased until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer is decreased until the brightness reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, it is provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 by directing attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to suppress the visibility of the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 37, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330, and the connectors marked on these substrates can be suppressed. Information such as the number of pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest and the decline in the game interest.

Further, according to the result of the special lottery, the player participation type production for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 301 in the production operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is not performed. The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. When the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during normal times when the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative substrate 376 is turned off, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative substrate 376 and the surface of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 are operated. The LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring 330 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light for a certain period of time to be controlled in the center of the effect operation button unit 360. The button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emittingly decorated. Then, when the non-operated period of the effect operation unit 301 reaches a certain period, the display of the barometer of the effect display device 1600 is extinguished and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is turned off. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, so that the central button decorative substrate 376 on which these LEDs are mounted and the central button decorative substrate 376 are The surfaces of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be made difficult to see by the light emitted from the LED.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower side of the effect operation ring 330. The brightness of the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided in the above is not adjustable. That is, the brightness of the LED provided in the effect operation unit 300, which is provided close to the player and is easily noticed, cannot be adjusted, and the light emission is controlled by the preset brightness. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is light-emitting and decorated in the above-mentioned light emitting mode at the time of effect, it is always mounted on the surfaces of the center button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 with a certain brightness or higher. The LED can be made to emit light, and the LED illuminates the effect operation unit 301 in a situation where the player pays attention to the effect operation unit 300 (a situation in which the effect operation unit 301 is operated such as a player participation type effect or volume control). The light emitted can make the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 difficult to see, and the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, and the components marked on these substrates can be made difficult to see. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and prevent deterioration of the design. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned central button decorative substrate 376, outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, white is adopted as the insulating film (resist) of the LED mounting surface, and the mounting surface has yellow insulating properties. Information (notation part) such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged is silk-printed with paint. In this way, in this example, since the notation part is silk-printed with a yellow insulating paint that has little visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, it is not only when the LED is on but also when the LED is off. It is also difficult to identify this information.

The brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 to when the peripheral control MPU is activated, before and after the special symbol displayed in a variable manner is stopped. It may be always feasible except for a certain period of time (such as one or both), or specific conditions such as a period of waiting for customers and performing a demonstration by the effect display device 1600. It may be feasible only when is satisfied. Further, the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 depending on the situation (whether or not the fluctuation is displayed, etc.). The case where the result of the luminance adjustment is reflected immediately and the case where the result of the brightness adjustment is reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302 may be changed.

In this example, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be executed even when the door frame 3 is open. Further, when the door frame 3 is open, the LED is mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710, and the LED is mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, back lower left effect unit 3200 LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, movable decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (not lit), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (this example). Then, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board 273. The decorative substrate 278 on the upper right side of the plate and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be controlled to emit light. That is, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness while the door frame 3 is open, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. , The brightness cannot be determined by the light emitting state of these a plurality of LEDs.

On the other hand, in the state where the door frame 3 is not opened (the state where the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710, the back top effect unit 3400. LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 LED, LED mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, movable decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back back left rotating decoration Control is not performed to turn off a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3610, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110). Possible state). Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the brightness can be determined by the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

Further, the above-mentioned back front left decorative substrate 3714, back upper front decorative substrate 3422, back front right decorative substrate 3814, back lower right decorative substrate 3253, back lower left decorative substrate 3203, back upper rear decorative substrate 3114, back upper rear decorative substrate. For 3452, the back rear left decorative board 3522, and the back rear right decorative board 3622, white is adopted as the insulating film (resist) of the LED mounting surface, and the number of connector pins is applied to the mounting surface with yellow insulating paint. , IC orientation, part number, pin number, outline line on which electronic parts are arranged, and other information (notation part) are silk-printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a non-lightable state, it is possible to make it difficult to identify these information.

[Adjusting the brightness of LEDs mounted on a specific board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a circuit board on which an LED (dimming LED) whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range is mounted and an LED (non-dimming LED) which emits light at a constant brightness because the brightness cannot be adjusted. A circuit board to be mounted is provided. Then, when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED, it is possible to adjust the brightness using the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED as an index.

Specifically, the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back upper rear. Decorative substrate 3452, back rear left decorative substrate 3522, back rear right decorative substrate 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, Back and rear movable decorative board 3110, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. Is equipped with a dimming LED, and is provided with a central button decorative board 376 and an outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and an effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. A non-dimming LED is mounted on a substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, a functional display substrate provided on the functional display unit 1400, and the like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the circuit board on which the non-dimming LED is mounted is provided in the upper left portion and the upper right portion of the game board 5, and is provided below the game board 5 in the front frame 3. In other words, non-dimming LEDs are provided in each of the areas arbitrarily divided into the upper area and the lower area of the game board 5. Therefore, when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED, the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED provided in the area to which the dimming LED belongs, that is, the non-dimming LED arranged in the vicinity of the dimming LED is used as an index. The brightness can be adjusted as. The non-dimming LED mounted on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the function display substrate provided on the function display unit 1400, and the like are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. However, at least one non-dimming LED out of a predetermined number of mounted non-dimming LEDs is turned on. Therefore, it can be reliably used as an index when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED.

In FIG. 263 (A), the LED attributes such as the LED part number and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (furthermore, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), etc.). The display of the notation part indicating (may include the model of the LED) is omitted. Further, the notation portion may be formed in a light color (yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) different from the white color of the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface), or the notation portion may be formed by removing the foil. Is formed, or a color different from the white color of the insulating film (not limited to light color) or foil removal is used on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) without forming a notation portion on the LED mounting surface. A portion may be formed. Further, the notation unit may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, "LED1" or the like is formed for one LED), or is grouped for each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, for each type). (For example, "LED1 to LED5" and the like are formed for a plurality of LEDs). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of the light emitted from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. In addition, it is possible to suppress the loss of light emission due to the non-dimming LED and realize efficient light emission.

Further, the LED mounting surface (surface) of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. ), The back front left decorative board 3714, the back upper front decorative board 3422, the back front right decorative board 3814, the back lower right decorative board 3253, the back lower left decorative board 3203, the back upper back decorative board 3114, and the back upper back decoration. Substrate 3452, back rear left decorative substrate 3522, back rear right decorative substrate 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back LEDs such as the rear movable decorative body 3110, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. A white insulating film (resist) is formed as well as the mounting surface (surface). In this way, it is mounted on the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330, and has brightness. Since the non-dimming LED, which is an index of adjustment, is controlled to emit light under the same conditions as the dimming LED (mounted on the same or very similar white insulating film (resist)), it is compared with the non-dimming LED. The difference between the brightness of the dimming LED and the brightness of the dimming LED after adjusting the brightness becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, the LED mounting surface (surface) of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. ), Back front left decorative board 3714, back upper front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative board 3814, back lower right decorative board 3253, back lower left decorative board 3203, back upper back decorative board 3114, back upper back decorative board 3452 , Back back left decorative board 3522, back back right decorative board 3622, back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top back rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable LED mounting surfaces such as decorative body 3110, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. By forming a white insulating film (resist) on the (surface), the decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of these circuit boards is suppressed, and the light emitted from the dimming LED or non-dimming LED. Since the brightness of the light can be increased, it is possible to suppress the loss of light emission by the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED and realize efficient light emission.

A circuit board on which a non-dimming LED is mounted to have the same function as the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400, and a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). In this case, the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED mounted on the circuit board provided in the specific display instead of the dot matrix display 7000 or the function display unit 1400 may be provided. May be used as an index.

In addition, a specific substrate is provided on which both an LED whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range (dimming LED) and an LED whose brightness cannot be adjusted and emits light at a constant brightness (non-dimming LED) are mounted. It may be. For example, as shown in FIG. 263, a non-dimming LED having a function as the specific display and a back front left decorative substrate 3714, a back upper front decorative substrate 3422, a back front right decorative substrate 3814, and a back lower right decorative substrate 3253. , Back bottom left decorative board 3203, back back decorative board 3114, back top rear decorative board 3452, back back left decorative board 3522, back back right decorative board 3622, back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top back rotating decoration 3440 , Back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame Similar to the top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457, both the dimming LED that controls light emission in relation to the game effect may be mounted on one circuit board.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263 (A), a side view composed of a full-color LED in which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) and the brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range. Both the type dimming LED 1820 and the top view type non-dimming LED 1830 consisting of a full-color LED that emits light at a constant brightness because the brightness cannot be adjusted are on the same surface on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed. The specific substrate 1800 mounted on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) may be provided on one or both of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. Further, in the specific substrate 1800, mounting holes 1810 for mounting are formed at the four corners of the specific substrate 1800, and a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed.

Further, in the specific substrate 1800 of this example, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the dimming LED group composed of the plurality of dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are composed of the plurality of non-dimming LEDs 1830. The dimming LED group is arranged at a predetermined interval. Further, the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group are more than the distance to the adjacent dimming LED 1820 in the dimming LED group and the distance to the adjacent non-dimming LED in the non-dimming LED group. They are arranged so that they are separated from each other. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to distinguish between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it becomes easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

Further, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 employ packages of the same or very similar colors, and each package is made of white resin. In this way, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are packaged in the same or very similar colors, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light under the same conditions, and the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light. By comparing the brightness with the dimming LED, the difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Further, in the above example, a side view type LED is used as the dimming LED 1820, while a top view type LED is used as the non-dimming LED 1830, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same type LED (top view type or Side view type) may be used. In this case, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light under the same conditions, the brightness and non-brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment is made by comparing the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. The difference from the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Further, the types of packages of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be the same, and in this case, it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

In the above example, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is used as the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package may be directly mounted on the specific substrate 1800. In this case as well, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light under the same conditions, the brightness and non-brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment is made by comparing the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. The difference from the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (B), the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 have different decorations in front of the specific substrate 1800. In this example, the word "chance" is formed by a translucent lens in front of the area where the dimming LED 1820 of the specific substrate 1800 is mounted, and the other part is specified by the opaque first decorative portion 1850. In front of the area where the non-dimming LED 1830 of the substrate 1800 is mounted, a partition member 1860 that partitions each of the non-dimming LEDs 1830 and penetrates so as to make individual light emission visible is provided, and the partition member 1860 is provided. A translucent cover body 1870 is provided at the front.

As described above, in this example, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the specific substrate 1800 which is the same circuit board, but the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are different for each decoration. And are separated by decoration. Further, since the partition member 1860 which is not provided in the dimming LED 1820 is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830, it becomes easy to understand that the non-dimming LED 1830 has a function different from that of the dimming LED 1820.

Further, in this example, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the same substrate, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are arranged at a relatively short distance while being arranged at regular intervals. Therefore, it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

In this example, a partition member is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830 so that the light emission of each of the plurality of non-dimming LEDs 1830 can be visually recognized. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 mounted on the specific board 1800 are controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Further, as with the dot matrix display 7000 described above, the non-dimming LED 1830 is also controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and the special lottery result (No. 1) is obtained when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. (1) Special lottery result, 2nd special lottery result) may be lit and displayed in a light emitting mode. As a result, the non-dimming LED 1830, which is attracting attention from the player by being lit and displayed in a light emitting mode according to the special lottery result, can be used as an index for adjusting the brightness, and when the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 is adjusted. By facilitating the image of the adjusted brightness, it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, on the specific substrate 1800 on which the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted, a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group. In this through hole 1840, the light emitted from the LED is not reflected but leaks to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) side of the specific substrate 1800, so that the reflection and interference of the light are suppressed. Since a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group in this way, the light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is reflected or interferes. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can each have a brightness corresponding to the individual light emission, and the dimming LED 1820 can be set by using the brightness corresponding only to the light emission of the non-dimming LED 1830 as an index. Since the brightness can be adjusted, the accuracy of the comparison is improved, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, in this example, through holes 1840 are formed so as to have an outer diameter smaller than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 (one through hole 1840 is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800. Since the ratio (area) ≤ the ratio (area) occupied by one dimming LED 1820 or one non-dimming LED 1830, the light of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is unnecessarily taken from the through hole 1840 to the back surface of the specific substrate 1800. It is possible to prevent leakage to (LED non-mounting surface). Further, the number of through holes 1840 formed between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is larger than the number of dimming LEDs 1820 and the number of non-dimming LEDs 1830 mounted on the side of the through holes 1840. There are many. As described above, in this example, the through hole 1840 is formed with an outer diameter smaller than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and the number and non-dimming LEDs 1820 mounted on the side of the through hole 1840 are also formed. Since more through holes 1840 are formed than the number of LEDs 1830, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are used more than necessary while suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. It is possible to prevent the brightness of the non-dimming LED 1830 from being lowered.

It should be noted that a hole different from the through hole 1840, for example, a positioning hole of the specific substrate 1800, the above-mentioned mounting hole 1810, or the like may be formed between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. Further, the hole portion may be formed with an outer diameter larger than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. In this case, the dimming LED 1820 or the non-dimming LED 1830 mounted on the side of the hole portion may be formed. A small number of holes may be formed. As a result, the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is not lowered more than necessary while suppressing the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. be able to.

Further, a three-dimensional object (electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness) that separates a part or all of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is provided on the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the specific substrate 1800. As a result, the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be suppressed. For example, as shown in FIG. 263 (C), a resistor 1880 may be mounted between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the specific substrate 1800. Further, the resistor 1880 has a predetermined thickness, and is mounted so as to project from the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the specific substrate 1800. In this way, the resistor 1880 is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and projects from the LED mounting surface (front surface, surface) of the specific substrate 1800 so that the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are one. Since the part or the whole is separated, it is possible to suppress the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

Further, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, a dark-colored (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) three-dimensional object (some dark colors). It may be provided with different portions (for example, those having a metallic color such as silver, a transparent portion, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 263 (C), a resistor 1880 having a black appearance may be mounted on the specific substrate 1800. As described above, by mounting the resistor 1880 having a dark appearance with low reflection efficiency between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the reflection of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is performed. And the effect of suppressing interference can be further enhanced. Further, when a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure having a black appearance having the lowest reflection efficiency as a dark color is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are provided. The effect of suppressing the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the above can be maximized.

Further, although an example in which a resistor 1880 is mounted as an electronic component is illustrated, the same effect as described above can be obtained if the electronic component is mounted on a circuit board such as a capacitor, a diode, an IC, or an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit). It is possible to play. Further, the number and mode of arrangement of three-dimensional objects such as these electronic parts and structures are not limited to those described above, and for example, a plurality of three-dimensional objects are arranged between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 at predetermined intervals. Or, a three-dimensional object having an outer diameter larger than that of the dimming LED 1820 or the non-dimming LED 1830 (ratio (area) occupied by one three-dimensional object on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800 ≥ one dimming LED 1820 or 1 One or a plurality of non-dimming LEDs 1830 may be arranged in proportion (area).

Further, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the dimming LED 1820 or the non-dimming LED 1830 is seen from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) rather than the LED package. An object having a large amount of protrusion (the height from the LED mounting surface to the outermost surface of the three-dimensional object is high) may be arranged, and by configuring in this way, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be arranged. The effect of suppressing the reflection and interference of the irradiated light can be further enhanced.

Further, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be distinguished from each other by making the color and shape of the package of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 different from each other. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are distinguished by different arrangement forms with the dimming LED 1830 group (arranged in one vertical row as shown in FIG. 263 (B), arranged in two diagonal rows, etc.). It may be possible.

According to the above embodiment, the lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the light emitting as the game progresses. Multiple light emitting means (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back) LEDs provided on the upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc., and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least in this example). Door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 LEDs, and plate upper left decorative board 273, the LED provided on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included), the dot matrix display 7000, the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600, etc.) and the player. A gaming machine including a brightness adjusting means capable of adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means according to the operation of the operating means (rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operating unit 301), and the first of the plurality of light emitting means. 1 Light emitting means (light emitting decorative body (light emitting decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back upper front) LEDs provided on the rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc., and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least the door frame in this example). Left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and LED provided on door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. The LEDs provided on the 273, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included.)) The light emission is controlled with the brightness adjusted according to the operation of the operating means, and a plurality of light emission is performed. Among the means, the second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc.) is characterized in that light emission is controlled with a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means. As described above, since the brightness of the second light emitting means is constant, it can be used as a reference when confirming the brightness of the first light emitting means.

Further, the second light emitting means may be arranged at a position separated from the first light emitting means by a predetermined distance. By arranging the second light emitting means whose light emission is controlled at a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means at a position separated from the first light emitting means by a predetermined distance, the light emitted from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Since the interference of the light emitted from the light emitting means is suppressed and the individual lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be visually recognized separately, the brightness comparison becomes easy.

Through holes (through holes 1840) may be formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Since a through hole is formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, the reflection efficiency of the substrate surface between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be reduced, and light interference can be achieved. Is suppressed, and the brightness of the first light emitting means and the brightness of the second light emitting means can be easily compared.

The second light emitting means is partitioned by a decoration different from that of the first light emitting means (in this example, the word "chance" is displayed by a translucent lens in front of the area where the dimming LED 1820 of the specific substrate 1800 is mounted. Each of the non-dimming LEDs 1830 is partitioned in front of the area where the non-dimming LED 1830 of the specific substrate 1800 is mounted, and each of the non-dimming LEDs 1830 is visually recognized. A partition member 1860 that penetrates is provided so as to be possible, and a translucent cover body 1870 is provided in front of the partition member.) Since the second light emitting means is partitioned by a decoration different from that of the first light emitting means, the reference second light emitting means can be easily specified by controlling the light emitting property with a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means. Will be able to.

The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be mounted on the same light emitting substrate. Since the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted on the same light emitting substrate, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be provided at relatively close positions, and the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be provided. It becomes easy to compare with the brightness of the light emitting means.

A white coating film may be formed on the surface of the light emitting substrate on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted. Since a white coating film is formed on the surface on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light emitting substrate can be improved, and the light emitted by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be increased. Efficient light emission can be realized by suppressing loss.

[Details of main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 264 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 that can set the game performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. It includes a non-conductive resin main control board box 1320 that is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left-right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Of the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, the area is formed and arranged so as to occupy about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining one-fifth area. Therefore, the square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the area of the corner where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 rotates coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side when viewed from the front, the hinge portion 310 on the main body frame and the hinge portion 320 on the lower main body frame of the main body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, whereas the shaft support side of the main body frame 4 ( The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, as described above, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 so as to open and close covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is a thing. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 around the axis extending vertically, and the left side in the front view is paid out. Since it is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600, the right side of the front view becomes the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side of the front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is open. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green color is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resist except for various land patterns. However, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly painted with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, it will be described that a color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, and other staff members say that the main control board 1310 is a board that controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game and the payout of the game ball B) and is of high importance in crime prevention. Awareness of is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to distinguish the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 from other boards and call attention to it. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is a high substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to call attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 to distinguish it from other boards.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, green color, which is generally used as the resist of the substrate, is adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, and white color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 becomes more prominent than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important for crime prevention in addition to the main control board 1310. It can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished from each other. If possible, it may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, the setting change board 1311 is used. It may be printed as silk printing in white so as to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and / or the back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow, and red. You may print it.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a non-conductive resin cover body and a non-conductive resin base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not they have been tampered with). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of heat-dissipating ventilation holes capable of releasing the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first major winning opening sensor 2402, and a second major winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). It may be electrically connected via (electrical wiring). The force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a is absorbed (softened) by the harness (electrical wiring) from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Can be difficult to convey to). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The connector connection, which is a connection between boards, includes a connection using a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism and a connection using a special connector provided with a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. When the socket is fitted with the plug, The structure is such that there is no amount of movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in, and the socket fits with the plug. When fitting, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed in (for example, in the vertical direction). It has a structure. In the present embodiment, a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism is used as the connector connection that is a connection between the boards, but a special connector having a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with a distance dimension of one side having about one-fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. It is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side, and its lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction along the left side of the setting change board 1311, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310. It is located on the right side of the setting change board 1311 at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key at a center point where the center lines of the square-shaped setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions intersect is arranged. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN is arranged. A setting indicator 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. A special monitor 1310h is arranged below, from the center to the right side, in which six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) are arranged in a row.

The setting display 1310g can display the set value of the pachinko machine 1, while the special monitor 1310h can display the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. However, even if only the special monitor 1310h is provided, the function of displaying the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and the function of displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered can be combined. Good. In such a case, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the setting value can be changed (change permission state) or a confirmation display of the setting value is performed (confirmation display state) on the special monitor 1310h. While the set value of is displayed, the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed in the state excluding the change permission state and the confirmation display state. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). Position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion port and the metal setting key can be pulled out from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port in the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so as not to damage it.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, and the setting key ON signal is the setting change board 1311. Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Procedure for changing the setting value, procedure for confirming and displaying the setting value]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, and the setting display 1310 g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the setting value of the setting value will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, etc., so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is compared with the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. Work to open the main body frame 4, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by. Subsequently, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, the detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Will be done. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU1310a increases by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch. When the maximum value of the set value 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial value of 1, the value is increased by 1, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value sets the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Set to turn off Turn the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position of the key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the set value from the state of displaying the set value on the setting display 1310 g. Switch to the state and switch from the state where the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned on to the state where it is turned off.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the set value. Complete the work of changing the settings of.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is not operated. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then outside. The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2 is performed, and then a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is displayed. Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, this pressing operation is supported. Therefore, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The OFF operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value is the work of extracting the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. To complete the work of confirming and displaying the currently set value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the outer frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko as described above. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON, so that the setting key is turned ON and the RAM clear switch is pressed. It is necessary that the part is not operated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is directed clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (power outage). While the requirement is that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is restored when the power is restored after a momentary power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), a predetermined set value display permission is permitted. The condition is that "the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs)". It differs in that.

Here, briefly explaining the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and usually from the time of probability change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, a jackpot symbol. The jackpot symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that defines the percentage of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the percentage of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[Initial operation of the movable body when the power is turned on]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses various commands for controlling the game effect and the state of the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined timing, and stores a predetermined storage area (commands) of the main control built-in RAM. By setting it in the exclusive area (command buffer) to be used and sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can also send information on the control of the game effect and the state of the pachinko machine 1. Can be grasped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, various movable bodies are provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Of these, as a movable body (main control board side movable body) whose operation itself is directly linked to giving benefits to the player, for example, the second starting port door 2414 (starting port solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting port 2004. , 1st prize opening door 2417 (1st attacker solenoid 2418) for opening and closing the 1st prize opening 2005, 2nd prize opening door 2611 (2nd attacker solenoid) for opening and closing the 2nd prize opening 2006 Regarding 261), it is assumed that the operation is performed by the drive signal output from the main control board 1310. On the other hand, although the operation itself does not directly lead to the benefit to the player, as a movable body (peripheral control board side movable body) that operates during various effects during the game, for example, the effect operation unit 301, the back-up and rear rotation decoration Decorative bodies such as the body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are assumed to operate by the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510. As for such a movable body, each of the movable body operated by the main control board 1310 (main control board side movable body) and the movable body operated by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control board side movable body) , When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to perform an initial operation for confirming whether or not the pachinko machine 1 operates normally.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body (main control board side movable body) operated by the main control board 1310 is performed only when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 265, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the main control MPU starts the processing when the main control side is turned on. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processes of steps S10 to S22 of the main control side power-on process described above are executed. In the wait time waiting process in step S24, a waiting time (boot timer) for waiting until the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1 is turned on, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is set to the timing t3. In step S37, the setting change process is performed, and the state shifts to a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state). In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the set value (set value 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch that operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position. By turning OFF, the state shifts to a state in which it is impossible to change the setting value (unchangeable state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs step S38, excluding a specific area (the above-mentioned setting value dedicated area and out ball counting dedicated area) from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. After that, steps S40 to S52 are performed to perform various initial settings (timing t4 is the time when various initial settings are completed).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t1 is turned on, the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch without turning on the setting key switch 1311a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. Does not shift to a state (change permission state) in which the setting change processing of the step S37 is not performed at the timing t3 and the setting value setting can be changed. However, since the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU performs step S38 during the period from timing t3 to t4 to specify a specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM. Clear except for (the above-mentioned area dedicated to the set value and the area dedicated to counting out balls), and then steps S40 to S52 are performed to perform various initial settings.

After completing various initial settings at the timing t4, among the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5, the movable body (main control board side movable body) that operates by the drive signal output from the main control board 1310. Start the initial operation. Specifically, as the main control board side movable body, the second start opening door 2414 (starting port solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, and the first large winning opening 2005 for opening and closing. The initial operation of the winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) and the second major winning opening door 2611 (second attacker solenoid 261) for opening and closing the second major winning opening 2006 is started. Each of these main control board side movable bodies is a member capable of opening and closing, and in the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, the second starting door 2414, the first winning door 2417, and the second Each of the grand prize entrance doors 2611 performs a special operation different from the operation that appears in the normal game progress process. Such an operation ends when the timing t5 arrives. (The timing t5 is the time when the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed).

When the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at the timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at the timing t5, the state shifts to a state (variable state) in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed. That is, when the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 at the timing t6 after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at the timing t5, the variation display of the special symbol is started and the variation display is started. A variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value can be changed during the period from timing t3 to t4 (change permission state). Regardless of whether or not this is done, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed during the period from timing t4 to t5. As a result, in the inspection at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control board side movable body operates, so that the main control board side movable body operates normally. It is possible to visually confirm whether or not to do so, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1.

During the period from timing t4 to t5, as the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, a special operation different from the operation appearing in the normal game progress process is performed. Specifically, the second start door The initial operation of 2414, the initial operation of the first prize-winning door 2417, and the initial operation of the second prize-winning door 2611 are performed in this order (details of each initial operation will be described later). In this way, in the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, by sequentially operating each movable body, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not it operates normally, and it is difficult to overlook a defect, so that the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to improve the accuracy of inspection during manufacturing. If it is important to shorten the inspection time during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side may be operated in parallel at the same time. In such a case, the inspection of the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side can be completed early, and the game can be started early (it is possible to display the variation of the special symbol). State (variable state)). Further, when the initial operations of the main control board side movable bodies are operated in parallel at the same time, the main control board side movable bodies are moved within a specific area of the game area 5a (for example, the center accessory 2500). It is preferable to arrange them collectively in the area on the right side of the above. As a result, even when the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side are operated in parallel at the same time, it is easy to confirm whether or not they operate normally, and it is difficult to overlook a defect. It is possible to improve the accuracy of inspection at the time of manufacturing the machine 1.

Here, a specific mode of the initial operation of the main control board side movable body performed during the period from timing t4 to t5 will be described. During the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the second starting door 2414, the initial operation of the first winning door 2417, and the initial operation of the second winning door 2611 are performed by individual drive sources. The initial operation of each is an opening / closing operation in which a short opening of 1 second or less and a long opening of 3 seconds or more are performed. That is, each of the initial operation of the second starting door 2414, the initial operation of the first winning door 2417, and the initial operation of the second winning door 2611 is first opened for 0.5 seconds, and then opened. A combination operation for the initial operation is set, in which the door is closed for 1 second and then opened for 3 seconds. Such a combination operation for the initial operation (an operation of opening for 3 seconds after opening for 0.5 seconds) is an operation that does not appear when the movable body on the main control board side operates during the game progress process. Yes, this makes it clear that the operation is not due to returning to the game before the power failure (short-time game or big hit game), and it is possible to prevent misidentification during inspection work. Regarding the individual movements of short opening and long opening, it is checked whether normal operation can be performed if the movements that can appear when the main control board side movable body operates during the game progress process are set. It is suitable because it can improve the accuracy of.

In addition, with respect to the initial operation of the second starting door 2414, the initial operation of the first winning door 2417, and the initial operation of the second winning door 2611, it is possible to detect whether or not each initial operation is normally performed. It may be. In each initial operation, after operating from the initial position (closed state) to the operating position (open position), an operation for returning from the operating position to the initial position is performed. For example, the second starting door 2414 and the first large An initial position detection sensor is provided for each of the winning door 2417 and the second large winning door 2621, and when an abnormality in which the movable body does not return to the initial position is detected, the subsequent operation of the movable body is performed. It may be maintained in a state where the game cannot proceed without performing the above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outflow of defective products and the loss of holes.

Further, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is performed, but the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the first big prize opening 2005, and the second big prize Even if the game ball B enters the ball entry port such as the port 2006, it is treated as invalid, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at the timing t5, such a ball entry port is used. The game ball B that has entered the ball is treated as valid. Specifically, in the period from timing t4 to t5, "detection corresponding to each of the entry ports such as the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006". "A mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection itself by the sensor is not performed", "A mode in which the detection sensor performs detection but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310" , "Detection is performed by the detection sensor, and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, but based on the detection signal, no detection signal or command is sent to other boards such as the payout control board 633. "Aspects that do not output", etc. Further, after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at the timing t5, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the detection signal is paid out. It is an embodiment in which a detection signal or a command can be output to another board such as a control board 633.

In addition to the above, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the game ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the game ball from the payout device 580. It is possible for B to pay out. Further, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable state (non-variable state), and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the special symbol is displayed. The state shifts to a state in which variable display can be performed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B is illegally inserted when the entrance is opened during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the payout device 580 does not display the fluctuation. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being paid out and illegally obtaining profits.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the special monitor 1310h monitors the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and displays the calculation result. With respect to such a special monitor 1310h, when the game ball B enters the ball entry port during the period from timing t4 to t5, the ball enters regardless of whether or not the detection sensor corresponding to each of the game balls B is detected. It is controlled so that it is not added to the number or the number of payouts and is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. Then, after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at the timing t5, when the game ball B enters the ball entry port, the detection sensor corresponding to each is detected, and the number of balls entered and the payout are performed. It is controlled so that it is added to the number and reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, even if the game ball B is illegally inserted when the entry port is opened during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, it is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. The reliability of information can be improved. For a few seconds after the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1 is turned on, the 7-segment display for displaying information on the special monitor 1310h is controlled to be fully lit. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 normally displays and operates when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

Further, during the period from timing t4 to t5, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being launched from the ball launching device 540, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, although the entry port is opened during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, the game ball B is not launched in the first place. Therefore, the game ball B is launched and entered when the entry port is opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent profits from being obtained.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. During the period from timing t4 to t5, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and the detection is continued even after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5. There is. As a result, when the game ball B is illegally inserted when the entrance is opened by using a magnet or applying vibration during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, illegal magnetism or Unauthorized vibration can be detected, and fraudulent acts can be prevented.

Next, the control on the peripheral control board 1510 side will be described. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the peripheral control MPU starts the processing when the power of the peripheral control unit is turned on. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processes of steps S1000 and S1002 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above are executed. In the initial setting process of step S1000, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and various control information (peripheral data) are transferred. Processing or the like is performed (timing t2 is the time when the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed).

The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initial setting process of step S1000 before the timing t3, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, and at the time of timing t2. After that, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. However, the completion of the initial setting process in step S1000 is before the timing t3, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, but it is the time when the main control MPU completes various initial settings. It may be before the timing t4.

The standby screen 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the period from when the initial setting is completed at the timing t2 until the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5. On the standby screen 1, for example, the message "Recovering" is displayed to notify that the game cannot be started. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5, the effect display device 1600 displays the standby screen 2 based on the power-on command. On the standby screen 2, for example, by displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol "123", it is notified that the state is waiting for the start of the symbol variation. After that, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at the timing t6, the effect display device 1600 starts the variation display (variation effect) of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern command.

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power-on command at the timing t5, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the movable body operates by the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation of the body (movable body on the peripheral control board side) has started. Specifically, as the peripheral control board side movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, etc. The initial operation of the movable body of is started. Each of these peripheral control board side movable bodies is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operating position, and in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, each movable body is set to the initial position (evacuation). It is decided to confirm whether it operates normally from the position) to the operation position (appearance position), and to perform accurate positioning so that the movable body stands by at the initial position. Then, after the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed, it is possible to perform an effect using the movable body. For example, when a fluctuation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set is transmitted as a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined value during the symbol fluctuation is transmitted. At the timing of, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position. However, if the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is not completed at the timing when the movable body is operated based on the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation is prioritized and the movable body is controlled so as not to operate. ing.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5, the movable body on the peripheral control board side that is not in the initial position is first returned to the initial position and then returned to the initial position. The initial operation is started.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5 after completing the initial setting at the timing t2, but after completing the initial setting at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command at the timing t5. When the peripheral control board 1510 has not received the power-on command for a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 minutes), the predetermined time has elapsed even though the power-on command has not been received. At that time, the display of the standby screen 1 in the effect display device 1600 shifts to the display of the standby screen 2. Further, when a predetermined time elapses, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started. This is because, of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, when only the power supply on the peripheral control board 1510 side is not supplied and then the power supply on the peripheral control board 1510 side is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 The power-on command is not received, and even in such a case, when the power supply on the peripheral control board 1510 side is restored, the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern command can be started. Because.

Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the set value is set in the period from timing t3 to t4. It shifts to the state where it is possible to change the setting (change permission state), but when the change permission state starts, the setting change start command that tells that it is the start of the change permission state is issued from the main control board 1310. It is transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command at the start of setting change, the effect display device 1600 can notify that the change is permitted by displaying, for example, a message "setting is being changed". It will be possible. However, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started not when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command at the start of setting change, but when the command at power-on is received at the timing t5 thereafter. There is.

As described above, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the main control board side movable body is initially operated during the period from timing t4 to t5, whereas the peripheral control board is used. The initial operation of the side movable body is performed after the timing t5. That is, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed. By sequentially performing the initial operation on the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body in this way, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 1 operates normally, and the pachinko machine 1 is inspected at the time of manufacture. Can be facilitated.

In the above, when the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at the timing t5, the main control MPU sends a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510, but at the timing t4, the main control board When the initial setting on the 1310 side is completed, the power-on command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In such a case, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t4. That is, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body is started at the same time. As a result, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side can be completed at an early timing, and the movable body can be quickly shifted to a state in which the movable body can be operated based on the fluctuation pattern command.

Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Here, only the part different from the case where the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 266, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the main control MPU starts the process of turning on the power of the main control side. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processes of steps S10 to S22 of the main control side power-on process described above are executed. In the wait time waiting process in step S24, a waiting time (boot timer) for waiting until the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1 is turned on, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU is set to the timing. Steps S29 to S36 are performed in t3 to check the main control built-in RAM, and then the set value confirmation display process in step S28 is performed to shift to a state in which the set value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state). .. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position. By turning OFF, the state shifts to a state in which the confirmation display of the set value is not performed (unconfirmable state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various initial settings (the time when various initial settings are completed is set as timing t5).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t1 is turned on, the power switch 630a is operated without turning on the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the set value confirmation display process in step S28 is not performed at the timing t3, and the state (confirmation display state) in which the set value confirmation display is performed is not performed. During the period of timings t3 to t5, the main control MPU performs steps S29 to S36 to check the main control built-in RAM, and then performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various initial settings.

When the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t1 is turned on, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is not performed after various initial settings are completed at the timing t5. When the various initial settings are completed at the timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, after completing various initial settings at the timing t5, the state shifts to a state (variable state) in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed. That is, when the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 at the timing t6 after completing various initial settings at the timing t5, the variation display of the special symbol is started and the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed. Send a variation pattern command to.

As described above, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value can be changed during the period from timing t3 to t4 (change permission state). Regardless of whether or not this is done, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed during the period from timing t4 to t5. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the timings t4 to t5 are set regardless of whether or not the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state). The period of is not provided, and the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is not performed. That is, whether or not the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is performed depends on whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. As a result, for example, in the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 after it is installed on the game island, if it is desired to confirm whether or not the movable body on the main control board side operates normally, the RAM clear switch is switched when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The operator can select whether or not to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, and the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated.

Regarding the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side, the peripheral control board 1510 received the power-on command at timing t5 regardless of whether the RAM clear switch was operated when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on. It is supposed to start at that point.

Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power switch 630a is operated without operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the setting is made in the period from timing t3 to t5. The state shifts to a state in which the value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), but when the confirmation display state starts, a confirmation display start command is issued to the main control board 1310 to inform that it is the start of the confirmation display state. Is transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, the effect display device 1600 notifies that it is in the confirmation display state by displaying, for example, a message "setting value confirmation display in progress". It becomes possible. However, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started not when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, but when the power-on command is received at the timing t5 thereafter. There is.

In the above, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, but the timing is before the power-on command is received. That is, it may be started when the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2. An example of such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 268. FIG. 267 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 268 is a time chart showing the RAM clear switch when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when is not operated. Here, only the parts different from those in FIGS. 265 and 266 will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, in this modification, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started when the initial setting of the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2. That is, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started early without waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to receive the power-on command at the timing t5. As a result, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side can be completed at an early timing, and the movable body can be quickly shifted to a state in which the movable body can be operated based on the fluctuation pattern command.

[Regarding the specific operation of the movable body in the predetermined number of symbol changes after changing the settings]
In the present embodiment, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation display of the symbol for a predetermined number of times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in this embodiment, the first time). At the start of the symbol variation display and the 100th symbol variation display), a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting of the set value has been changed is executed. In this suggestion effect, a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. If the set value setting has not been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect is executed at the start of the predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. There is no such thing, and the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is not subjected to a specific operation.

First, a case where a specific operation of a movable body is performed in the first change display of a symbol after a setting change of a set value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 269 is a time chart showing the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the first change display of the symbol after the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the following, first, a case where the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has already been completed at the time of starting the first variation display of the symbol will be described.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by moving the setting key switch 1311a and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU Performs the setting change process in step S37 at the timing t3, and shifts to a state (change permission state) in which the setting of the set value can be changed. In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the set value (set value 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch that operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position. By turning OFF, the state shifts to a state in which it is impossible to change the setting value (unchangeable state). Then, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side and initial operations of the main control board side movable body, and supplies power to the peripheral control board 1510. Send a command on input.

As shown in FIG. 269 (A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and the setting value setting is changed. In this case, at the time when the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the setting change completion command indicating that the setting value setting has been changed is also transmitted. As a result, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, it is possible to grasp that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on.

After transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the main control MPU shifts to a state (variable state) capable of displaying the variation of the special symbol. That is, when the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 at the timing t6 after the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the variation display of the special symbol is started. At the same time, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at the timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the variation display (variation effect) of the first decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern command. ing.

After the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the first variation display of the decorative symbol is started at timing t6, it is specified for the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. I am trying to do the operation. Specifically, as a movable body mounted on the main body frame 4, a specific operation is performed on the effect operation unit 301, and in addition, as a movable body mounted on the game board 5, the back-up rear decorative body 3451 I am trying to perform a specific operation for. The effect operation unit 301 is a member capable of operating the button between the initial position (evacuation position) and the operation position (protruding position), and the button moves to the operation position in a specific operation with respect to the effect operation unit 301. After that, the operation of returning to the initial position is performed. Further, the back-up rear decoration body 3451 is a member capable of the back-up rear decoration body 3451 operating between an initial position (evacuation position) and an operation position (appearance position), and is a back-up rear decoration body. In the specific operation for the 3451, the back-up rear decorative body 3451 moves to the operation position and then returns to the initial position.

On the other hand, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the confirmation display of the set value is displayed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When only the control built-in RAM is cleared, or when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (setting value setting change, setting value confirmation display, and main control built-in RAM are cleared). (If not), no specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variation display of the decorative symbol.

As described above, if the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variation display of the decorative symbol. A specific action is performed on the moving body. For example, since the hall manager performs the setting change of the set value before the opening of the hall, the player knows whether or not the setting value of the set value has been changed after the opening of the hall before the game. Can't. However, by starting the game and starting the first variable display of the decorative symbol, whether or not a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, that is, the setting value is set. The player can know if any changes have been made. As a result, when the hall is opened, the game can be actively started in order to know whether or not the setting of the set value has been changed.

Further, regarding the specific operation for the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change display of the decorative pattern for the first time is displayed. It is performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times, including the start time. For example, in addition to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol for the first time, it is also performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol for the specified number of times every 100 times. As a result, even if the game is not immediately after the opening of the hall, it is possible to know whether or not the setting of the set value has been changed, and the game can be actively started.

Here, the fluctuation pattern is set to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and the effect content to be executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the fluctuation time. For example, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation effect is transmitted. As a part of the above, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbol. However, all the fluctuation patterns are set so that the movable body does not move for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. That is, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the movement of the movable body based on the variable pattern is restricted. When the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the movable pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol for a predetermined number of times. The specific movement for the body is not based on the fluctuation pattern, but is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Does this suggest that the setting value was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on when a specific operation was performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5? , It is possible to recognize whether the degree of expectation is suggested as a part of the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern.

Further, when performing a specific operation on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, the operation time of the specific operation is shorter than the operation time of the movable body based on the fluctuation pattern. It is set to be. As a result, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the movement of the movable body based on the variable pattern is restricted, but the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. By shortening the operation time of the specific operation at the start of, the limited time can be shortened.

In this example, after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times. The specific motion is uniformly performed on the movable body, but as a modification, either the specific motion A that suggests the set value or the specific motion B that does not suggest the set value is executed. It may be. Specifically, at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol at the predetermined number of times, the peripheral control MPU acquires the predetermined random number value X and the random number value Y, and determines whether or not to execute the specific operation A (execution lottery). Is performed based on the acquired random number value X, and the specific operation A or the specific operation B is executed based on the result of the execution determination. Further, when determining the specific operation A, one of the specific operation A1 suggesting the low setting value, the specific operation A2 suggesting the high setting value, and the specific operation A3 suggesting the setting value 6 is currently set. It is determined according to the set value and the random number value Y. Here, when the currently set set value is the set value 1 to 3, the probability that the specific action A1 suggesting a low set value is higher than that of the specific action A2 (specific action A1: specific action A2 = 7: The effect is determined according to the value of the random number Y with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (ratio of 3). Further, when the set values are 4 to 5, the specific operation A2 suggesting a high set value is determined with a higher probability than the specific operation A1 (specific operation A1: specific operation A2 = 3: 7 ratio). The effect is determined according to the value of the random number Y with reference to the effect distribution table 1. Further, when the set value is 6, the specific actions A1 to A3 are set to a predetermined probability (specific action A1) including the specific action A3 which suggests the set value 6 which is not determined when the set value is 1 to 5. : Specific operation A2: Specific operation A3 = 1: 5: 4) The effect determination is made according to the value of the random number value Y with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 2. That is, since the specific operations A1 and A2 may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting cannot be determined by one execution, but the specific operation When A3 is output, it is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the specific operation A is executed, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the specific operation A.

Further, in this example, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are displayed at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol for the predetermined number of times thereafter. Although it is prevented from operating on the mounted movable body, it may be a non-specific operation different from the specific operation as long as it does not perform a specific operation. As non-specific movements for the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, the effect operation unit 301 moves slightly from the initial position (moves to the extent that it does not move to the movement position), or after backing up. The decorative body 3451 may move slightly from the initial position (move to the extent that it does not move to the operating position). In this way, even if a non-specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. , The difference from the specific operation is clear, and it can be clearly grasped that the setting of the set value has not been changed.

Further, in this example, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main body frame 4 and the game board are used at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol at a predetermined number of times. Although a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the 5, the suggestion effect may be performed by displaying a specific image using the effect display device 1600, or may be specified from the speaker. It may be performed by the output of sound.

Regarding the above description of FIG. 269 (A), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side is already at the time when the first symbol variation display is started at the timing t6. Since the initial operation of the movable body is completed, it is possible to perform a specific operation on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variation display of the symbol. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269 (B), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side is movable at the time when the first symbol variation display is started at the timing t6. If the initial movement of the body is not completed, the specific movement cannot be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variation display of the symbol. In such a case, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is started at the start of the variable display of the symbol, which is started after the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed. I am trying to perform a specific operation. For example, at the time when the first symbol variation display is started at the timing t6, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is not completed, but when the second symbol variation display is started, the peripheral control board side. When the initial operation of the movable body is completed, a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the second change display of the symbol. ing. As a result, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, the specific operation can be reliably performed, and the information obtained from the specific operation can be prevented from being overlooked. it can.

Further, with respect to the above description of FIG. 269 (A), when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5 after the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Although the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is performed, the case where the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is normally completed is described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269 (C), when an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position occurs in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, the initial symbol changes. At the start of the variable display of the symbol for a predetermined number of times, including the start of the display, no specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. However, in this example, as a movable body that performs a specific operation, there are an effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and a back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and an abnormality occurs. If one of the movable bodies is one of them, the specific action is not performed on the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred, whereas the specific action is performed on the movable body that has normally completed the initial operation. I have to. As a result, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform a specific operation excluding the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred, and the information obtained from the specific operation can be obtained. It can be prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, if an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position occurs, the movable body is used during the symbol change after the abnormality occurs. Even if the variation pattern in which the effect is set is transmitted, the movable body does not move from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation. However, only the movement based on the fluctuation pattern is not performed on the movable body in which the abnormality occurs in the initial operation, and the movement based on the fluctuation pattern can be performed on the movable body that has normally completed the initial movement. ..

[About the standby position of the movable body after changing the setting]
In the present embodiment, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side movable body normally stands by when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed. If the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side movable body will move when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed. It is designed to change to a position different from the normal standby position. That is, when the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the set value is determined by the standby position of the movable body on the peripheral control board side when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed. A suggestion effect that suggests that the setting has been changed is being executed.

First, FIG. 294 shows a case where the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body changes when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Will be described with reference to. FIG. 294 is a time chart showing the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. .. In the following, first, a case where the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has already been completed at the time of starting the first variation display of the symbol will be described.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by moving the setting key switch 1311a and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU Performs the setting change process in step S37 at the timing t3, and shifts to a state (change permission state) in which the setting of the set value can be changed. In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the set value (set value 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch that operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position. By turning OFF, the state shifts to a state in which it is impossible to change the setting value (unchangeable state). Then, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side and initial operations of the main control board side movable body, and supplies power to the peripheral control board 1510. Send a command on input.

As shown in FIG. 294 (A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and the setting value setting is changed. In this case, when the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the setting change completion command indicating that the setting value setting has been changed is also transmitted. As a result, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, it is possible to grasp that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the movable body that operates by the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 ( The initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body) has started. Specifically, as the peripheral control board side movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, etc. The initial operation of the movable body of is started. Each of these peripheral control board side movable bodies is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operating position, and in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, each movable body is set to the initial position (evacuation). It is decided to confirm whether it operates normally from the position) to the operation position (appearance position), and to perform accurate positioning so that the movable body stands by at the initial position.

Then, at the end of the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, each movable body is returned to the initial position, and then the movable body stands by at the initial position. However, among the movable bodies on the peripheral control board side, a specific movable body, here, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 mounted on the game board 5, and the back-up rear Regarding the decorative body 3451, a specific movable state depends on whether the set value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the set value setting is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The standby position of a specific movable body at the end of the initial movement of the body is different. Specifically, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby position A, which is the initial position of the specific movable body, is reached at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. While it operates so that it is located in the (normal standby position), if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is specified at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. It operates so as to be located at any of the standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the movable body.

As described above, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby position A, which is the initial position of the specific movable body, is reached at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. It is located at any of the standby positions B to D different from the (normal standby position), and then a specific movable body waits at that standby position. For example, since the hall manager performs the setting change of the set value before the opening of the hall, the player should normally check whether the setting of the set value has been changed after the opening of the hall. I can't know. However, before the start of the game after the opening of the hall, is the specific movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 waiting at any of the standby positions B to D different from the normal standby position? By confirming whether or not, the player can know whether or not the setting of the set value has been changed. As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting value has been changed after the hall is opened, the game can be actively started.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body is set to the initial position of the specific movable body. Although it is different from the standby position A (normal standby position), the standby position of a specific movable body is changed according to the currently set value (changed set value). .. That is, the currently set setting value (changed setting value) is suggested according to the standby position of the specific movable body. Specifically, when standby positions B to D are prepared as standby positions different from the normal standby positions of a specific movable body, and the currently set setting values are set values 1, 3, and 5. The standby position B, which suggests that the set value is odd, can be determined. Further, when the currently set set values are the set values 2, 4, and 6, the standby position C suggesting that the set values are even numbers can be determined. Further, when the currently set set values are the set values 5 and 6, the standby position D suggesting that the set value is a high set value can be determined. When the currently set value is the set value 5, the ratio of the standby position B to the standby position D higher than that of the standby position D as to which of the standby position B and the standby position D is determined (standby position B: Refer to the effect distribution table for the set value 5 determined by the standby position D = 7: 3 ratio), and use the peripheral control MPU when determining the standby position (when the initial operation of a specific movable body starts). The determination is made according to the value of the acquired random number value). Similarly, when the currently set value is the set value 6, the ratio of the standby position C to the standby position D higher than that of the standby position D (standby position C) as to whether to determine the standby position C or the standby position D. : Peripheral control MPU at the time of determining the standby position (at the start of the initial operation of a specific movable body) with reference to the effect distribution table for the set value 6 determined by the standby position D = 7: 3 ratio) The decision is made according to the value of (random value obtained in). From this, it is determined that the current set values of the standby position B and the standby position C are not fixed to the low setting or the high setting, but the standby position D is determined to be the high setting. As a result, when a specific movable body is waiting at the standby position D, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of a high set value that can be grasped from the standby position D.

Of the specific movable bodies, the standby positions B to D of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 are in the order of the standby position B, the standby position C, and the standby position D (normally). It is located so that the amount of movement from the standby position) is large. Similarly, with respect to the standby positions B to D of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, the standby position B, the standby position C, and the standby position D are in this order. It is positioned so that the amount of movement from the position A (normal standby position) is large.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. Although it operates so as to be located in any of the above, it may operate to return the specific movable body to the initial position at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. In such a case, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, after returning the specific movable body to the initial position, the initial operation of the specific movable body is performed by an operation different from the initial operation of the specific movable body. It is supposed to operate so as to be located at any of the standby positions B to D different from the position.

Further, in this example, examples of the specific movable body include the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5. Has been done. Of these, since the effect operation unit 301 is mounted on the main body frame 4, when it is located at standby positions B to D different from the initial position, it can be directed to the outside such as a customer who is not playing a game. It is possible to greatly appeal that the setting of the set value has been changed. In addition, since the production operation unit 301 is exposed so that it can be contacted from the outside, there is a possibility that the standby position may be changed unreasonably due to mischief, but the hall manager notices it because it is easy to recognize from the outside. It is easy and can prevent the occurrence of mischief. On the other hand, since the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are mounted on the game board 5, they cannot be contacted from the outside, and the standby position is unreasonably changed by mischief. Never.

Further, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are mounted as specific movable bodies. Both the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up back decoration body 3451 are operating so as to be located in any of the standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the specific movable body. However, it may be possible to select only one of them and operate so as to be located at any of the standby positions B to D. In such a case, for example, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 rather than the case where only the standby positions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 change. It may be suggested that the set value is higher when only the standby position of the effect operation unit 301 changes. Further, only the standby position of one of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 changes. It may be suggested that the set value is higher when both standby positions change than when both standby positions are changed, and when both standby positions change, the set value 6 is fixed. You may.

Further, in this example, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, the setting value of the setting value is changed by changing the standby position of a specific movable body. Although it is suggested, it is not limited to the movable body that can change the standby position, but even if it is executed for the movable body that can change the stopping mode such as the movable body that can rotate. Good. Even in such a case, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is suggested that the setting value of the setting value is changed by changing from the normal stop mode. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 294 (A), after the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the main control MPU is capable of displaying the variation of the special symbol (variable state). ). That is, when the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 at the timing t6 after the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the variation display of the special symbol is started. At the same time, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at the timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the variation display (variation effect) of the first decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern command. ing.

At the start of the first variation display of the decorative symbol at the timing t6, the specific movable body located in any of the standby positions B to D is operated so as to return to the initial position (normal standby position). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using a specific movable body based on the fluctuation pattern during the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern for the first time. The variation pattern is set to the variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and the effect content to be executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the variation time. For example, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation effect is transmitted. As a part of the above, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the above, when the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 at the timing t6, the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started. Of these, the entry into the first start port 2002. Only at the start of the variation display of the special symbol based on the sphere, the specific movable body located in any of the standby positions B to D is operating so as to return to the initial position (normal standby position). On the other hand, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2004, the specific movable body located in any of the standby positions B to D is set to the initial position (normal standby position). I try not to go back. If the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the RAM is initialized (RAM clear), and the game must always start from the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state). Therefore, the ball is not allowed to enter the second starting port 2004. For this reason, as the first variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry into the second start port 2004 should not be performed, and the ball is illegally entered into the second start port 2004. There is a possibility. In such a case, even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed for the first time, the specific movable body does not return to the initial position (normal standby position) and remains positioned in any of the standby positions B to D. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to notice, and the fraudulent activity itself can be deterred.

Regarding the above description of FIG. 294 (A), peripheral control has already been performed after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and before the first symbol variation display is started at timing t6. Since the initial operation of the movable body on the substrate side is completed, the standby position different from the standby position A (normal standby position), which is the initial position of the specific movable body, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. It is located in any of B to D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294 (B), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side is movable at the time when the first symbol variation display is started at the timing t6. When the initial movement of the body is not completed, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, the specific movable body is not located in any of the standby positions B to D, and is the standby position which is the initial position. It is designed to be located at A (normal standby position). For example, if the specific movable body is located at any of the standby positions B to D at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body after the start of the fluctuation display of the first symbol, the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern is produced. It may be misunderstood that it suggests the degree of expectation as a part of the above, but such a misunderstanding does not occur by being located at the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position.

Further, with respect to the above description of FIG. 294 (A), when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Although the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is performed, the case where the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is normally completed is described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294 (C), when an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position occurs in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, the specific movable body At the end of the initial operation, the specific movable body is not located in any of the standby positions B to D. However, in this example, as specific movable bodies, there are an effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and a back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and an abnormality has occurred. When one of the bodies is present, the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred is not located in any of the standby positions B to D, whereas the movable body that has normally completed the initial operation is in any of the standby positions B to D. I try to be located in the crab. As a result, when the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the specific movable body is positioned at any of the standby positions B to D except for the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to prevent the information obtained from the standby position of the specific movable body from being overlooked.

In the above, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, but the timing is before the power-on command is received. That is, it may be started when the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2 (see FIGS. 267 and 268). Even in such a case, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, any of the standby positions B to D different from the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position of the specific movable body. It is supposed to operate so as to be located in. As a result, since the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed at an early timing, it is possible to quickly shift to the state in which the specific movable body stands by at any of the standby positions B to D.

[Restrictions on suggestive effects after an abnormality occurs]
In the present embodiment, when the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the number of big hits after the setting of the set value is changed reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example). In addition, a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting of the set value has been changed is executed. In this suggestion effect, the lamp light emission and the sound output from the speaker are used for execution. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, if an abnormality is detected between the time when the setting value is changed and the time when the suggestion effect is executed, the suggestion effect is not executed at the execution timing of the suggestion effect. I'm in control. The relationship between such suggestion effect and abnormality detection will be described with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a time chart showing the relationship between the suggestion effect and the abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 295, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the game ball B is subsequently accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by is a big hit, it is counted as the number of big hits. Then, when the number of big hits after changing the setting of the set value reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example) at the timing t3, a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting of the set value has been changed is executed. .. In this suggestion effect, by executing the effect according to the currently set value (set value after the change), it not only suggests that the setting value of the set value has been changed, but also the currently set value is set. It also suggests the settings that are available. Further, the suggestion effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot of the predetermined number of times (sixth in this example) after the setting of the set value is changed.

Further, in the suggestion effect, any one of the suggestion effects A to C is executed as an effect according to the currently set value (set value after the change). Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the suggestion effects A to C is to be executed is performed, and in the execution determination, a jackpot game based on a predetermined number of jackpots (sixth in this example). When it is determined that it is the end time of, a predetermined random number value X is acquired by the peripheral control MPU, and a suggestion effect A suggesting a low setting value, a suggestion effect B suggesting a high setting value, and a suggestion suggesting a setting value 6 One of the effects C is determined according to the currently set set value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set set value is set values 1 to 3, the probability that the suggestion effect A suggesting a low set value is higher than that of the suggestion effect B (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B = 7: The effect is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (ratio of 3). Further, when the set values are 4 to 5, the high setting that suggests the high setting value is determined with a higher probability than the suggestive effect A (suggestion effect A: suggestive effect B = 3: 7). The effect is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the effect distribution table 1. Further, when the set value is 6, the suggestion effects A to C including the suggestion effect C suggesting the set value 6 which is not determined when the set values are 1 to 5 are set to a predetermined probability (suggestion effect A). : Suggested effect B: Suggested effect C = 1: 5: 4) The effect is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 2. That is, since the suggestion effects A and B may be output regardless of the current set value, the low setting or the high setting is not fixed, but when the suggestion effect C is executed, the suggestion effect C is executed. , It is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestion effect.

As the suggestion effect A suggesting a low setting value, the effect data in which the sound "Bee" is output from the speaker and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are emitted in blue is used. As the suggestion effect B that suggests a high setting value, the sound "BB" is output from the speaker, and the effect data that the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit red light is used. As the suggestion effect C that suggests the set value 6, the sound "BBB" is output from the speaker, and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are emitted in rainbow colors. Is used. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested by executing the sound output and the lamp light emission in different modes for each suggestion of the set value.

On the other hand, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the confirmation display of the set value is displayed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When only the control built-in RAM is cleared, or when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (setting value setting change, setting value confirmation display, and main control built-in RAM are cleared). (If not), even if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, becomes a big hit. Not counted as the number of jackpots. That is, even if the number of big hits after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example), the suggestion effect is not executed and the currently set value is also suggested. Absent.

Further, in this example, after the setting of the set value is changed, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 becomes a big hit. At that time, it is counted as the number of big hits, but when it becomes a small hit, it is not counted as the number of big hits. Here, when the setting of the set value is changed, the jackpot probability is changed, but the small hit probability is not changed. For this reason, only the big hits that involve the setting change of the set value are counted and included in the execution condition of the suggestion effect, and the small hits that do not involve the setting change of the set value are counted as the number of times. Without doing so, it is not included in the execution conditions of the suggestion effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred by various methods. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. Then, it monitors whether or not a magnet is used or vibrates, and if it is detected by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or giving vibration is performed. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port) illegally after that, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state), the ball is allowed to enter the first starting port 2002 where the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the game area 5a can enter. On the other hand, the ball B that has flowed down the right side area of the game area 5a is not allowed to enter the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in a normal game state (low probability non-time saving state), it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is driven into the right area of the game area 5a, and the game ball B flows down the right area of the game area 5a. If it is detected that there is, an abnormality has occurred because there is a possibility that the game ball B is being driven into the right area of the game area 5a in an attempt to illegally enter the second starting port 2004. I judge that there is.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. .. When the door frame opening switch or the main body frame opening switch is detected even during the game, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Unauthorized acts such as opening 4 are performed, and there is a possibility that the ball may be illegally entered into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, or a big hit may be illegally generated. Is determined to have occurred.

When an abnormality is detected at the timing t2, the abnormality is notified to the outside by using a speaker, an LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. As the abnormality notification, in order to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message is output from the speaker, or the LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are blinked with strong light emission. .. In addition, as a warning message, the displayed content differs depending on the type of abnormality. For example, detection is performed by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "Magnetic (vibration) has been detected" is output. In addition, it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right area of the game area 5a, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "Please return to left-handed" is output. are doing. In addition, the door frame open switch and the main body frame open switch are detected, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "The door is open" is output.

Further, the abnormality notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected. However, if the abnormality is resolved before the predetermined period elapses from the time when the abnormality is detected, the abnormality notification is terminated at that time. For example, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the game ball B is caused to flow down the left side area of the game area 5a. When it is returned to, the abnormality is resolved and the abnormality notification is terminated. Further, when the door frame opening switch or the main body frame opening switch is detected and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. When the 4 is closed, the abnormality is resolved and the abnormality notification is terminated.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t2, even if the number of big hits after changing the setting value at timing t3 reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example), the suggestion effect is restricted from being executed. ing. That is, if an abnormality is detected before the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example) after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a suggestion effect is produced. Even at the execution timing, the suggestion effect is not executed. The cause of the anomaly detection is suspected to be fraudulent activity, but if such fraudulent activity is suspected, the setting value has been changed and information on the currently set setting value is obtained. Because it cannot be done, a penalty for cheating can be given and the cheating itself can be deterred.

More specifically, when an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the abnormality notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected, but the execution timing of the suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the abnormality notification. Even if the arrival of, the suggestion effect is not executed. That is, even if the number of big hits after changing the setting of the set value reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example) during the execution of the abnormality notification, the abnormality notification is executed with priority over the suggestion effect. It is possible to clearly show that an abnormality has occurred to the outside.

Further, when an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected, but it is assumed that the execution timing of the suggestion effect has arrived after the abnormality notification is completed. However, there is no suggestion effect. That is, even if the number of big hits after changing the setting of the set value reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example) after the end of the abnormality notification, the setting of the set value is changed by not executing the suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent information about the current set value from being obtained.

In this example, when the abnormality at the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t2 is a specific abnormality, it is restricted not to execute all of the suggestion effects including the sound output, the lamp emission, and the effect display. , If it is not a specific abnormality, it is restricted not to execute only a part of the suggestion effect consisting of audio output, lamp emission, and effect display. That is, the degree of limiting the suggestion effect differs depending on the type (degree) of the abnormality. Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects at the timing t2, it is determined that a serious abnormality (specific abnormality) has occurred, and audio output, lamp emission, and production are performed. While it is restricted not to execute all of the suggestion effects consisting of the display, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right area of the game area 5a at timing t2, or the door frame When the release switch or the main body frame release switch is detected, it is judged that a minor abnormality has occurred, and only the audio output is not executed among the suggestion effects consisting of the sound output, the lamp emission, and the effect display. It is limited to the above, and the lamp light emission and the effect display are executed. Here, when the detection is performed by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, there is a very high possibility that a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or giving vibration is performed, so that the abnormality is severe. When it is determined that (specific abnormality) has occurred, but it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right area of the game area 5a, the player simply plays the game. It is possible that the hall manager simply opened the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 when the door frame opening switch or the main body frame opening switch was detected, or the possibility that the area where the ball B was driven was mistaken. Since it is sexual and not necessarily cheating, it is judged that a minor abnormality has occurred. In this way, when a serious abnormality occurs, there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed, and since all of the suggestion effects are restricted from being executed, the fraudulent activity itself can be suppressed.

In the above, depending on the type (degree) of the abnormality, it is restricted not to execute a part or all of the suggestion effect consisting of audio output, lamp emission, and effect display, but for all abnormalities, all of the suggestion effect May not be executed. Further, when an abnormality is detected, the mode of outputting a suggestion effect including voice output, lamp light emission, and effect display may be suppressed. In this way, when the mode of outputting the suggestion effect including the voice output, the lamp emission, and the effect display is suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the suggestion effect is being executed at the execution timing of the suggestion effect.

In this example, the suggestion effect is executed when the number of big hits after changing the setting of the set value reaches a predetermined number of times (6 times in this example), but after changing the setting of the set value. Before the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times, it may be possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the big hit occurs after the setting of the set value is changed. That is, when the predetermined number of big hits is 6, each of the 1st to 5th big hits may be able to execute the suggestion effect. As the suggestion effect, any of the suggestion effects A to C is executed as the effect according to the currently set value (set value after the change), and the suggestion effect A, the suggestion effect B, and the suggestion effect C are executed. In order, it suggests that the high expectations are high. Then, when the suggestion effect is executed in each of the 1st to 6th jackpots, the suggestion effect is executed so that the degree of expectation can be gradually increased in each of the 1st to 6th jackpots. At the 6th big hit, the final suggestion effect is executed to suggest the high expectation level. In each of the 1st to 5th jackpots, of the suggestion effects A to C, the suggestion effect C that determines that the currently set installation value is the set value 6 is not executed. For example, when the suggestion effect C is executed as the final suggestion effect in the sixth big hit, the suggestion effect A → the suggestion effect A → the suggestion effect A → the suggestion effect B → in each of the 1st to 5th jackpots. It is possible to execute in the order of suggestion effect B. As a result, the final expectation cannot be grasped before the number of big hits after changing the setting of the set value reaches 6 times. Therefore, until the number of big hits reaches 6 times. The game can be continued with expectation.

In the above, the suggestion effect can be executed every time a big hit occurs after the setting value is changed. However, when an abnormality is detected at the timing t2, the suggestion effect is executed at the subsequent execution timing of the suggestion effect. It is restricted not to. Specifically, when the predetermined number of jackpots is 6, each of the 1st to 5th jackpots can also execute the suggestion effect, but for example, during the 2nd to 3rd jackpots. When an abnormality is detected in, the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of the third and subsequent big hits is restricted.

Further, in this example, the suggestion effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of times (in this example, the sixth time) after the setting of the set value is changed, but the predetermined number of times (this example). Then, it suffices if the suggestion effect is executed with the 6th) big hit as an opportunity. For example, when the jackpot result (stop symbol) based on the jackpot of the predetermined number of times (6th in this example) after changing the setting of the set value is displayed, or the predetermined number of times (in this example) after changing the setting of the set value. , 6th) The jackpot game based on the jackpot may be in progress. In addition, when performing a demonstration (demo production performed in a player waiting state) after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot of the predetermined number of times (sixth in this example) after the setting of the set value is changed. As a suggestion effect, the content of the demonstration (light emission mode of the lamp, etc.) may be changed. The demonstration is a production that starts when the state in which the game is not performed continues for a predetermined time. As a result, if the game is not performed after the end of the big hit game based on the predetermined number of times (6th time in this example) after the setting of the set value is changed, the content of the demonstration can be confirmed. It is possible to grasp whether or not the high expectation level is high, and if it indicates that the high expectation level is high, the motivation to start the game can be increased. Regarding the content of the demonstration executed as the suggestion effect, for example, it is possible to end it by the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and by checking the content of the demonstration, whether or not the expectation of a high setting value is high. If you do not want to know, the hall manager operates the production operation unit 301 so that it is not possible to grasp whether or not the high degree of expectation, which is a high set value, is high.

[About contact / non-contact with handle and single-shot button]
In the present embodiment, as the configuration relating to the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, whether or not the handle 182 is rotated, and the handle 182 It has a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the single-shot button 193 is pressed during the rotation operation of the above, and detects the operation status of the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193.

First, the steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting on the player is detected and the steering wheel 182 or the like of the player It detects contact with. That is, when the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects it, whereas when the player does not touch the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect it.

Further, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 has a function of detecting whether or not the handle 182 is not rotated (non-rotating state), and a single-shot button 193 is pressed during the rotating operation of the handle 182. It has a function to detect whether or not it is present. That is, when the handle 182 is not rotated or the single-shot button 193 is pressed during the rotation operation of the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the rotation of the handle 182. When the single-shot button 193 is not pressed during the operation, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 does not detect it. Regarding the single-shot button 193, by pressing the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182. At the same time, by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the signal path at the time of detection of the handle touch sensor 192 and the single-shot button operation sensor 194 will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a diagram for explaining a signal path at the time of detection of the handle touch sensor 192 and the single-shot button operation sensor 194.

The detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the relay board 106 after the handle. Then, when the launch control unit 633b inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the launch control unit 633b outputs the detection signal toward the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

Similarly, the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the relay board 106 after the handle. Then, when the launch control unit 633b inputs the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the launch control unit 633b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU has the following four operation situations depending on the combination of whether or not the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and whether or not the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input. I know which one of them.

As the first operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the player is in contact with the handle 182. However, it is determined that the handle 182 is not being rotated and the game is not being played.

Further, as a second operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player touches the handle 182 while performing the detection signal. It is determined that the single-shot button 193 is not pressed during the rotation operation of the handle 182, and that the operation is normal when the game ball B is to be fired.

Further, as a third operation situation, when the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the player touches the steering wheel 182 while performing the detection signal. The handle 182 is not rotated, or the player is in contact with the handle 182 and is pressing the single-shot button 193 during the rotation of the handle 182. It is judged that it is a normal operation situation to temporarily stop the launch.

Further, as a fourth operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player comes into contact with the handle 182. It is determined that the handle 182 is in a rotating state even though it is not, and that it is an abnormal operation situation that cannot occur in normal games.

The main control MPU performs the launch permission signal setting process (step S113) described above, and sets the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. It makes it possible. In this process, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, it is possible to set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. On the other hand, even if the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input, when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the launch stop logic that inverts the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal ( It is set to launch non-permission logic). That is, when the handle 182 is touched and the single-shot button 193 is not operated, it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, while the single-shot button 193 is operated. Occasionally, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input, the firing permission logic is inverted as the firing permission signal logic. It is set to stop logic (launch non-permission logic). That is, when the handle 182 is not in contact with the handle 182, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633.

Then, when the launch control unit 633b rotates the handle 182 during the period of receiving the launch permission signal, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the launch solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. On the other hand, even when the handle 182 is in contact with the single-shot button 193, even if the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the firing permission signal is not received. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven.

Further, when the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182 (abnormal operation situation). Is a period during which the launch permission signal is not received (the period during which the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact), so that the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

When the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and does not input the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU permits firing toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Although the signal is output, when the launch permission signal is output, a launch permission time command for notifying that the launch permission signal is being output is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the player is not pressing the single-shot button 193 during the rotation operation of the handle 182 while the player is in contact with the handle 182 during the period of receiving the command at the time of launch permission. It is possible to grasp that it is the second operation state (normal operation state) for launching the game ball B.

Further, when the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU faces the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Although the launch permission signal is not output, at that time, a launch stop command indicating that the launch of the game ball B is temporarily stopped is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the player is in contact with the handle 182 but is not rotating the handle 182 during the period in which the command at the time of firing is stopped, or the player is in the state of not rotating the handle 182. A third operation state (normal operation state) in which the single-shot button 193 is being pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated while the handle 182 is being contacted, and the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. It can be grasped that.

Further, when the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and does not input the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 Although the launch permission signal is not output toward, at that time, an abnormality occurrence command for notifying that an abnormal operation status has occurred is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the handle 182 is rotating even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182 during the period in which the command is received when an abnormality occurs. It is possible to grasp that it is a fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) that cannot occur.

Regarding the above, the peripheral control MPU uses the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the LED provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 to notify the abnormality to the outside during the period of receiving the command when an abnormality occurs. I try to do. As an abnormality notification, a warning message is output from the effect display device 1600 or the speaker, or an LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is used to notify the outside that an abnormal operation status has occurred. Is blinking with a strong light emission. Also, as a warning message, the message "Please operate the steering wheel normally" is output. Here, when the command at the time of abnormality occurrence is received, the handle 182 is in a rotating state even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182, so that the handle 182 is operated by some method. There is a high possibility that the game is being played in a fixed manner, and there is a risk of attempting to cheat during such a period. In this respect, in this example, it is possible to grasp that it is a fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) that cannot occur in a normal game, and when such a fourth operation situation is grasped, it is possible to grasp. By notifying anomalies, it is possible to detect the risk of cheating at an early stage.

Further, in the main control MPU, the player does not touch the handle 182 and rotates the handle 182 during the period when neither the command for permitting firing, the command for stopping firing, nor the command for generating an abnormality is received. It can be grasped that there is no state and it is the first operation state in which the game is not performed.

The main control MPU enables the setting value to be set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when it is determined that the setting value change permission or the setting value confirmation display has not been performed. When it is determined that the value change permission or the confirmation display of the set value is being performed, the launch permission logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) as the logic of the launch permission signal. That is, during the permission to change the set value or the confirmation display of the set value, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. .. Therefore, even if the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a while the setting value change is permitted or the set value is confirmed and displayed, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball is not driven. It is not possible to hit B.

In the above, while the setting value change permission is being permitted or the setting value confirmation display is being performed, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, whereas the setting value change permission or After the confirmation display of the set value is completed, it is possible to output the launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, but before the completion of the setting value change permission and the confirmation display of the set value. When the handle 182 is continuously in contact with the handle 182 from the time to the end, the firing permission signal is not output even after the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are completed. In such a case, after the permission to change the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are completed, the launch permission signal can be output by temporarily releasing the hand from the handle 182 and touching the handle 182 again. The game ball B can be rotated and driven into the game area 5a.

Further, as described in detail above, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG. When this is done, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that fraud is detected. Occasionally, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted. That is, when the fraudulent activity is detected, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Therefore, at the time of detecting fraudulent activity, even if the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. ing.

It should be noted that during the permission to change the set value or the confirmation display of the set value, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since the command at the time of permission to launch is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU is grasped as the non-contact with the handle 182. Similarly, when a fraudulent activity is detected, a launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched, and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is not output. In the peripheral control MPU, it is grasped that it is the time when the steering wheel 182 is not in contact with the steering wheel 182 because the command when the firing is permitted is not output.

By the way, during the period in which the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is continuously input, the output of the command at the time of permission to fire may be continued from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, but the handle touch sensor 192 When the detection signal from is switched from non-input to input, the command when firing is permitted is output, and when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is switched from input to non-input, the command when firing is not permitted is output. You may. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU can grasp that it is the time of contact with the handle 182 during the period from receiving the command at the time of permission to launch to receiving the command at the time of disapproval of launch. Similarly, during the period in which the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is continuously input during the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the command at the time of firing stop from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU is issued. The output may be continued, but when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is switched from non-input to input, the firing stop command is output, and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input. A command for non-stop firing may be output when switching to non-input. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU is in contact with the handle 182 during the period from receiving the launch stop command to receiving the launch non-stop command, but it is the operation of the single-shot button 193. Can be grasped.

(Direction according to the operation of the single button)
Next, in the peripheral control MPU, depending on whether or not a command for stopping firing is input, it is grasped whether or not the single-shot button 193 is being operated during contact with the handle 182, and the single-shot button 193 is operated. The production is performed according to the release of the operation of the single-shot button 193. Of these, first, the execution control of the effect according to the operation of the single-shot button 193 will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing an example of the first command-related processing at the time of launch stop executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 272, first, the peripheral control MPU is executing a reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) with high expectation as a reach effect after reach formation during the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol). Whether or not it is determined (step S2801). In the peripheral control MPU, the effect is controlled based on the variation pattern determined on the main control board 1310 side, and the effect based on the variation pattern includes the effect that does not form reach (normal variation) and the reach formation. Later, a normal reach effect with a low expectation is executed, and a super reach effect with a high expectation is executed after a normal reach effect with a low expectation is executed after the reach is formed. As for these effects, the effect time is set to be longer in the order of the effect that does not form reach, the effect that executes the normal reach effect, and the effect that executes the super reach effect.

In the process of step S2801, if it is determined that a reach effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as the reach effect after the reach is formed, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is being executed. It is determined whether or not a command for stopping firing has been received (step S2802). That is, it is determined whether or not the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B during the execution of the highly expected reach effect. Then, when it is determined that the command at the time of stopping the firing is received during the execution of the highly expected reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is operated to launch the game ball B during the execution of the highly expected reach effect. Is counted (added) to the firing stop count counter indicating the number of times the is temporarily stopped (step S2803). Regarding this firing stop count counter, it is possible to count only once for one execution of the reach effect with high expectation, and even if the operation / non-operation of the single-shot button 193 is repeated many times, a plurality of times. It does not count times.

Following the processing of steps S2801 to S2803, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not it is the end of the tenth highly expected reach effect (step S2804). Then, when it is determined that it is the end of the tenth highly expected reach effect, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more (step S2805). That is, whether or not the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B in the reach production with a high degree of expectation of 5 times or more for the 10 times of the reach production with a high degree of expectation. To judge.

In the process of step S2805, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is pressed as an audio output from the speaker. A special sound A suggesting that the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped many times is output (step S2806). As the special sound A, a voice "Like" is output.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2805, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is not 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is used as the sound output from the speaker. Is operated to output a special sound B suggesting that the number of times the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped is small (step S2807). As the special sound B, the voice "Let's do our best" is output. Further, in the process of step S2807, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is to be output, and the execution is performed as an audio output from the speaker. One of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of the determination.

At the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, regardless of whether the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more, after the processing of steps S2806 and S2807, the firing stop count counter The value is being reset. Then, after the end of the 10th highly expected reach production, the next highly expected reach production will be the 1st highly expected reach production, and the count of the firing stop count will be newly started. I'm supposed to do it.

Here, during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, since the production time is long, the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is likely to increase, and the hold is likely to increase. When the upper limit (4 pieces, which is the limit number) is reached, the hold does not increase even if the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to play the game. Temporarily stop the firing of ball B so as not to reduce the number of balls held. At this time, if it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. There is a high possibility that it will stop. That is, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly expected reach production, the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Since it was an easy situation and it was difficult to reduce the number of balls held, there is a high possibility that the single-shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball B, and to praise such a situation. It is supposed to output the special sound A of. On the other hand, if it is difficult to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, it is difficult for the hold to reach the upper limit, and there is a possibility that the game ball B will continue to be fired without operating the single-shot button 193. Is high. That is, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Since it was a difficult situation and it was easy to reduce the number of balls held, there is a high possibility that the game ball B is being fired without operating the single-shot button 193, and a special sound to encourage such a situation. B is to be output.

In the process of step S2807, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output. When it is determined that the value of the stop count counter is not 5 counts or more, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X, and the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, One of the setting suggestion sounds C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set set value is set values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than the setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (B = 7: 3 ratio). When the set values are 4 to 5, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggestion sound A (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3: 7). The effect determination is performed according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the effect distribution table 1 for high setting to be determined. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggestion sounds A to C including the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set with a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = 1: 5: 4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 2. .. That is, since the setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting cannot be determined by one output, but the setting When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

As the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data in which the voice "Bee" is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, "Bee" is used from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C that suggests the setting value 6, the sound data that outputs the voice "BBB" is used as the setting suggestion sound C. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect corresponding to the operation of the single-shot button 193. Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is operated to launch the game ball B. By outputting a special sound A that suggests that the number of times the ball is temporarily stopped is large, it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. You can know what happened. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. By outputting a special sound B suggesting that the number of stops was small, it was difficult to enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the number of balls held was likely to decrease. Can be grasped. As a result, when a special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

Further, the command at the time of stopping the firing is transmitted from the main control board 1310 toward the peripheral control board 1510 only when the single-shot button 193 is operated during the contact with the handle 182. That is, even if the single-shot button 193 is operated, the peripheral control MPU does not receive the launch stop command unless it is in contact with the handle 182. Therefore, in the process of step S2802, the launch stop command is received. It is not determined that it has been used, and it is not counted (added) to the firing stop count counter. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B while contacting the handle 182 and participating in the game, and the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193 can be grasped. It is possible to improve the accuracy of information such as the game status obtained from.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is operated to operate the game ball B. In addition to outputting the special sound B suggesting that the number of times the firing is temporarily stopped is small, any of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is output. In this way, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is entered. It is a situation where it is difficult to ball and there is a high possibility that the game efficiency is poor, but when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know information about the currently set setting value, so such a game efficiency. It can motivate the player to continue the game even in a bad situation. Further, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, it is easy to hit the situation, so that the motivation to continue the game can be particularly motivated.

In this example, at the end of the tenth highly expected reach effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more, and output a special sound. However, at the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, regardless of whether the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more, after the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, it is special. Sound may be output.

(Direction according to the release of single-shot button operation)
Next, the execution control of the effect corresponding to the release of the operation of the single-shot button 193 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing an example of the second launch stop command-related processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 273, first, the peripheral control MPU is executing a reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) with high expectation as a reach effect after reach formation during the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol). Whether or not it is determined (step S2901).

In the process of step S2901, when it is determined that a highly expected reach effect (for example, super reach effect) is being executed as the reach effect after the reach is formed, the process goes to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined whether or not the hold due to the entry of the ball has reached the upper limit (limit number) (step S2902). When the number of holds increases due to the entry of balls into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, or when the hold decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the symbol, the hold number command indicating the number of holds is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Therefore, the number of holds can be grasped by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when it is determined that the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number), it is determined whether or not the command at the time of launch stop has been received ( Step S2903). That is, it is determined whether or not the launch of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single-shot button 193 in the situation where the hold has reached the upper limit during the execution of the highly expected reach effect. It is determined that the launch of the game ball B is temporarily stopped regardless of whether the single-shot button 193 is operated before the start of the highly expected reach effect or the single-shot button 193 is operated after the start. can do.

In the process of step S2903, when it is determined that the command for stopping firing has been received, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) is set as the time during which the special effect described later can be executed when the command for permitting firing is received. The set operation waiting time is started (step S2904). Here, when executing a reach effect with a high degree of expectation based on a fluctuation pattern, the effect is executed in the order of fluctuation start → reach formation → reach effect with a low degree of expectation → reach effect with a high degree of expectation. As the waiting time, a time shorter than the production time of the reach production, which is highly expected, is set. In addition, after the start of the operation waiting time, when the command at the time of launch permission is received, the operation waiting time is ended. On the other hand, if the command for permission to fire is not received after the start of the operation waiting time, the operation waiting time ends when the predetermined time elapses, but the reach with high expectation is high before the predetermined time elapses. When the production is finished, the operation waiting time is also finished. Further, in the operation waiting time, it is monitored whether or not it is possible to switch from the state of receiving the command at the time of launch stop to the state of receiving the command at the time of launch permission. That is, during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, in the situation where the hold has reached the upper limit, after operating the single-shot button 193 to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball B, the reach with high expectation is also high. During the execution of the production, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released and the launch of the game ball B is restarted.

Further, in the process of step S2904, when the operation waiting time is started, as an effect executed during the operation waiting time, a promotion effect for promoting the release of the operation of the single-shot button 193 is started. As the promotion effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display an image "What may happen if the firing is restarted?". As a result, it is possible to grasp that it is required to release the operation of the single-shot button 193 and restart the firing of the game ball B even though the single-shot button 193 is being operated.

Following the processing of steps S2901 to S2904, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not an operation waiting time is occurring (step S2905). Then, when it is determined that the operation waiting time is occurring, it is possible to switch from the state of receiving the firing stop command to the state of receiving the firing permission command while the operation waiting time is occurring ( Step S2906), as a special effect, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is to be output, and the execution determination is made as the audio output from the speaker. Any one of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of (step S2907). That is, when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled and the launch of the game ball B is restarted while the operation waiting time is occurring, the special effect is executed.

Here, during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, since the production time is long, the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is likely to increase, and the hold is likely to increase. When the upper limit (4 pieces, which is the limit number) is reached, the hold does not increase even if the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to play the game. Temporarily stop the firing of ball B so as not to reduce the number of balls held. At this time, if it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. There is a high possibility that it will stop. That is, if an operation waiting time occurs during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. Therefore, it is highly possible that the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball B. On the other hand, if the operation waiting time does not occur during the execution of the highly expected reach effect, it is difficult to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the number of balls held decreases. Since it was an easy situation, it is highly possible that the game ball B was continuously fired without operating the single-shot button 193.

Further, if the single-shot button 193 is operated during the execution of the highly expected reach effect and the operation waiting time occurs, the number of balls held does not decrease, but for the hall side, the single-shot button 193 is operated. It is preferable to release it and have the game ball B continue to be fired. In this regard, when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, it is possible to induce the single-shot button 193 to be canceled by executing a special effect.

In the process of step S2906, the execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output is performed, but in the execution determination, the operation of the single button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time occurs. When it is determined that the value has been set, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X, and the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, and the setting suggestion sound suggesting a setting value 6. Any of C is determined according to the currently set set value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set set value is set values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than the setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (B = 7: 3 ratio). When the set values are 4 to 5, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggestion sound A (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3: 7). The effect determination is performed according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the effect distribution table 1 for high setting to be determined. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggestion sounds A to C including the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set with a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = 1: 5: 4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 2. .. That is, since the setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting cannot be determined by one output, but the setting When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

As the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data in which the voice "Bee" is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, "Bee" is used from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C that suggests the setting value 6, the sound data that outputs the voice "BBB" is used as the setting suggestion sound C. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value.

As described above, in this example, when the single-shot button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated, and during the operation waiting time, when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled, a special effect is executed. ing. That is, a special effect is executed as an effect according to the operation status of the single-shot button 193. Specifically, when it is determined that the single-shot button 193 has been operated during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, the operation waiting time is generated so that the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 can be reached. It is possible to grasp that the situation is such that it is easy to enter the ball and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. On the other hand, when it is determined that the single-shot button 193 is not operated during the execution of the highly expected reach effect, the operation waiting time is not generated. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good depending on whether or not the operation waiting time is generated. Further, when it is determined that the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, it is possible to induce the single-shot button 193 to be canceled by executing a special effect.

Further, the command at the time of stopping the firing is transmitted from the main control board 1310 toward the peripheral control board 1510 only when the single-shot button 193 is operated during the contact with the handle 182. That is, even if the single-shot button 193 is operated, the peripheral control MPU does not receive the launch stop command unless it is in contact with the handle 182. Therefore, in the process of step S2802, the launch stop command is received. It is not determined that it has been used, and it is not counted (added) to the firing stop count counter. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B while contacting the handle 182 and participating in the game, and the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193 can be grasped. It is possible to improve the accuracy of information such as the game status obtained from.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value are used as a special effect. Which is being output. In this way, if the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, it is highly possible that the launch of the game ball B is restarted and the number of balls held is reduced, but a setting suggestion sound is output. At that time, since the information regarding the currently set set value can be known, it is possible to motivate the player to restart the firing of the game ball B even if the number of such balls held may decrease. Further, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, it is easy to hit the situation, so that the motivation to continue the game can be particularly motivated.

Further, in this example, it is a condition that the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number) during the execution of the highly expected reach effect. When the single-shot button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated. As a result, the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 will reach the upper limit (limit number) between the start of the symbol change and the start of the highly expected reach effect. Can motivate you. In addition, the single-shot button 193 is operated even when the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 has not reached the upper limit (limit number) during the execution of the highly expected reach effect. When this happens, an operation waiting time may be generated. Then, when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled during the occurrence of such an operation waiting time, a non-special effect (special effect) may be executed. As the non-special effect, for example, a setting non-suggestion sound that does not suggest the currently set setting value may be output, such as a sound of "pip-pip" (sound different from the setting suggestion sound) being output from the speaker.

In this example, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring while the reach effect with high expectation is being executed, and the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled. At that time, the special effect is being executed, but even if it is determined that the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, the special effect is performed after the highly expected reach effect is completed. You may perform the production.

(Direction according to the operation of the steering wheel)
Next, the execution control of the effect according to the contact with the handle 182 will be described with reference to FIG. 274. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the command-related processing at the time of launch permission executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 274, the peripheral control MPU first includes a highly expected reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) as a reach effect after the reach is formed during the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not it is being executed (step S3001).

In the process of step S3001, if it is determined that an effect including a highly expected reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as the reach effect after the reach is formed, is the command at the time of launch permission received? It is determined whether or not (step S3002). As described above, the effect including the reach effect with high expectation is the effect of executing the super reach effect after executing the normal reach effect with low expectation after the reach is formed as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Then, when it is determined that the command at the time of launch permission is received during the execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, the contact time counting counter indicating the time of contact with the handle 182 is counted. (Addition) (step S3003).

In the process of step S3303, only the time during which the command at the time of launch permission is received is counted during the execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, and the time during which the command at the time of firing stop is received is counted. Absent. That is, when the single-shot button 193 is not operated while the handle 182 is in contact with the handle 182 during the execution of the effect including the highly expected reach effect, the game ball B can be fired. , When counting with respect to the contact time counting counter, but in a state of being in contact with the handle 182, but in a state of temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball B by operating the single-shot button 193. Is not counted against the contact time counting counter, and is excluded from the contact time with the handle 182. In addition, when the single-shot button 193 is temporarily operated while in contact with the handle 182 during the execution of the production including the highly expected reach effect, after the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released, the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released. The counting for the contact time counting counter is restarted.

Following the processing of steps S3001 to S3003, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not it is the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation (at the end of the reach effect with high expectation) (step S3004). .. Then, when it is determined that the end of the effect including the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is reached, it is determined whether or not the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step S3005).

In the process of step S3005, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, the sound is output from the speaker to the handle 182. A special sound A suggesting that the contact time is short is output (step S3006). As the special sound A, a voice "Like" is output.

On the other hand, in the process of step S3005, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at the end of the effect including the highly expected reach effect, the handle 182 is used as an audio output from the speaker. A special sound B suggesting that the contact time with the device is long is output (step S3007). As the special sound B, the voice "Let's do our best" is output. Further, in the process of step S3007, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is to be output, and the execution is performed as an audio output from the speaker. One of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of the determination.

Here, when executing an effect including a reach effect with a high degree of expectation based on a fluctuation pattern, the effect is executed in the order of fluctuation start → reach formation → reach effect with a low degree of expectation → reach effect with a high degree of expectation. However, the predetermined time is set to be longer than the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect with a high degree of expectation (the end of the reach effect with a low degree of expectation).

In addition, during the execution of the production including the reach production with high expectation, the production time is long, so that the hold due to the entry into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is likely to increase. When the hold reaches the upper limit (4 pieces, which is the limit number), the hold does not increase even if the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the single-shot button 193 is operated. The launch of the game ball B is temporarily stopped so that the number of balls held is not reduced. At this time, if it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. There is a high possibility that it will stop. That is, when the contact time with the handle 182 except when the single-shot button 193 is operated is less than a predetermined time, it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the ball is held. Since it was difficult to reduce the number, it is highly possible that the single-shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball B, and a special sound A to praise such a situation should be output. It is said. On the other hand, if it is difficult to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, it is difficult for the hold to reach the upper limit, and there is a possibility that the game ball B will continue to be fired without operating the single-shot button 193. Is high. That is, when the contact time with the handle 182 is longer than a predetermined time except when the single button 193 is operated, it is difficult to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the ball is held. Since it was a situation where the number of players was likely to decrease, it is highly possible that the game ball B was continuously fired without operating the single-shot button 193, and a special sound B for encouraging such a situation was output.

In the process of step S3007, the execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output is performed, and in the execution determination, the contact is made at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation. When it is determined that the value of the time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, a predetermined random number value X is acquired by the peripheral control MPU, and a setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value and a setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value. , Any of the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set set value is set values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than the setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (B = 7: 3 ratio). When the set values are 4 to 5, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggestion sound A (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3: 7). The effect determination is performed according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the effect distribution table 1 for high setting to be determined. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggestion sounds A to C including the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set with a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = 1: 5: 4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 2. .. That is, since the setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting cannot be determined by one output, but the setting When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

As the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data in which the voice "Bee" is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, "Bee" is used from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C that suggests the setting value 6, the sound data that outputs the voice "BBB" is used as the setting suggestion sound C. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect according to the contact time with the handle 182. Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, it is suggested that the contact time with the handle 182 is short. By outputting the special sound A, it is possible to grasp that it is easy to enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at the end of the production including the highly expected reach effect, the special sound B suggesting that the contact time with the handle 182 is long. By outputting the above, it is possible to grasp that it was difficult to enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the number of balls held was likely to decrease. As a result, when a special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, only the time when the command at the time of launch permission is received is counted, and the time during which the command at the time of launch stop is received is not counted. .. That is, when the single-shot button 193 is not operated while the handle 182 is in contact with the handle 182 during the execution of the effect including the highly expected reach effect, the game ball B can be fired. , When counting with respect to the contact time counting counter, but in a state of being in contact with the handle 182, but in a state of temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball B by operating the single-shot button 193. Is not counted against the contact time counting counter, and is excluded from the contact time with the handle 182. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball B can be fired while in contact with the handle 182, and the accuracy of information such as the game status obtained from the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193. Can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at the end of the production including the highly expected reach effect, it is suggested that the contact time with the handle 182 is long. In addition to outputting the special sound B to be output, any of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is output. In this way, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at the end of the production including the highly expected reach effect, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is entered. It is a situation where it is difficult to ball and there is a high possibility that the game efficiency is poor, but when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know information about the currently set setting value, so such a game efficiency. It can motivate the player to continue the game even in a bad situation. Further, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, it is easy to hit the situation, so that the motivation to continue the game can be particularly motivated.

In this example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time and output a special sound at the end of the production including the highly expected reach effect. However, at the end of the production including the highly expected reach effect, regardless of whether the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, after the end of the effect including the highly expected reach effect, it is special. Sound may be output.

Further, in this example, it is possible to determine whether or not the contact time with the handle 182 is longer than a predetermined time and output a special sound during the execution of the production including the highly expected reach effect. However, during the execution of the production including the highly expected reach effect, the number of times the handle 182 is touched and the number of times the hand is released from the handle 182 are counted in the situation where the handle 182 is repeatedly touched and non-contacted. In this way, it may be possible to determine whether or not the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and to output a special sound. For example, when the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is more than a predetermined number during the execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Since it is a difficult situation, there is a high possibility that the game ball B is repeatedly launched and stopped, and a special sound B for encouraging such a situation is output. Further, it is based on both the judgment result of whether or not the contact time with the handle 182 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time and the judgment result of whether or not the number of contacts or non-contacts with the handle 182 is equal to or longer than the predetermined number of times. Then, it may be decided whether to output the special sound A or B.

[About the common mode used in the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect]
Next, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a command (first holding number designation command 0 to 0) instructing the first holding storage number when the first holding storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002. 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600, and the second reserved memory number is calculated based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. When it changes, a command (second hold number specification command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) for instructing the second hold storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to set the second hold storage number. It is designed to be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the lottery result for which the start of the suggestion is suspended is not only displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first hold storage display 1700 or the second hold memory display 1701, but also according to the lottery result that the suggestion is being executed. The hold storage is also displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the execution hold storage display 1702. As a result, the final display mode in the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect, which will be described later, can be displayed on the ongoing hold memory display 1702, and the lottery result suggestion is executed by this configuration. Since it is possible to pay attention to the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect until the time is reached, and to have expectations for the big hit and the high set value, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. When a pre-determination command is received from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion is suspended based on the pre-determination command, corresponding to the lottery result. The display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be changed to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the jackpot expectation at the time of executing the suggestion of the lottery result. It has become like.

In this example, the first hold storage number specified by the first hold number specification command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold storage number specified by the second hold number storage command, and the second hold storage number specified by the predetermination command. Peripheral control board 1510 has a hold notice effect according to each of the prior judgment information (loss, small hit, big hit, etc., which may notify the type of big hit such as probability variation big hit or normal big hit). It also has a hold notice determination table for determining the hold notice pattern type when executing the hold notice effect.

Then, when the decision to execute the hold notice effect is made and the type of the hold notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from the normal ones. It is displayed in a different display mode (in this example, a display color different from the usual one). In this example, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when the hold notice is executed, they are displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. To do. Further, the display modes of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color.

In addition, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, a hold notice pattern having a high expectation of big hit (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display mode, and the preliminary judgment is made. When the lottery result is identified as a loss as information, the final hold display mode is determined by determining with a high probability a hold notice pattern that has a low jackpot expectation (for example, blue) as the final hold display mode. When a mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

In addition, in the hold notice pattern, every time the lottery result is suggested (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) during execution of the hold notice effect (every time the hold is exhausted), the effect display device How the display mode of the first reserved storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1701 displayed on the 1600 changes is set. In the hold notice pattern, the display modes of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the reverse order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and every time the lottery result is suggested (decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display)) (every time the hold is exhausted). The display mode of the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the mode has a high expectation of a big hit. Is set to. Therefore, even if the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is low, the suggestion of the lottery result, which is the execution target of the hold notice, is started. Until then, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a big hit, and the mode of the hold display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color after displaying them in white (basic color). (For example, the first hold storage display 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002). , The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first hold storage display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result starts. When the first hold storage display 1700d is moved to the first hold storage display 1700c, the color changes from white to rainbow color). Therefore, even if the display mode of the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 is changed (the number of holds) is small, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 have a high expectation of big hit. It is possible to display the hold storage display 1701. Further, even if the first reserved storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1701 are displayed in a display mode having a low expectation of a big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, and the first The display modes of the hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 can be expected to be noticed until the end.

Further, the start timing of the hold notice effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the usual one) is the first hold based on the acceptance of the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1701, the first reserved storage 1700a to d are moved according to the subsequent timing (for example, the suggestion of the lottery result is completed and the next lottery result is started. It is also started when it is made to. As a result, even if the hold notice effect is not executed, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pachinko machine 1 is changed by changing the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 as in the above-mentioned hold notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation. It is possible to execute the setting value hold suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of. Specifically, the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. Corresponding to the lottery result in which the start of suggestion is suspended based on the currently set value from the time when the pre-judgment command is received from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has entered in 2004. It has become possible to execute a set value hold suggestion effect that suggests a set value of the pachinko machine 1 by changing the display mode of the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600. There is.

In this example, the currently set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU, but at the timing when the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a fluctuation pattern command. The current set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command and is also stored in the peripheral control MPU. However, regarding the information regarding the currently set value (set value information), the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start It may be included in the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402.

In this example, the first hold storage number specified by the first hold number specification command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold storage number specified by the second hold number storage command is currently set. Depending on each of the set values, the peripheral control board 1510 creates a set value hold suggestion determination table for determining the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestion effect and the set value hold suggestion pattern type when the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. I have.

Then, a decision is made to execute the set value hold suggestion effect, and when the set value hold suggestion pattern type to be executed is determined, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 are determined. Is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one (in this example, a display color different from the usual one). In this example, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when the hold notice is executed, they are displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. To do. Further, the display modes of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color. Is set to be high.

Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified to be 5 or 6, the set value hold suggestion pattern is set to be a mode in which the expectation for a high set value is high (for example, red or rainbow color) as the final hold display mode. When the pachinko machine 1 is determined by probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final hold display mode is a set value hold suggestion pattern in which the expectation for a high set value is medium (for example, green). Is determined with a high probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, the set value hold suggestion that the degree of expectation for the high set value is the lowest (for example, blue) as the final hold display mode. By determining the pattern with a high probability, the player's expectation for the high setting value is increased when the mode with high expectation for the high setting value is displayed as the final hold display mode.

In addition, the set value hold suggestion pattern is used every time the lottery result is suggested (decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display)) during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is exhausted). , How the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes is set. In the set value hold suggestion pattern, the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is opposite to the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change in the order of (that is, the degree of expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and each time the lottery result is suggested (decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display)) (hold). The display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or with respect to a high setting value. It is set to have a high degree of expectation. Therefore, even if the first hold storage 1700 and the second hold storage 1701 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is low, the lottery result that is the execution target of the set value hold suggestion effect Until the suggestion is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display changes to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high setting value, and the mode of the hold display can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Further, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, it is not always necessary to change the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color after displaying them in white (basic color). (For example, the first hold storage display 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002. The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first hold storage display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result is completed and the next lottery result is displayed. When the first hold storage display 1700d is moved to the first hold storage display 1700c according to the start of, the color changes from white to rainbow color). Therefore, even if the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 or the second hold storage display 1701 is changed (the number of holds) is small, the first hold memory display 1700 or the first hold storage display 1700 or the second hold storage display 1701 has a high degree of expectation for a high set value. It is possible to display the second hold storage display 1701. Further, even if the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are displayed in a mode having a high degree of expectation for a high set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. The display modes of the first reserved storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1701 can be expected to be noticed until the end.

Further, the start timing of the set value hold suggestion effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the usual mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the one-hold storage display 1700 or the second hold storage display 1701, the first hold storage 1700a to d according to the subsequent timing (for example, when the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result starts. It is also started when moving the. As a result, even if the set value hold suggestion effect is not executed, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 can be noticed with expectation until the end.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the hold notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree and the set value hold suggestion effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 have the same effect content (same mode). It is possible to control the display. Specifically, in the hold notice effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on the hold notice pattern. On the other hand, in the set value hold suggestion effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are held and announced based on the set value hold suggestion pattern. It is possible to display in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, which is the same mode as the pattern-based mode. As a result, when the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (white, which is the basic color), the jackpot expectation is suggested during the execution of the hold notice effect. It is not possible to determine whether the setting value is being held or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being suggested during the execution of the setting value hold suggestion effect, and it is possible to give fun to guess which effect is being executed. it can. For example, as the final mode of the hold display, when the lottery result shows a loss even though it is displayed in rainbow color (when the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern shows a loss pattern), the hold is held. The player suggested that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 was a high setting value by executing the setting value holding suggestion effect, rather than suggesting that the jackpot expectation was high by executing the notice effect. You can guess conveniently.

It should be noted that the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, while the set value hold suggestion effect is not based on the advance determination information. That is, the hold notice effect can be executed by acquiring the held lottery result in advance, while the set value hold suggestion effect can be executed without acquiring the hold lottery result in advance.

Further, in this example, when it is determined to execute only one of the execution determination of the hold advance notice effect and the execution determination of the set value hold suggestion effect, the determined effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute both the execution judgment of the hold notice effect and the execution judgment of the set value hold suggestion effect, the upper mode (blue → green → red) is the final mode of the hold display. → Perform an effect in which the upper aspect of the rainbow color order) is set. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the jackpot expectation is suggested during the execution of the hold notice effect or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is suggested during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect. One can have as many expectations as possible. In addition, when it is decided to execute both the execution determination of the hold notice effect and the execution determination of the set value hold suggestion effect, and if the final hold display mode is the same, any effect is executed. Alternatively, for example, the hold notice effect may be preferentially executed. Further, when it is determined to execute both the execution determination of the hold notice effect and the execution determination of the set value hold suggestion effect, one of the effects may be preferentially executed. For example, the hold notice effect may be executed. May be prioritized for execution.

Further, in this example, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. That is, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and when the lottery result is suggested based on the hold memory executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset. Since the content of the set value hold suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. It is possible to prevent the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

Further, in this example, all of the blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are commonly used as the hold display modes in the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect, but only some of the modes are used. It may be used in common. That is, there may be a mode in which the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect can appear exclusively as the hold display mode, and the hold notice effect and the set value hold For each of the suggestion effects, there may be a mode that can appear exclusively as a mode of the hold display. For example, if it is possible to change to the rainbow color as the final hold display mode only for the hold notice effect, the hold is held when the final hold display mode changes to the rainbow color. It can be determined that the execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the expectation for a big hit is high. In addition, when it is possible to change to the rainbow color as the final hold display mode only for the set value hold suggestion effect, when the final hold display mode changes to the rainbow color. , It can be determined that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value by executing the set value hold suggestion effect.

Further, in the hold notice effect, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 can be displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on the hold notice pattern. In the set value hold suggestion effect, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are set to blue, green, red, and rainbow, which are the same modes as those based on the hold notice pattern, based on the set value hold suggestion pattern. Although it is possible to display in any of the colors, these common modes are displayed on the effect display device 1600 using the same image data. In addition, the hold notice pattern and the set value hold suggestion pattern are used each time the lottery result is suggested (decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display)) (every time the hold is exhausted). How the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes is set, but these effect patterns are shared to provide a hold notice effect. When executing either the setting value hold suggestion effect or the set value hold suggestion effect, the mode of the hold display may be changed based on the common effect pattern.

Further, in the hold notice effect, the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation is executed (first effect) by changing the mode of the hold display based on the hold notice pattern, whereas in the set value hold suggestion effect, the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. Based on the set value hold suggestion pattern, the hold display mode is changed in the same manner as the hold notice effect to execute the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (second effect). Separately, a third effect suggesting the expected degree of jackpot and suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be executed. Regarding such a third effect, the first hold storage number specified by the first hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold storage number specified by the second hold number storage command is used. , Pre-judgment information instructed by the pre-judgment command (may be one that can notify the type of big hit such as loss, small hit, big hit, probabilistic big hit, normal big hit, etc.) and the currently set value. According to each, the effect pattern in which how the mode of the hold display changes is set is determined. Then, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a high set value (for example, 5 or 6), a mode with high expectation as a final hold display mode. When (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability, the lottery result is specified as a loss as preliminary judgment information, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a low set value (for example, 1 or 2). As the final mode of the pending display, the mode with the lowest expectation (for example, blue) may be determined with high probability. Further, as the preliminary judgment information, the lottery result is specified as a big hit (a specific big hit such as a probability variation big hit), and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is equal to or more than a predetermined set value (for example, 3 or more). Only when specified may it be possible to determine a particular aspect (eg, rainbow color) as the final mode of hold display. In such a case, when a specific mode is displayed as the final mode of the hold display, not only is it confirmed that the lottery result is a big hit and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, but also the pachinko machine 1 Since it is determined that the set value of is equal to or higher than the predetermined set value, the motivation to continue the game even after the end of the big hit game can be particularly increased.

Next, a specific production example of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a specific production example of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 275 (A), the lottery result for which the start of the suggestion is suspended is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701, and the suggestion is being executed. It is possible to display the hold memory according to the lottery result as the running hold memory display 1702 on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the number of first reserved storages increases, and one first reserved storage display 1700 is additionally displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when it is decided to execute either the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the effect pattern (hold notice pattern) of the determined effect is determined. Alternatively, it is possible to display the mode of the first hold storage display 1700 additionally displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on any of the set value hold suggestion patterns).

Then, every time the lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) (every time the hold is exhausted), the first hold memory display 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600 or As the second hold storage display 1701 moves, it is possible to change the display mode based on the effect pattern (either the hold notice pattern or the set value hold suggestion pattern) that has already been determined. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (B), while the suggestion of the lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is being executed, the pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is displayed in rainbow color. At this time, if the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 275 (C)). On the other hand, when the lottery result is lost, the lost symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 275 (D)).

As described in detail above, as the hold notice effect, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, the hold notice will be a mode with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, red or rainbow color) as the final hold display mode. The pattern is determined with a high probability, and when the lottery result is specified as a loss as the preliminary judgment information, the hold notice pattern that has a low expectation of big hit (for example, blue) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display mode. ing. That is, when the execution hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color at the time of executing the hold notice effect, there is a high possibility that the lottery result is a big hit. From this, when the running hold memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are used. Among them, it can be grasped that there is a high possibility that the hold notice effect suggesting that the big hit expectation is high was executed.

On the other hand, as the set value hold suggestion effect, regardless of whether the lottery result is specified as a big hit or a loss as the preliminary judgment information, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, the final hold is made. As a display mode, a set value hold suggestion pattern that has a high expectation for a high set value (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final setting is achieved. As a mode of the typical hold display, a set value hold suggestion pattern in which the expectation for the high set value is medium (for example, green) is determined with a high probability, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2. Occasionally, as the final mode of the hold display, the set value hold suggestion pattern in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is the lowest (for example, blue) is determined with high probability. That is, when the execution hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color at the time of executing the set value hold suggestion effect, there is a high possibility that the set value is a high set value, but the lottery It is not involved in the possibility that the result is a jackpot. From this, when the running hold memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are used. Among them, it can be understood that there is a high possibility that the set value hold suggestion effect suggesting that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value has been executed.

Further, in this example, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the lottery result, and as the production based on the fluctuation pattern, a production that does not form a reach (normal fluctuation) and a normal reach production with a low expectation after the reach is formed are performed. Examples include a production to be executed, a production to execute a normal reach production with a low expectation after the reach is formed, and then a super reach production with a high expectation. These effects are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of the effect that does not form reach, the effect that executes the normal reach effect, and the effect that executes the super reach effect. That is, when the execution hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color at the time of executing the hold notice effect, the lottery result is likely to be a big hit, and the reach with high expectation of a big hit is high. There is a high possibility that the production will be performed. For this reason, when the running hold memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the reach effect with a high expectation of big hit is executed, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are included. , It can be grasped that there is a high possibility that the hold notice effect suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high was executed.

On the other hand, when the execution hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color at the time of executing the set value hold suggestion effect, it is highly possible that the set value is a high set value, but the lottery It is not involved in the possibility that the result is a big hit, and not in the possibility of performing a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit. For this reason, when the running hold memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the reach effect with a high expectation of big hit is not executed, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Of these, it can be understood that there is a high possibility that the set value hold suggestion effect suggesting that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value has been executed.

In the hold notice effect, the rainbow color may appear as the final hold display mode only when the lottery result is a big hit. In such a case, when the running hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Of these, it is determined that the set value hold suggestion effect suggesting that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value has been executed. Further, in the set value hold suggestion effect, it may be possible to make the rainbow color appear as the final hold display mode only when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6. In such a case, when the running hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Although it is not possible to know which of the above was executed, if the setting value hold suggestion effect was executed, it is confirmed that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6, so that the player's expectations are raised. Can be done.

In this example, it is possible to change the mode of the hold display between the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect, but the display is not limited to the hold display and is not the hold display. May be targeted. Even in such a case, when a common mode appears by making it possible for the effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit and the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 to appear. In addition, it is not possible to determine whether it suggests the expected degree of jackpot or the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit and the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to those executed using the display of the effect display device 1600, and the sound from the speaker or the lamp emission is used. It may be something to do.

In addition, when the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree and the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The value may be suggested. In this case, after displaying the operation instruction image instructing the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the effect display device 1600. The jackpot expectation degree and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. In addition, the operation instruction image may be shared between the case where the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value are maintained and the case where the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value are further increased. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation and the suggested set value can be increased by the effect (the effect of displaying the operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the hold suggestion effect, and the rotation of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to induce the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to be positively operated.

In addition, it may be possible to select the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestion effect during the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the taste of the player, and even for a player who does not want to suggest the jackpot expectation level or the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the jackpot expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, explanations about the modes suggested by the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect (the mode that suggests the jackpot expectation and the mode that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are common modes, etc.). It may be executed at the time of the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the suggestion of the lottery result (during the variable display of the decorative symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the jackpot from being excessively improved due to being mistaken for the jackpot expectation when the set value hold suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, during the execution of the time saving state or the probability change state, the hold notice effect based on the pre-judgment information instructed by the pre-judgment command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 is executed. It may be possible to execute only the hold notice effect based on the pre-determination information instructed by the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. .. In addition, during the execution of the time saving state or the probability change state, only the set value hold suggestion effect is displayed in relation to the first hold memory 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002. May be executed. As a result, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the probability change state, it is possible to have expectations for the set value hold suggestion effect.

[About special monitor information]
Next, the special monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. 264. The game area 5a, which is partitioned on the game board 5, is provided with a plurality of entry ports into which the game ball B can enter. Of the plurality of entry ports, the winning openings for which the prize balls are paid out by entering the balls are the plurality of winning openings that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be accepted (here, four). The general winning opening 2001 and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and the game ball B is the gate portion. By accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through 2003. The first big winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2006 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of.

Further, among the plurality of entry ports, the out port for collecting the game ball B that has not entered the winning opening is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a, and the game ball B is discharged from the game area 5a. It includes an out port 2010, and a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 that are provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction and discharge the game ball B from the game area 5a.

In addition, among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a, the games that have entered the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006. The ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first major winning opening sensor 2402, and the second major winning opening sensor 2601, and the out port 2010 and the first sub-out. The game ball B collected by the port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and these detection signals are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. Is input to the main control MPU.

The main control MPU is the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, that is, within the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B discharged from is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the winning ball, and the out to collect the game ball B that did not enter the winning opening. The number of balls of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the mouth and the number of balls entered are counted.

Further, the main control MPU counts the number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning opening. Specifically, 3 for entering a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004) corresponding to the winning openings to which the prize balls are paid out by entering the balls. It is decided in advance to pay out (such as pieces), and when it is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning opening that is the target of paying out the prize balls by entering the balls, the number of balls of the predetermined number of game balls B is calculated. , It is counted as the number of payouts.

Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. As a formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, (number of payouts ÷ number of balls entered) × 100 can be mentioned. For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is too high, it is possible that only the winning openings, which are the targets for paying out the prize balls by entering the balls, are entering the ball. Yes, by monitoring the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, it is possible to grasp whether or not the ball has been entered into the winning opening due to fraudulent activity.

In this example, the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the entry port (winning port, out port) is determined only when the low probability non-time saving state is obtained among the plurality of game states. The number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is counted and reflected in the display on the special monitor 1310h. In the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and the high-probability time-saving state (probability variation state), the number of balls of the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580 also increases because the ball enters the second starting port 2004 frequently. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls tends to increase. In other words, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered increases depends on the period of the low probability time saving state (time saving state) and the high probability time saving state (probability variation state). By excluding the period, if there is no cheating, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered can be kept within a certain range.

Further, in this example, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, but the number of balls of the game ball B (number of balls entered) entered into the entry port (winning opening, out opening). ) And the number of game balls B to be paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts), respectively.

Further, for the special monitor 1310h, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated by the main control MPU, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Further, regarding the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), the information is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, each time the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) reaches 60,000 balls, a new entry is made. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of old balls is saved as a history up to the calculation result of a predetermined number of times. In the specifications of such a special monitor 1310h, for example, from the time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of newly entered balls is calculated, at least the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) ( Until the number of balls entered) reaches 1000 balls, the execution of the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of balls entered may be restricted. This is because, immediately after newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, the situation of entering the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls by entering the ball, continues, and the number of balls entered is higher than the reference value. The ratio of the number of payouts becomes high, or the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts becomes lower than the standard value due to the continuous situation where the prize balls are not entered into the winning opening that is the target of paying out the prize balls. Bias is likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, it is judged that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed. Should not be executed.

In this example, the game ball B collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 is used by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, respectively. Although it is detected, the detection sensor corresponding to each out port may be provided on the main body frame 4 side instead of being provided on the game board 5 side. An example of such a modification will be described below.

First, as a first modification, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided on the game board 5 has a ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4. It is mentioned that a frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B that passes through the pachinko machine 1 and is discharged to the rear outside (the island facility side of the game hall) but passes through the ball discharge port 629 is provided. Be done. When the frame-side out port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. At that time, the frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, and the number of the game balls B detected by the frame-side out-port sensor is counted as the number of incoming balls.

In the above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 also has the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620 through the passage 610c, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. Not only the game ball B that is discharged to (the island equipment side of the game hall) and is driven into the game area 5a, but also the game ball B that is discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is on the frame side. The configuration is such that the outlet sensor can be detected. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of balls of the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, the number of the game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is calculated. It is hoped that various calculations will be made by excluding (invalidating). In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame-side out-port sensor also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-extracting passage 580b of the payout device 580, the game ball B is located upstream of the frame-side out-port sensor, and is different from this. The ball removal detection sensor is provided so that the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further, the game ball detected by the ball removal detection sensor. It is desirable to configure the number of B to be subtracted from the number of balls entered. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball ejection detection sensor, once subtracted from the number of balls entered, and then detected by the frame side out port sensor. It will be added to the number of balls entered, and the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially not reflected in the number of balls entered. In such a form, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the game machine 1 is not energized (when the ball ejection action of the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball ejection detection sensor nor the frame side out port sensor can detect itself, but the game is played downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 while the game machine 1 is energized. When the ball B is released (when the payout device 580 is pulled out) or when the game machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball pull-out passage 580b of the payout device 580. However, although the ball is pulled out from the payout device 580, the problem is solved when the game machine 1 is energized during the ball pulling. Further, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through separate passages without merging, and the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. (The island equipment side of the game hall) may be discharged, and only the game ball B driven into the game area 5a may be configured so that the frame side out port sensor can detect it. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to subtract the number of game balls detected by the ball removal detection sensor from the number of balls entered.

Next, as a second modification, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the winning ball by entering the ball, and the out opening that collects the game ball B that has not entered the winning opening are entered. The winning game ball B, which has been balled, is discharged to the outside behind the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall) through separate passages without merging, and the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball. A first frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting a game ball B passing through a first passage after the game balls B that have entered the mouth have joined, and a game ball that has not entered the winning opening. It is mentioned to provide a second frame-side out port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the second passage after the game balls B entering the out port for collecting B have joined. Be done. When the first frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the first passage, the second frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the second passage. Occasionally, each detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball, when the merged game ball B passes through the first passage, the first The frame side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, and after the game ball B enters the out-port to collect the game ball B that did not enter the winning opening, the merged game ball B becomes the second. When passing through the passage, the second frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, and the number of game balls B detected by the first frame-side out-port sensor and the second frame The game ball B detected by the side out port sensor is counted as the number of incoming balls.

[Regarding production control based on special monitor information]
In this example, the special monitor 1310h not only displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, but also determines the game status of the pachinko machine 1 using the information obtained from the special monitor 1310h and reflects it in the production content. I'm letting you. The effect control related to the information obtained from such a special monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing an example of special monitor-related effect processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 270, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not a special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 side (step S2701). The special monitor information command is a command indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is equivalent to the information output to the special monitor 1310h. In addition, the special monitor information command is issued from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board every time the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) reaches 100 balls. It is being transmitted towards 1510.

If it is determined in the process of step S2701 that the special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 side, it is determined whether or not the special monitor information command has been received 10 times or later since the power was turned on. (Step S2702). That is, since the special monitor information command is transmitted every time the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) reaches 100, the game is played after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that has entered the entry port (winning opening, out opening) has reached 1000 or less after the start of the game. Then, when it is determined that the special monitor information command is received from the 10th time onward after the power is turned on, the processes of steps S2703 to S2708 are performed.

In the process of step S2703, as information obtained from the special monitor information command, it is determined whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or greater than the first outlier or equal to or less than the second outlier. ..

In the process of step S2703, when it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not equal to or more than the first outlier and not less than or equal to the second outlier, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is , It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than the first specified value (step S2704). Then, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or greater than the first specified value, a special sound A suggesting that the number of payouts is large relative to the number of balls entered is output as audio output from the speaker ( Step S2705). As the special sound A, a voice "Like" is output.

In the process of step S2704, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than the first specified value, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or less than the second specified value. Determine (step S2706). Then, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or less than the second specified value, a special sound B suggesting that the number of payouts is small relative to the number of balls entered is output as audio output from the speaker ( Step S2707). As the special sound B, the voice "Like" is output. Further, in the process of step S2707, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is to be output, and the execution is performed as an audio output from the speaker. One of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of the determination.

Here, the first specified value and the second specified value are assumed by the game designer as to what value the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is when the game is played normally. With the reference value as a reference, the first specified value is set so that the ratio is larger than the reference value, and the second specified value is set so that the ratio is smaller than the reference value (first specified value). Default value> Reference value> Second default value). That is, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or higher than the first specified value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is higher than the reference value, and therefore the payout is higher than expected by the player designer. The number is increasing, and it can be understood that it was easy to enter the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the winning ball by entering the ball. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than or equal to the second specified value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is lower than the reference value, and therefore the payout is higher than expected by the player designer. Since the number is small, it can be understood that it was difficult to enter the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the winning ball by entering the ball.

Further, regarding the first outlier, the value is set so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much larger than the reference value or the first specified value (first outlier >>). First specified value> reference value). That is, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or higher than the first outlier, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value. Is unexpectedly too large, and it is suspected that the prize balls are illegally entered into the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls. On the other hand, for the second outlier, the value is set so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much smaller than the standard value and the second specified value (reference value> second specified value). Value >> Second outlier). That is, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or less than the second outlier, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much lower than the reference value or the second specified value. Is too small unexpectedly, and the nails near the winning openings, which are the targets for paying out the winning balls, are bent so that they will not enter the winning openings. Is suspected.

Further, in the execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output, when the special monitor information command is received, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random number value X and sets a low setting value. One of the suggestion setting suggestion sound A, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting the high setting value, and the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set set value is set values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than the setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (B = 7: 3 ratio). When the set values are 4 to 5, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggestion sound A (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3: 7). The effect determination is performed according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the effect distribution table 1 for high setting to be determined. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggestion sounds A to C including the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set with a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = 1: 5: 4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 2. .. That is, since the setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting cannot be determined by one output, but the setting When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

As the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data in which the sound "Bee" is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, "Bee Bee" is used from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C that suggests the setting value 6, the sound data that outputs the voice "BBB" is used as the setting suggestion sound C. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. Specifically, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or higher than the first specified value, a special sound A suggesting that the number of payouts is large with respect to the number of balls entered is output, so that the ball is entered. It can be understood that it was easy to enter the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize ball. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than or equal to the second specified value, a special sound B suggesting that the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is small is output to win a prize ball by entering the ball. It is possible to grasp that it was difficult to enter the winning opening to be paid out. As a result, when a special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

In this example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is in the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, the effect is executed according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. Absent. However, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is in the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, for example, as an audio output from the speaker, the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is near the reference value. A special sound C suggesting that there is may be output. As the special sound C, for example, a voice such as "OK" is output. As a result, when the special sound C is output, it can be grasped that the game efficiency is close to the reference value assumed by the game designer.

In addition, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or less than the second specified value, in addition to outputting the special sound B suggesting that the number of payouts is small with respect to the number of balls entered, it is currently set. Any of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the set value is output. In this way, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than or equal to the second specified value, it is difficult to enter the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls by entering the balls, and the game efficiency is improved. Although it is a bad situation, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know the information about the currently set setting value, which motivates the player to continue the game even in such a situation where the game efficiency is poor. Can be made to. Further, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, it is easy to hit the situation, so that the motivation to continue the game can be particularly motivated.

Further, in this example, the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is produced according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. It is decided to execute every time (the number of balls entered) reaches 100 balls. As a result, as long as the game is continued, it is possible to periodically perform the production according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and it is possible to regularly grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good. Can be done.

In this example, after the game is started after the power is turned on, at least until the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) reaches 1000 balls. During that time, the execution of the effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command, is restricted. This is because, immediately after the game is started after the power is turned on, the situation in which the prize balls are entered into the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls, continues, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is higher than the standard value. Bias is likely to occur, for example, the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be paid out is lower than the standard value due to the continued situation in which the prize balls are not entered into the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls. ing. For this reason, immediately after the game is started after the power is turned on, it is judged that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the effect corresponding to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not executed. It is supposed to be.

In the process of step S2703, when it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or greater than the first outlier or equal to or less than the second outlier, the number of balls entered is used as audio output from the speaker. An abnormal notification sound suggesting that the number of payouts for the above is significantly different from the reference value is output (step S2708). As the abnormality notification sound, a voice saying "It's strange" is output.

As described above, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or higher than the first outlier, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value. , The number of payouts has increased unexpectedly, and it is suspected that the prize balls are illegally entered into the winning openings that are the targets for paying out the prize balls. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or less than the second outlier, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much lower than the reference value or the second specified value. Is too small unexpectedly, and the nails near the winning openings, which are the targets for paying out the winning balls, are bent so that they will not enter the winning openings. Is suspected. In such a case, by outputting an abnormality notification sound, it is possible to notify that some abnormality has occurred in the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and it is possible to enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities. it can.

The volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be changed by operating the effect operation unit 301. That is, after the volume of the game sound is changed, the effect sound is output at the changed volume. However, while the volume of the special sound is output at the changed volume, the volume of the abnormal notification sound is output at the maximum volume regardless of whether the volume has been changed. .. For example, if the volume of the abnormal notification sound is also reduced when the volume is changed to a low volume, even if the abnormal notification sound is output, the abnormal notification sound may not be noticed, but in this example, the maximum volume is reached. By outputting the abnormality notification sound in, it is possible to surely notify that some abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to enhance the deterrent power against fraudulent acts.

In this example, a special monitor information command is transmitted every time the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) reaches 100, and the special monitor is transmitted. At the timing when the information command is transmitted, it is possible to execute the effect (output of special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, but at a different timing, the number of balls entered It may be possible to perform an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts. For example, the special monitor information command may be transmitted at any time each time the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port). Then, the timing at which the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is determined to be equal to or higher than the first specified value based on the special monitor information command, or the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or less than the second specified value. At the timing when it is determined, the effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered may be executed. This makes it possible to know the information obtained from the special monitor information command in real time.

Further, for example, it may be possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed as the contact time with the handle 182. This can motivate the operator to continue operating the handle 182. Further, for example, during the execution of a specific reach effect such as a reach effect with high expectation, the timing of operating the single-shot button 116 capable of stopping the launch of the game ball B and the operation of the single-shot button 116 are canceled. At the timing, it may be possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. Of these, when it is possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered at the timing when the operation of the single-shot button 116 is released, the single-shot button 116 is operated. Even in a situation where the launch of the game ball B is stopped, the operation of the single-shot button 116 can be released to motivate the player to continue launching the game ball B.

Further, for the special monitor 1310h, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated by the main control MPU, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Further, regarding the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), the information is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, each time the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) reaches 60,000 balls, a new entry is made. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of old balls is saved as a history up to the calculation result of a predetermined number of times. In the specifications of such a special monitor 1310h, for example, from the time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of newly entered balls is calculated, at least the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) ( Until the number of balls entered) reaches 1000 balls, the execution of the effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of balls entered may be restricted. This is because, immediately after newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, the situation of entering the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls by entering the ball, continues, and the number of balls entered is higher than the reference value. The ratio of the number of payouts becomes high, or the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts becomes lower than the standard value due to the continuous situation where the prize balls are not entered into the winning opening that is the target of paying out the prize balls. Bias is likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, it is judged that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is determined. It is sufficient not to execute the effect.

In this example, it is possible to output a special sound from the speaker as an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. May be executed using any of voice, display, and lamp emission, and two or more of them may be executed.

[Measurement prohibited status of special monitor]
As described above, during the game, the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. That is, the number of balls of the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a and the number of balls of the game ball B (number of payouts) paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning opening are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) in which the main control board 1310 is prohibited (stopped) so as not to measure the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. A special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j. Since this special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back surface side of the game machine 1, it can be operated after the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and only the hall manager can operate it. It is possible to do.

The special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j can be operated either upward or downward from the reference position. The signal of the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Normally, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are counted with the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j as a reference position. On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward or downward, the measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is set. It is occurring. However, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B cannot be launched from the ball launching device 540, whereas the special monitor measurement is performed. When the prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a state in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540 is generated when the handle 182 is operated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, the main control MPU uses the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal even if the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. Is set to the inverted launch stop logic (launch disallowance logic). That is, even when the handle 182 is touched, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, the measurement prohibition state is generated, but during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, the handle is in contact with the handle 182. Even if the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by rotating the 182, the launch solenoid 542 is not driven because the launch control unit 633b is not receiving the launch permission signal, and the game ball B is not driven. It is not possible to type in. While the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, whereas the payout control board 633 is fired after the measurement prohibited state ends. It is possible to output a launch permission signal to the control unit 633b, but if the handle 182 is continuously in contact from before the end of the measurement prohibition state to after the end, the measurement prohibition state ends. Even after that, the launch permission signal is not output. In such a case, after the measurement prohibited state ends, the launch permission signal can be output by temporarily releasing the hand from the handle 182 and touching it again, and the handle 182 is rotated to play the game ball B. It can be driven into the area 5a.

On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. It is possible. That is, at the time of contact with the handle 182, a launch permission signal is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the measurement prohibition state is generated, but during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, the launch control unit 633b receives the launch permission signal. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. You can hit B.

(About extension of measurement prohibited state)
First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

As shown in FIG. 286, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at the timing t1, the main control MPU prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts (stops). Shift to non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, the game in which the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening) regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). It prohibits counting the number of balls (number of balls entered) of ball B, and maintains information on the number of balls entered before the transition to the measurement prohibited state. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) is prohibited, and the information on the number of payouts before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. That is, since the information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts does not change in the measurement prohibited state, the information on the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, and the predetermined state continuation period (for example, for example) from the timing t2. At the timing t3 when 5 seconds) has passed, the measurement prohibited state is terminated, and the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2, the measurement prohibition state is continued for a predetermined state continuation period. In addition, after the end of the counting prohibited state, a new number of balls entered is added to the information on the number of balls entered that has been maintained before the transition to the measurement prohibited state, and similarly, the measurement prohibited state is entered. A new number of payouts will be added to the information on the number of payouts that has been maintained before the transition.

After returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from above at timing t2, the handle 182 is operated for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the measurement prohibition state is continued. After the game ball B is launched, the ball enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) on the game area 4a and is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the ball entry port (winning port, out port). It is set to be at least longer than the ball flow time (for example, 4.5 seconds). For example, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at the timing t2, the game ball B used during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 remains in the game area 4a during the execution of the measurement prohibition state. Even if the game ball B flows down the game area 4a after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2, the game ball B is the entry port (winning opening, out). Regarding the timing detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the mouth), the information (number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h is not counted as the number of balls entered or paid out because the measurement prohibited state is continuing. It can be definitely excluded from the ratio of the number of payouts to.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated, which prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. ing. For example, if some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will inspect the pachinko machine 1 in order to eliminate the abnormality, but even during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are checked. When counting, the game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) during such an inspection is displayed in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It will be reflected, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h will not indicate the information during the game. In this regard, during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) during such an inspection is not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate information during the game.

Further, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are prohibited (stopped) so as not to be measured. After returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from above, the measurement prohibition state is continued until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. After the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 is completed and the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the pachinko machine 1 may have an abnormality again. In this regard, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the pachinko machine 1 is re-introduced by continuing the measurement prohibition state until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. Even if an abnormality occurs, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h for the game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) at the time of such an abnormality (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered). It is not reflected in. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be excluded from the information when an abnormality occurs, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port), it is treated as invalid, and measurement is prohibited at timing t3. After the state is finished, the game ball B that has entered such an entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection sensor corresponding to each of the entry ports does not perform the detection itself". Or, "a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310" or "detection by the detection sensor is performed and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310". However, based on the detection signal, it is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. " Further, after the counting prohibition state ends at the timing t3, "the detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are calculated based on the detection signal. It is a mode to be reflected in the count. " As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening) in the measurement prohibited state, it is prohibited to count the number of balls entering or paying out, and the ball is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, the game ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580 during the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, and after the measurement prohibited state is completed at the timing t3, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out. Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, the change of the special symbol cannot be displayed (unchangeable state), and after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t3, the change of the special symbol is changed. It shifts to a state where it can be displayed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 in the measurement prohibited state, the change display of the special symbol is not performed and the payout device 580 does not display the fluctuation. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being paid out and profits to be obtained during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being launched from the ball launching device 540, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t3, the handle When the 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibited state, the game ball B is not fired in the first place, so that the ball cannot be entered into the entry port (winning port, out port) by the launch of the game ball B. , It is possible to prevent profits from being obtained during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. In the measurement prohibition state during the period of timings t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and the measurement prohibition state is continued even after the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t3. .. As a result, when the game ball B is illegally inserted into the ball entry port (winning port, out port) by using a magnet or applying vibration in the measurement prohibited state, the game ball B is illegally magnetized or illegally inserted. Vibration can be detected and fraudulent activity can be prevented. However, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3. In such a case, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be detected even if the magnet is unintentionally approached or vibrated during the inspection in the measurement prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied to enter the ball (winning opening). When an attempt is made to illegally insert the game ball B into the out port), an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information related to the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal plate 558, but the outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibition state and the outside that conveys the magnetic detection or vibration detection. The end signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibition state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. Therefore, except for the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected, an outer end signal for transmitting the magnetic detection or vibration detection is output, while the measurement prohibited state is executed. Even if magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys magnetism detection or vibration detection is not output. Further, except for the measurement prohibited state, the abnormality notification for transmitting the magnetic detection and the vibration detection is performed by using the effect display device 1600 or the like, but during the measurement prohibited state, the measurement prohibited state as described later is performed. The special display corresponding to is given priority, and the abnormality notification (display) that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and displayed on the effect display device 1600 as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. are doing. The display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. FIG. 287 is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

First, in the normal state (a state in which measurement is not prohibited), the number of balls entered and the number of payouts can be counted, and the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is calculated. For example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is 20.0%, the numerical value "A-20.0" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the effect display device 1600 displays the "payout rate 20. The message "0%" is displayed (Fig. 287 (A)). As a result, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered can be recognized by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Normally, by transmitting an information command for transmitting the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. It is possible to display.

More specifically, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, every time the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) reaches 60,000 balls, The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of new balls entered is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the old number of balls entered is saved as a history up to the calculation result for two times. Then, on the special monitor 1310h, "ratio of the number of payouts to the current number of balls entered"-> "ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered one time ago"-> "number of balls paid out two times ago" The display is switched at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds) in the order of "ratio of the number of payouts to". For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the history of one time before and the history of two times before, is 20.0%, the special monitor 1310h displays "A-20.0". → The display is switched at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds) in the order of “B-20.0” → “C-20.0”. While the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the special monitor 1310h displays a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state as described later. However, after the measurement prohibited state ends, the special display ends and " The ratio of the number of payouts to the current number of balls entered ”is started in order.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The period of timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, and the period of timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. Therefore, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2.

Specifically, in the measurement prohibition state, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward during the period t1 to t2 from the upper direction to the return of the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position. As the special display 1 corresponding to the state of being in the state, the symbol "-----" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Fig. 287 (B)). As a result, it is possible to recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a start command for notifying the start of the measurement prohibition state is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to specialize. It is possible to start displaying the display 1.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, during the period of timings t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. As the special display 2 corresponding to the state after the above, the symbol "++++++" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the message "waiting for the end of the measurement prohibited state" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Fig. 287 (C)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "waiting for the end of the measurement prohibited state". As a result, it is possible to recognize that the measurement prohibited state is waiting for the end by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the main control board 1310 issues a peripheral control command to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. By transmitting to the substrate 1510, it is possible to start displaying the special display 2 on the effect display device 1600. Further, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, when a predetermined state continuation period elapses, an end command for notifying the end of the measurement prohibition state is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting to.

As described above, in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to recognize whether or not the measurement prohibition state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Further, among the measurement prohibited states, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. As a result, it is possible for either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 to recognize whether or not the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is in the state after being returned to the reference position from above, and to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return the device.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, when switching the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position, In the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "waiting for the end of the measurement prohibited state". As a result, the special display 2 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 1, and it is possible to easily recognize that the state is the state after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. In this example, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed while the measurement prohibited state is being executed. However, any notification corresponding to the measurement prohibited state may be used, and such a notification may be used. , In addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, the sound output from the speaker, the lamp light emission, or the like may be used for execution, or two or more of them may be used for execution.

Further, with respect to the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, etc.) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, each of them has an initial position and an operation position. Although it is possible to operate with, the effect member is restricted so as not to operate during the execution of the measurement prohibited state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect member from operating and hindering the inspection work of the hall manager during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 have a special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state. 0 may be displayed. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state, the 7-segment display of the special monitor 1310h is displayed so as to be fully lit, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "start of the measurement prohibition state". You may. As a result, it can be recognized by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 that the measurement prohibited state has started. Further, at the start of the measurement prohibition state, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 normally displays and operates by displaying the 7-segments and the like of the special monitor 1310h so as to be fully lit.

Further, in this example, in the state of normal measurement, which is not the measurement prohibited state, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, and the effect is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600. Then, in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display the special display (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying the information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. it's shown. However, in the effect display device 1600, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered in the state of normal measurement, which is not the measurement prohibited state. It may be possible to display only to that effect. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in the state of normal measurement, which is not the measurement prohibited state, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured. While only the fact can be grasped from the player side, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisible to the player side, the number of balls entered as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The ratio of the number of payouts to the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state, so that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts can be determined. It is possible to grasp from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that the measurement is not performed.

Further, in this example, as the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, a switch that can be operated in the vertical direction is used, but any member that can shift to the measurement prohibition state by operation may be used. It may be a press-type switch or a member capable of shifting to a measurement prohibited state by a key operation possessed by the hall manager.

Further, in this example, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j provided on the main control board 1310 is configured to be exposed from the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed, but the special monitor measurement is performed. A small cover that disables external contact with the prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the main control board box 1320, and when operating the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, the small cover is opened and exposed special monitor measurement. The prohibition switch 1310j may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from being performed.

(About a modified example of the end timing of the measurement prohibited state)
In the above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, and a predetermined state continuation period elapses from the timing t2. The measurement prohibition state is terminated at the timing t3, but the measurement prohibition state may be terminated when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2. However, even in such a case, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state reaches the timing t3 when the predetermined notification continuation period elapses from the end of the measurement prohibited state as well as during the execution of the measurement prohibited state. Until then, it is displayed continuously. A modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

As shown in FIG. 288, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at the timing t1, the main control MPU prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts (stops). Shift to non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, the game in which the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening) regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). It prohibits counting the number of balls (number of balls entered) of ball B, and maintains information on the number of balls entered before the transition to the measurement prohibited state. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) is prohibited, and the information on the number of payouts before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. That is, since the information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts does not change in the measurement prohibited state, the information on the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2, the main control MPU decides to end the measurement prohibition state and starts counting the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. There is. In addition, after the end of the counting prohibited state, a new number of balls entered is added to the information on the number of balls entered that has been maintained before the transition to the measurement prohibited state, and similarly, the measurement prohibited state is entered. A new number of payouts will be added to the information on the number of payouts that has been maintained before the transition.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated, which prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. ing. For example, if some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will inspect the pachinko machine 1 in order to eliminate the abnormality, but even during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are checked. When counting, the game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) during such an inspection is displayed in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It will be reflected, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h will not indicate the information during the game. In this regard, during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) during such an inspection is not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate information during the game.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port), it is treated as invalid, and measurement is prohibited at timing t2. After the state is finished, the game ball B that has entered such an entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection sensor corresponding to each of the entry ports does not perform the detection itself". Or, "a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310" or "detection by the detection sensor is performed and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310". However, based on the detection signal, it is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. " Further, after the counting prohibition state ends at the timing t2, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are calculated based on the detection signal. It is a mode to be reflected in the count. " As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening) in the measurement prohibited state, it is prohibited to count the number of balls entering or paying out, and the ball is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, the game ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580 during the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, and after the measurement prohibited state is completed at the timing t2, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out. Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (unchangeable state), and after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t2, the fluctuation of the special symbol is changed. It shifts to a state where it can be displayed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 in the measurement prohibited state, the change display of the special symbol is not performed and the payout device 580 does not display the fluctuation. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being paid out and profits to be obtained during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being launched from the ball launching device 540, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t2, the handle When the 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibited state, the game ball B is not fired in the first place, so that the ball cannot be entered into the entry port (winning port, out port) by the launch of the game ball B. , It is possible to prevent profits from being obtained during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. In the measurement prohibition state during the period of timings t1 to t2, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and the measurement prohibition state is continued even after the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t2. .. As a result, when the game ball B is illegally inserted into the ball entry port (winning port, out port) by using a magnet or applying vibration in the measurement prohibited state, the game ball B is illegally magnetized or illegally inserted. Vibration can be detected and fraudulent activity can be prevented. However, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2. In such a case, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be detected even if the magnet is unintentionally approached or vibrated during the inspection in the measurement prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied to enter the ball (winning opening). When an attempt is made to illegally insert the game ball B into the out port), an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information related to the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal plate 558, but the outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibition state and the outside that conveys the magnetic detection or vibration detection. The end signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibition state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. Therefore, except for the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected, an outer end signal for transmitting the magnetic detection or vibration detection is output, while the measurement prohibited state is executed. Even if magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys magnetism detection or vibration detection is not output. In addition, magnetic detection and vibration detection are performed except during the display of the special display during the execution of the measurement prohibition state and the display of the special display that is continuously displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state as described later. The abnormality notification to be transmitted is performed by using the effect display device 1600 or the like, but during the display of such a special display, the special display is given priority and the abnormality notification (display) for transmitting magnetic detection and vibration detection is performed. I try not to do it.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and displayed on the effect display device 1600 as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t2, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. are doing. The special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continuously displayed not only during the execution of the measurement prohibited state but also from the end of the measurement prohibited state until the arrival at the timing t3 when the predetermined notification continuation period elapses. it's shown. An example of modification of the display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. 289 is a modification of the specific display displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

First, in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. As for the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state, not only during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also until the timing t3 when the predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the end of the measurement prohibited state. It is continuously displayed during the period.

Specifically, during the period of timings t1 to t2 during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, the special display 1 corresponding to the execution of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. -”Is displayed, and the message“ Measurement prohibited state is being set ”is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 289 (A)). As a result, it is possible to recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a start command for notifying the start of the measurement prohibition state is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to specialize. It is possible to start displaying the display 1.

Further, during the period of timings t2 to t3 after the end of the measurement prohibition state, the symbol "++++++" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as the special display 2 corresponding to the end of the measurement prohibition state. The display device 1600 displays the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set" (FIG. 289 (B)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "setting of the measurement prohibited state". As a result, either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set even though the measurement prohibition state has ended. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, that is, when the measurement prohibition state ends, an end command for notifying the end of the measurement prohibition state is issued from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting, it is possible to start displaying the special display 2 on the effect display device 1600. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not a predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed since the end of the measurement prohibition state, and when the predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed since the end of the measurement prohibition state, an effect display is displayed. In the device 1600, it is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to recognize whether or not the measurement prohibition state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Further, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is continuously displayed not only during the execution of the measurement prohibition state but also from the end of the measurement prohibition state until the predetermined notification continuation period elapses. Here, when operating the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, since the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back surface side of the game machine 1, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. There is. That is, immediately after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2, so that the ball entry port (winning port, out port) It is easy to illegally enter the game ball B, but if the game ball B is illegally entered into the entry port (winning port, out port), it is after the end of the measurement prohibited state. It is counted as the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, and is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h is the information during the game. It is no longer an indication. In this respect, it is possible to reduce the motivation to illegally enter the ball by making the player recognize that the measurement prohibited state is being set even though the measurement prohibited state has ended. The reliability of the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be improved. In addition, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 due to cheating, and the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to inspect the pachinko machine 1 after the abnormality occurs. When the measurement prohibited state is generated, it is recognized as if the measurement prohibited state is being set after the measurement prohibited state ends, so that the person who may have committed fraudulent acts can be re-established. The willingness to cheat can be reduced.

Further, after the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t2, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is continuously displayed until the timing t3 at which the predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses is reached. However, during such a predetermined notification continuation period, it is possible to launch the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 when the handle 182 is operated, and the first start port 2002 and the second start When the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the opening 2004, it is possible to display the variation of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol). In such a case, the effect display device 1600 displays a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, but the special display is displayed rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol. By displaying with priority, even if the game ball B is illegally entered in the winning opening, it can be recognized as if the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the ball can be illegally entered. It is possible to reduce the motivation to do so.

Further, before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from above, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2. As a result, it is possible for either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 to recognize whether or not the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is in the state after being returned to the reference position from above, and to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return the device.

Further, when switching the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position, the effect display device 1600 may be used. A predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set". As a result, the special display 2 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 1, and it is possible to easily recognize that the state is the state after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. In this example, not only during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also from the end of the measurement prohibited state to the elapse of the predetermined notification continuation period, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continuously displayed. However, any notification corresponding to the measurement prohibited state may be used, and such notification may include, in addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, audio output from the speaker, lamp emission, and the like. It may be executed by using, or it may be executed by using two or more of them.

Further, with respect to the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, etc.) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, each of them has an initial position and an operation position. Although it is possible to operate with, the effect member is restricted so as not to operate during the execution of the measurement prohibited state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect member from operating and hindering the inspection work of the hall manager during the execution of the measurement prohibited state. Further, the effect member may be restricted not to operate not only during the display of the special display during the execution of the measurement prohibition state but also during the display of the special display continuously displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state. .. As a result, even during the display of the special display that is continuously displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, the effect member does not operate as in the execution of the measurement prohibition state, so it is as if the measurement prohibition state is being set. Can be recognized by.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 have a special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state. 0 may be displayed. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state, the 7-segment display of the special monitor 1310h is displayed so as to be fully lit, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "start of the measurement prohibition state". You may. As a result, it can be recognized by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 that the measurement prohibited state has started. Further, at the start of the measurement prohibition state, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 normally displays and operates by displaying the 7-segments and the like of the special monitor 1310h so as to be fully lit.

Further, in this example, while the special display is being displayed while the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the special display that is continuously displayed after the measurement prohibited state is being displayed, and the special display is not being displayed except for the above. As information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, during the display of the special display, the special display 1310h and the effect display device 1600 do not display information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, and the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state (special display 1, special display 2). ) Is displayed. However, in the effect display device 1600, while the special display is hidden, the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls to be entered is not displayed, and only the indication that the number of balls to be entered and the number of payouts is normally measured is displayed. You may do so. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 is visible from the player side while the special display is hidden, the player side only indicates that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured. While it can be grasped, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisible to the player side, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is pachinko as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. It can be grasped from the back side of the machine 1. During the display of the special display, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 indicate that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are not measured when the special display 1 is displayed, and the number of balls entered when the special display 2 is displayed. It can be grasped from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as if the number or the number of payouts is not measured (as if the measurement prohibited state is being set).

(About ball launch permission while measurement is prohibited)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIG. 290 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward. Compared to the case where the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, it is the same in that it generates a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, but when the handle 182 is operated, the ball It differs in that it generates a state in which the game ball B is launched from the launching device 540.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. It is possible to do. That is, at the time of contact with the handle 182, a launch permission signal is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the measurement prohibition state is generated, but during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, the launch control unit 633b receives the launch permission signal. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. You can hit B.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward at the timing t1, the main control MPU prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts (stops). Shift to non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, the game in which the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening) regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). It prohibits counting the number of balls (number of balls entered) of ball B, and maintains information on the number of balls entered before the transition to the measurement prohibited state. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) is prohibited, and the information on the number of payouts before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. That is, since the information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts does not change in the measurement prohibited state, the information on the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, and a predetermined state continuation period has elapsed from the timing t2. At the time of timing t3, the measurement prohibited state is terminated, and the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at the timing t2, the measurement prohibition state is continued for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, after the end of the counting prohibited state, a new number of balls entered is added to the information on the number of balls entered that has been maintained before the transition to the measurement prohibited state, and similarly, the measurement prohibited state is entered. A new number of payouts will be added to the information on the number of payouts that has been maintained before the transition.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state during the period of timings t1 to t3, when the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540 to the firing permitted state, and the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t3. I try to continue later. That is, in the measurement prohibited state, it is possible to launch the game ball B from the ball launching device 540 by simultaneously setting the firing permitted state, and by launching the game ball B, the ball launching port (winning port, out port) is reached. You can enter the ball.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated, which prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. Not only that, when the handle 182 is operated, a launch permission state in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 540 is generated. That is, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, it is possible to perform a trial hit in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 540 when the handle 182 is operated, and even if the trial hit is performed. The test hit mode is set so that it is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered). For example, it is possible whether or not the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540, and whether or not the game ball B launched from the ball launching device 540 normally enters the entry port (winning port, out port). In order to confirm that there is, a trial hit by the hall manager is required, but if the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are counted even during the trial hit, the entry port ( The game ball B that has entered the winning opening and the out opening) is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of winning balls), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h is the game. It no longer shows the information inside. In this regard, when the hall manager makes a trial shot, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) during the trial hit is not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate information during the game.

Further, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are prohibited (stopped) so as not to be measured. After returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below, the measurement prohibition state is continued until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. Immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below, if the hall manager is making a trial shot, immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has been hit by the trial hits the entry port (winning opening, out opening). In this regard, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the game ball B is hit by trial by continuing the measurement prohibition state until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. However, even if the ball enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) immediately after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (relative to the number of balls entered). It is not reflected in the percentage of payouts). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be excluded from the information at the time of trial hitting, and the accuracy as the information during the game can be maintained.

After returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below at timing t2, the handle 182 is operated for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the measurement prohibition state is continued. After the game ball B is launched, the ball enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) on the game area 4a and is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the ball entry port (winning port, out port). It is set to be at least longer than the ball flow time (for example, 4.5 seconds). As a result, even if the game ball B is launched by operating the handle 182 immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position, the game ball B corresponds to the entry port (winning opening, out opening). Regarding the timing to be detected by the detection sensor, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the number of payouts with respect to the number of balls entered) without being counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts while the measurement prohibited state is continuing. Can be definitely excluded from the percentage).

Further, in the above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, but the predetermined state continuation period from the timing t2. The measurement prohibition state is terminated at the time of the elapsed timing t3, but the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is lowered at the timing t2 as described in (About the variation example of the end timing of the measurement prohibition state). The measurement prohibited state may be terminated when the position is returned to the reference position from the direction. That is, the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) may be terminated when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at the timing t2.

Further, in the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and launch permitted state), which is the period of timings t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening), it is treated as invalid. Then, after the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t3, the game ball B that has entered such a ball entry port is treated as valid. Specifically, in the trial hitting mode, which is the period of timings t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection sensor corresponding to each of the entry ports does not perform the detection itself". Or, "a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310" or "detection by the detection sensor is performed and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310". However, based on the detection signal, it is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. " Further, after the trial hitting mode is completed at the timing t3, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are determined based on the detection signal. It is a mode to be reflected in the count. " As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening) in the trial hitting mode, it is prohibited to count the number of balls entering or paying out, and the ball is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, in the trial hitting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period of timings t1 to t3, the game ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580, and after the trial hitting mode ends at timing t3. , It is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580. Further, in the trial striking mode during the period of timings t1 to t3, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be performed (non-variable state), and after the trial striking mode ends at the timing t3, the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Is made to shift to a state where it is possible to perform (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 in the trial hitting mode, the change display of the special symbol is not performed, and the payout device 580 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being paid out and profits to be obtained during the execution of the trial hit mode.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. In the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period of timings t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and after the trial striking mode ends at timing t3. I try to continue. As a result, in the trial striking mode, when the game ball B is illegally inserted into the ball entry port (winning port, out port) by using a magnet or applying vibration, the game ball B is illegally magnetized or illegally inserted. Vibration can be detected and fraudulent activity can be prevented. However, in the trial striking mode during the period of timings t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid. In such a case, in the trial striking mode, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are detected even if the magnet is unintentionally approached or vibrated during the trial striking. It is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period of timings t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied. When an attempt is made to illegally insert the game ball B into the entry port (winning port, out port), an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information related to the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal plate 558, but the outer end signal for transmitting the trial striking mode and the outside for transmitting the magnetic detection and vibration detection are transmitted. The end signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the trial striking mode is output with priority over the outer end signal that transmits magnetic detection or vibration detection. Therefore, except for the trial striking mode, when an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected, an outer end signal for transmitting the magnetic detection or vibration detection is output, while the trial striking mode is being executed. Even if magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys magnetism detection or vibration detection is not output. Further, except for the trial striking mode, the abnormality notification for transmitting magnetic detection and vibration detection is performed by using the effect display device 1600 or the like, but during the execution of the measurement prohibited state trial striking mode, as will be described later. The special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is given priority, and the abnormality notification (display) that conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and displayed on the effect display device 1600 as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. In addition, during the period of timings t1 to t3, even if a trial hit is made, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) is not reflected in the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and launch). It is set to the "permitted state", and the special display corresponding to the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and launch permitted state) is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. Is displayed. The display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291. FIG. 291 is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward.

First, in the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and launch permitted state), the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the trial hit mode without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. Of these, the period t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below. The special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is switched from the special display 3 to the special display 4 during the period of the timing t2 to t3.

Specifically, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), special monitor measurement is prohibited during the period of timings t1 to t2 from the lower direction until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position. As a special display 3 corresponding to the state in which the switch 1310j is being operated downward, the symbol "LLLLLL" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the effect display device 1600 is "setting the trial hit mode". Is displayed (Fig. 291 (A)). As a result, the trial striking mode (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h even if the trial striking is performed by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. It can be recognized that the measurement prohibited state and the firing permitted state are being set. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a start command for notifying the start of the trial striking mode is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making the effect display device 1600 special. It is possible to start displaying the display 3.

Further, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), during the period of timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j As a special display 4 corresponding to the state after returning to the reference position from the lower direction, the symbol "UUUUUU" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the "trial striking mode ends" on the effect display device 1600. The message "Waiting" is displayed (Fig. 291 (B)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "waiting for the end of the trial striking mode". As a result, it can be recognized by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 that the trial hitting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is waiting for completion. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the main control board 1310 issues a peripheral control command to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from below. By transmitting to the substrate 1510, it is possible to start displaying the special display 4 on the effect display device 1600. Further, after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below, when a predetermined state continuation period elapses, an end command for notifying the end of the trial striking mode is issued from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting to.

As described above, in the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and launch permitted state), the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 do not display information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, and the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state). And the special display corresponding to the launch permission state) is displayed. As a result, the trial striking mode (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h even if the trial striking is performed by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. It is possible to recognize whether or not the measurement prohibited state and the firing permitted state are being set. In addition, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below, the special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is displayed from the special display 3. It has been switched to the special display 4. As a result, it is possible for either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 to recognize whether or not the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is in the state after being returned to the reference position from below, and to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return the device.

In addition, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from below, the special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is displayed from the special display 3. When switching to the special display 4, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to surround the message "waiting for the end of the trial striking mode". As a result, the special display 4 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 3, and it is possible to easily recognize that the state is the state after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below. In this example, the special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is displayed during the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), but any notification corresponding to the trial striking mode is performed. As such notification, in addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, either audio output from a speaker, lamp light emission, or the like may be used, and two or more of them may be used. You may want to do it.

Further, in this example, when the handle 182 is touched, the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and makes it possible to set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. Then, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is started to be input, a specific effect by voice, light emission, video, etc. is executed as an effect capable of transmitting that the launch of the game ball B is started. It is possible. However, while the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is being executed, although it is possible to input the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 182, do not execute the specific effect. It is restricted. As a result, during the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), even if the trial striking is performed by touching the handle 182, the specific effect is not executed and the trial striking work is hindered. Can be prevented. Then, after the trial hitting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is completed, the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is started to be input by the contact of the handle 182, which makes it possible to execute a specific effect. There is.

Further, with respect to the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, etc.) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, each of them has an initial position and an operation position. Although it is possible to operate between the two, the effect member is restricted from operating during the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect member from operating and hindering the trial striking operation during the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state).

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, that is, immediately after the start of the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 are used for trial. The corresponding special display 0 may be displayed at the start of the striking mode. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the trial striking mode, the 7-segments and the like of the special monitor 1310h are all lit, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "start of the trial striking mode". You may. As a result, it is possible to recognize that it is the start of the trial striking mode by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Further, at the start of the trial striking mode, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 normally displays and operates by displaying the 7-segments and the like of the special monitor 1310h so as to be fully lit.

In addition, in this example, in the state of normal measurement, which is not the trial hit mode (measurement prohibited state and launch permitted state), the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is special as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. It is displayed on the monitor 1310h and displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, in the trial striking mode, the special display (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial striking mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. it's shown. However, in the effect display device 1600, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered in the state of normal measurement, which is not the trial hit mode. It may be possible to display only to that effect. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in the state of normal measurement, which is not the trial hit mode, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured. While only the fact can be grasped from the player side, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisible to the player side, the number of balls entered as information on the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The ratio of the number of payouts to the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the trial hit mode, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display the special display (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial hit mode, so that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts can be determined. It is possible to grasp from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that the measurement is not performed.

[Measurement of special monitor when entering the ball when the second starting port is closed]
As described above, during the game, the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. That is, the number of balls of the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a and the number of balls of the game ball B (number of payouts) paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning opening are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 even when the second starting port 2004 is closed is counted as the number of balls entered, but after that, The game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 is controlled so as not to be counted as the number of balls entered. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed will be described with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed.

Regarding the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2414 operates according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 to open the second starting port 2004, and the game ball. B can be accepted. Then, the game ball B that has entered the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2401. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered immediately before the closing of the second starting port 2004 may be detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 immediately after the closing of the second starting port 2004. From this, the game ball B detected by the second start port sensor 2401 in a predetermined period from the time when the second start port 2004 is closed is regarded as "the game ball B entered when the second start port 2004 is closed". The game ball B detected by the second start port sensor 2401 during the period excluding the time when the second start port 2004 is opened and the time when the second start port 2004 is closed for a predetermined period is not handled. It is treated as "game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed".

As shown in FIG. 292, when the game ball B enters the ball when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, the main control MPU enters the ball of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port). It is counted (added) as a number (number of balls entered). Further, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, the main control MPU counts (adds) the number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580. .. That is, the game ball B that has entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls).

Further, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the fact that the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1. Further, it is possible to display the variation of the special symbol based on the fact that the game ball B enters the ball when the second starting port 2004 is closed at the timing t1. As a result, with respect to the game ball B that has entered when the second start port 2004 is closed, the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 in the same manner as when the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is opened. Or, it is possible to display a variable display of a special symbol.

Further, when the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, the effect display device 1600, the LED provided on the main body frame 4, and the like are used to give specific notification to the outside. (Notification that normal measurement is not possible) is performed. The specific notification will be described in detail later, but even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, it is not counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts (normal counting is performed). In order to convey that there is no such thing to the outside, a warning message is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the LED provided on the main body frame 4 is blinked with a strong light emission. For example, if the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, a warning message saying "There is a risk of illegal winning, so normal special monitor measurement will not be performed from here onward." Is displayed.

Further, when the game ball B enters at the timing t1 when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the effect display device 1600 will perform the specific notification while the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , The specific notification (message display) may be displayed with priority over the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, by making the variable display of the decorative symbol invisible (making it difficult to see) by the specific notification (message display), it is possible to greatly appeal to the outside that the specific notification is being performed.

After that, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 and the game ball B enters the entry port (winning port, out port) excluding the second start port 2004. Whether or not to count the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out differs depending on the case of a ball. That is, after the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, there are cases where the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 and an entry port excluding the second start port 2004. Whether or not to count the number of balls entered and the number of payouts differs depending on whether the game ball B enters the (winning opening, out opening). Even during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540 when the handle 182 is operated.

Specifically, regarding the game ball B that has entered the second start port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, the ball entry port is regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that has entered the (winning opening, out opening). Further, the game ball B that has entered the second start port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification is paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B. That is, the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification is not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h.

Further, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, it is treated as invalid. Specifically, during the execution of the specific notification, "the power supply to the second start port sensor 2401 is cut off so that the detection itself by the second start port sensor 2401 corresponding to the second start port 2004 is not performed. "Aspect", "Aspect in which detection is performed by the second start port sensor 2401 but no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310", and "Detection by the second start port sensor 2401" is performed. , A mode in which the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310, but is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts based on the detection signal. ” As a result, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, it is prohibited to count the number of balls entered or paid out, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (input). It can be excluded from the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls).

Further, during the execution of the specific notification, the payout device is based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed. The game ball B is not paid out from 580. Further, during the execution of the specific notification, regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed, a special symbol is provided based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004. There is no variable display of. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 without displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profits from being obtained during the execution of the specific notification.

On the other hand, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) excluding the second start port 2004 will enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port). It is counted (added) as the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B. Further, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) excluding the second start port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, the number of balls of the game ball B that is paid out from the payout device 580 ( It is counted (added) as the number of payouts). That is, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (relative to the number of balls entered) is obtained for the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) excluding the second start port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification. It will be reflected in the ratio of the number of payouts).

Further, during the execution of the specific notification, the game is played from the payout device 580 based on the fact that the game ball B enters the winning opening (the winning opening to which the prize ball is to be paid out) excluding the second starting port 2004. It is possible to pay out the ball B. In addition, during the execution of the specific notification, the change display of the special symbol is based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the winning opening (the winning opening to which the prize ball is paid out) excluding the second starting port 2004. It is possible to do. As a result, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening other than the second starting port 2004 is paid out from the payout device 580, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. be able to.

As described above, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry port (winning port, out port) for the game ball B. It is counted (added) as (the number of balls entered) and counted (added) as the number of balls (number of balls paid out) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580. When the second starting port 2004 is opened, the game ball B can be inserted, whereas when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the game ball B cannot be inserted. (Ii) With respect to the game ball B that entered when the start port 2004 was closed, there is a possibility that the second start port 2004 was opened and the game ball B was entered due to an illegal act. However, for example, at the time of transition from the open state to the closed state of the second starting port 2004, the game ball B is caught in the operating second starting port door 2414, and the second starting port is caught. After the transition to the closed state of 2004, the state in which the game ball B is caught in the second start port door 2414 is resolved, and the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401. There is a possibility that irregularities have occurred. That is, regarding the game ball B that entered when the second start port 2004 was closed, although there is a possibility that the game ball B entered the second start port 2004 due to fraudulent activity, the second start port was irregular due to the occurrence of the second start port. Since there is a possibility that the game ball B has entered the ball in 2004, it is not always the case that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to an illegal act. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed is included as information during the game without being excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered). I am doing it.

In addition, when the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed, a specific notification is given to the outside, and the ball enters the second start port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification. Regarding the game ball B, it is prohibited to count (add) the number of balls entered or paid out regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. Here, at the stage where one game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed, it cannot be determined whether or not the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 due to fraudulent activity, but it continues thereafter. When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, it can be determined that there is a very high possibility that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to an illegal act. For this reason, it is prohibited to count (add) the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts during the execution of the specific notification, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It is not reflected in (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be excluded from the information at the time of determining that the ball has been entered due to fraudulent activity, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

It should be noted that, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that has entered the second start port 2004 is prohibited from being counted (added) as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. By inspecting the pachinko machine 1 by the hall manager and re-turning on the power to eliminate the abnormal measurement failure state, the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 is counted as the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. It can be returned to a state where it can be (added).

In the above, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the fact that the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, but the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580. You may not pay out. Further, although it is possible to display the variation of the special symbol based on the fact that the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. You may. As a result, even for the game ball B that first entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed, the special symbol was not displayed in a variable manner, and the game ball B was not paid out from the payout device 580, which was a fraudulent act. This makes it possible to prevent profits from being obtained in a state where the ball may have entered the second starting port 2004.

Further, regarding the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed, the ball entry port (winning port) , Out port), it is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B, but it may be counted (added) as the number of balls entered. However, the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification is paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B. As a result, if the game ball B continues to enter the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification, only the number of balls entered out of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts increases, and the number of balls entered is increased. Since it is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts is reduced, the act of trying to insert the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification is performed. It can be deterred.

As described above, if the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is closed, it may be that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 due to an illegal act, or the second start is caused by the occurrence of irregularity. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the game ball B has entered the mouth 2004, the game ball B is counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. In this way, when it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity or whether the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to the occurrence of irregularities. , It may be counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and may be another example as follows. Specifically, with respect to the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2414 operates according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 to open the second starting port 2004. The structure is such that the game ball B can be accepted by opening it, but in the normal state (the state where the time reduction is not given), the normal lottery result is not hit and the second starting port 2004 is not opened. It may be configured. In such a case, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 is opened and the game ball B is entered due to an illegal act. However, for example, the normal lottery result is won immediately before the end of the time saving state (the state in which the time saving is given), and based on the winning, the second starting port 2004 is opened after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. In such a case, there is a possibility that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to the occurrence of irregularities even in the normal state. That is, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 in the normal state, it may be that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 due to an illegal act, or the second start port 2004 due to the occurrence of irregularity. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the game ball B has entered the ball, the game ball B is counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 in the normal state is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), and is used as information during the game. Can be included.

[Measurement of special monitor when anomaly is detected]
As described above, during the game, the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. That is, the number of balls of the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a and the number of balls of the game ball B (number of payouts) paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning opening are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) after the abnormality is detected is counted as the number of balls entered, but is not counted as the number of payouts. Is controlled. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when such an abnormality is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when an abnormality is detected.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred by various methods. Specifically, among the entry ports (winning opening, out opening), it is monitored whether or not a large amount of game ball B has entered one entry opening in a short time, and one entry opening. On the other hand, when a large amount of game ball B is entered in a short time, a fraudulent act such as a cheating person directly entering the game ball B into one entry port is performed. It has been performed, and since the game ball B has already entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) illegally, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. Then, it monitors whether or not a magnet is used or vibrates, and if it is detected by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or giving vibration is performed. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port) illegally after that, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the ball entry ports (winning port, out port) are connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring, respectively, but it is monitored whether or not those wirings are broken or disconnected. , If it is detected that the wiring is broken or pulled out, even if the game ball B is inserted into the ball entry port (winning port, out port), it is not detected by the detection sensor and the game is normal. It is judged that an abnormality has occurred because it is not possible to perform.

As shown in FIG. 293, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1 is the same as before the abnormality detection at the timing t1. It is counted (added) as the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening and the out opening). Further, the game ball B that has entered the entry port (winning port, out port) from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1 is counted as the number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts). (Addition) is prohibited. That is, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) from the time when the abnormality is detected is counted as the number of balls entered, but is not counted as the number of payouts, and information on the number of balls entered. Only the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) will be reflected.

As described above, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) after the abnormality is detected is counted as the number of balls entered, but not as the number of payouts. From this, when the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) after the abnormality is detected, only the number of balls entered out of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts increases, and the number of balls entered. It will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the total will be small. As a result, after the abnormality is detected, the act of trying to insert the game ball B into the entry port (winning port, out port) can be suppressed.

In addition, from the time when an abnormality is detected at timing t1, when the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port), it is treated as effective for counting the number of balls entered and paid out. It is treated as invalid for counting numbers. Specifically, from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, "the detection sensor performs detection and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, but the number of balls entered is based on the detection signal. A mode in which it is reflected in the count but not reflected in the count of the number of payouts ”, and the like. As a result, from the time when an abnormality is detected, when the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port), only the information regarding the number of balls entered out of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is special. It can be included in the information displayed on the monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

Further, from the time of abnormality detection, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580. In addition, from the time of abnormality detection, it is in a state where it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (non-variable state). As a result, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the special symbol does not change and the payout device is not displayed. Since the game ball B is not paid out from the 580, it is possible to prevent a profit from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

Further, when an abnormality is detected at the timing t1, the effect display device 1600, the LED provided on the main body frame 4, and the like are used to perform specific notification (normal measurement impossible notification) to the outside. .. As a specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port), it is not counted as the number of payouts (normal counting is not performed), so that the effect display device is used. A warning message is displayed on the 1600, and the LED provided on the main body frame 4 is blinked with a strong light emission. In addition, as a warning message, the displayed content differs depending on the type of abnormality. For example, if it is detected that a large number of game balls B have entered one entry port in a short time and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, "there is a possibility of illegal winning. Therefore, the warning message "The normal special monitor will not be measured from here onward" is displayed. In addition, if it is detected by the magnetic sensor 2470 or vibration sensor 3005 and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, "Since there is a risk of illegal winning, normal special monitor measurement will not be performed from here onward. Is displayed as a warning message. In addition, if it is detected that the wiring is broken or disconnected, and it is judged that an abnormality has occurred, "There is a risk that winning will not be detected, so normal special monitor measurement will not be performed from here onward. Is displayed as a warning message.

Further, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not fired in the first place, so that the game ball B can be fired to enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port). It is not possible to prevent profits from being obtained after anomaly detection.

In the above, from the time of abnormality detection, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching device 540 even if the handle 182 is operated, but when the handle 182 is operated, the game ball is not launched from the ball launching device 540. B may be fired. As a result, the game ball B can be launched, but even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Since the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, it is possible to prevent profits from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

The game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) after the abnormality was detected is counted as the number of balls entered, but it is prohibited to count as the number of payouts, but an abnormality was detected. After that, the hall manager inspects the pachinko machine 1 and turns on the power again to eliminate the abnormal measurement failure state, so that the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) is paid out. It can be returned to a state where it can be counted (added) as a number.

[Another example]
Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (a plurality of drums using a game medal) ( It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a rotating drum or reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 296, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box body) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door (front frame) 6002 can be turned into the main body by inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise. It can be opened from the part (box body) 6004.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to form the main body (box body) 6004. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal columnar cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. It includes a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and the rear end is mounted on the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is located at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of notched notches. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder to be rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal is made of metal. The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and the main body part (not shown) via a door frame metal ground wire. It is electrically connected to the grounding board provided inside the box body) 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) can temporarily aggregate electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (earth) to the island equipment of the game hall, and the island of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to the ground of the equipment.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This release switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not located near the metal locking device, and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An release switch is arranged on the portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are decorated on the front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and since it has conductivity, electromagnetic noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, so that it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the substrate ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004. An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic elimination pad can remove noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative parts are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and the front and back sides are provided. Some of the decorative parts are decoratively plated on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The grounding board provided inside the main body (box body) 6004 was electrically connected to the grounding of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment grounding wire. Instead of electrically connecting to the ground board, electrically connect to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box body) 6004, and connect the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board. May be electrically connected. AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board from the island facility in the game hall. This alternating current 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) invades, the resistance value instantly drops and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears , It has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. ..

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 also houses a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted together with the main control board 1310. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, the setting key switch is used. The 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, or the main body. It may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. Further, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set value, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) alone. The setting display 1310g composed of the above-mentioned setting change permission lamp 1310z and the like may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are displayed. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a game machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal insertion port 6008 becomes the ball insertion port 6008', and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls as a game medium into the ball insertion port 6008' to operate the start lever 6014. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the saucer 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear effect unit 3110 Back rear movable decorative body 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative plate body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c 1st LED housing 3113d 2nd LED housing 3113e Reflecting 3114 Back rear decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative base 3115a Cover plate part 3115b Flange part EL Creeping distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined starting port, a variation display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and a predetermined result is derived when a winning result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol. In a game machine that executes a winning game
A setting changing means capable of changing the setting information regarding the probability that the hit result is derived, and
Equipped with an effect control means for performing a predetermined effect control,
The effect control means performs a specific effect of receiving a firing operation of a game ball and outputting a light suggesting a set value after the setting is changed by the setting changing means.
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is performed when a contact with a predetermined launch handle is detected as a launch operation.